Flow Computer Mobrey 7955 Gas Quad 1540

Operating Manual
HB551540
February 2005 7955 Flow Computer
Quad-Stream/Run Gas Applications (1540)
www.mobrey.com
Solartron-Mobrey pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The
information contained in this document is, therefore, subject to change without notice.
To the best of our knowledge, the information contained in this document is accurate. However,
Solartron-Mobrey cannot be held responsible for any errors, omissions or inaccuracies, or any
losses incurred as result of them.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because Solartron-Mobrey is continuously improving its products, some of the
menus which appear on your instrument’s display may not be exactly as
illustrated and described in this manual. However, because the menus are
simple and intuitive, this should not cause any major problems.
This manual is concurrent with embedded software version 551540, issue 5.90 (or higher)
Static precautions
Some parts of the instrument (such as circuit boards) may be damaged by static electricity.
Therefore, when carrying out any work that involves the risk of static damage to the instrument,
the instructions show the following notice:
While carrying out this procedure you must

wear an earthed wrist strap at all times to
protect the instrument against static shock.
At such times you must wear an earthed wrist-strap to protect the instrument.
Safety information
NOTE: This information applies only to those instruments that are mains-powered.
Electricity is dangerous and you risk injury or death if you do not disconnect the power supplies
before carrying out some of the procedures given in this manual. Whenever there is such a
hazard, the instructions show a notice similar to the following:
Electricity is dangerous and can kill.

Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
You must heed any such warnings and make sure that, before you go any further:
x All power leads are un-powered.

x All power leads are disconnected from the equipment that you are working on
unless the instructions tell you otherwise.
x You obey any other common-sense precautions that may apply to your situation.
If you obey these sensible precautions you can work on the equipment in complete safety.
Contents
1. About this manual 1.1
1.1 What this manual tells you 1.1

1.2 Who should use this manual 1.1
1.3 Software versions covered by this manual 1.1
2. Getting started 2.1
2.1 What this Chapter tells you 2.1

2.2 How to use this Chapter 2.1
2.3 7955 Input Connections 2.2
2.3.1 Overview of 7955 Inputs 2.2
2.3.2 Turbine (Pulse) Flowmeter Inputs 2.3
2.3.3 Ultrasonic (Pulse) Flowmeter Inputs 2.5
2.3.4 Orifice Flowmeter Inputs 2.7
2.3.5 mA-type Temperature Transmitter 2.10
2.3.6 PRT-type Temperature Transmitter 2.13
2.3.7 mA-type Pressure Transmitter 2.15
2.3.8 Gas Density Transducers (in a safe area) 2.18
2.3.9 Gas Specific Gravity Transducers (in a safe area) 2.20
2.3.10 Digital Input Connections 2.22
2.4 7955 Output Connections 2.24

2.4.1 Overview of 7955 Outputs 2.24
2.4.2 Pulse Output Connections 2.25
2.4.3 Analogue Output Connections 2.26
2.4.4 Digital Output Connections 2.27
2.5 Other 7955 Connections 2.28

2.6 Where to find the 7955 connectors 2.28
2.6.1 Pin designations for a 7955 without any option boards fitted 2.29
2.6.2 Pin designations for a 7955 with option board 79556 fitted 2.30
2.7 If you need help ... 2.33
3. About the 7955 3.1
3.1 Background 3.1

3.2 The 7955 Quad Metering-run Gas Flow Computer 3.1
3.2.1 Connection support 3.1
3.2.2 Application Feature List 3.2
3.3 Communications 3.5

3.4 Physical description of the 7955 3.6
3.5 Typical installation 3.7
3.6 Checking your software version 3.8
4. Installing the system 4.1

4.2 Hazardous and non-hazardous environments 4.1
4.3 Installation procedure 4.1
4.4 Step 1: Drawing up a wiring schedule 4.1
4.5 Step 2: Unpacking the instrument 4.2
4.6 Step 3: Setting dip-switches 4.3
4.7 Step 4: Fitting the 7955 4.4
4.8 Step 5: Making the external connections 4.5
4.9 Step 6: Earthing the instrument 4.6
4.10 Step 7: Connecting the power supply 4.6
5. The keyboard, display and indicators 5.1
5.1 What this chapter tells you 5.1

5.2 The layout of the front panel 5.1
5.3 What the display shows 5.2
5.4 How the keys work 5.2
5.5 Using the keys to move around the menus 5.2
5.6 Using the keys to view stored data 5.3
5.7 Using the keys to edit information 5.4
5.8 The 795x character set 5.7
5.9 LED indicators 5.7
5.10 Summary of key functions 5.8
6. The menu system 6.1

6.2 What the menu system does 6.1
6.3 How the menu system works 6.1
7. Serial Port Communications and Networking 7.1
7.1 What this chapter tells you 7.1

7.2 7955 communication capabilities 7.1
7.2.1 Communication Ports 7.1
7.2.2 Data Services 7.3
7.3 MODBUS from the 7955 view-point 7.4

7.3.1 Introduction 7.4
7.3.2 Supported MODBUS Functions 7.4
7.3.3 Single/Multiple Register Access 7.4
7.3.4 Floating-point Numbers 7.5
7.3.5 Float Totalisers 7.5
7.3.6 Byte Swap Mode 7.5
7.3.7 Word Swap Mode 7.5
7.3.8 Values: Base or Displayed Units 7.6
7.3.9 MODBUS Addressing 7,6
7.4 Connecting to a 7955 Serial Port (RS-232 and RS-485) 7.6

7.4.1 RS-232 (Full Duplex) Rear Panel Connections 7.6
7.4.2 RS-485 (Half Duplex) Rear Panel Connections 7.9
7.5 Connecting to Ethernet 7.10

7.6 After Connecting up to the 7955 Serial Port … 7.11
7.6.1 General RS-232/485 Port Configuration 7.11
7.6.2 RS-232 Configuration 7,11
7.6.3 RS-485 Configuration 7.12
7.7 After Connecting up to the 7955 Ethernet Port … 7.13

7.8 7955 Database access over a MODBUS network 7.15
7.8.2 7955 Database Information: Software Parameter Values 7.17
7.8.3 7955 Database Information: Software Parameter Status 7.20
7.8.4 7955 Database Information: Size and Type of Parameter Value 7.22
7.8.5 7955 Database Information: Full Attributes of a Software Parameter 7.24
7.9 Historical Alarm logger access over a MODBUS network 7.25

7.9.2 Worked Examples 7.26
7.10 Historical Event logger access over a MODBUS network 7.32

7.11 Archive access over a MODBUS network 7.38

7A. Peer-To-Peer Communications 7a.1

7B. High-speed List Communications 7b.1
7C. Duty/Standby (Hot Back-up) 7c.1
7D. Chromatograph Support 7d.1
7E. Intelligent Transmitter Monitor 7e.1
7F. 16-Bit Communications (Gould List) 7f.1
8. Alarms and Events 8.1
8.1. Alarms 8.1

8.1.1 Alarm types 8.1
8.1.2 Alarm indicators 8.1
8.1.3 How alarms are received and stored 8.2
8.1.4 Examining the Alarm Status Display and Historical Alarm Log 8.2
8.1.5 What the Alarm Status Display tells you 8.3
8.1.6 What the entries in the Historical Alarm Log tell you 8.3
8.1.7 Clearing all entries in the Historical Alarm Log 8.4
8.1.8 User-defined Alarms X and Y 8.5
8.1.9 User-defined ‘Comparison’ limit alarm 8.6
8.1.10 ‘Status Input’ triggered alarms 8.7
8.1.11 Alarm Logger Output (ALO) 8.8
8.1.12 Alarm Message List 8.9
8.2. Events 8.13

8.2.1 Introduction to 795x events 8.13
8.2.2 Event indicators 8.13
8.2.3 How events are received and stored 8.13
8.2.4 Examining the Event Summary and the Event log 8.14
8.2.5 What the Event Status Display tells you 8.14
8.2.6 What the entries in the Historical Event Log tell you 8.15
8.2.7 Clearing all entries in the Historical Event Log 8.16
8.3. Enhanced Auditing 8.17

8.3.1 Audit User Events 8.17
8.3.2 Audit System Alarms 8.18
8.3.3 Audit Control Attributes 8.19
8.3.4 Audit Event Suppression Control: Automatic Mode 8.21
8.3.5 Audit Alarm Suppression Control: Automatic Mode 8.23
9. Additional facilities 9.1
9.1 Feature: Archiving 9.1

9.1.2 Statistical Information 9.2
9.1.3 Analysis of an archive 9.2
9.1.4 Configuration details 9.8
9.1.5 Re-sizing Archive Space 9.14
9.1.6 Operation details (Reporting) 9.15
9.1.7 Guided examples of archiving 9.17
9.2 Feature: Printed Reports 9.18
9.2.1 “Current” report definition 9.18
9.2.2 Report Enhancements 9.19
9.3 Selecting units and data formats 9.20

9.4 Limits 9.20
9.5 Fallback values and modes 9.21
9.6 Units which the 795x can display 9.21
10. Configuring using Wizards 10.1
10.1 Introduction to Wizards 10.1

10.2 Using Wizards 10.1
10.3 Quick-view Guide (Set-up Wizards) 10.3
10.4 Units Wizard Selection 10.4
11. Configuring without Wizards 11.1
11.1 What does this Chapter tell me? 11.1

11.2 Quick-find Index 11.2
11.3 A structured approach to configuring 11.3
11.3.1 Preparation stage 11.3
11.3.2 Configuration stage 11.3
11.4 Reference page conventions 11.6

x Analogue Inputs 11.7
x Digital Inputs 11.8
x Pulse Inputs 11.9
x Orifice Flow Metering (ISO 5167) 11.13
x Orifice Flow Metering (AGA 3) 11.14
x Orifice Flow Metering (HART) 11.15
x Turbine Flow Metering 11.30
x Ultrasonic Flow Metering 11.34
x Linear Flow Metering 11.38
x Base Volume Rate 11.40
x Ultrasonic Flow Totalling (by individual metering-run) 11.43
x Ultrasonic Flow Totalling (by individual sub-station) 11.45
x Ultrasonic Flow Totalling (by station) 11.47
x Turbine/Orifice/Linear Flow Totalling (by individual metering-run) 11.49
x Turbine/Orifice/Linear Flow Totalling (by individual sub-station) 11.51
x Turbine/Orifice/Linear Flow Totalling (by station) 11.53
x Tariff totals 11.55
x Temperature Measurements 11.57
x Pressure Measurements 11.59
x Metering density measurements 11.60
x Base density measurements 11.70
x Specific gravity measurements 11.77
x Energy measurements 11.80
x Analogue Outputs 11.84
x Digital Outputs 11.85
x Pulse Outputs 11.86
x Special Equation Type One 11.87
x Special Equation Type Two 11.88
x Passwords and Security 11.89
x Multi-Page Multi-View 11.92
12. Routine operation (data map) 12.1
12.1 Viewing the data 12.1

12.1.1 Flow rates and Flow totals 12.2
12.1.2 Line density, base density and specific gravity 12.5
12.1.3 Temperature, Pressure and Energy 12.7
12.1.4 Smaller Topics 12.8
12.2 Checking the performance of the 795X 12.9

12.3 Printed reports 12.12
12.4 Giving your 795X a tag number 12.14
12.5 Giving a tag number to a stream 12.14
13. Routine maintenance and fault-finding 13.1
13.1 Cleaning the instrument 13.1

13.2 Fault-finding 13.1
14. Removal and replacement of parts 14.1
14.1 Front panel assembly 14.1

14.2 Display 14.1
14.3 Switch panel 14.2
14.4 Processor board 14.3
14.5 Power supply board 14.3
14.6 Connector Board 14.3
14.7 Fuse 14.4
14.8 Back-up battery 14.5
14.9 Rear Panel Assembly 14.6
14.10 Mother Board 14.7
14.11 Guide to fitting the Ethernet board 14.8
15. Assembly drawing and parts list 15.1
15.1 What the drawing and parts list tells you 15.1
15.2 How to obtain spare parts 15.1
16. HART, SMART and the 7955 16.1

16.2 Introduction to SMART and HART with the 7955 16.1
16.3 Connecting the 7955 to a HART network loop 16.3
16.4 Configuring the 7955 to use a HART network loop 16.6
16.5 Post configuration - viewing HART data 16.8
16.6 SMART units of measurement 16.8
17. BATCHING (TRANSACTIONS) 17.1
17.1 Standard batch operations 17.1

17.1.1 Batch operation types 17.1
17.1.2 Batch operation parameter reference 17.1
17.1.3 Guided Example 1: Manual Trigger Type Batch 17.4
17.1.4 Guided Example 2: Timed Batches (Station mode only) 17.6
17.1.5 Guided Example 3: Daily Batch (Station mode only) 17.8
17.1.6 Printing Batch Reports 17.9
Appendices
Appendix A Glossary A.1
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule B.1
Appendix C Technical data for the 7955 C.1

C.1 What this Appendix contains C.1
C.2 External connections C.1
C.3 Maximum number of external connections C.3
C.4 Specification C.4
C.5 Connections C.9
C.6 Earthing C.11
Appendix D Units and conversion factors D.1

Appendix E Data tables E.1
E.1 The tables E.1
E.2 Equations used to derive data tables E.5
Appendix F Calculations F.1

Appendix G Certificate of Conformity G.1
Quick-start Guide
Quick-start Guide
If you want to... Read....
• Find out what's in this manual Contents pages
• Get started quickly Chapter 2
• Get an overview of the instrument Chapter 3 and Appendix C
• Understand how the menu system works Chapter 6
• Make connections to the instrument Chapters 2, 4, 7 and Appendix C
• Install the instrument and set it up Chapters 2, 4, 10 and 11
• Set-up Serial Communications Chapter 7 + Addendums 7A and 7B
• Operate the instrument Chapters 5 - 9 and 12
• Carry out routine maintenance Chapter 13
• Trace and repair faults Chapters 13 and 14
• Remove and replace parts Chapters 14 and 15
• Set-up HART Communications Chapter 16
• Understand what a term means Appendix A
795x Op Man / AB Page Q.1

Quick-start Guide
Page Q.2 795x Op Man / AB

Chapter 1 About this manual
1. About this manual
1.1 What this manual tells you

This manual tells you how to install, configure, operate and service the instrument. In addition,
some information is given to help you identify and correct some of the more common faults which
may occur. However, since repairs are done by changing suspected faulty assemblies, fault-
finding to board component level is not covered.
This manual assumes that all devices or peripherals to be connected to the 795x have their own
documentation which tells you how to install and configure them. For this reason it is assumed that
anything which you want to link to the 795x is already installed and working correctly in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Since the instrument can be used for a wide variety of purposes, it is driven by software specially
for your application. This manual gives information about the software which applies to your
machine only.
Throughout this manual the term '795x' is used to refer to all members of the 795x family (7950,
7951 and 7955).
1.2 Who should use this manual

This manual is for anyone who installs, uses, services or repairs the 795x.
1.3 Software version covered by this manual

The software version dealt with in this manual is given on the title page. Chapter 3 tells you how to
find out what software is installed in your instrument.
795x Op Man/CB Page 1.1

Chapter 1 About this manual
Page 1.2 795x Op Man/CB

Chapter 2 Getting started
2. Getting Started
2.1 What this Chapter tells you
This chapter shows how to:
x Connect different types of instrumentation to a 7955 that is fitted with the D-type rear panel.
x Set the DIP switches in the 7955.
x Select the appropriate software Wizard to configure the 7955.
2.2 How to use this Chapter

This chapter is designed to introduce the various types of inputs and outputs that the 7955 can support.
Each type of connection is represented by an easy-to-follow, self-contained worked example. Try one
example at a time.
After working through the examples that are appropriate, use the information in Chapter 3 to plan
connections and then implement them in conjunction with the subsequent installation chapter.
Examples are organised as follows:

x Section 2.3 - for 7955 Input Connections only…….… (Page 2.2
x Section 2.4 - for 7955 Output Connections only..…... (Page 2.24)
Important Warnings!!
1. The 795X series is not intrinsically safe and, therefore, can only be
used in officially designated safe (non-hazardous) areas.
2. All examples of connections in this manual are designed to be

attempted in a non-hazardous area.
3. Hazardous area considerations are outside the scope of this manual.

Always refer to installation documentation supplied by the
manufacturer for their instrumentation.
Each worked example has a comprehensive set of instructions to establish a successful physical connection.
Instructions also show how to select the correct software Wizard.
Some types of connection require DIP switches to be set. These internal switches are located on the
processor board (mA/PRT analogue inputs) and the power supply board (8V/16V turbine).
Worked examples explain when to set a DIP switch. Newer models of the 7955 have DIP switch access
holes on top of the housing. Older models require the removal of the housing.
Note:
x DIP switches which are not shown in the diagrams have no effect on the field
transmitter shown.
x Where a field transmitter can be connected to more than one analogue input, the DIP
switch setting depends on which input you have used.
Other sections in this chapter are as follows:

x Section 2.5 lists chapters that cover connections that are more complex. (Page 2.28)
x Section 0 contains 7955 pin designation lists (Page 2.33)
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.1

2.3 7955 Input Connections

2.3.1 Overview of 7955 inputs
This section features connections with external devices that provide only input signals to the 7955.
Use this list to quickly locate appropriate examples:

x Turbine (Pulse) Flowmeter Inputs...........…....….................... Page 2.3
x Ultrasonic (Pulse) Flowmeter Inputs...........…..…................... Page 2.5
x Orifice Flowmeter Inputs.....................................……............. Page 2.7
x mA-type temperature transmitter........................……............. Page 2.10
x PRT-type temperature transmitter........................……........... Page 2.13
x mA-type pressure transmitter...............................……........... Page 2.15
x Gas Density Transducers (in a SAFE AREA)...........……....... Page 2.18
x Gas Specific Gravity Transducers (in a SAFE AREA)....….... Page 2.20
x Digital Input Connections........................................……......... Page 2.22
Use the “Health Check” facility on the 7955 to monitor what is being input. Refer to Chapter 13 to find out
how to locate this facility using the 7955 menu system. Once located, select the particular type of input and
then select the instance of that input to see what is happening.
Page 2.2 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

2.3.2 Turbine (Pulse) Flowmeter Inputs

Support is provided for wiring up to 4 † (pulse) flowmeters to the 7955:
x A 7955 can accept either single or dual pulse signal trains from each flowmeter. There are r signal
pins for each pulse train.
x Flowmeters can be powered by the turbine power supply pins on the 7955. These power pins are
an isolated supply source - 8V or 16V (selectable by a DIP switch on the power supply board). The
selected voltage applies to all turbine power pins.
Example: Display pulse frequency from a turbine (pulse) flowmeter with dual pulse train outputs connected
to Pulse Input 1.
Follow these instructions to work through the example :-
Turn off the power 01. Ensure that the 7955 is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switch 02. Select the voltage, 8V or 16V, that is required by all the turbine flowmeters.
This diagram shows the 8V selection:
(only if powering the
flowmeter using the
8V 16V
7955 isolated power
source)
Connect the 03. Wire the flowmeter terminals to the 7955.

flowmeter to the
7955 Table 2.3.1 shows a full list of 7955 pins for connections to turbine (pulse)
flowmeters. For this example, pins listed under the “Pin Group #1” heading
can be used.
Each flowmeter terminal (wire) in Figure 2.3.1 has a connection label. The
label identifies the appropriate pin in a pin group.
Figure 2.3.1: Typical dual pulse turbine flowmeter with connections shown
Turbine Power +
Power
Turbine Power -
supply unit
Turbine signal 'A' +

Turbine signal 'A' -
Pickup 'A'
Turbine
Turbine signal 'B' +

Pickup 'B' Turbine signal 'B' -
Table 2.3.1: 7955 Pin groups for use with turbine flowmeters
Connection label Pin Group #1 Pin Group #2 Pin Group #3 Pin Group #4
Turbine Power + SK3/4 SK3/4 SK3/4 SK3/4
Turbine Power - SK3/20 SK3/20 SK3/20 SK3/20
Turbine Signal ‘A’ + SK1/42 SK1/27 SK1/12 SK1/46
Turbine Signal ‘A’ - SK1/43 SK1/28 SK1/13 SK1/47
Turbine Signal ‘B’ + SK1/10 SK1/44 SK1/29 SK1/15
Turbine Signal ‘B’ - SK1/11 SK1/45 SK1/30 SK1/14
† th
There is a 5 . pulse input. It is reserved for future support of Master Meter Proving.
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.3

Important Notes:
x Flowmeters with a single pulse train output should only use the 7955 pins applicable to the pickup
nominated as ‘A’. These are labelled as: “Turbine Signal ‘A’ +”, “Turbine Signal ‘A’ -”.
x Application software use of pulses from these flowmeter (pulse) inputs will depend on the particular
release of the software that is concurrent with this Operating Manual. Refer to Chapter 3 (About The
7955) and the configuration chapters for details on use of these inputs.
(Instructions continued…)
Turn on the power 04. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On Self
Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished,
ignore any flashing alarm lights which may appear.
Visit the Wizards 05. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu (if you are not
selection menu there already).
06. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until the word “Configure” is
displayed on one of the four lines.
07. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Configure”. This action
selects the principal configuration menu.
08. Press the ‘a’-key twice to arrive at the Wizard selection screen.
Select the Wizard 09. Press the ‘b’-key. (This action starts the selection process)
10. Use the blue UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key (repeatedly) to scroll through
a list of Wizards. Stop when “Flow meter” is displayed.
11. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Flow meter” Wizard.
Proceed with 12. Press the blue ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit Stream 1?”.
Wizard
13. Press the blue ‘c’-key to select “Turbine”.
14. Press the blue ‘b’-key.
15. Use the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key until “Dual pulse (A+B)” is seen.
16. Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection and proceed to the next prompt.
17. Press the ‘c’-key and then use the arrow keys until “Live” is displayed.
18. Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection and proceed to the next prompt.
19. Press the ENTER key several times until “Edit Turbine Linearisation?” appears.
20. Continue to press the ‘c’-key to answer “NO” until the Wizard exits back to the
selection screen. Guidance on interacting with Wizards is in Chapter 10.
Check on results 21. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu.
22. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until “Health check” is displayed on
one of the four lines.
23. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Health check”.
24. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Flowmeter inputs”.
25. Press the blue single-lettered key that is alongside “Turbine”.
26. Press the blue single-lettered key that is alongside “Turbine freq.”.
27. Monitor the calculated pulse frequency value.
Note:
If the digit next to the triangular-shaped mark on the last display line does not
show a “1”, use the STREAM/RUN SELECT key until “1” appears.
(End of instructions)
Page 2.4 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

2.3.3 Ultrasonic (Pulse) Flowmeter Inputs

Support is provided for wiring up to 4 ultrasonic (single pick-up) flowmeters to the 7955:
x The 7955 can accept a single pulse train from this type of flowmeter.
x Flowmeters can be powered by the turbine power supply pins on the 7955. These power pins are
an isolated supply source - 8V or 16V (selectable by a DIP switch on the power supply board). The
selected voltage applies to all turbine power pins.
Example: Display pulse frequency from an ultrasonic flowmeter with a single pulse train output connected to
Pulse Input 1.
Follow these instructions to work through the example :-
Turn off the power 01. Ensure that the 795x is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switch 02. Select the voltage, 8V or 16V, that is required by the flowmeter. This
diagram shows the 8V selection:
(only if powering the
flowmeter using the
8V 16V
795X isolated power
source)
Connect the 03. Wire the flowmeter terminals to the 7955.

flowmeter to the 7955
Table 2.3.2 shows a full list of 7955 pins for connecting to ultrasonic (pulse)
flowmeters. For this example, pins listed under the “Pin Group #1” heading
should be used.
Each flowmeter terminal (wire) in Figure 2.3.2 has a connection label. The
label identifies the appropriate pin in a chosen pin group.
Figure 2.3.2: Typical ultrasonic flowmeter with single pick-up and power connections shown
Power +
Power
Power -
supply unit
Signal 'A' +
Signal 'A' -
Pickup 'A'
Table 2.3.2: 7955 Pin groups for use with an ultrasonic flowmeter
Connection label Pin Group #1 Pin Group #2 Pin Group #3 Pin Group #4
Power + SK3/4 SK3/4 SK3/4 SK3/4
Power - SK3/20 SK3/20 SK3/20 SK3/20
Signal ‘A’ + SK1/42 SK1/27 SK1/12 SK1/46
Signal ‘A’ - SK1/43 SK1/28 SK1/13 SK1/47
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.5

Important Notes
x Flowmeters with a single pulse train output should only use the 7955 pins applicable to the pickup
nominated as ‘A’. These are labelled as: “Signal ‘A’ +”, “Signal ‘A’ -”.
x Application software use of pulses from these flowmeter (pulse) inputs will depend on the particular
release of the software that is concurrent with this Operating Manual. Refer to Chapter 3 (About The
7955) and the configuration chapters for details on use of these inputs.
08. Press the blue ‘a’-key twice to arrive at the Wizard selection screen.
Select the Wizard 09. Press the blue ‘b’-key. (This action starts the selection process)
10. Press the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
Wizards. Stop when “Flow meter” is displayed.
11. Press the blue ‘b’-key to select and start the “Flow meter” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 12. Press the blue ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt “Edit stream 1?”.
13. Press the blue DOWN-ARROW key once.
14. Press the blue, single-lettered that is alongside “Ultrasonic”.
15. Press the blue ‘b’-key.
16. Use the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key until “Single pulse (A)” is seen.
17. Press the ENTER key several times until “Flow meter frequency” appears.
18. Press the ‘c’-key and then use the arrow keys to make “Live” appear.
19. Press the ENTER key twice (to confirm selection and make the next prompt
appear.)
20. Press the ENTER key several times until “Edit ultrasonic general corrections?”
appears.
21. Continue to press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” until the Wizard exits back to the
23. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until “Health check” is displayed
on one of the four lines.
26. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Ultrasonic”.
27. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Ultrasonic freq.”.
28. Monitor the calculated pulse frequency value.
Note:
show a “1”, use the STREAM/RUN SELECT key until “1” appears.
Page 2.6 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

2.3.4 Orifice Flowmeter Inputs

Loop powered differential pressure cells can use any of the analogue inputs on the 7955. There are 16
analogue inputs on a 7955.
The maximum number of cells supported by the application software is indicated in Chapter 3. For the
purpose of the example below, 2 DP cells are used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the
r signal pins of analogue inputs 1 Ö 4 are labelled with the term “PRT”. These
particular pins have a dual role - PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to
an analogue input) will determine the function.
Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a
loop powered (0-20mA or 4-20mA) field transmitters:
x Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for mA (per analogue
input used)
x Ensure that only the analogue power pins are used. The reason for this is that
PRT power is only applied when a measurement is required and, therefore, not
suitable for loop powered mA devices.
Example:
x Two metering-run #1 cells (high range and low range) connected to Analogue Inputs ‘1’ and ‘2’. They are
powered by the 7955 (24V isolated supply).
Follow these instructions to work through the example: -
Turn off the power 01. Ensure that the 7955 instrument is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switches as 02. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 1 is set for mA.
shown on page 2.8.
03. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 2 is set for mA.
Connect the first 04. Wire the first cell to Analogue Input ‘1’.
Differential Pressure
cell
+ Analogue Power +
- Signal +
Signal -
Analogue Power -
The diagram features connection labels, for example “Analogue Power +”,
which will each identify one pin from any pin group of Table 2.3.3.
Analogue Input ‘1’ pins are listed under the “Input #1 Pin Group” column.
Table 2.3.3: 7955 (D-type) pins for the first four mA inputs
Connection Input #1 Input #2 Input #3 Input #4

Label Pin Group Pin Group Pin Group Pin Group
Analogue Power + SK3/34 SK3/34 SK3/34 SK3/34
Signal + SK3/50 SK3/32 SK3/14 SK3/46
Signal - SK3/33 SK3/15 SK3/47 SK3/29
Analogue Power - SK3/18 SK3/18 SK3/18 SK3/18
Note: Refer to section 0 (page 2.33) to locate the pins of remaining 12 inputs.
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.7

Connect the second 05. Wire the second cell to Analogue Input ‘2’.
Differential Pressure
cell
+ Analogue Power +
- Signal +
Signal -
Analogue Power -
The diagram features connection labels, for example see “Analogue Power +”,
which will each identify one pin from any pin group of Table 2.3.3
SW1
A 1 Õ DIP switch settings of analogue inputs 1 and 2 for this example. The
B 2
“SW2” block must be set to match the “SW1” block.
4-20mA PRT
C 3
D 4
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
SW2
Turn on the power 06. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power-On-Self-
Test (POST) routine that takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished, ignore
any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Wizards. Stop when “Flow meter” is displayed.
13. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Flow meter” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 14. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit stream 1?”
15. Press the blue, lettered-key that is alongside “Orifice”.
16. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the arrow keys until “Plate” appears.
17. Press the ENTER (or ‘b’-key) twice.
18. Press the ‘b’ key and then use the numeric keypad to type in a value for the
pipe internal diameter.
20. Repeat steps 18 and 19 for Orifice diameter.
21. Press the ENTER (or ‘b’-key) repeatedly until “Orif mass flow calc” appears.
22. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the arrow keys until “AGA 3” appears.
23. Press the ENTER repeatedly until “Edit differential pressure?” appears.
Page 2.8 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

24. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes”.
25. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the arrow keys until “H=DP:1 L=DP:2” appears.
26. Press the ENTER key twice.
27. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the arrow keys until “Analog input 1” appears.
28. Press the ENTER key three times.
29. Press the ‘b’ key and then use the numeric keypad to type in a percentage of
the low range for automatic switching up to the high range cell. (e.g. 90.0%)
31. Press the ‘b’ key and then use the numeric keypad to type in a percentage of
the low range for automatic switching down to the low range cell. (e.g. 95.0%)
33. Repeat steps 31 and 32 for each differential pressure range (of the two cells).
33. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the arrow keys until “4-20mA input” appears
35. Repeat steps 33 to 34 for the 2nd. input.
36. Press the ENTER key or ‘c’-key to answer “NO” until the Wizard exits back to
the selection screen. Guidance on interacting with Wizards is in Chapter 10.
38. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until “Health check” is displayed on
one of the four lines.
41. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Orifice”.
42. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “DP value”.
43. Monitor the “Live” calculated differential pressure value.
Note:
If the digit next to the triangular-shaped mark on the last display line does not show
a “1”, use the STREAM/RUN SELECT key until a “1” appears.
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.9

2.3.5 mA-type temperature transmitter

Loop powered temperature transmitters can use any of the analogue inputs on the 7955. There are 16
The maximum number of temperature transmitters supported by the application software is indicated in
Chapter 3. For the purpose of the example below, 1 transmitter is used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
particular pins have a dual role – PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to
input used)
Example:
Metering-run #1 temperature, read from 1 loop powered temperature transmitter connected to Analogue Input
‘3’. The transmitter is powered by the 7955 (24V isolated supply).

Set DIP switches as
02. Ensure that the DIP switch for Analogue Input ‘3’ is set to mA.
shown on page 2.14.
Connect the field 03. Wire the field transmitter to Analogue Input ‘3’.
transmitter to the 7955
+ Analogue Power +
- Signal +
Signal -
Analogue Power -
The diagram features connection labels, for example “Analogue Power +”

which will each identify one rear panel pin from any pin group of Table 2.3.4.

Signal + SK3/50 SK3/32 SK3/14 SK3/46
Signal - SK3/33 SK3/15 SK3/47 SK3/29
Note: Refer to section 0 (page 2.33) to locate the pins of the remaining 12 inputs.
Page 2.10 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

SW1
A 1
Õ DIP switch settings of Analogue Input ‘3’ for this example. The “SW2”
block must be set to match the “SW1” block.
B 2
4-20mA PRT
C 3
D 4
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
SW2
08. Press the blue ‘a’-key twice to navigate to the Wizard selection screen.
Wizards. Stop when “Temperature” is displayed.
11. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Temperature” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 12. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit stream 1?”.
13. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the next prompt of
“Edit line temperature?”.
14. Press the ‘b’-key.
15. Use the UP-ARROW key or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
options. Halt when “Analogue input 3” is seen.
17. Repeat steps 14 to 16 for selecting the appropriate analogue input type.
18. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the numeric keypad to type in the maximum
temperature supported by the transmitter.
20. Press the blue ‘b’-key and then use the numeric keypad to type in the
minimum temperature supported by the transmitter.
22. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to the all further prompts until the Wizards
exits back to the selection screen.
Check on results 23. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu (if you are not
there already).
24. Press the DOWN-ARROW key several times until “Temperature” is displayed
on one of the four lines.
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.11

25. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Temperature”.

26. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Line temperature”.
26. Monitor the “Live” calculated temperature value.
Note:
show a “1”, use the STREAM/RUN SELECT key until a “1” appears.
Page 2.12 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

2.3.6 PRT-type temperature transmitter

PRT-type temperature transmitters can use any of the first four analogue inputs on the 7955. There are 16
The maximum number of temperature transmitters supported by the application software is indicated in
Chapter 3. For the purpose of the example below, 1 transmitter is used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
PRT-type field transmitters:
x Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for PRT (per analogue
input used)
x Ensure that only the PRT power pins are used.
Example:
Metering-run #2 temperature, read from 1 PRT-type temperature transmitter connected to Analogue Input 4.
The transmitter is powered by the 7955 (isolated supply).

Set DIP switches as
02. Ensure that the DIP switch for Analogue Input ‘4’ is set to PRT.
shown on page 2.14.
PRT Power +
Signal +
PRT
Signal -
PRT Power -
The diagram features 4 connection labels, for example see “PRT Power +”,
Table 2.3.5: 7955 (D-type) pins for the four PRT inputs

PRT Power + SK3/49 SK3/16 SK3/31 SK3/13
Signal + SK3/50 SK3/32 SK3/14 SK3/46
Signal - SK3/33 SK3/15 SK3/47 SK3/29
PRT Power - SK3/17 SK3/48 SK3/30 SK3/45
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.13

SW1
Õ DIP switch settings of analogue input 4 for this example. The “SW2”
A 1 block must be set to match the “SW1” block.
B 2
4-20mA PRT
C 3
D 4
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
SW2
10. Use the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
Wizards. Halt when “Temperature” is displayed.
11. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Temperature” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 12. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to the prompt of “Edit stream 1?”.
13. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit stream 2?”.
14. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit line temperature?”.
16. Use the UP-ARROW key or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
options. Halt using the arrow keys when “Analogue input 4” is seen.
18. Repeat steps 15 to 17 for selecting the “PT100 input” option.
19. Use the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to the all further prompts until the Wizard exits
to the selection screen. A guide to interacting with a Wizard is in Chapter 10.
21. Use the DOWN-ARROW key until “Temperature” is displayed on one of the
four lines.
22. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Temperature”.
23. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Line temperature”.
24. Monitor the “Live” calculated temperature value.
Note:
Page 2.14 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

2.3.7 mA-type pressure transmitter

Loop powered pressure transmitters can use any of the analogue inputs on the 7955. There are 16
The maximum number of pressure transmitters supported by the application software is indicated in Chapter 3.
For the purpose of the example below, 1 transmitter is used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
input used)
Example:
Metering-run #2 pressure, read from 1 loop powered pressure transmitter connected to Analogue Input ‘3’.
The transmitter is powered by the 7955 (24V isolated supply).

Set DIP switches as
02. Ensure that the DIP switch for Analogue Input ‘3’ is set to mA.
shown on next page.
+ Analogue Power +
- Signal +
Signal -
Analogue Power -
The diagram features 4 connection labels, for example “Analogue Power +”,

Signal + SK3/50 SK3/32 SK3/14 SK3/46
Signal - SK3/33 SK3/15 SK3/47 SK3/29
Note: Refer to section 0 (page 2.33) to locate the pins of the remaining 12 inputs.
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.15

SW1
Õ DIP switch settings of Analogue Input ‘3’ for this example. The
A 1
“SW2” block must be set to match the “SW1” block.
B 2
4-20mA PRT
C 3
D 4
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
SW2
Test (POST) routine that takes less than 30 seconds. When it is finished,
ignore any flashing alarm lights that may appear.
Wizards. Halt when “Pressure” is displayed.
11. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Pressure” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 12. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to the prompt of “Edit stream 1?”
13. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit stream 2?”
14. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit line pressure?”
options. Halt when “Analogue input 3” is displayed.
18. Repeat steps 15 to 17 for selecting the appropriate mA range.
maximum static pressure measurement supported by the transmitter.
minimum static pressure measurement supported by the transmitter.
23. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to all the further prompts until the Wizard
exits to the selection screen. A guide on interacting with a Wizard is in Chapter
10.
25. Use the DOWN-ARROW key until “Pressure” is displayed.
26. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Pressure”.
Page 2.16 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

27. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Line pressure”.
28. Monitor the “Live” calculated pressure value.
Note:
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.17

2.3.8 Gas Density Transducers (in a SAFE AREA)

The 7810/11/12 Gas Density transducer connects to a time period input (seen as “density input” in pin
designation tables). There are 4 time period inputs on a 7955.
Example:
x Prime metering-run ‘1’ gas density (always from channel ‘1A’), read from a gas density transducer
(7812) connected to Time Period Input ‘1’.
x Prime metering-run ‘2’ gas density (always from channel ‘2A’), read from a gas density transducer
(7810 or 7811) connected to Time Period Input ‘2’.
x Transducers are powered by the 7955 (24V isolated supply).

Connect the first 02. Wire the 7812 to Time Period Input ‘1’.
transducer to the 7955
1 +24V Power
SIG A
2
Signal +
3
SIG B 0V Power
4
Signal -
The diagram features four connection labels, for example see “+24V Power”,
Time Period Input ‘1’ pins are listed under the “Input #1 Pin Group” column.
Note: For hazardous area connections, always refer to the documentation
supplied by the manufacturer of the transmitter/transducer.
Connect the second 03. Wire the 7810 (or 7811) to Time Period Input ‘2’.
POS +24V Power
SIG Signal +
NEG Signal -
0V Power
The diagram features four connection labels, for example see “+24V Power”,
Table 2.3.7: 7955 (D-type) pins for the 4 time period inputs
Input #1 Pin Input #2 Pin Input #3 Pin Input #4 Pin

Connection label
Group Group Group Group
+24V Power SK3/35 SK3/35 SK3/35 SK3/35
Signal + SK1/31 SK1/48 SK1/16 SK1/33
Signal - SK1/32 SK1/49 SK1/17 SK1/50
0V Power SK3/19 SK3/19 SK3/19 SK3/19
Page 2.18 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

08. Press the blue, ‘a’-key twice to arrive at the Wizard selection screen.
10. Use the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW keys to scroll through the list of
Wizards. Halt when “Line Density” is displayed.
11. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Line Density” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 12. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit stream 1?”
13. Press the ‘b’-key to select “A”. (Prime value always from channel ’1A’)
14. Press the ENTER key
15. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit line density A calc?”
16. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the numeric keypad to enter the value of
factor K0 from the correct calibration certificate of the first transducer.
17. Press the ENTER key twice
18. Repeat steps 16 to 17 for factors K1 and K2 (also from the same certificate)
19. Press the ENTER key twice (to skip past the next two prompts)
20. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” until the prompt of “Edit stream 2?”
22. Press the ‘b’-key to select “A”. (Prime value always from channel ’2A’)
23. Press the ENTER key
24. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit line density A calc?”
25. Press the ‘b’-key and then use the numeric keypad to enter the value of
factor K0 from the correct calibration certificate of the second transducer
26. Repeat steps 23 to 24 for factors K1 and K2 (also from the same certificate)
27. Press the ENTER key twice (to skip past the next two prompts)
28. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to all subsequent prompts until the Wizard
exits back to the selection screen. A guide on interacting with a Wizard is in
Chapter 10.
Check on results 29. Press the MAIN MENU key to visit page 1 of the top-level menu (if you are not
there already)
30. Use the DOWN-ARROW key until “Line density” is displayed
31. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Line density”
32. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Prime line density”
33. Monitor the “Live” calculated value for metering-runs ‘1’ and ‘2’.
Note:
show a “1” or a “2”, use the STREAM/RUN SELECT key until a “1” or “2” appears.
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.19

2.3.9 Gas Specific Gravity Transducers (in a SAFE AREA)

The 3096/3098 Gas Specific Gravity transducer connects to a time period input, seen labelled as a “density
input” in pin designation tables. There are 4 time period inputs on a 7955. Check in Chapter 3 for the list of
supported connections.
Example:
x Prime metering-run ‘2’ specific gravity measurements (always from channel ‘2B’), read from a transducer
(3096 or 3098) connected to Time Period Input ‘2’ in a non-hazardous area.
x Transducer is powered by the 7955 (isolated 24V supply).

Connect the first 02. Wire the transducer terminals to Time Period Input ‘2’.
(a) 2 wire arrangement:
3096/3098
transducer
330 ohms
1 +24V Power
SIG A
2 Signal +
0V Power
3
SIG B
Signal -
4
(b) 3 wire arrangement:
3096/3098
transducer
40 ohms
1 +24V Power
SIG A
2
Signal +
3
SIG B 0V Power
4
Signal -
The diagram features connection labels, for example see “+24V Power”,
which will each identify one pin of any pin group in Table 2.3.8.
Table 2.3.8: 7955 (D-type) pins for the 4 time period inputs
Input #1 Pin Input #2 Pin Input #3 Pin Input #4 Pin

Connection label
Group Group Group Group
+24V Power SK3/35 SK3/35 SK3/35 SK3/35
Signal + SK1/31 SK1/48 SK1/16 SK1/33
Signal - SK1/32 SK1/49 SK1/17 SK1/50
0V Power SK3/19 SK3/19 SK3/19 SK3/19
Page 2.20 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

Visit the Wizards 05. Press the light grey MENU key to visit page 1 of the Main Menu (if you are not
08. Press the ‘a’-key twice to visit the Wizard selection screen.
10. Use the blue UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
Wizards. Halt when “Specific gravity” is displayed.
11. Press the ‘b’-key to select and start the “Specific gravity” Wizard.
Proceed with Wizard 12. Press the ‘c’-key to answer “No” to the prompt of “Edit stream 1?”
14. Press the ‘b’-key to select “A”. (Prime SG from SG ‘A’ only)
15. Press the ‘b’-key
16. Use the blue UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the list of
options. Halt when “Time Period 2” is displayed
18. Press the ‘d’-key to answer “Yes” to the prompt of “Edit SG A calc?”
19. Press the ‘b’-key and enter a value for factor K0 from the correct transducer
calibration certificate.
21. Repeat steps 19 to 20 for the factor K2.
22. Press the blue ‘c’-key to answer “No” to the next prompt. Fallback and limits
can be ignored for this example.
23. Answer “No” to all subsequent prompts until the Wizard exits back to the
25. Use the DOWN-ARROW key until “Base density / SG” is displayed.
26. Press the blue, single-lettered key that is alongside “Prime SG”.
27. Monitor the “Live” calculated value.
Note:
A second 3096/3098 can be connected to any of remaining time period inputs.
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.21

2.3.10 Digital Input Connections

There are 24 Status Inputs available on a 7955 without any option boards fitted. Appendix ‘C’ contains
information about the number of extra inputs available on option boards.
Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made to a 7955:
1. Power usage (two options)

(1a) Internal powered
795x status input (Internal power) notes:
795x
Always use an isolated voltage from the
range 5V to 24V.
+5V to 24V
(Isolated supply)
There are only a few isolated voltage pins,
on the rear panel of the 795x, that are
Status input suitable:
(a) Density power (24V)
3.3k
(b) Turbine power (8V or 16V)
Status input common Circuit operation notes:
0V (Isolated supply) A closed switch produces a digital

signal that represents a value of 1
Status input using internal An open switch produces a digital

voltage source signal that represents a value of 0
Isolated Voltage Supply Pins

These are listed in the following table:
7955 D-Type 7955 D-Type
Choice Power Pin Source
(+VDC) (0V)
1st. Density (+24V) SK3/35 SK3/19
2nd. Density/Turbine (+8V/16V) SK3/36 SK3/20
(1b) External powered (recommended)

795x status input (external power) notes:
795x 1. Use a voltage that falls within the range 5V to 24V.
+5V to +24V
(external) It is possible to use the same voltage source that is
powering the 795x. In this case, the voltage
requirement is 24V.
Status input 2. An isolated power source must be used to maintain

status input isolation.
3.3k
Circuit operation notes:

0V Status input common
(external) A closed switch produces a digital
signal that represents a value of 1
An open switch produces a digital

Status input using external signal that represents a value of 0
voltage source
Page 2.22 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

2. Digital Input Common Pin

Use either SK2/34 or SK2/35 for any digital input connection.
3. Digital Input Signal Pins

Table 2.3.9 shows the rear panel pin allocation for each signal pin. By default, the digital input signal pins
are configured with the positive logic setting and are, therefore, inactive initially.
Full configuration details of digital input settings (logic level, mode level, etc.) and details on supported
functions, activated by an external input, are to be found in Chapter 11.
The 7955 response to an active digital signal from an external system is entirely dependent on the
functionality of an application software version. Refer to Chapter 3 for an introduction to the software
release that is covered by this Operating Manual.
Table 2.3.9: 7955 Digital Input Signal Pins
D-Type D-Type D-Type D-Type

Input Input Input Input
Pin Pin Pin Pin
1 SK2/1 7 SK2/9 13 SK2/21 19 SK2/27
2 SK2/2 8 SK2/10 14 SK2/22 20 SK2/36
3 SK2/5 9 SK2/11 15 SK2/23 21 SK2/37
4 SK2/6 10 SK2/18 16 SK2/24 22 SK2/38
5 SK2/7 11 SK2/19 17 SK2/25 23 SK2/39
6 SK2/8 12 SK2/20 18 SK2/26 24 SK2/40
Note: Refer to section 0 (page 2.33) to locate the pins of extra digital inputs.
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.23

2.4 7955 Output Connections

2.4.1 Overview of 7955 outputs
This section features connections with external devices that provide output signals to the 7955.
Use this list to quickly locate appropriate examples:

x Pulse Output Connections……….……… Page 2.25
x Analogue Output Connections....…......... Page 2.26
x Digital Output Connections........………... Page 2.27
Use the “Health Check” facility on the 7955 to monitor what is being output. Refer to Chapter 12 to find out
how to locate this facility using the 7955 menu system. Once located, select the particular type of output and
then select the instance of that output to see what is happening.
Page 2.24 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

2.4.2 Pulse Output Connections

There are 5 pulse outputs available on a 7955.
Table 2.3.9 shows the recommended method for wiring a pulse output to a relay. Work through parts 1, 2 and
3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made.
Table 2.4.1: Connections for Pulse Output 1

+5V to +40V
795X Pulse output +ve
Relay
Pulse output 1
Note:
The +24V and 0V could be
taken from a density supply
Pulse output common
or somewhere else on the
instrument.
0V
1. Pulse Output Power +VE Pin

Use pin SK1/7 for all pulse outputs.
2. Pulse Output Common Pin

Use pin SK1/6 for all pulse outputs.
3. Pulse Output Signal Pin

Table 2.4.2 shows the rear panel pin allocation and parameter allocation for each signal pin.
By default, parameters (menu data locations) are not pre-allocated to pulse outputs. Refer to Chapter
11 for the configuration information necessary to make an allocation.
Table 2.4.2: 7955 Pulse Output Signal Pins
Default Parameter
Output 7955 D-Type Pin
Output
1 None Allocated SK1/23
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.25

2.4.3 Analogue Output Connections

There are 4 mA-type analogue outputs available on a 7955 without an option board fitted. Appendix ‘C’
contains information about the number of extra inputs available on option boards.
Table 2.4.3 shows the recommended method for wiring up one analogue output. Work through parts 1, 2 and
3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made:
Table 2.4.3: Analogue Output Wiring Connections
795x
Analogue Output
Signal
Analogue Output
Commmon
Connections:
1. Analogue Output Common Pin
Use SK2/15 for all analogue outputs.
2. Analogue Output Pins

Table 2.4.4 shows the rear panel pin allocation and parameter allocation for each output pin.
By default, parameters (menu data locations) are not pre-allocated to analogue outputs for transmission
(of values) to one or more external systems. Refer to Chapter 11 for the configuration information
necessary to make an allocation.
Table 2.4.4: 7955 Analogue Output Pins and Parameter Allocation
Output Default Parameter 7955 D-Type Pin

Output
Note: Refer to section 0 (page 2.33) to locate the pins of extra mA outputs.
Page 2.26 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

2.4.4 Digital Output Connections

There are 25 digital output channels available on a 7955 without any option boards fitted.
Status Output ‘1’

Status Output ‘1’ uses a relay with 2 contacts:
1: Normally Open pin (SK3/3) OR Normally Closed pin (SK3/2)
2: Common pin is SK3/1.
This output permanently functions as a ‘Watchdog’ for indicating the presence of at least
one active alarm:
x The NO - Normally Open - contact is energised when there is an alarm.
x The NC - Normally Closed - contact is energised when there are no alarms.
Status Outputs ‘2’ to ‘25’

Remaining digital outputs are of the open-drain type.
Connections:
Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be
made to the 7950:
1. Power Usage
(a) External power (Recommended)
Figure 2.4.1: A recommended approach to wiring a digital outputs ‘2’ to ‘25’

This diode protects 795x
against reverse voltages
795x External power supply provides

voltage and current suitable for
user selected relay.
Status output
0V from external power supply

Status output common
2. Digital Output Common Pins

Use pin SK1/5 for all digital outputs.
3. Digital Output Signal Pins

Outputs ‘6’ to ‘25’ do not have a default function but they may be allocated to a function as part of
configuring a feature. (See Chapters 8, 9 or 11 for supported functions).
D-Type Refer to Chapter 8 for information on changing

Output Default Function settings for the Alarm Logger Output (Watchdog)
Pin
feature.
2 Limit Alarm Watchdog SK2/12
3 Input Alarm Watchdog SK2/13 Refer to Chapter 11 for information on
4 User Alarms Watchdog SK2/28 configuring a Status Output.
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.27

2.5 Other 7955 connections

Serial Communications
Turn to Chapter 7 for a full guide to Serial Communications involving the 7955.
HART Communications
Turn to Chapter 16 for a full guide to HART support on a 7955.
2.6 Where to find the 7955 connectors

The connectors and pin designations referred to in this chapter can be found as follows: -
Section 2.6.1 7955 pins without any option boards fitted

Section 2.6.2 7955 pins with option board 79556 fitted
See Appendix ‘C’ for a combined list of all connectors and pin designations.
Note: It is not possible for both option boards 79558 and 79559 to be fitted at the same time.
Pin 1 Pin 15 Pin 1 Pin 50

SK4 SK1

SK5 SK2
Pin 1 Pin 9 Pin 50

Pin 1 Pin 4 Pin 1
SK6 SK3
PL1
Figure 2.6.1: The 7955 Rear Panel
Page 2.28 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

2.6.1 Pin Designations: 7955 without any option boards fitted.
Note: This table is also valid with the HART option board (79557) fitted.
Pin SK1 SK2 SK3 SK4 SK5 SK6 PL1

1 Status o/p 12 Status i/p 1 Alarm common Ground
2 Status o/p 13 Status i/p 2 Alarm NC Comm 1 tx Ground
3 Status o/p 14 Alarm NO Comm 1 rx Supply -
4 Status o/p 15 Turbine power + Supply +
5 Status o/p com Status i/p 3 Analog i/p 15+ Comm 0V
6 Pulse o/p com Status i/p 4 Analog. i/p 14 +
7 Pulse o/p power Status i/p 5 Analog. i.p 12 + Comm 0V
8 Turbine Sig. 9 + Status i/p 6 Analog i/p 11 + Comm 3 rx/tx +
9 Turbine Sig. 9 - Status i/p 7 Analog. i/p 9 + Comm 3 rx
10 Turbine Sig. 2 + Status i/p 8 Analog. i/p 8 + Comm 3 rts
11 Turbine Sig. 2 - Status i/p 9 Analog. i/p 6 + Comm 2 rx/tx +
12 Turbine Sig. 5 + Status o/p 2 Analog. i/p 5 + Comm 2 rx
13 Turbine Sig. 5 - Status o/p 3 PRT 4 power + Comm 2 rts
14 Turbine Sig. 8 - Status o/p com PRT 3 signal +
15 Turbine Sig. 8 + Analog. o/p com PRT 2 signal -
16 Density Sig. 3 + Analog. o/p 1 PRT 2 power +
17 Density Sig. 3 - Analog. o/p 2 PRT 1 power -
18 Status o/p 16 Status i/p 10 0V Analogue
19 Status o/p 17 Status i/p 11 0V Density
20 Status o/p 18 Status i/p 12 0V Den./Ana./Turb. Comm 3 rx/tx -
21 Status o/p 19 Status i/p 13 Analog. i/p 15 - Comm 3 tx
22 Status o/p 20 Status i/p 14 Analog. i/p 14 - Comm 3 cts
23 Pulse o/p 1 Status i/p 15 Analog. i/p 12 - Comm 2 rx/tx -
24 Pulse o/p 2 Status i/p 16 Analog. i/p 11 - Comm 2 tx
25 Turbine Sig. 10+ Status i/p 17 Analog. i/p 9 - Comm 2 cts
26 Turbine Sig. 10- Status i/p 18 Analog. i/p 8 -
27 Turbine Sig. 3 + Status i/p 19 Analog. i/p 6 -
28 Turbine Sig. 3 - Status o/p 4 Analog. i/p 5 -
29 Turbine Sig. 6 + Status o/p 5 PRT 4 Signal -
30 Turbine Sig. 6 - Status o/p 6 PRT 3 Power -
31 Density Sig. 1 + Analog. o/p 3 PRT 3 Power +
32 Density Sig. 1 - Analog. o/p 4 PRT 2 Signal +
33 Density Sig. 4 + PRT 1 Signal -
34 Status o/p 21 Status i/p com +24V Analogue
35 Status o/p 22 Status i/p com +24V Density
36 Status o/p 23 Status i/p 20 +24V Dens./Ana.
37 Status o/p 24 Status i/p 21 Analog. i/p 16 -
38 Status o/p 25 Status i/p 22 Analog. i/p 16 +
39 Pulse o/p 3 Status i/p 23 Analog. i/p 13 -
40 Pulse o/p 4 Status i/p 24 Analog. i/p 13 +
42 Turbine Sig. 1 + Status i/p 26 Analog. i/p 10 +
44 Turbine Sig. 4 + Status o/p 8 Analog. i/p 7 +
45 Turbine Sig. 4 - Status o/p 9 PRT 4 power -
46 Turbine Sig. 7 + Status o/p 10 PRT 4 Signal +
47 Turbine Sig. 7 - Status o/p 11 PRT 3 Signal -
48 Density Sig. 2 + PRT 2 Power -
49 Density Sig. 2 - PRT 1 Power +
50 Density Sig. 4 - PRT 1 Signal +
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.29

2.6.2 Pin designations for a 7955 with option board 79556 fitted

1 Status o/p 12 Status i/p 1 Alarm common Ground
2 Status o/p 13 Status i/p 2 Alarm NC Comm 1 tx Ground
3 Status o/p 14 Alarm NO Comm 1 rx Supply -
4 Status o/p 15 Turbine power + Supply +
5 Status o/p com Status i/p 3 Analog i/p 15+ Comm 0V
6 Pulse o/p com Status i/p 4 Analog. i/p 14 +
14 Turbine Sig. 8 - Status o/p com PRT 3 signal +
15 Turbine Sig. 8 + Analog. o/p com PRT 2 signal -
16 Density Sig. 3 + Analog. o/p 1 PRT 2 power +
17 Density Sig. 3 - Analog. o/p 2 PRT 1 power -
18 Status o/p 16 Status i/p 10 0V Analogue
19 Status o/p 17 Status i/p 11 0V Density
33 Density Sig. 4 + Analog. o/p 5 PRT 1 Signal -
48 Density Sig. 2 + Analog. o/p 6 PRT 2 Power -
49 Density Sig. 2 - Analog. o/p 7 PRT 1 Power +
Page 2.30 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

2.6.3 Pin Designations: 7955 with option board 79558 fitted

1 Status o/p 12 Status i/p 1 Alarm common Comm 5 rx/tx + Ground
2 Status o/p 13 Status i/p 2 Alarm NC Comm 5 rx Comm 1 tx Ground
3 Status o/p 14 Status i/p 27 Alarm NO Comm 5 rts Comm 1 rx Supply -
4 Status o/p 15 Status i/p 28 Turbine power + Comm 4 rx/tx + Supply +
5 Status o/p com Status i/p 3 Analog i/p 15+ Comm 4 rx Comm 0V
6 Pulse o/p com Status i/p 4 Analog. i/p 14 + Comm 4 rts
14 Turbine Sig. 8 - Status o/p com PRT 3 signal + Comm 5 rx/tx -
15 Turbine Sig. 8 + Analog. o/p com PRT 2 signal - Comm 5 tx
16 Density Sig. 3 + Analog. o/p 1 PRT 2 power + Comm 5 cts
17 Density Sig. 3 - Analog. o/p 2 PRT 1 power - Comm 4 rx/tx -
18 Status o/p 16 Status i/p 10 0V Analogue Comm 4 tx
19 Status o/p 17 Status i/p 11 0V Density Comm 4 cts
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.31

2.6.4 Pin Designations: 7955 with option board 79559 fitted

1 Status o/p 12 Status i/p 1 Alarm common Ethernet 0V Comm 5 rx/tx + Ground
2 Status o/p 13 Status i/p 2 Alarm NC Ethernet cd + Comm 5 rx Comm 1 tx Ground
3 Status o/p 14 Status i/p 27 Alarm NO Ethernet tx + Comm 5 rts Comm 1 rx Supply -
4 Status o/p 15 Status i/p 28 Turbine power + Ethernet 0V Comm 4 rx/tx + Supply +
5 Status o/p com Status i/p 3 Analog i/p 15+ Ethernet rx + Comm 4 rx Comm 0V
6 Pulse o/p com Status i/p 4 Analog. i/p 14 + Ethernet 0V Comm 4 rts
8 Turbine Sig. 9 + Status i/p 6 Analog i/p 11 + Ethernet 0V Comm 3 rx/tx +
9 Turbine Sig. 9 - Status i/p 7 Analog. i/p 9 + Ethernet cd - Comm 3 rx
10 Turbine Sig. 2 + Status i/p 8 Analog. i/p 8 + Ethernet tx - Comm 3 rts
11 Turbine Sig. 2 - Status i/p 9 Analog. i/p 6 + Ethernet 0V Comm 2 rx/tx +
12 Turbine Sig. 5 + Status o/p 2 Analog. i/p 5 + Ethernet rx - Comm 2 rx
13 Turbine Sig. 5 - Status o/p 3 PRT 4 power + + 12V Comm 2 rts
14 Turbine Sig. 8 - Status o/p com PRT 3 signal + Ethernet 0V Comm 5 rx/tx -
Page 2.32 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

2.7 If you need help...

If you get into difficulties when using a Wizard, you can abandon the configuration and start again as follows:
1. Keep selecting for “NO” (usually by pressing the ‘c’-key) or, if that option is not available, press the
ENTER key until you can start selecting NO.
2. Carry on with (1) until you return to the Wizards menu where you started.
3. Start the worked example again. The configuration you abandoned is cleared from the memory of
the instrument when you begin again.
If you don’t know where the keys are...
Figure 2.7.1 shows how to find all the keys referred to in the worked examples. The diagram shows those
keys referred to in the worked examples, plus some others you may use. Chapter 5 gives a full
explanation of what all the keys do.
1 Down-arrow 6 Back
2 Up-arrow 7 Enter
3 Multi-view display 8 Main Menu
4 Left-arrow 9 Print Menu
5 Right-arrow 10 Stream/Run Select
Figure 2.7.1: Keys and indicators on the front panel
7955 1540 (Ch02/AB) Page 2.33

Page 2.34 7955 1540 (Ch02/AB)

Chapter 3 About the 7955
3. About the 7955

3.1 Background
The Solartron-Mobrey 7955 is designed to meet the demand for a reliable, versatile, user-friendly and cost-
effective instrument for flow metering. It has a Motorola 68332 32-bit microprocessor and surface-mounted
circuit board components so that it is powerful, reliable and compact.
A 7955 features:
x a maths co-processor (to improve calculation speed)
x comprehensive I/O capabilities
x alarms and alarm history facilities
x a menu-driven, user-friendly interface (for easy access to information)
x an IP50 case (when panel mounted)
x dc powered
x serial ports (using RS232 or RS485) for MODBUS network communications and printing
3.2 The 7955 Quad Metering-Run Gas Flow Computer

The 7955 Gas Flow Computer is used specifically for dry or wet gas metering, and can use a variety of
instrumentation to measure and calculate parameters of interest.
This chapter is an introduction to capabilities of software version 1640. Application supported connections
are listed in Section 3.2.1 (below). Application features are listed on page 3.2.
3.2.1 Connection Support

The lists specify the maximum number of connections as supported by the software rather than the 7955
hardware. Refer to Appendix ‘C’ for hardware information.
Supported Input Connections:

Solartron-ISA Dualstream I
Turbine flowmeters with single/dual pick-up connections or Ultrasonic flowmeters with a single pick-up
{Metering-run/Stream ‘1’ uses Pulse Input ‘1’, Metering-run/Stream ‘2’ uses Pulse Input ‘2’, etc.}
mA differential pressure transmitters for each metering-run

mA Linear flowmeters
Gas density transducers (7810/7811/7812) or Gas specific gravity transducers (3096/3098).
Temperature transmitters (Analogue) - maximum of 2 transmitters for each metering-run/stream.
Static Pressure transmitters (Analogue) - maximum of 1 transmitter for each metering-run/stream.
HART transmitters 2 - differential pressure, density, temperature, pressure, mass flow rate -
Maximum of 5 transmitters on any one of the 4 HART network loops.
Modbus networked chromatographs - (user-allocated to metering-runs/channels) -
Support for various models: Daniels 2551, Hartmann & Braun BTU8000 or ABB
mA input for density at line conditions (for each metering-run)
mA input for density at base conditions (for each metering-run)
mA input for percentage of CO2 (for each metering-run)
mA input for percentage of N2 (for each metering-run)
mA input for specific gravity (for each metering-run)
mA input for energy value in volumetric or mass units (for each metering-run)
2
Requires HART add-on board 79559 to be fitted. Provides hardware support for four HART network loops. See Chapter 16.
7955 1540 (Ch03/AB) Page 3.1

Digital (Status) Inputs for

(a) flow direction indication (ultrasonic flow metering),
(b) activating a print-out of the “Current Report” through a serial port
(c) selecting maintenance-mode (whilst ‘active’) - 7955 must be in a ‘flow stopped’ state
(d) forcing the 7955 into a ‘flow stopped’ state
Supported Output Connections:

5 x Pulse outputs - for transmitting total increments every cycle
8 x Analogue outputs - for transmitting values
Digital (Status) Outputs for
(a) active alarm watchdog feature.
Other Supported Connections:

5 x Serial Ports - for direct connection to Modbus protocol networks and one ASCII printer
{Also, see Section 3.3 for further information}
3.2.2 Application Feature List

Configuration details for listed features can be found in Chapters 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11.
Orifice Flow Metering (Forward Flow)

Standards supported: ISO 5167-1:1991(E), ISO 5167-1:1991.Amd.1998(E) and AGA 3 (Nov.1992)
x Differential pressure measurement (for each metering-run/channel) - pay/check or prime selection cell
arrangements
Primary DP devices: Dualstream I, Orifice Plate, Venturi tube or V-Cone
x Individual metering-run, 2 x sub-stations and station flow rates:
Mass rate, Corrected Volume rate, Base Volume rate and Energy rate
x Individual metering-run totalling: (Normal flow mode and Maintenance mode totals)
Mass, Corrected Volume, Base Volume and Energy flow totals
x 2 x sub-stations totalling: (Normal flow mode totals only)

x Station totaling: (Normal flow mode totals only)

x Wet or dry gas metering
Note: Other primary DP devices, such as a Dall Tube, can be used if fixed values are known for
the Discharge coefficient, Velocity of approach and Expansibility factor.
Turbine Flow Metering (Forward Flow)

x Flow correction curve profile (for each metering-run)
Live ‘K factor’ from “Frequency versus K factor” linearisation and a fixed offset (error %) or
Set ‘K factor’ and a live offset (error %) from “Flow versus Error percentage” linearisation
x Individual metering-run, 2 x sub-stations and station flow rates:
Indicated Volume, Corrected Volume rate, Mass rate, Base Volume rate and Energy rate
x Individual metering-run, 2 x sub-stations and station totalling:

Indicated Volume, Corrected Volume rate, Mass rate, Base Volume rate and Energy flow
Note: Individual metering-run totaling features normal flow mode totals and maintenance mode totals.
Page 3.2 7955 1540 (Ch03/AB)

Ultrasonic Flow Metering (Forward and Reverse Flow)

x Individual metering-run, sub-station and station flow rates:
x Individual metering-run, 2 x sub-stations and station forward flow totalling:

x Individual metering-run, 2 x sub-stations and station reverse flow totalling:

x Individual metering-run, 2 x sub-stations and station net flow totalling:

x Flow velocity
Note: Individual metering-run forward flow totalling and reverse flow totalling feature normal flow mode totals
and maintenance mode totals.
Linear Flow Metering (Forward Flow)

x Individual metering-run, sub-stations and station flow rates:
x Individual metering-run, sub-stations and station totalling:

Indicated Volume, Corrected Volume rate, Mass rate, Base Volume rate and Energy
Note: Individual metering-run totalling feature normal flow mode and maintenance mode totals.
Temperature measurement
x Metering temperature (for each metering-run or channel).
{from a HART input, PRT-type analogue input or mA-type analogue input}
x ‘Density loop’ temperature ‘1’ (for metering-run/channel ‘1’)
‘Density loop’ temperature ‘2’ (for metering-run/channel ‘2’)
{from a HART inputs, PRT-type analogue inputs or mA-type analogue inputs}
Notes: (Temperature Measurement)

1. An Orifice system requires up-stream or down-stream measured temperature and referral to get the
temperature at the flow metering point.
2. HART inputs are not available without an option board fitted inside the 7955.
Pressure measurement
x Metering pressure (for each metering-run or channel)
{from HART input or mA-type analogue input}
x Atmospheric pressure (for all metering-runs or channels)

x Differential pressure for each metering-run

Note: HART inputs are not available with an option board fitted inside the 795X.
7955 1540 (Ch03/AB) Page 3.3

Gas density measurement (at the flow metering point)
x Metering density ‘A’ (for each metering-run)

{from gas density transducers}
x Metering density ‘B’ (for each metering-run)

{from PTZ-1, PTZ-2, mA-type analogue input or HART input}
x Prime metering density (for each metering-run)

{from metering density ‘A’, metering density ‘B’, last good value or fallback value}
x Base density ‘A’ (for each metering-run)

{from prime specific gravity measurements}
x Base density ‘B’ (for each metering-run)

{from PTZ-1, PTZ-2, mA-type analogue input or HART input}
x Prime base density (for each metering-run)

{from base density ‘A’, base density ‘B’, last good value or fallback value}
x Line and base compressibility (for all metering-runs)

{NX-19, NX-19mod, NX-19mod3h, S-GERG, AGA8 and Linear interpolation}
Note: HART inputs are not available without an option board fitted inside the 795X.
Specific gravity measurement (at the flow metering point)
x SG ‘A’ (for each metering-run)

{from gas specific gravity transducers}
x SG ‘B’ (for each metering-run)

{from gas specific gravity transducers, prime base density, mA input or chromatograph}
x Prime specific gravity (for each metering-run)

{from SG ‘A’, SG ‘B’, last good value or fallback value}
Energy
x Energy value (for each metering-run)
{from ISO 6976 (1995), AGA5 (1981), mA-type Analogue Input or Chromatograph}
Other features:
x Gas composition feeds (from Header or from any or from all of the independent metering-runs)
x Passwords and security levels
x Multi-page multi-view key (for easy viewing of user selected parameters)
x Live CO2 and N2 percentages
{from a mA-type analogue input or MODBUS connected Chromatograph}
x Alarm condition totalling of either a flow rate or missing flowmeter pulses

{for all individual metering-runs, 2 x sub-stations and a station}
x Missing pulse totalling (for dual pick-up turbine flowmeters only)
{for all individual metering-runs, 2 x sub-stations and a station}
x Special Equation type 1 (for each metering-run)
x Special Equation type 2 (for each metering-run)
x Health check menu
(a) shows live raw inputs to 7955
(b) shows intermediate and full results from calculations
(c) monitoring of external devices (through status inputs and signal ‘digit’ map menu data)
(d) User alarm ‘digit’ map menu data
Page 3.4 7955 1540 (Ch03/AB)

x Analogue outputs for transmitting parameter values to other systems every cycle
x Pulse outputs for transmission of normal-mode totaliser increment values every cycle
x Data archiving facility - full coverage is provided in Chapter 9
x Tariff totals
3.3 Communications
The 7955 can operate as a MODBUS slave. It can:
x download a configuration from a PC, DCS, etc.
x upload a configuration
x monitor random locations in the 7955
x interrogate the alarm and data logger buffers
x manipulate the alarm and data logger buffers
x set random locations with new data
x instigate printed reports.
Note: Chapter 7 contains a full guide to Serial Communications and Networking with the 7955.
7955 1540 (Ch03/AB) Page 3.5

3.4 Physical description of the 7955

The main body of the 7955 is a one-piece aluminium extrusion, which provides the best possible EMC
protection. The keyboard and display is attached to the front of the instrument. All electrical and
communications connectors are mounted on the Rear Panel.
The standard 7955 contains four circuit boards. The Processor Board and the Power Supply Board are
mounted horizontally. These are connected by plugs and sockets to the Mother Board, which is mounted
vertically at the back of the case. The Connector Board is parallel to the Mother Board to which it is joined.
The Keyboard and Display are wired to the Processor Board. The Connector Board holds the connectors to
which external devices are linked.
Figure 3.4.1: The 7955 and its major assemblies
Processor
Power Board
Supply
Board
SK4 SK1

SK5 SK2
Pin 1 Pin 9
SK6 SK3
PL1
Connector
Board Rear Panel
Mother
Board
Keyboard
and display
Page 3.6 7955 1540 (Ch03/AB)

3.5 Typical installation

The diagrams below illustrate typical installations that can utilise a 7955 instrument with software version 1640.
Figure 3.5.1: Four independent metering-runs with a single set of instrumentation on each
7 8 9
DENSITY
METER
DENSITY
xxx.x
BASE TEMPERATURE
VISCOSITY
xx.x
a
b
4 5 6 Key to illustration
LINE
METERVISCOSITY
xx.x
PRESSURE 1 2 3
SPECIFIC
TEMPERATURE
xxx.x
GRAVITY c
d
0 +/- V1 Inlet Valve (not under 7955 control)
CLR EXP
2
i
V2 Outlet Valve (not under 7955 control)
F F
T
P MT D
V1 SG V2 F Flowmeter pick-up
C T
DT
P Pressure Sensor
F F
V1 SG P T
MT D V2 MT Metering Temperature Sensor
T C
DT ‘Density Loop’ Temperature Sensor
DP T
DT
F F
V1 SG P T
MT D
V2 D Density Transducer
T
DP C T
C Chromatograph
DT
F F
V1 SG P T
MT D
V2 SG Specific Gravity Transducer
T
DP C T
DT
Figure 3.5.2: Header with four metering-runs. Single set of instrumentation on each run.
7 8 9
a
DENSITY
BASE DENSITY
DENSITY
XXX.X
BASE VISCOSITY
XXX.X b
4 5 6 Key to illustration
METER TEMP’ATURE
LINE VISCOSITY
XX.X 1 2 3
METER PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
XX.X c
0 +/-
d
CLR EXP
V1 Inlet Valve (not under 7955 control)
1
i
V2 Outlet Valve (not under 7955 control)
2
DTT V2
D
C DP F F F Flowmeter pick-up
P TT
V1
P Pressure Sensor
DP F F
MT Metering Temperature Sensor
P TT
V1
DT ‘Density Loop’ Temperature Sensor
D Density Transducer
DP F F
M
P TT
C Chromatograph
DP Differential Pressure Switch
DP F F
(using a Digital Input 3)
M P TT
SG Specific Gravity Transducer
3
Also requires set-up of a user-defined limit alarm.
7955 1540 (Ch03/AB) Page 3.7

3.6 Checking your software version

The 7955 instrument is driven by pre-loaded software, which differs according to the application for which the
instrument is to be used.
PREFIX DIGIT 1 DIGIT 2 DIGIT 3 DIGIT 4
HARDWARE METERED FLOW STREAMS/ SPECIAL

PLATFORM PRODUCT METER CHANNELS
50, 51 or 55 1 Gas 0 None 1 Single 0-9

for 7950, 2 Liquid 1 Orifice 2 Dual
7951 or 7955 3 Both 2 Turbine 3 etc...
4 Other 3 Venturi 4 etc...
4 Mass
5 Multi
PREFIX DIGIT DIGIT DIGIT DIGIT

1 2 3 4
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION CODE
You can find the software configuration code in several ways:

1. It is printed on a label inside the instrument. You can find it by removing the terminal cover.
2. It is written into the menu structure.
Page 3.8 7955 1540 (Ch03/AB)

Chapter 4 Installing the system
4. Installing the system
4.1 What this chapter tells you

This chapter gives full instructions for installing the 7955.
It does not go into detail about how to install any peripheral devices (such as transducers,
computers or printers) which are connected to the 7955. For this information you must refer to the
documentation supplied with these items.
4.2 Hazardous and non-hazardous environments

If all or part of an installation is in an area where there is the risk of fire or explosion (which is
almost always the case when gases are involved), then safety barriers usually have to be wired into
the circuit. However, some instruments (such as the Covimat) are explosion-proof and barriers are
not, therefore, needed.
You must follow the manufacturers instructions and safety recommendations fully.
4.3 Installation procedure

Briefly, the procedure is:
Step 1: Draw up a wiring schedule

Step 2: Unpack the 7955
Step 3: Set the DIP switches
Step 4: Fit the 7955
Step 5: Make all external connections
Step 6: Earth the installation
Step 7: Connect power supply
The steps in the procedure are explained in the following sections.
4.4 Step 1: Drawing up a wiring schedule

Before you make any connections, you must draw up a wiring schedule to help you identify wiring
colours and make sure that you do not connect more items of any given type than are allowed.
(If you are in doubt, check the specification in Appendix C.)
A blank copy of a wiring schedule is given in Appendix B.
7955 Op Man/AA Page 4.1

4.5 Step 2: Unpacking the instrument

Remove the instrument from its packing and examine it to see if any items are loose or if it has
been damaged in transit. Check that all items on the shipping list are present. If any items are
missing or if the equipment is damaged, contact your supplier immediately for further advice.
What should be supplied with the 7955:
Item Quantity
• Mounting Clamp Assembly 1

• Captive screws 2
• Mounting strap 1
• Location moulding 1
• 9-way D-type plug 1
• 9-way D-type connector hood 1
• 15-way D-type Free plug 1
• 15-way D-type hood 1
• 25-way D-type connector hood 1
• 50-way D-type hood 3
• 4-way socket 1
• Security label 2
• 1.6A fuse (this is a spare) 1
Note: If you have ordered optional, additional facilities (such as extra outputs) these are already
installed in the machine.
Page 4.2 7955 Op Man/AA

4.6 Step 3: Setting DIP switches

The 7955 has two blocks of DIP switches on the Processor Board, as shown in the diagram on the
next page:
• SW1 switches select whether each input is 4-20 mA or PRT
• SW2 switches not used in the current version of 7955
Each switch in the SW2 block must be the same as the corresponding pair of switches in the SW1
block. The 7955 does not work correctly otherwise.
The 7955 is supplied with the DIP switches in these default settings:
• Turbine power: 8 VOLTS
• Input 1 PRT
• Inputs 2-4: 4-20mA
SW1
A 1
B 2
4-20mA C 3 PRT
D 4
Part of the 7955

Processor Board
SW2
DIP switches on the Processor Board of the 7955
If you want to change the DIP switch settings, you must also configure the inputs. This is
explained in Chapter 10. Later models of 7955 have a small hole in the top of the instrument to
allow access to the switches without removing the cover.
After the configuration has been completed (see Chapters 10 and 11), the 7955 should be
switched into the ’secure’ mode to prevent unauthorised or accidental tampering with the
instrument’s configuration.
Note: The 7955 is always shipped from Solartron with the security lock on the front panel set to
the ‘non-secure’ mode.

4.7 Step 4: Fitting the 7955

Note: You must not fit the 7955 where it may be subjected to extreme conditions or be liable to
damage. For further information about the environmental conditions within which it can
operate, see Appendix C.
1. Firstly, referring to this diagram, cut out an aperture in the front panel for each instrument
which is to be mounted on it.
29±1mm
Aperture for the Aperture for the

instrument instrument
17±1mm
96±1mm Aperture for the Aperture for the 14.5mm

192±1mm 17.5mm
Minimum dimensions for a panel with apertures to fit four 7955’s
2. Each instrument is mounted in a clamp which is fixed to the rear of the front panel, as shown
in the two diagrams that follow.
3mm
The 7955 unit
101mm Mounting
Clamp
355mm
Location
Moulding Panel with
aperture
Before assembly

3mm Mounting
7.2mm Clamp
Captive
Clamp
Screws (2)
Rear Panel
113mm of 7955
352mm
12.5mm 221mm
10mm
Note: Sufficient clearance is required for plugs and cables at the rear of the 7955
After assembly
You can mount the clamp so that it is fixed permanently or can be removed later, if required.
If you want the clamp to be fixed permanently, carry out Steps 3 - 8. If you want to be able to
remove the clamp, carry out Steps 9 - 12.
If the clamp is to be fixed permanently:

3. Make sure that the face of the front panel is in good condition and has no loose or flaking
paint. Use a suitable de-greasing agent to clean the face of the panel.
4. Insert the location moulding through the aperture in the front panel.
5. Peel the protective strip off the adhesive tape on the face of the mounting clamp. Then,
working from the back of the front panel, carefully position the clamp over the location
moulding. The clamp and panel bond on contact.
6. Press firmly on the area where the clamp is bonded to the front panel to ensure that they are
bonded firmly. Remove the Location Moulding and discard it.
7. Slide the instrument through the front panel. Tighten the two captive screws to secure it into
the clamp.
Note that, if you install more than one instrument, it helps to support them if you use a
Mounting Strap to link each clamp to the next one, as shown in the diagram:
Back of Back of
Mounting clamp Mounting clamp
Inside of
front panel Mounting
strap
Mounting arrangements for more than one instrument
8. Finally, attach all connectors to the back panel.

If the clamp is to be removable:
1. Insert the location moulding through the aperture in the front panel.
2. Working from the back of the front panel, carefully position the clamp over the location
moulding. Remove the Location Moulding and discard it.
3. Slide the instrument through the front panel. Tighten the two captive screws to secure it into
the clamp.
Note that, if you install more than one instrument, it helps to support them if you use a
Mounting Strap to link each clamp to the next one, as shown in the diagram on the previous
page..
4.8 Step 5: Making the external connections

1. Refer to the documentation supplied with the external equipment to see if you have to carry
out any special procedures when connecting them to the 7955. Take special notice of any
information about safety requirements in hazardous areas, and complying with EMC
regulations.
2. For each D-type connector, pass the connector hood over the cable and wire up the
connector. Secure the hood and connector body together then connect the earth wire to the
hood. Stick an identifying label on to the connector hood.
3. Check the wiring thoroughly against the schedule and wiring diagram.
4. Attach all connectors to the Back Panel.
Refer to Chapter 2 and Appendix C for examples of field transmitter connections and a full list of
7955 pin designations
4.9 Step 6: Earthing the instrument
NOTE: Incorrect earthing can cause many problems, so you must earth the chassis
and the electronics correctly. However, the way in which you do this depends
almost entirely on the type of installation you have and the conditions under
which it operates. Therefore, because these instructions cannot cover every
possible situation, the manufacturers recommend that earthing procedures
should only be carried out by personnel who are skilled in such work.
The chassis of the 7955 must be earthed in all cases; both for safety reasons and to ensure that
the installation complies with EMC regulations. Do this by connecting an earth lead from the stud
on the rear panel to a local safety earth such as a cabinet earth or some other suitable metal
structure.

Crinkle
washers
Thumb
nut
Nut
Plain
Earth washers
lead
Earthing the instrument chassis
In addition to earthing the chassis, you may have to make extra earth connections in some
cases, depending on the installation requirements.
Details of this are given in Appendix C.
4.10 Step 7: Connecting the power supply

Plug the dc power connector into plug PL2 and switch on the power.
The instrument goes through the following Power On Self Test (POST) routine:
• The display shows a sequence of characters or patterns to prove that all elements of
the display are working. There is a pause of five seconds between each change of
pattern.
• The program ROM is checked against a checksum. The display shows how the test
is proceeding.
• Critical data are checked. The display shows the result of this check.
• The coefficients are checked. The display shows the result of this check.
• The battery-backed RAM is checked. The display indicates progress.
• Any saved programs are checked. The display shows the number of programs and
their status. Note that, for a new machine, there are no stored programs.
• If a battery is fitted, its condition is checked and reported.
Note that, when the power is switched on, the alarms may light up. You can ignore these for
the moment - alarms are explained later in this manual. You can now proceed to configure
your 7955 (see Chapters 10 and 11).
If the POST fails to complete, switch off the power supply and check all connections and the
DIP switch settings. Then re-connect the power supply. If the POST still fails to complete,
switch off again and contact your supplier.


Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
5. The keyboard, display and indicators
5.1 What this chapter tells you

This chapter tells you:
• How the front panel is laid out.
• What the keys and indicators do.
• What characters you can display.
5.2 The layout of the front panel

Figure 5.2.1 shows the layout of the keyboard. The diagrams at the end of this chapter give a visual
summary of what each of the keys do.
2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9
a
Flow rates
4 5 6
Flow totals b
Line density 1 2 3
1 Base density / SG c
0 +/-
d
CLR EXP 7
1
2
16 15 14 13 12 11 9
10
1 Down-arrow 7 Enter 13 Print Menu

2 Up-arrow 8 Information Menu 14 Stream/Run Select
3 Multi-view display 9 Limit alarm LED 15 (Application specific)
4 Left-arrow 10 Input alarm LED 16 Security LED and lock
5 Right-arrow 11 System alarm LED
6 Back 12 Main Menu
Figure 5.2.1: The layout of the front panel
795x Op. Man.(Ch05/DB) Page 5.1

5.3 What the display shows

The display can show the following information:
• numerical data in floating point, exponent or integer formats
• text descriptors
• units of measurement (if applicable)
• status of application parameters i.e. set, live, failed or fallback (if applicable)
• alarm and event information
• current time and date
• stream (metering-run) identification numerically (if applicable)
5.4 How the keys work

The keys let you:
• move around the menus
• view data stored in the 795x (VIEW mode)
• edit the data. (EDIT mode)
Some keys do different things according to where you are in the menu system. For example:
This key does nothing until you get into EDIT mode. After you have
ENTER key edited the data of application parameters, pressing ENTER accepts the
changes and puts the 795x back into VIEW mode.
When you move through the menu structure this selects any menu
‘c’ key choice shown against the key. However, when in VIEW mode, pressing
c lists the display units.
This key does nothing if you are in EDIT mode. At other times, it takes
INFORMATION you to a special menu providing information on alarms, events, flow
MENU key status and 795x operating mode.
This key does nothing if you are in EDIT mode. At other times, it takes
PRINT MENU you to a special menu dealing with data archiving and printing of
reports.
The sections that follow tell you more about what the keys do and how you use them.
5.5 Using the keys to move around the menus

A general tour of the menu system is provided in chapter 6. The keys, which you can use to move around the
menu system, are:
Moves the display up to the previous page of the menu. If there is no

UP-ARROW
previous page, this does nothing.
Moves the display down to the next page of the menu. If there is no
DOWN-ARROW
next page, this key does nothing.
Each key selects the menu choice next to it. If there is no menu choice
‘a’ - ‘d’ keys
next to a key, that key does nothing.
Page 5.2 795x Op. Man. (Ch05/DB)

BACK Returns you to the previous step.
MAIN MENU Moves you straight to the top-level menu.
INFORMATION Takes you to a special menu providing information on alarms, events,

MENU flow status and 795x operating mode.
Takes you to a special menu dealing with data archiving and printing
PRINT MENU
of reports.
You can define one or more display pages, each showing up to four
MULTI-VIEW items of data, lines of descriptive text, or both. Pressing MULTI-
(blank key, top) VIEW shows the first display page you have defined. Use the arrow
keys to page up and page down.
APPLICATION The use of this key is dependent on the functionality of application

(blank key, bottom) software. If this key is in use, it will be mentioned in later chapters.
Note: Keys other than those listed above have no effect.
5.6 Using the keys to view stored data

When an application parameter screen is viewed after selection from the menu, the display is in VIEW mode.
Figure 5.6.1: Typical parameter screen (in VIEW mode)
What the display shows

Figure 5.6.1 shows a typical display when you view an application parameter screen. In VIEW mode, all
information is right justified.
Line 1 shows the parameter description. (Some words may be abbreviated.)

Line 2 shows the present value (or text for indirection type).
Line 3 shows the units (if any). This line is blank if there are no units.
Line 4 shows LIVE, SET, FB (FALLBACK) or FAIL to indicate the state of the present value
shown in Line 2, where appropriate.
These indications mean:
LIVE The data shown is live data received from the transducer or transmitter
connected to the 795x.
SET You have entered a fixed value for the data; this value does not change
unless you change it or make it live.
FALLBACK A fallback or default value has been used to obtain the value for the data.
FAIL The input has failed.
Optionally, Line 4 may also show the parameter’s unique identification number (location ID), which is required
when setting up certain features e.g. multi-view. You can display this information by using the ‘a’ key.

In VIEW mode, the keys that you can use are:
On/off toggle for displaying the parameter’s identification (location ID). This
‘a’ key
is displayed to the left of the status indication on line 4 of the display.
Puts the 795x into EDIT mode so that you can edit the data on line 2. The
‘b’ key
data is left justified whilst in EDIT mode. (See next section)
Puts the 795x into EDIT mode so that you can select from a list of the units
‘c’ key in which the data can be displayed. The units are left justified whilst in
EDIT mode. (See next section)
Puts the 795x into EDIT mode so that you can select a status (Set or Live).
‘d’ key
The status is left justified whilst in EDIT mode. (See next section)
If there is more than one stream (run) and there is a number on the far left
STREAM / RUN
of display line 4, this key will select another stream (run). The screen will
SELECT
be refreshed with attributes (value, units and status) for that stream (run).
BACK Returns you to the previous step.
MAIN MENU Takes you straight to the top-level menu.
5.7 Using the keys to edit information

You can:
• edit text
• select from a multiple-choice list
• edit numerical information
• edit the date and time.
5.7.1 Text editing
Once in EDIT mode (see earlier), the keys that you use to edit text are:
LEFT-ARROW Moves the cursor to the left along the line of text you are editing.
RIGHT-ARROW Moves the cursor to the right along the line of text you are editing.
This key changes the character at the current cursor position. It scrolls
UP-ARROW forwards through the alphanumeric character set. Stop when the
character you want is displayed.
Changes the character at the current cursor position. It scrolls
DOWN-ARROW backwards through the alphanumeric character set. Stop when the
character you want is displayed.
0-9 keys Each key enters a single digit.
If you are satisfied with the changes you have made, press b to accept
‘b’ key the changes and go back to VIEW mode. (Note: the ENTER key also
does this.)

If you are satisfied with the changes you have made, press the ENTER
ENTER key to accept the changes and go back to VIEW mode. (The b key also
does this.)
CLEAR This clears a line of text.
If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press BACK to
BACK
abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
PLUS / MINUS Toggles between lower and upper case letters.
5.7.2 Multiple-choice selection

Once in EDIT mode (see earlier), the keys that you use to select from a multiple-choice list are:
UP-ARROW Scrolls up through the available options.
DOWN-ARROW Scrolls down through the available options.
If editing the data (on display line 2) and you are satisfied with the
‘b’ KEY change you have made, press b to accept the change and go back to
VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
If editing the units and you are satisfied with the change you have
‘c’ KEY made, press c to accept the change and go back to VIEW mode.
(Note: ENTER also does this.)
If editing the status and you are satisfied with the change you have
‘d’ KEY made, press d to accept the change and go back to VIEW mode.
(Note: ENTER also does this.)
If you are satisfied with the change you have made, press the ENTER
ENTER
key to accept the change and go back to VIEW mode.
CLEAR Restore the previous contents.
If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press the
BACK
BACK key to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
5.7.3 Numerical editing

Once in EDIT mode (see earlier), the keys that you use to edit numerical data are:
LEFT-ARROW Erases the digit to the left of the cursor.
This changes the sign of the number. Pressing it repeatedly toggles

PLUS / MINUS
between PLUS and MINUS.

DOT Inserts a decimal point.
EXPONENT Use this key if you want to show numbers in exponent form.
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press b. The 795x will
‘b’ key
then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press the ENTER key.
ENTER
The 795x will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: b also does this.)
CLEAR Clears the line you are currently editing.
If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press BACK to
BACK
abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
Numerical entry
When you type in a number the first digit appears at the left of the display and each successive digit is then
positioned to the right of the one just entered. A number being entered over-types any existing number.
Parameter identifiers (Location ID)

These appear on the display in the same way as for numerical entry. However, when you accept the number
(by pressing b or ENTER), the text descriptor of the application parameter appears on line 2 of the display.
5.7.4 Date and time editing

The date and time are displayed in the format: dd-mm-yyyy hh:mm:ss. When you edit the date and time, the
cursor moves to the right but skips the ‘:’ and ‘-’ characters.
LEFT-ARROW Moves the cursor to the left.
RIGHT-ARROW Moves the cursor to the right.
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press b. The
‘b’ key
795x will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does this.)
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press ENTER.
ENTER
The 795x will then revert to VIEW mode. (Note: b also does this.)
CLEAR Restore the previous contents.
If you do not want to keep the changes you have made, press BACK
BACK
to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
The new date and time is validated – an invalid date and time is greeted with “Bad date/time” on-screen for a
few seconds before the previous content is restored.

5.8 The 795x character set

You can use any of the 96 characters shown below as part of your display.
Figure 5.8.1: The 795x character set
5.9 LED indicators

Security Indicator This LED shows the present security level of the system.
• RED FLASHING - the instrument is at Calibration level
• RED - Engineer level: the instrument can be configured.
• ORANGE – Operator level: limits can be changed.
• GREEN - World level: no parameters can be changed.
Note: For more information about these, refer to Chapter 11.
1. Security Level LED
Figure 5.9.1: Alarm Indicators
Alarm Indicators These are the Input, System and Limit alarms. For more information about
these, refer to Chapter 8: “Alarms and Events”.
1. System alarm LED.

2. Input alarm LED.
3. Limit alarm LED.
Figure 5.9.2: Alarm Indicators

5.10 Summary of key functions

The diagrams on the next two pages provide a visual summary of the function of each key when in various
modes.
Key What the key does when...
...moving around ...in VIEW ...in one of the following

the menus mode EDIT modes:
Text editing
Multiple-choice editing
Numeric editing
Units editing
Date & time editing
UP-ARROW
Pages UP in a menu. Selects which Scrolls through character set
(Does nothing if top units to show Scrolls through available options
page already shown.) on display Does nothing
DOWN-ARROW
Pages DOWN in a menu. Selects which Scrolls through character set
(Does nothing if last page units to show Scrolls through available options
already shown.) on display Does nothing
MENU
Goes to the top menu Goes to the top menu Does nothing
BACK
Goes to the previous Goes to the previous Cancels changes and goes
menu menu back to VIEW mode
'a' KEY
Chooses line a Toggles between: Does nothing
from a menu (1) location ID
a (2) nothing
'b' KEY
Chooses line b Goes to EDIT mode Accepts changes and goes
from a menu back to VIEW mode
b
Does nothing
'c' KEY
Chooses line c Goes into units editing Does nothing
from a menu mode. (See UP & Accepts changes and goes
c DOWN arrow keys) back to VIEW mode
'd' KEY
Chooses line d Toggles between Does nothing
from a menu LIVE and SET
(where appropriate)
INFORMATION
Goes to alarm/event Goes to alarm/event Does nothing
sub-menu sub-menu
PRINT
Opens the print menu Opens the print menu Does nothing
USER DISPLAY
Views the Views the Does nothing
MULTIVIEW display MULTIVIEW display
you have defined you have defined
(TOP blank key)
Summary of what the keys do - part 1

Key What the key does when...
...moving around ...in VIEW ...in one of the following

the menus mode EDIT modes:
Text editing
Multiple-choice editing
Numeric editing
Units editing
BOTTOM blank key
Date & time editing
KEY NOT USED
Does nothing Does nothing Does nothing
ENTER
Does nothing Does nothing Accepts changes and
goes back to VIEW mode
LEFT
Does nothing Does nothing Moves the cursor LEFT
Does nothing
Erases the last digit
RIGHT
Does nothing Does nothing Moves the cursor RIGHT
Does nothing
CLR
Does nothing Does nothing Deletes character at cursor
CLR Reverts to original selection
Clears the line of numerals
Restores previous contents
DOT
Inserts a decimal point
PLUS/MINUS Change to upper or lower case

+/- Changes the sign of a number
EXP Insert space at cursor

EXP Inserts the exponent
STREAM SELECT Selects another stream

Does nothing if there is more than Does nothing
1 one supported.
2
0-9 KEYS
Do nothing Do nothing Enter a digit
Do nothing
0 9
Summary of what the keys do - part 2


Chapter 6 The menu system
6. The menu system

Before you can configure and operate the 795x instrument, you must have some understanding of how the
menu system works. The menus are simple, logically-arranged and intuitive so they should present no
problems to the average user.
This chapter tells you how a typical menu structure is arranged. However, because instruments in the 795x
family have different software according to the application for which they are being used, the descriptions
given here is general so that it applies to any 795x instrument.
Note: Chapter 12 features tables showing the menu system used in your application.
6.2 What the menu system does

The menu system lets you:
• Configure the 795x
• Operate it
• View data and settings stored in the 795x
• Edit data stored in the 795x
6.3 How the menu system works

When you power-on the 795x instrument, the menu system appears immediately after the routine Power-On-
Self-Test (POST) is completed.
If it is the first power-on since application software was installed, the Main Menu screen will appear, similar
to the one shown in Figure 6.3.1. Otherwise, the 795x will display the last visited menu screen prior to
powering off (or a power failure).
Figure 6.3.1: Main Menu Screen (Top-Level Menu)
Think of the menu system as having a tree-like structure which repeatedly branches to lower levels.
The Main Menu screen (‘tree trunk’) in Figure 6.3.1 comprises four menu choices (‘branches’). Each menu
choice has a text description (e.g. “Flow rates”) and a triangular icon to indicate the type of menu choice.
A non-solid, triangular icon indicates the menu choice leads to a further menu (sub-branch), whereas a solid,
triangular icon indicates the menu choice leads to an application software parameter screen (leaf).
In addition, each menu choice is associated with a lettered key (a, b c or d). For example, a menu choice on
display line 1 is always associated with the ‘a’-key. A menu choice on display line 2 is always associated with
the ‘b’-key, and so on.
795x Op Man (Ch06/FA) Page 6.1

When you make a choice from the Main Menu, using the lettered keys, it leads you on to other, lower-level
menus (branch levels 2, 3, and so on).
Figure 6.3.2 shows how pressing the ‘a’-key will lead to a menu for “Flow rates”. Similarly, the ‘b’-key leads to a
menu for “Flow totals”. Using the BACK key will return you to the previous menu, in this case the Main Menu.
Figure 6.3.2: Menu Choice Selection
Where a menu has more choices that can fit on to the display, it consists of two or more pages. Vertical arrow
icons appear on the left-hand side of the display to indicate there are further pages.
Figure 6.3.3 shows how you can scroll up or down between the pages by using the UP-ARROW and DOWN-
ARROW buttons. These buttons will do nothing if there is no page to scroll to.
Figure 6.3.3: Pages of a Main Menu
Page 6.2 795x Op Man (Ch06/FA)

At the lowest levels in each branch of the menu system, there are software parameter screens (‘leaves’).
Figure 6.3.4 shows how to get to the software parameter screen for Live/Set Meter temperature values.
Application software parameter screens feature a solid, black, triangular shaped mark in the bottom-left
corner of display line 4.
In multiple-run (multi-stream) application software, there is a number to indicate which metering-run (stream)
that the parameter attributes (value, units and status) is referring to.
Note: Details about editing application software parameters can be found in Chapter 5.
Figure 6.3.4: Software Parameter Screen
Returning to the Main Menu again, there are several menu choices that are noteworthy as they are common
to all application software versions. In addition, you’ll come across them in subsequent chapters.
Figure 6.3.5 and Figure 6.3.6 provide an overview .
Leads to menus for viewing interim

results of measurements and other Leads to a screen for
calculations, Inputs, Outputs, etc. entering a password to
(See Chapter 12 for a full map) change security level.
(See Chapter 11).
Leads to menus for editing measurement tasks
for your installation. (See Chapters 8 - 11).
Figure 6.3.5: Main Menu Choices – Common to all application software (Part One)
795x Op Man (Ch06/FA) Page 6.3

Leads to menus where you can

view/edit the time and date, plus Leads to a screen
machine cycle timing. detailing the software
version number.
Leads to a screen where you can view/edit

text to identify the 795x instrument.
Figure 6.3.6: Main Menu Choices – Common to all application software (Part Two)
All other menu choices on the Main Menu (e.g. “Flow rates”) are for operators to quickly find final
measurements and other calculation results. Chapter 12 has tables showing these menus in more detail.
Page 6.4 795x Op Man (Ch06/FA)

Chapter 7 Serial Port Communications and Networking
7. Serial Port Communications and Networking

This Chapter is a comprehensive guide to serial RS-232/485 and Ethernet port communications with the
7955 instrument. Since this subject area is vast, with countless reference books, the scope is restricted to
the 7955 point-of-view. Therefore, it has been assumed that the reader has a reasonable working
knowledge of data communications and networking.
Highly recommended references for this Chapter are:
x The 1992 edition of “MODICON MODBUS PROTOCOL REFERENCE GUIDE (PL_MBUS-300)”.
x Release 1.0 of the “OPEN MODBUS/TCP SPECIFICATION” (available from www.modicon.com)
Note: This Chapter is not a guide to the MODBUS and MODBUS/TCP protocols
7.2 7955 Communication Capabilities

The 7955 instrument has extensive facilities – ports and data services – to allow the communication of
data with almost any device that has support for the Modicon MODBUS and MODBUS/TCP protocol.
Communication ports and their associated standards are summarised in Table 1. Various application data
services are available through the ports and are introduced in Section 7.2.2.
Table 1: 7955 Communications Ports and Supported Standards

Serial Port Serial Port Serial Port Serial Port Serial Port Ethernet Port
One * Two * Three * Four ** Five ** One ***
RS-232C RS-232C/485 RS-232C/485 RS-232C/485 RS-232C/485 IEEE 802.3
MODBUS MODBUS MODBUS MODBUS MODBUS MODBUS/TCP
* Fitted as standard ** Requires option board 79550508 or board 79550509 to be fitted
*** Requires option board 79550509 to be fitted
7.2.1 Communication Ports
Serial RS-232/485 Ports

Two serial interface standards are supported by the 795x series – Serial RS-232C (full duplex) and Serial
RS-485 (half duplex). They are software selectable if there is a choice for a particular port.
RS-232C is the usual choice for a direct (point-to-point) network connection with only one device.
Typically, it is utilised when transmitting printed reports to an ASCII compatible output device, such as a
printer or a terminal. Another main use is the ‘Peer-to-Peer List’ data service that can regularly broadcast
parameter values to another 7955 instrument. Data services are introduced in Section 7.2.2.
RS-485 is the choice when establishing a multi-drop network with two or more devices. This network
allows both Master/Slave and Peer/Peer arrangements of devices and, subsequently, full availability of all
data services. Data services are introduced in Section 7.2.2.
Ethernet Port
2
An Ethernet port becomes available when add-on board 79550509 is fitted inside the 7955, as guided in
Chapter 14. However, you will first need to check that the firmware (software version) release you intend to
use does feature Ethernet functionality. Secondly, a 10Mbits/s MAU – Media Access Unit - adapter must
be attached to a 15-pin D-type socket on the rear panel. You can see this in Figure 7.5.2 (page 7.10).
The optional 10 BaseT (10Mbit/s) Ethernet port is compliant with the IEEE 802.3 standard for TCP/IP 3.
This connectivity option allows you attach 7955 instruments to any local or wide area network that is using
the TCP/IP protocol. It is possible to have 7955 instruments on the Internet. In future, troubleshooting and
software updates may be possible without requiring a site visit.
2
When ordering the Ethernet pack containing the add-on (option) board, use part number 79559
3
TCP/IP is the abbreviation for “Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol”, a suite of communications protocols
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.1

For connection to 100Mbit/s (or higher speed) Ethernet networks, you can connect the 7955 instrument to a
communication hub for the conversion from 10Mbit/s. However, this speed is very misleading. In practice,
average data transfer rates will be much lower – roughly 9600bps – and stretch machine cycle times as
indicated in Table 2 and Table 3.
The 7955 instrument can be configured to function as an Ethernet Server, an Ethernet Client, or both.
When the 7955 is functioning as an Ethernet Server it can have concurrent connections (channels) with up
to two registered (known) clients. Registered clients must be MODBUS TCP/IP compliant devices, such as
other 7955 instruments, so that they can access the data services available on the 7955 Ethernet Server.
When the 7955 is functioning as an Ethernet Client and it is registered with a 7955 Ethernet Server, it can
use the ‘Peer-to-Peer Lists’ to communicate parameter values/settings with that Server. Similarly, this
Client/Server set-up can be used by remote meter proving functions. (Proving is explained in Chapter 16)
All data services are introduced in Section 7.2.2.
Table 2: Times for High Speed List Read Operations
Data Read Cycle Time Change

10 floating-point numbers + 200ms
30 floating-point numbers +600ms
Table 3: Times for High Speed List Write Operations
Data Written Cycle Time Change

20 floating-point numbers + 1.5s
30 floating-point numbers +2.0s
Page 7.2 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

7.2.2 Data Services

Identical data services are available through the Ethernet port and any serial RS232/485 port. However,
the availability of a service does depend on Master/Slave and Client/Server arrangements.
Services are accessed by a half-duplex exchange of MODBUS (or MODBUS/TCP) – request and
response - messages between the 7955 instrument and another MODBUS (or MODBUS/TCP) device.
Guided examples with the necessary message sequences to correctly access services are given later in
Chapter 7 and in any extra pages that are inserted between Chapters 7 and 8.
Table 4: Data Services Availability (Master/Slave)

Available on
Data Services Purpose of Data Service
Master/Slave
x Allow any (non-795x) MODBUS Master device to perform
Database Access 7955 Slave
read/writes on an individual parameter in the database of a Slave
x Retrieval of LIVE alarm information from the Historical Alarm Log.
Historical Alarm Log 7955 Slave
(Events are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual)
x Retrieval of LIVE event information from the Historical Event Log.
Historical Event Log 7955 Slave
(Alarms are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual)
x Allow non-795x MODBUS Master device to perform fast
High Speed List 1 * 7955 Slave
read/writes on an arranged group of up to 150 parameters.
x Allow non-795x MODBUS Master device to perform fast
High Speed List 2 * 7955 Slave
read/writes on an arranged group of up to 150 parameters.
x Retrieval of software parameter data from any of the data archives.
Archive Access 7955 Slave
(Archiving is explained in Chapter 9 of this manual)
x Allow 7955 MODBUS Master to perform read/writes on software
Peer-to-Peer * 7955 Master
parameters in the database of multiple 7955 MOBUS slaves
* This application data service is fully explained in the extra pages between Chapter 7 and Chapter 8
Table 5: Data Services Availability (Ethernet Client/Server)

Available on
Data Services Purpose of Data Service
Client/Server
x Allow Ethernet Clients to perform read/write operations on an
Database Access 7955 Server
individual software parameter in the database of the Server
x Retrieval of LIVE alarm information from the Historical Alarm Log.
Historical Alarm Log 7955 Server
(Events are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual)
x Retrieval of LIVE event information from the Historical Event Log.
Historical Event Log 7955 Server
(Alarms are explained in Chapter 8 of this manual)
x Allow Ethernet Clients to perform fast read/writes on an arranged
High Speed List 1 * 7955 Server
group of up to 150 software parameters. (Independent of HSL-2)
x Allow Ethernet Client to perform fast read/writes on an arranged
High Speed List 2 * 7955 Server
group of up to 150 software parameters. (Independent of HSL-1)
x Retrieval of software parameter data from any of the data archives.
Archive Access 7955 Server
(Archiving is explained in Chapter 9 of this manual)
x Allow 7955 Ethernet Client to perform read/writes on software
Peer-to-Peer * 7955 Client
parameters in the database of a 7955 Ethernet Server
* This application data service is fully explained in the extra pages between Chapter 7 and Chapter 8
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.3

7.3 MODBUS from the 7955 view-point

7.3.1 Introduction
The Modicon MODBUS specification is designed to transfer data in 1-bit (coil) or 16-bit (register) blocks.
This protocol has not been designed to deal with data, such as floating point numbers, which require a
minimum of 32-bit blocks. For this reason, every manufacturer of computer equipment, which deals with
this type of data, must decide in which way the protocol should be extended. Consequently, many different
implementations exist for the transfer of 32-bit floating-point data.
Chapter 7 deals with the data types as listed in Table 6. A comprehensive guide to support for 16-bit only
(Gould List) Modbus communications is in supplement 7F, which follows this chapter.
7.3.2 Supported MODBUS Functions

The 795x Series supports two MODBUS protocol commands:
1. Command 03 – Read multiple registers.
2. Command 16 – Write multiple registers.
The 795x Series also uses these commands for single register access, as described in Section 7.3.3.
The 795x Series instrument represents data using one or more 16-bit registers (see Table 6). Where
registers contain a collection of bits, the 16-bit register is still used rather than individual bit (coil) access,
which is not supported.
Table 6: 795x Data types
Data Type Registers
x Character (2-bytes) 1 x 16-bit

x Unsigned 8-bit integer 1 x 16-bit
x Signed 16-bit integer 1 x 16-bit
x Signed 32-bit integer 2 x 16-bit
x 32-bit floating point number * 2 x 16-bit
x 64-bit floating point number * 4 x 16-bit
x Multiple-choice (List) Option 1 x 16-bit
x Location pointer 1 x 16-bit
x Character string 11 x 16-bit
* A floating-point number is either single-precision (32-bit) or
double-precision (64-bit), depending on port configuration.
7.3.3 Single/Multiple Register Access

The 795x Series has support for both single and multiple register access. Each communication port is
configurable to allow one type of register access.
Multiple Register Access:

A read/write command involving a 22-byte character string will require an explicit request for 11 registers.
(This type of register access can be seen demonstrated in later worked examples.)
Single Register Access:

A read/write command, involving the same character string, will require an explicit request for 1 register.
The 22-byte character string will still be returned as 11 x 16-bit values.
Page 7.4 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

7.3.4 Floating-point numbers

Floating-point (real) data within the 795x database is stored as a 64-bit IEEE (double-precision) number.
When requested over a MODBUS network link, floating-point data is either handled as a 32-bit IEEE
(single-precision) number or as a 64-bit IEEE (double-precision) number. The precision level is individually
selectable for each communication port through the menu-based parameter <Pn real precision>.
Note: Chapter 7 deals with the data types as listed in Table 6. A comprehensive guide to support for 16-bit
only (Gould List) Modbus communications is in supplement 7F, which follows this chapter.
7.3.5 Flow totalisers

Since a totaliser value builds continuously to a maximum and then is re-set to 0, this type of data cannot be
transferred in quite the same way as a conventional floating point.
A 32-bit floating point number can represent only 7 significant digits. Therefore as the value grows, less
and less digits are available for the fractional part. In addition, 7 digits are not generally acceptable for a
totaliser.
Therefore, the 795x Series normally communicates totalisers as a 32-bit integer (2 x 16-bit registers). The
whole part is a 32-bit integer and the fractional part is a 32-bit integer, each at a separate Modbus register
address. (Contact Solartron Mobrey and ask for a Modbus register list for the release of 551540 software.)
There is a menu-based parameter <Pn MODB total format> that will enable flow totals to be communicated
as a 32-bit (single-precision) or 64-bit floating-point (double-precision) number. This feature is selectable
on a port by port basis. The precision level is dependent on the setting for the communication port, as
described in section 7.3.4.
7.3.6 Byte Swap Mode

By default, the 795x Series are big-endian machines rather than little-endian machines. The difference is in
the byte order understood by particular computer architectures (see Appendix A for a definition). In most
cases, this is transparent and can be ignored.
However, there is a menu-based parameter <Pn Modbus Word Order> that will allow a communication port of a
795x to be little-endian. This feature is selectable on a port by port basis.
Consequently, the byte order in a multi-byte representation of a Modbus communicated parameter value
(‘the data’) can be reversed prior to transmission. The 795x will then expect the byte order of parameter
values (‘the data’) in replies to be already reversed.
Figure 1: Byte Ordering Examples

SINGLE PRECISION DOUBLE PRECISION
Default Order Default Order

42 C2 3F 0D 40 58 47 E1 9B 90 EA 9E
(Big-Endian) (Big-Endian)
Byte Swap 0D 3F C2 42 Byte Swap 93 EA 90 9B E1 47 58 40

(Little-Endian) (Little-Endian)
Note: Byte Swap cannot be used at the same time as Word Swap (below). These two modes are selected
through the same menu-based parameter, preventing simultaneous use. Unless otherwise stated, Byte Swap
mode is not used in Modbus commands shown in the rest of this chapter, nor the supplements that follow.
7.3.7 Word Swap Mode

Since Modicon did not define 32-bit data transfers, the order of transmission for (2 x 16-bit) words of a 32-bit
value is also not defined. The 795x Series provides a menu-based parameter <Pn Modbus word order> to
choose whether the first or second (16-bit) word of a Modbus communicated parameter value is the most
significant (i.e. comes first). This feature is selectable on a port by port basis. For double-precision (64-bit)
numbers, a word swap places the second double-word as the most significant (see Figure 2).
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.5

Note: Word Swap cannot be used at the same time as Byte Swap (above). These two modes are selected
through the same menu-based parameter, preventing simultaneous use.
Figure 2: Word Ordering Examples

WORD '1' WORD '2' WORD '1' WORD '2' WORD '3' WORD '4'
Default Order (16 Bits) (16 Bits) Default Order (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits)
42 C2 3F 0D 40 58 47 E1 9B 90 EA 9E
Word Swap (16 Bits) (16 Bits) Word Swap (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits)
3F 0D 42 C2 EA 9E 9B 90 47 E1 40 58
7.3.8 Values: base or displayed units

By default, the 795x Series will transmit parameter values (‘the data’) in base units, as listed in Chapter 9.
However, there is a menu-based parameter <Pn units conversion> that will enable parameter values (‘the
data’) in the same units that have been selected for the displayed units on the parameter screen.
Similarly, the 795x Series will expect the units of received parameter values to be already in the same units
selected for the displayed units.
This feature is selectable on a port by port basis.
7.3.9 MODBUS Addressing

Unlike most MODBUS devices, the 7955 instrument can respond to more than one MODBUS address
through a communication port.
MODBUS Slave
The base address of a MODBUS Slave is programmable and is used for accessing the database of
software parameters. It is also possible to configure a 7955 to allow access to further data services
through virtual addressing – consecutive MODBUS addresses offset beyond the base address.
MODBUS/TCP Server
The unit identifier (base address) of a MODBUS/TCP Server is programmable and is used for accessing
the database of software parameters. It is also possible to configure a 7955 Ethernet Client to allow access
to further data services through virtual addressing – consecutive MODBUS addresses offset beyond the
base address.
You do not need to edit these virtual addresses because they are at fixed offsets beyond the programmed
base address. The offsets are illustrated in Table 7.3.7. A virtual address becomes active when the
corresponding data service is enabled.
Note: There can be different base addresses programmed for each individual port if you require it.
However, the fixed address offsets still apply and will access exactly the same data service.
Table 7.3.7: Data Services and MODBUS Addressing
MODBUS Addressing Data Service Address Offset

Base address Software Parameter Database +0
(Base address) Peer-to-Peer Lists (+0)
Virtual Address ‘1’ Historical Alarm & Event Log +1
Virtual Address ‘2’ High Speed List ‘1 +2
Virtual Address ‘3’ High Speed List ‘2’ +3
Virtual Address ‘4’ Data Archives +4
Note: ‘Peer-to-Peer List’ functions use the ‘Software Parameter Database’ service of a
7955 MODBUS Slave/Ethernet Server
Page 7.6 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

7.4 Connecting to a 7955 Serial Port (RS-232 and RS-485)

This Section is a reference with a table of grouped rear panel pins for each serial port.
7.4.1 RS-232 (full duplex) Rear Panel Pin Connections
RS-232C Serial Interface Pin Groups (Serial Port ‘1’)

7955 (D-type) Function
Comm 1 Tx SK6/02 x Transmit data
Comm 1 Rx SK6/03 x Receive data
Comm 0V SK6/05 x 0V GND (Signal Ground)

Comm 2 Tx SK5/24 Transmit data
Comm 2 Rx SK5/12 Receive data
Comm 0V SK5/07 0V GND (Signal Ground)
Comm 2 CTS SK5/25 Clear to send
Comm 2 RTS SK5/13 Request to send


Note: This optional serial port is available when add-on board 79558 is
installed inside the 7955
RS-232C Serial Interface Pin Group (Serial Port ‘5’)

Note: This optional serial port is available when add-on board 79558 is
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.7

A simple network can consist of just two devices. They could be an IBM compatible PC and a 7955
connected by a RS-232C ‘straight through’ cable.
PC 7955
Rx Tx
2 SK6/2
Tx Rx
3 SK6/3
5 SK6/5
Signal Ground
PC com port connection to 7955 port 1

RS-232 wiring with no RTS/CTS handshaking
PC 7955
Rx Tx
2 SK5/24
Tx Rx
3 SK5/12
Signal Ground
5 SK5/7
RTS
7 SK5/13
CTS
8 SK5/25
PC com port connection to 7955 port 2

RS-232 wiring with RTS/CTS handshaking
Larger and more intricate MODBUS networks are possible. For example, a supervisory system may want
to get flow rates from several 7955 instruments.
Page 7.8 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

7.4.2 RS-485 (half duplex) Rear Panel Connections

This Section is a reference with tables of grouped rear panel pins for each serial port.
RS-485 Serial Interface Pin Group (Serial Port ‘1’)

Note: There is no support for RS-485 on serial port one.
RS-485 Serial Interface Pin Group (Port ‘2’)

7955 (D-Type) Function
Comm 2 Rx/Tx+ SK5/11 Transmit/receive data +
Comm 2 Rx/Tx- SK5/23 Transmit/receive data -


Note: This optional serial port is available when option board 79558 is

Note: This optional serial port is available when option board 79558 is
Solartron has often established a MODBUS network by connecting a ‘Prover’ flow computer to multiple
‘stream’ flow computers with an RS-485 cable.
7955 7951 7951

Prover Stream 1 Stream 2
Tx/Rx+ Tx/Rx+
SK5/8 SK3/1 SK3/1
Tx/Rx- Tx/Rx-
SK5/20 SK3/9 SK3/9
Signal Ground Signal Ground
SK5/7 SK3/5 SK3/5
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.9

7.5 Connecting to Ethernet

The Ethernet port terminals are exclusively on the rear panel 15-pin D-type socket labelled SK4.
Unlike the serial RS-232C/485 ports on the 7955, an Ethernet network must never be wired directly to this
Ethernet port. Direct wiring prevents the 7955 instrument from being electrically isolated. Instead, a MAU
(transceiver) device must be attached to socket SK4 and the Ethernet cable is then attached to the MAU.
This can be seen in Figure 7.5.2
Since the MAU will usually not have attachment screws, it is held in place with a slide-lock mechanism that
is already integrated into socket SK4 4. Once the MAU device is engaged with the socket, the slide-lock is
adjusted to hold it firmly in place.
For reference purposes, Appendix C has a table with the individual terminals.
Depending on the make and model of the MAU device, there will be ports for the various Ethernet plug-in
connectors used by different cable types. Figure 7.5.1 shows a typical MAU that can be ordered with or
without the Ethernet add-on board. This particular device has a port for a RJ45 connector, which is
common for twisted-pair Ethernet cabling.
After successfully connecting the 7955 instrument to the Ethernet network, the next stage is to configure
the communication parameters. This information is in Section 7.7 on page 7.13.
Figure 7.5.1: A typical MAU device
Figure 7.5.2: Where to attach to MAU adapter
4
Older rear panels have a SK4 socket without an integrated slide-lock mechanism. Flow Computers can be upgraded at our factory.
Page 7.10 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

7.6 After Connecting up to the 7955 Serial Port …

This Section explains how to proceed with configuring the communication parameters of the 7955
instrument after all the wiring to external communication devices is completed, as guided in Section 7.4.
RS-232: Complete Section 7.6.1 and then complete Section 7.6.2

RS-485: Complete Section 7.6.1 and then complete Section 7.6.3
7.6.1 General RS-232C/485 Port Configuration

This Section is for configuring basic communication parameters before moving on to the RS-232C and
RS-485 configuration sections.
Objective:
Set-up the basic communication parameters for each serial port with an RS-232 (point-to-point) or RS-485
(multiple-drop) network connection.
What to do here:
Follow these instructions for each port:
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<“Communications”>/<“Ports”>
2. Select the sub-menu for a serial port.
3. Work through this menu data checklist: (Note: Some localised menu searching is required)
Menu Data Name Instructions and Comments

Port Baud rates x Select a rate that is suitable for networked device(s).
Port Char Format x Select a character format that is suitable for networked device(s).
Port handshaking x Select the option descriptor of either “None”, “Xon/Xoff” or “CTS/RTS”.
Port RS232 / 485 x Select the physical layer interface for the network. Read Note (B)
Notes:
A On-screen menu data names incorporate a number to identify the associated serial port.
B Not all 7955 communication ports have support RS-485. For further information, see page 7.1.
4. Repeat all previous steps for each RS-232/485 port that you intend to use.
7.6.2 RS-232 Configuration

This Section is for completing the configuring of software parameters for a point-to-point communication
link with another RS-232C device.
Objective:
Set-up the basic communication parameters for serial ports with an RS-232C connection.
What to do here:
Follow these instructions:
2. Select the sub-menu for a serial port with the RS-232C connection
3. Locate the menu data page with a descriptor of “Comms port owner” (or similar)
4. Select an option descriptor
Select the option with “Printer” when the RS-232C device is an ASCII compatible output device, such as a
printer. Otherwise, select either “Master” or “Slave”, depending on which data services are needed.
5. Test the RS-232C connection, perhaps by printing a report

7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.11

7.6.3 RS-485 Configuration

This Section is for completing the configuring of software parameters for serial ports with an RS-485
communication link into a multi-drop (MODBUS Master/Slave) network.
Objective:
Set-up the 7955 to function as a MODBUS Slave through the port. This will allow for ‘remote’ accessing of
various application data services by a MODBUS Master.
What to do:
1. Ensure that general port parameters have already been configured, as guided in Section 7.6.1

3. Select the sub-menu for a RS-485 port
4. Work through the checklist of Menu Data List 7.6.1
Menu Data List 7.6.1: RS-485 Software Parameters
Menu Data Name Instructions and Comments Notes?

Comms port owner x Select the option descriptor with “MODBUS Slave” A
Port MODBUS mode x Select the transmission mode (as agreed for the Master) A
MODBUS word order x Selection is dependent on configuration of the Master A, C
MODB slave add x ‘Set’ a value for the MODBUS base address of the port (slave) A, C, D
P MODBUS Features x Select data services that are accessible by a Master (through this port) A, B
Long reg access x Selection is dependent on configuration of the Master A, C
MODB precision x Selection is dependent on configuration of the Master A, C
Notes:
A On-screen menu data names incorporate a number to identify the associated serial RS-485 port
B Table 7.6.1 shows how the multiple-choice option descriptors relate to enabling access to one or more data
services through a port. A summary of all data services can be found in Section 7.2.2 on page 7.3
C See page 7.6 for guidance
D The 7955 Flow Computer can be MODBUS Slaves at different base addresses on each port. It is possible to
have an identical base address on two or more ports when they are not connected to the same network.
Table 7.6.1: Data Service Enabling Codes
Option Descriptors DBM A&E HSL ‘1’ HSL ‘2’ ARC

H
None 9 8 8 8 8
Alarm 9 9 8 8 8
Alarm + List1 9 9 9 8 8
Alarm+List1+List2 9 9 9 9 8
Alarm + L1+L2+DL 9 9 9 9 9
9 = Enabled; DBM = Database, A&E = Historical Alarm & Event Logs;
HSL = High Speed List; ARCH = Data Archives
Page 7.12 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

7.7 After Connecting up to the 7955 Ethernet Port …

This Section explains how to proceed with configuring the communication software parameters of the 7955
after the Ethernet port is connected to an Ethernet network. For connection details, return to page 7.10.
What to do:
x Decide if the 7955 instrument is to be an Ethernet Server, an Ethernet Client of another 7955
instrument, or both. (Guidance is provided below)
x Once you have decided, follow the instructions for configuring the 7955 instrument
Client?
This is similar to the 7955 instrument being a MODBUS Master device. A 7955 Ethernet Client has to be
registered with a 7955 Ethernet Server so it can use ‘Peer-to-Peer Lists’ to update the software parameter
database of that Server. It can also communicate with remote ‘Stream’ Flow Computers during a meter
proving session.
Server?
This is similar to the 7955 instrument being a MODBUS slave device. However, a 7955 Ethernet Server
allows up to two registered (known) Ethernet Clients to access (1) software parameters in the database, (2)
‘High Speed Lists’, (3) ‘Historical Alarm and event logs’ and (4) the parameter archives.
All Ethernet Clients must be MODBUS TCP/IP compliant devices.
7955 Client Configuration

No Ethernet port configuring is required unless the 7955 instrument is also to be configured as a server.
Extra pages following this Chapter will have a full guide to configuring and using the peer-to-peer function.
Chapter 16 is dedicated to explaining the 7955 support for meter proving.
7955 Server Configuration

(Steps 1 to 4 set-up the server function)
2. Select blue, lettered soft-key alongside the descriptor with “Ethernet server”
3. Work through the parameter checklist of Menu Data List 7.7.1 in the deliberate order shown.
Note: The IP address MUST ALWAYS be the parameter that is edited last of all in this step. Otherwise, a
power cycle is required, followed by re-programming of all the Ethernet server parameters
4. Monitor the <Server port status> parameter for a short period
(Steps 5 to 11 register two clients A and B with this server)
5. Re-navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<“Communications”>/<“Ports”>
6. Select blue, lettered soft-key alongside the descriptor with “Ethernet client A” or “Ethernet client B”
7. Work through the parameter checklist of Menu Data List 7.7.2 in the deliberate order shown.
Note: The IP address MUST ALWAYS be the parameter that is edited last of all in this step. Otherwise,
a power cycle is required, followed by re-programming of all the Ethernet Client parameters
8. Locate the menu data page with “Client A configure” (for A) or “Client B configure” (for B)
9. Change the soft-command (option descriptor) to “Configure”

Note: Use the “Un-configure” soft-command to sever the connection with a 7955 Server
10. Monitor the <Enet Client status> parameter for a short period
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 if there is a second client to register
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.13

The 7955 Ethernet Server function is now ready to respond to MODBUS TCP/IP requests from the
registered clients (A and B). However, ‘High Speed Lists’ and ‘Peer-to-Peer Lists’ services will require
additional configuring before they can be used. The extra pages after this Chapter will have a full guide to
these services.
Should this 7955 go through a power-cycle, the Ethernet Server re-starts but is free of clients. Connections
with registered clients will need to be re-established using the <Client configure> parameter on the server.
Menu Data List 7.7.1: Ethernet Server Parameters

Default
Setting
Server port number x Leave it with the default setting 502
“Modbus
Eprt MODB word order x Select the Word Swap Mode. See page 7.6 for guidance
default”
x Unit Identifier. This is equivalent to the MODBUS base address of
Eport Modbus UI 9
a slave device.
x This makes data services available through the Ethernet port.
Eport MODB features None
Table 1 can assist with the choices available
x Choose if all the MODBUS messages are of the single or multiple “Multiple
Eprt MODB reg access
register access type. (See page 7.4 for guidance) registers”
x Choose whether 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point values are coded in “Single”
Eport MODB precision
the data component of the MODBUS messages (32-bit)
x Edit an IP address for this 7955 Ethernet Server. Ensure the
Eport IP address * 0.0.0.0
address is available first before editing, even if network is private.
Abbreviations: “Eport” or “Eprt” = Ethernet port, “IP” = Internet Protocol, “MODB” = MODBUS,
“UI” = Unit Identifier, “reg” = register
Menu Data List 7.7.2: Ethernet Client A/B Parameters

Default
Setting
x This should match the value SET for the <Server port number>
<Client port number> 502
parameter listed in Menu Data List 7.7.1
x Choose option that is compatible with the Ethernet Client. See “Modbus
<Clt MODB word order>
page 7.6 if guidance is required default”
x Choose option that is compatible with the Ethernet Client. . “Multiple
<Clt MODB reg access>
(See page 7.4 for guidance) registers”
x Register the IP address of the Ethernet Client. Take care when
<Client IP address> 127.0.0.1
editing this since there is no validation of the address or format
Abbreviations: “CltA” or “ClientA” = Ethernet Client A, “IP” = Internet Protocol, “MODB” = MODBUS,
“reg” = register
Table 7.7.1: Data Services Enabling Codes
Option Descriptors DBM A&E HSL ‘1’ HSL ‘2’ ARC

H
None 9 8 8 8 8
Alarm 9 9 8 8 8
Alarm + List1 9 9 9 8 8
Alarm+List1+List2 9 9 9 9 8
Alarm + L1+L2+DL 9 9 9 9 9
9 = Enabled; DBM = Database, A&E = Historical Alarm & Event Logs;
HSL = High Speed List; ARCH = Data Archives
Page 7.14 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

7.8 7955 Database access over a MODBUS network

This Section demonstrates how a (non-795x) MODBUS Master and a (non-795x) Ethernet Client can
communicate with the software parameter database of a 7955 MODBUS Slave/Ethernet Server.
7.8.1 Introduction
There are several types of information that can be obtained from the software parameter database:
1. Parameter value (in base units of measurement)
2. Parameter value status
3. Data size and data type attributes for a parameter (location) value
The 795x series uses a unique index called a location identification (ID) number. There is a unique ID
number for every stored software parameter. The location ID number is not normally displayed, but
pressing the ‘a’ soft-key when a database variable (menu data page) is displayed, will display the number
on the fourth line.
MODBUS registers are expressed as the database location ID number minus 1. Therefore, a requesting
device will ask for MODBUS register 16 in order to read the data in database location 17.
Notice
Parameter attributes and location identification (ID) numbers of the
database with your installed software is likely to be different to those
used in these examples. For a full list of locations, locate the ASCII
text file with the filename extension ‘.MAN’ on your ‘FC CONFIG’ 5
installation disk.
A number of worked examples are provided for each information type. Every example features objectives,
actions, and results. Adapt the examples to suit your requirements.
Objective
For an example, the objective could be to read a value from a specific location.
Action(s)
This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages), shown
as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the MODBUS
Master or Client. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values.
Table 7.8.2 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use
them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence.
Result
This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS response to an action. There may be a reference to additional
information. Some software parameters may have a “No access” security attribute and, therefore, be
permanently unavailable. The response from a command to read such data is shown in Table 7.8.1.
Table 7.8.1: "No Access" to Data Response
Receive 0A 83 …
Meaning Slv. Err. …
5
This is a useful PC based package, developed by Solartron, for interacting with the 795x. It is supplied only when requested.
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.15

Table 7.8.2: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences
Abbreviations Meaning
Slv. The MODBUS slave base address
UI The MODBUS/TCP unit identifier – similar to the slave base address
Err. Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Fn. MODBUS Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Transact ID Transaction Identifier – this is usually 0 (0x0000)
Protocol ID Protocol Identifier – this is usually 0 (0x0000)
Length Number of bytes that follow (excluding Ethernet packet)
Reg. Cnt Number of registers to read or write / Number of registers read or written
Reg. ID MODBUS Register number
DC Data Count – The number of bytes of data that follow
The Data Data bytes that contain the useful information
Chk sum Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
EOT End of text marker
Page 7.16 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

7.8.2 7955 Database Information: Software Parameter Values

MODBUS (Master/Slave):
Software parameter values are mapped within the first 10,000 registers of the MODBUS register map
directly associated with the programmed base address of a 7955 MODBUS slave. Our examples assume
the 7955 MODBUS Slave (port) is configured with a base address of “01”.
MODBUS/TCP (Client/Server):
Software parameter values are mapped within the first 10,000 registers of the MODBUS register map
directly associated with the unit identifier (UI) – base address – of a 7955 Ethernet Server. Our
examples assume that the server has been configured with a base address (UI) of “09”.
Notes:
x Identification (ID) numbers of the software parameters with your installed software may
be different to those used in these examples.
x All request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’ mode, (2) 32-bit single
precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
Example 1: Read base density value from database location 0787
MODBUS Action: Read from MODBUS register 0786

Transmit 01 03 03 12 00 02 64 4A
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 01 03 04 44 54 A0 00 D7 13
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action: Read from MODBUS register 0786

Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 03 03 12 00 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 07 09 03 04 44 54 A0 00
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. DC The Data
Result: The data value part of the reply, 0x4454A000, translates from a 32-bit IEEE number into the
floating-point number 850.50 (in Kg/m3 – base units).
Example 2: Write base density value of 850 Kg/m3 (base units) to location 0787
MODBUS Action: Write to MODBUS register number 0786
Transmit 01 10 03 12 00 02 04 44 54 80 00 53 6A
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt DC IEEE 32-bit data value Chk. Sum
Receive 01 10 03 12 00 02 E1 89
MODBUS/TCP Action: Write to MODBUS register number 0786

Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 0B 09 10 03 12 00 02 04
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC
Transmit 44 54 80 00
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 10 03 12 00 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.17

Example 2 Result:
Base density value changes. The 0x44548000, translates from a 32-bit IEEE number into the floating-
point number 850.00 (in Kg/m3 – base units).
Example 3: Read the user alarm summary from read-only location 1579
MODBUS Action:
Read from MODBUS register 1578
Transmit 01 03 01 33 06 2A 53 6A
Receive 01 03 16 20 … 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 00
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data… A= B= C= D= X= Y= Z= -
Receive 00 DB 96
Meaning - Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action:
Read from MODBUS register 1578
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 03 01 33 06 2A
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 17 09 16 20 … 20 30 30
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI DC The Data… A= B=
Receive 30 30 30 30 30 00 00
Meaning C= D= X= Y= Z= EOT EOT
Result:
x There are 22 (0x16) bytes of returned data. Table 7.8.3 shows how to interpret the “ABCDXYZ” bytes
are interpreted. The rest of the returned data is padded out with 12 ASCII spaces (0x20).
Note:
x The returned data is a character string and is therefore unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode
Table 7.8.3: Interpretation of returned data
Alarm State
Alarm Digit Data Comment
(ASCII Char)
A 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘A’ inactive
B 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘B’ inactive
C 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘C’ inactive
D 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘D’ inactive
X 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘X’ inactive
Y 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘Y’ inactive
Z 0x30 ‘0’ 0 = User Alarm ‘Z’ inactive
Page 7.18 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

Example 4: Check on selected option descriptor of a multiple-choice list
Objective: Check referral method selection for calculating Metering density.
MODBUS Action: Read from MODBUS register 03661 (0x0E4D)

Transmit 01 03 0E 4D 00 01 16 F5
Receive 01 03 02 00 00 B8 44
MODBUS/TCP Action: Read from MODBUS register 03661 (0x0E4D)

Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 03 0E 4D 00 01
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 09 03 02 00 00
Result:
x The returned data value 0x0000 can be interpreted by looking at the following table:
Value Meaning
0x0000 x 4x5 Matrix Referral selected
0x0001 x API Referral selected
Example 5: Select an option descriptor from a multiple-choice list
Objective:
Select the API referral method for calculating Metering density.
MODBUS Action:
Write value of 0x0001 to MODBUS register 03661 (0x0E4D)
Transmit 01 10 0E 4D 00 01 02 00 01 16 F5
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 01 10 0E 4D 00 01 93 36
MODBUS/TCP Action:
Write value of 0x0001 to MODBUS register 03661 (0x0E4D)
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 07 09 10 0E 4D 00 01 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt DC
Transmit 00 01
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 10 0E 4D 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt
Result: The reply indicates that the request was successful
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.19

7.8.3 7955 Database Information: Software Parameter Status

Software parameter states are mapped within registers 30001 to 40000 of the MODBUS register map
directly associated with the programmed base address of a 7955 MODBUS slave. Our examples assume
the 7955 MODBUS Slave (port) is configured with a base address of “01”.
Software parameter states are mapped within registers 30001 to 40000 of the MODBUS register map
directly associated with the unit identifier (UI) – base address – of a 7955 Ethernet Server. Our
examples assume that the server has been configured with a base address (UI) of “09”.
Notes:
Example 1: Read the status of location 0787

MODBUS Action: Read MODBUS register 30786 (30000 offset + 0787 - 1)
Transmit 01 03 78 42 00 01 3C BE
Receive 01 03 02 00 01 79 84
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data Chk. sum
MODBUS/TCP Action: Read MODBUS register 30786 (30000 offset + 0787 - 1):
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 03 78 42 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 09 03 02 00 01
Result: The “00 01” indicates a ‘SET’ status. Refer to Table 7.8.5 (on page 7.21) for other states.
Example 2: Change the status of location 0787

MODBUS Action: Change status to ‘LIVE’ by writing to 0x0000 to register 30786 (30000 + 0787 - 1)
Transmit 01 10 78 42 00 01 02 00 00 51 75
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC The Data Chk. sum
Receive 01 10 78 42 00 01 B9 7D
MODBUS/TCP Action: Change status to ‘LIVE’ by writing to 0x0000 to register 30786 (30000 + 786)
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 09 09 10 78 42 00 01 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC
Transmit 00 00
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 10 78 42 00 01
Result: Status has changed to “Live”. (See Table 7.8.4 on page 7.21 for other states)
Page 7.20 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

Example 3: Read status of user alarm state (location ID: 1579)
MODBUS Action:
Read MODBUS register 31578 (30000 offset + 1579 - 1)
Transmit 01 03 7B 5A 00 01 BC FD
Receive 01 03 02 00 FF F8 04
MODBUS/TCP Action:
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 03 7B 5A 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 09 03 02 00 FF
Result:
x The returned data value, 0x00FF, indicates that there is no status attribute for that location.
x See Table 7.8.5 for other states
Table 7.8.4: Status Codes (Selection)
Value Selection
0x0000 x Live state
0x0001 x Set state
Table 7.8.5: Status Codes (Returned)
Value State Return

0x0000 x Live
0x0001 x Set
0x0002 x Fail
0x0003 x Fallback
0x00FF x No state
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.21

7.8.4 7955 Database Information: Size and Type of Software Parameter Value
The data size and type of every software parameter value is mapped within registers 20,001 to 29,999 of the
MODBUS register map directly associated with the programmed base address of a 7955 MODBUS slave.
Our examples assume the 7955 MODBUS Slave (port) is configured with a base address of “01”.
The data size and type of every software parameter value is mapped within registers 20,001 to 29,999 of
the MODBUS register map directly associated with the unit identifier (UI) – base address – of a 7955
Ethernet Server. Our examples assume the server is configured with a base address (UI) of “09”.
Notes:
Example 1: Read size and type of data available from location 0787
MODBUS Action:
Transmit 01 03 51 32 00 01 35 39
Receive 01 03 02 07 04 BB B7
MODBUS/TCP Action:
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 03 51 32 00 01
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 09 03 02 07 04
Result:
2 bytes of data are returned in the reply: 0x07 and 0x04
x 0x07 = Data Type Code 7 – a 32-bit floating-point number
x 0x04 = 4 bytes needed to represent the floating-point value
Special Note:
x For other data type and size codes, refer to Table 7.8.6 on page 7.23
Example 2: Read size and type of data available from location 1579
MODBUS Action: Read MODBUS register 21,578 (20000 offset + 1579 - 1)

Transmit 01 03 54 4A 00 01 B5 EC
Receive 01 03 02 09 16 3F DA
Page 7.22 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

MODBUS/TCP Action: Read MODBUS register 21,578 (20000 offset + 1579 - 1)

Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 03 54 4A 00 01
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 09 03 02 09 16
Result:
2 bytes of data are returned in the reply: 0x09 and 0x16
x 0x09 = Data Type Code 9 – Character String
x 0x16 = 22 bytes – length of character string in bytes
Table 7.8.6: Interpreting Responses from Type 3 Requests
Type of Data Size (Bytes) Type (Code)

x Character 2 1
x Unsigned 8-bit integer 2 2
x Signed 16-bit integer 2 4
x 32-bit floating point number 4 7
x 64-bit floating point number 8 8
x Character String 22 9
x Multiple-choice (List) Option 2 10
x Location pointer 2 11
x Time and date 16 12
Table 7.8.7: Unit of Measurement Category Codes
Category Category
Unit Category Unit Category
Code Code
0 x (No units) 20 x (Not Used)
1 x Temperature 21 x (Not Used)
2 x Pressure 22 x (Not Used)
3 x Differential Pressure 23 x Time
4 x Volume 24 x Length
5 x Standard Volume 25 x Speed
6 x Mass 26 x Fraction
7 x Energy 27 x Saybolt Universal
8 x Density 28 x Saybolt Temperature
9 x Standard Density 29 x Absolute Zero
10 x Frequency 30 x Temperature Offset
11 x Period 31 x General
12 x Dynamic Viscosity 32 x (Not Used)
13 x Base Dynamic Viscosity 33 x (Not Used)
14 x Kinematic Viscosity 34 x (Not Used)
15 x Base Kinematic Viscosity 35 x Expansion Coefficient
16 x Flow Factor 36 x Youngs Modulus
17 x Volume Rate 37 x Velocity
18 x Standard Volume Rate
19 x Mass Rate
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.23

7.8.5 7955 Database Information: Full Attributes of a Software Parameter

The data size and type of every software parameter value is mapped within registers 40,001 to 49,999 of the
MODBUS register map directly associated with the programmed base address of a 7955 MODBUS slave.
Our examples assume the 7955 MODBUS Slave (port) is configured with a base address of “01”.
The data size and type of every software parameter value is mapped within registers 40,001 to 49,999 of
the MODBUS register map directly associated with the unit identifier (UI) – base address – of a 7955
Ethernet Server. Our examples assume the server is configured with a base address (UI) of “09”.
Notes:
Example 1: Read the full attributes of location 0787
MODBUS Action:
Transmit 01 03 9F 52 00 02 4B CE
Receive 01 03 04 04 07 01 08 BA D0
MODBUS/TCP Action:
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 09 03 9F 52 00 02
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 09 03 02 04 07 01 08
Result:
4 bytes of data are returned in the reply:
x 0x04 = 4 bytes – required to store a 32-bit floating-point number
x 0x07 = Data Type Code 7 – software parameter value is a 32-bit floating-point number
x 0x01 = Status Code 1 – “Live” value state
x 0x08 = Unit of Measurement Category Code 9 – Density units
Special Note:
x For interpreting other codes, refer to Table 7.8.6 (on page 7.23) and Table 7.8.7 (on page 7.23)
x The reply data is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode
Page 7.24 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

7.9 Historical Alarm Log access over a MODBUS Network

This Section demonstrates how a MODBUS Master/Ethernet Client can access “LIVE” information from the
Historical Alarm Log of a 7955 MODBUS Slave/Ethernet Server.
Refer to Chapter 8 if an explanation for the Historical Alarm Log is required.
7.9.1 Introduction
Information from the Historical Alarm Log is available to a MODBUS Master through the register map of
Virtual Address ‘1’ (base address + offset of 1).
Warning!
It is not advisable to clear or accept alarms using the front panel while the Historical Alarm
Log is being queried by a MODBUS master. Doing so could result in the MODBUS Master
having an incorrect view of the content.
Worked examples are provided to demonstrate the correct method for (1) obtaining details of an alarm, (2)
accepting that alarm and (3) clearing that alarm
Every example features objectives, request/response sequences, and an explained result. Adapt the
examples to suit your requirements.
Objective
Action(s)
This consists of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands (framed messages),
shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The framed messages need to be transmitted by the
MODBUS Master or Client. Responses are also shown as a sequence of hexadecimal values.
Table 7.9.1 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use
them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence.
Result
This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS Slave response to an action. There may be a reference to
additional information.
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.25

7.9.2 Worked Examples

Unless otherwise stated, all request and response messages shown here use (1) the ‘default word order’
mode, (2) 32-bit single precision encoding and (3) multiple read/write register MODBUS functions.
A base address of “01” (for MODBUS) and “09” (for MODBUS/TCP) has been assumed for or examples.
Example 1 (of 3)
Objectives:
1. Find out how many alarms are in the Historical Alarm Log
2. Retrieve identification numbers for logged alarms
3. Make information on a specific alarm available
4. Get further information about the alarm that was selected in step three
5. Accept the alarm that was selected in step three
6. Clear the alarm that was selected in step three.
Step 1 is to find out how many alarms are in the Historical Alarm Log.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Count alarms by reading MODBUS register 1,999
Transmit 02 03 07 CF 00 01 B5 72
Receive 02 03 02 00 10 FD 88
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Count alarms by reading MODBUS register 1,999

Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 07 CF 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 0? 0A 03 02 00 10
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC The Data
Result: Reply data indicates that there are 16 (0x0010) alarms in the Historical Alarm Log.
Step 2 is to retrieve the identification number of the second oldest alarm

MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Read MODBUS register 1
Transmit 02 03 00 01 00 01 D5 F9
Receive 02 03 02 00 17 BC 4A
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Read MODBUS register 1

Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 00 01 00 01
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 00 17
Result: Reply data indicates that the unique alarm ID is 0x0017
Page 7.26 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

Note:
Identification numbers of presently logged alarms are held in MODBUS registers 0 to 29 of the map for virtual
address ‘1’. The first entry in the Alarm Historical Log is always at MODBUS register 1. For the purpose of
this worked example, one alarm identification number is sufficient.
Step 3 is to make information on an alarm available. This is mandatory for remaining steps.
MODBUS Action 1 of 2: Make information available on the second alarm

Write alarm ID number, 0x0017, to MODBUS register 999
Transmit 02 10 03 E7 00 01 02 00 17 D6 79
Receive 02 10 03 E7 00 01 B1 89
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg.ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 2: Make information available on the second alarm

Write alarm ID number, 0x0017, to MODBUS register 999
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 09 0A 10 03 E7 00 01 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC
Receive 00 17
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 10 03 E7 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg.ID Reg. Cnt.
Result: Reply data indicates that the selection has been made
MODBUS Action 2 of 2:
Check that information is now available by reading MODBUS register 999
Transmit 02 03 03 E7 00 01 34 4A
Receive 02 03 02 00 17 BC 4A
MODBUS/TCP Action 2 of 2:
Check that information is now available by reading MODBUS register 999
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 03 E7 00 01
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 00 17
Result:
x Reply data indicates that the current alarm ID is confirmed to be 0x0017.
Note:
x A reply of 0x0000 indicates that no alarm has been selected
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.27

Step 4 is to get further information about the alarm that was selected in step three. To get information about
another alarm, repeat step three but use another identification number.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain alarm text length by reading MODBUS register 2000
Transmit 02 03 07 D0 00 01 84 B4
Receive 03 03 02 00 12 84 B4
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Obtain alarm text length by reading MODBUS register 2000
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 07 D0 00 01
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 00 12
Result: Reply data indicates that the alarm text length is 18 bytes (0x0012). At present, the length
returned is always 18 bytes. Divide the length by 2 to work out the number of register to request
when asking for the text. Do not assume the length will always be 18 bytes.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain ASCII alarm text by reading MODBUS register 1011
Transmit 02 03 03 F3 00 09 75 88
Receive 02 03 12 53 69 6D 65 70 65 72 69 6F 64 20
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC ‘T’ ‘i’ ‘m’ ‘e’ ‘p’ ‘e’ ‘r’ ‘i’ ‘o’ ‘d’
Receive 6E 6F 20 63 61 6C 00 7C EB
Meaning ‘n’ ‘o’ ‘c’ ‘a’ ‘l’ EOT Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Obtain ASCII alarm text by reading MODBUS register 1011
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 03 F3 00 09
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 15 0A 03 12 53 69 6D 65 70
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC ‘T’ ‘I’ ‘m’ ‘e’ ‘p’
Receive 65 72 69 6F 64 20 63 61 6C 00
Meaning ‘e’ ‘r’ ‘I’ ‘o’ ‘d’ ‘c’ ‘a’ ‘l’ EOT
Result: Reply data contains the base alarm message of “Timeperiod no cal”. See next action to find out
the additional character following the base message.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain alarm text code and qualifier by reading MODBUS register 1010:
Transmit 02 03 03 F2 00 02 65 8F
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg ID Reg Cnt. Chk sum
Receive 02 03 04 00 0B 31 20 65 8F
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The data Chk sum
Page 7.28 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Obtain alarm text code and qualifier by reading MODBUS register 1010:
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 03 F2 00 02
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 07 0A 03 04 00 0B 31 20
Result: 0x000B = A code for the alarm text – not to be confused with the alarm entry ID (from earlier)
0x31 = Represents ASCII character “1” – for metering-point/stream/channel one
0x20 = Alarm Type ‘2’ (2 = Present) + Alarm State ‘0’ (0 = Alarm Not Accepted)
Other possible results…

Type of alarm: “0”=Off, “1”=On, “2”=Present
State of alarm: “0”=Not Accepted, “1”=Accepted
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve time and date of selected alarm by reading MODBUS register 1009
Transmit 02 03 03 F1 00 08 15 88
Receive 02 03 10 00 21 00 06 00 0D 00 0A 07 CE 00 1C
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data
Receive 00 04 01 2D 32 6B
Meaning The Data Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Retrieve time and date of selected alarm by reading MODBUS register 1009
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 03 F1 00 08
UI+
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length 1
Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 12 0A 03 10 00 21 00 06 00 0D
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI Fn. DC 33 seconds 6 minutes 13 hours
Receive 00 0A 07 CE 00 1C 00 04 01 2D
th th
Meaning 10 . Month 1998 28 . (Oct) Wednesday Day of year
Result:
x When viewing the Historical Alarm Log entry you would see “28-10-98 13:06:33” on the third line
Special Notes:
x The order of date/time character strings in packets are unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
Step 5 is to accept the alarm that was selected in step three.

MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Write 0x0000 to MODBUS register 1004
Transmit 02 10 03 EC 00 01 02 00 00 97 0C
Receive 02 10 03 EC 00 01 C0 4B
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.29

MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Write 0x0000 to MODBUS register 1004

Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 09 0A 10 03 EC 00 01 02
Receive 00 00
Meaning The Data
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 10 03 EC 00 01
Result: The alarm entry selected through register 999 has been accepted. Information, such as the base
alarm message, remains available until another alarm entry is selected.
Step 6 is to clear the alarm that was selected in step three.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Write 0x01 to MODBUS register 1004 (0x3EC)
Transmit 0B 10 03 EC 00 01 02 00 01 56 CC
Receive 0B 10 03 E7 00 01 C0 4B
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Write 0x01 to MODBUS register 1004 (0x3EC)
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 08 0A 10 03 EC 00 01 02
Transmit 00 01
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 10 03 E7 00 01
Result:
x The alarm (selected through register 999) has been cleared. However, the conditions that caused the
alarm may still be present and the same alarm would then be raised with a new identification number.
Information such as the alarm text is now unavailable.
Example 2 (of 3)
Objective: Clear all alarms from the Historical Alarm Log
MODBUS Action: Write 0x01 to MODBUS register 2001

Transmit 02 10 07 D1 00 01 02 00 01 17 E1
Receive 02 10 07 D1 00 01 50 B7
Page 7.30 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

MODBUS/TCP Action: Write 0x01 to MODBUS register 2001

Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 09 0A 10 07 D1 00 01 02
Transmit 00 01
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 10 07 D1 00 01
Result:
x All alarms cleared. However, the conditions that caused the logged alarms may still be present and so
the same alarms would be raised again, but with new identification numbers.
Example 3 (of 3)
Objective: Retrieve abbreviated summary of the Historical Alarm Log
MODBUS Action: Read MODBUS register 2010

Transmit 02 03 07 D9 00 03 D5 77
Receive 01 03 06 00 00 00 0E 10 00 59 86
MODBUS/TCP Action: Read MODBUS register 2010

Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 05 03 07 D9 00 03
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 08 0A 03 06 00 00 00 0E 10
Receive 00
Meaning
Result:
x The reply data is interpreted as follows:
0x00 (Byte 1) = Number of system class alarms that have not been accepted = 0
0x00 (Byte 2) = Number of input class alarms that have not been accepted = 0
0x00 (Byte 3) = Number of limit class alarms that have not been accepted = 0
0x0E (Byte 3) = Total number of system class alarms (accepted or otherwise) = 14
0x10 (Byte 5) = Total number of input class alarms (accepted or otherwise) = 16
0x00 (Byte 6) = Total number of limit class alarms (accepted or otherwise) = 0
Note:
x The reply data is a character string and is therefore unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.31

7.10 Historical Event Log access over a MODBUS network

This Section demonstrates how a MODBUS Master/Ethernet Client can access “LIVE” information from
the Historical Event Log of a 7955 MODBUS Slave/Ethernet Server.
Refer to Chapter 8 if an explanation for the Historical Event Log is required.
7.10.1 Introduction
Information from the Historical Event Log is retrievable through the map of MODBUS registers associated
with ‘Virtual Address 1’ (base address + offset of 1).
Warning!
It is not advisable to clear or accept events using the front panel while the Historical
Event Log is being queried by a MODBUS master. This could otherwise result in the
MODBUS master having an in-correct view of the content.
Worked examples are provided to demonstrate the correct method for (1) obtaining details of an event,
(2) accepting that event and (3) clearing that event
Every example features objectives, actions, and a result analysis.
Objective
Action(s)
Table 7.10.1 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence.
Use them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence.
Result
Page 7.32 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)


A base address of “01” (for MODBUS) and “09” (for MODBUS/TCP) has been assumed for our examples.
Objectives:
1. Find out how many alarms are in the Historical Event Log
2. Retrieve identification numbers for recorded (logged) events
3. Make information available on a specific event
4. Get further information about the event that was selected in step three
5. Accept/Clear the event that was selected in step three.
Step 1 is to find out how many events are in the Historical Event Log.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Read MODBUS register 11,999
Transmit 02 03 2E DF 00 01 BC EB
Receive 02 03 02 00 96 7C 2A
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Read MODBUS register 11,999

Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 2E DF 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 00 96
Result: Returned data indicates that there are 150 (0x0096) events in the Historical Event Log.
Step 2 is to retrieve identification numbers for recorded (logged) events.

MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve ID number of the oldest event by reading register 10,000
Transmit 02 03 27 10 00 01 8F 48
Receive 02 03 02 02 D5 3C BB
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Retrieve ID number of the oldest event by reading register 10000
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 27 10 00 01
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. Reg. ID. Reg. Cnt.
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 02 D5
Result: Reply indicates that the unique event ID is 0x02D5.
Notes: Identification (ID) numbers of recorded events are available from MODBUS registers 10,000 to
10,149. The ID of the oldest recorded entry in the Historical Event Log is at register 10,000.
For the purpose of our worked example, one event identification number is sufficient. In
practice, all identification numbers would need to be retrieved and stored for repeating steps.
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.33

Step 3 is to make information available about a specific event. This is mandatory for remaining steps.
MODBUS Action 1 of 2: Make information available for the first event
Write the event identification number (i.e. 0x02D5) to MODBUS register 10,999
Transmit 02 10 2A F7 00 01 02 02 D5 EC DA
Receive 02 10 2A F7 00 01 B8 10
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 2: Make information available for first event

Write the event identification number (i.e. 0x02D5) to MODBUS register 10,999
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 09 0A 10 2A F7 00 01 02
Transmit 02 D5
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 10 2A F7 00 01
Result:
x Reply indicates that the selection has been made.
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Check that information for selected event is now available by read register 10,999
Transmit 02 03 2A F7 00 01 3D D3
Receive 02 03 02 02 D5 3C BB
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Check that information for selected event is now available by read register 10,999
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 2A F7 00 01
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 02 D5
Result: Reply indicates that the current event ID is confirmed to be 0x02D5.
Step 4 is to get further information about the event that was selected in step 3. To get information about
another event, repeat step 3 but use another event identification number.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event text length by reading MODBUS register 12,000
Transmit 02 03 2E E0 00 01 8C E7
Receive 03 03 02 00 14 FC 4B
Page 7.34 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event text length by reading MODBUS register 11,012
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 2E E0 00 01
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0A 03 02 00 14
Result:
Reply data indicates that the event text length is 20 bytes (0x0014). At present, the length returned is always
20 bytes. Divide the length by 2 to work out the number of register to request when asking for the event text.
Do not assume the event text length will always be 18 bytes.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event text by reading MODBUS register 11,012

Transmit 02 03 2B 04 00 0A 8D DB
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt Chk. Sum
Receive 02 03 14 6D 41 20 4F 2F 50 20 38 20 63
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data... (mA O/P 8 cycle time)
Receive 79 63 6C 65 20 74 69 6D 65 00 3A AD
Meaning The Data… Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event text by reading MODBUS register 11,012

Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 2B 04 00 0A
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 17 0A 03 14 6D 41 20 4F
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC ‘m’ ‘A’ ‘O’
Receive 2F 50 20 38 20 63 79 63 6C 65 20 74 69
Meaning ‘/’ ‘P’ ‘8’ ‘c’ ‘y’ ‘c’ ‘l’ ‘e’ ‘t’ ‘i’
Receive 6D 65 00
Meaning ‘m’ ‘e’ EOT
Result: Reply data contains the ASCII encoded event text. It is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve location ID, event type, and event state by reading register 11,010
Transmit 02 03 2B 02 00 02 6C 1C
Receive 02 03 04 00 72 01 01 A9 78
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Retrieve location ID, event type, and event state by reading register 11,010
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 2B 02 00 02
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 07 0A 03 04 00 72 01 01
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.35

Result:
0x0072 = Location ID 0114
1st. 0x01 = Type (0x00=Auto, 0x01=User, 0x02=Period)
nd
2 . 0x01 = State (0x00=Pending, 0x01=Accepted)
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Obtain date/time stamp for the same event by reading MODBUS register 11,009
Transmit 02 03 2B 01 00 08 1C 1B
Receive 02 03 10 00 04 00 33 00 09 00 06 07 D0
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC = 4 seconds = 51 mins. = 9 hours = June = 2000
Receive 00 08 00 05 00 A0 84 82
th th
Meaning = 8 . (June) = Thursday = 160 . Day Chk. Sum
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Obtain date/time stamp for the same event by reading register 11,009
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 2B 01 00 08
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 13 0A 03 10 00 04 00 33
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+1 Fn. DC = 4 seconds = 51 mins.
Receive 00 09 00 06 07 D0 00 08 00 05 00 A0
th th
Meaning = 9 hours = June = 2000 = 8 . (June) = Thursday = 160 . Day
Result: When viewing the Historical Event Log entry you would see “08-06-00 09:51:04” on the third line
Special Notes:
x The order of this data packet is unaffected by the ‘word order’ mode.
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event data for the same event by reading MODBUS register 11,011
Transmit 02 03 2B 03 00 19 7D D7
Receive 02 03 32 45 3B 80 00 … 80 53
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 1: Retrieve event data for the same event by reading MODBUS register 11,011
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 03 2B 03 00 19
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 35 0A 03 32 45 3B 80 00
Result: 453B8000 is an 32-bit IEEE number representing 3000.00 (Old = 3000.0) - ignore the other 46 bytes
Special Notes:
x You must use MODBUS function 3 irrespective of whether port is configured for single register access
x When the data part of the reply represents an option selection code, the code is in the first byte. You can
retrieve option text by reading 22 bytes from registers 11,013 (old option ) and 11014 (new option)
Page 7.36 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

Step 5 is to clear the selected event from Historical Event Log once all associated data has been retrieved
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Write value of the clearance code (0x0001) to MODBUS register 11,004
Transmit 02 10 2A FC 00 01 02 00 01 EC 9E
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt DC The Data Chk. Sum
Receive 02 10 2A FC 00 01 C9 D2
MODBUS Action 1 of 1: Write value of the clearance code (0x0001) to MODBUS register 11,004
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 09 0A 10 2A FC 00 01 02
Transmit 00 01
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 0A 10 2A FC 00 01
Result:
x Event cleared from the Historical Event Log. All associated data is no longer accessible.
Special Notes:
x If you wish to just accept the selected event, use the acceptance code 0x0000
x To clear all events in the Historical Event Log, write any 16-bit value to MOBUS register 12,001
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.37

7.11 Archive access over a MODBUS network

This Section demonstrates how a MODBUS Master/Ethernet Client can access archives of a 7955
MODBUS Slave/Ethernet Server.
Refer to Chapter 9 if an explanation of Data Archiving is required.
7.11.1 Introduction
Information from Archives is retrievable through the map of MODBUS registers associated with ‘Virtual
Address 4’ (base address + offset of 4).
Worked examples in Section 7.11.2 are provided to demonstrate the correct method for (1) selecting an
archive by type, (2) selecting a snapshot in that archive and (3) retrieving values from that snapshot
Every example features objectives, actions, and a result analysis.
Objective
Action(s)
Table 7.10.1 contains a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence.
Use them to distinguish the important elements of the sequence.
Result
Page 7.38 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)


A base address of “01” (for MODBUS) and “09” (for MODBUS/TCP) has been assumed for our examples.
Objectives:
1. Select an archive
2. Find out how many snapshots are stored in that archive
3. Select a snapshot within that archive.
4. Retrieve values from that archive
Step 1 is to select an archive by type and then, optionally, verify it has been selected
MODBUS Action 1 of 2: Select the Interval Archive by writing 0x02 to MODBUS register number 999
Transmit 05 10 03 E7 00 01 02 00 02 31 86
Receive 05 10 03 E7 00 01 B0 3E
MODBUS/TCP Action 1 of 2: Select the Interval Archive by writing 0x02 to MODBUS register 999
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 09 0D 10 03 E7 00 01 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt DC
Receive 00 02
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 0D 10 03 E7 00 01
Result: Reply indicates that the request was successful
Special Note:
x Codes – 0x0000 (Alarm Triggered Archive), 0x0001 (Daily Archive), 0x0003 (Manual Trigger Archive)
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Verify the Archive selection by reading from MODBUS register number 999
Transmit 05 03 03 E7 00 01 35 FD
Receive 05 03 02 00 02 C8 45
Verify the Interval Archive selection by reading from MODBUS register number 999
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0D 03 03 E7 00 01
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0D 03 02 00 02
Result: Reply indicates by type code 0x0002 that the Interval Archive has been selected
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.39

Step 2 is to find how many snapshots are stored in the selected archive
Read MODBUS register 39,999
Transmit 05 03 9C 3F 00 01 9B D2
Receive 05 03 02 00 07
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC The Data
Read MODBUS register 39,999
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0D 03 9C 3F 00 01
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0D 03 02 00 07
Result:
x There are presently 7 (0x0007) snapshots in the selected archive
Step 3 is to select a snapshot from the selected archive and then, optionally, verify it has been selected
Select newest snapshot the Archive by writing 0x0000 to MODBUS register 1000
Transmit 05 10 03 E8 00 01 02 00 00 B0 B8
Receive 05 10 03 E8 00 01 80 3D
Select newest snapshot the Archive by writing 0x0000 to MODBUS register 1000
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 09 0D 10 03 E8 00 01 02
Meaning Transact ID Protocol ID Length UI+4 Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt DC
Transmit 00 00
Meaning The Data
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 06 0D 10 03 E8 00 01
Result:
x Reply indicates that the request was successful
Special Note:
x This snapshot selection will not be reflected in archive parameters displayed within the menu system
x Other selection codes: 0x0001 (oldest snapshot), 0x0002 (2nd oldest snapshot), etc.
Page 7.40 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

Check on snapshot selection by reading from MODBUS register number 1000
Transmit 05 03 03 E8 00 01 05 FE
Receive 05 03 02 00 00 49 84
Check on snapshot selection by reading from MODBUS register number 1000
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0D 03 03 E8 00 01
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 05 0D 03 02 00 00
Result:
x Reply data 0x0000 indicates that the newest (latest) snapshot is selected
Special Note:
x This snapshot selection will not be reflected in archive parameters displayed within the menu system
nd
x Other selection codes: 0x0001 (oldest snapshot), 0x0002 (2 oldest snapshot), etc.
Step 4 is to retrieve the newest snapshot value from the first parameter programmed into the archive list
MODBUS Action 2 of 2: Retrieve first parameter attributes by reading MODBUS register 40000
Transmit 05 03 9C 40 00 02 EA 0B
Receive 05 03 04 06 04 FF 04 BE 89
MODBUS/TCP Action 2 of 2: Retrieve first parameter attributes by reading MODBUS register 40000
Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0D 03 9C 40 00 02
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 07 0D 03 04 06 04 FF 04
Result:
x 0x06 = Data Type ‘6’ – IEEE 32-bit floating-point value
x 0x04 = Data Size – Parameter value stored in 4 bytes
x 0xFF = Status – No Status Attribute
x 0x04 = Units of measurement group 4 – Volumetric units
Special Notes:
nd. rd.
x Other MODBUS registers: 40001 (= 2 listed parameter), 40002 (= 3 listed parameter), etc.
7955 1540 (CH07/BB) Page 7.41

Retrieve value by reading MODBUS register 2000
Transmit 05 03 07 D0 00 02 C5 02
Receive 05 03 04 00 0D 46 87 5C 32
MODBUS/TCP Action 2 of 2: Retrieve value by reading MODBUS register 2000

Transmit 00 00 00 00 00 06 0D 03 07 D0 00 02
Receive 00 00 00 00 00 07 0D 03 04 00 0D 46 87
Result:
x 0x000D4687 is the hexadecimal value for 870,023 (m3)
Special Note:
x Other MODBUS registers: 2001 (=2nd. listed parameter), 2002 (=3rd. listed parameter), etc.
Page 7.42 7955 1540 (CH07/BB)

PEER-TO-PEER
COMMUNICATIONS
(CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM ‘A’)
Solartron Mobrey Limited

158 Edinburgh Avenue, Addendum Issue: AA, July 2000
Slough, Berkshire, SL1 4UE, UK
2000, Solartron
Chapter 7(a) Peer-To-Peer Communications Software Version 1540, Issue 5.40 (or higher)
Page 7a.2 Issue: AA

Software Version 1540, Issue 5.40 (or higher) Chapter 7(a) Peer-To-Peer Communications
ABOUT THIS ADDENDUM
7a.1 What is the purpose if this addendum?

This addendum has been written to provide a guide to the software support for peer-to-peer MODBUS
network communications.
To use this guide effectively, it is essential to be familiar with the 795x keypad functions, moving around the
menu system and editing. (Chapter 5 can help with this)
The data necessary for configuring a measurement/feature can be found in separate parts of the menu
structure. A notation has been used as a short method of explaining how to move from the present menu to
another menu.
As an example, the notation of <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”> translates into these steps:

Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key
Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW (‘V’) key to scroll through pages until the word “Configure” is seen.
Step 3: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Configure”.
Step 4: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word “Flow rate” is seen.
Step 5: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Flow rate”.
Sometimes, it is convenient to use the MAIN-MENU key (especially if lost). However, use of the BACK-
ARROW key is a much more common method of returning to a menu level.
Note: The menu structure will vary in other software versions and releases.
Issue: AA Page 7a.3

PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS INTRODUCTION

7A.2 FEATURE: 795X COMMUNICATION OF PARAMETERS USING PEER-TO-PEER LISTS
What to do:
x An overview is in Section 7a.2.1…………………….……………. Page 7a.4
x A list of configuration instructions is in Section 7a.2.2…..…….. Page 7a.6
7A.2.1 WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THIS FEATURE?

This feature is typically used when a ‘Header’ Flow Computer must send various measurements (e.g.
pressure, temperature, etc.) over a MODBUS protocol network to one or more ‘Stream’ Flow Computers.
The Flow Computer network can be a mixture of members from the 795x series.
USE OF THE MODBUS PROTOCOL

In MODBUS protocol terms, a ‘Header’ Flow Computer is usually given the role of a MODBUS Master device.
It has the responsibility for the peer-to-peer transmission of measurement values during every machine cycle.
The ‘Stream’ Flow Computers are all MODBUS Slave devices and they are the recipients of peer-to-peer
transmissions.
When an RS-232 point-to-point network is the vehicle for this feature…

A 795x Master device continuously broadcasts values of peer-to-peer nominated parameters directly to
the database of a single 795x Slave device. The two MODBUS devices can be wired together via any
serial port supporting RS-232 standard. A peer-to-peer topology is shown in Figure 2on page 7a.4.
When an RS-485 multiple-drop network is the vehicle for this feature…

A 795x Master device continuously broadcasts values of peer-to-peer nominated parameters to a
maximum of sixteen 795x MODBUS slaves. The 795x MODBUS devices can be wired together via any
serial port supporting the RS-485 standard. A peer-to-peer topology is shown in Figure 3on page 7a.4
At present, peer-to-peer communications will operate through one serial port. Configuring another serial
port of the ‘Header’ 795x to function as a Master device and connecting it to a duplicate MODBUS network
will cause unpredictable results.
THE PEER-TO-PEER LISTS

On the 795x Master there are two peer-to-peer lists 1 for compiling a collection of up to 40 measurement
parameters (795x database locations) in total. The list is simply a look-up reference for the Master, when
preparing transmissions, and is programmed with database location IDs. 2
Figure 7a.2.1 shows how an individual peer-to-peer list comprises of entries (menu data pages) for
nominating from 1 up to 20 parameters. Each list entry requires a programmed source – a database
location ID on the 795x Master device - and a programmed destination – a database location ID on the
795x Slave devices.
Figure 7a.2.1 : Peer-To-Peer List Anatomy

PEER-TO-PEER LIST
(with practice values)
Source Destination
(Location IDs) (Location IDs)
"Indicated
Volume Rate" 661 01 661 01 "Indicated
02 02 Volume Rate"
256 662
"Actual Cycle 03 03 "Gross
Time" (Off) (Off) Volume Rate"
(Off) 20 (Off) 20
1
These lists are wholly independent of the High Speed Lists that are set-up on one (or more) 795x MODBUS slaves for access by
non-795x MODBUS Master devices.
2
To find out the database location ID for any parameter, navigate the menu system to the applicable menu data page and then
press the ‘a’ soft-key once. The 4-digit database location ID is then displayed on the fourth line of the LCD display.
Page 7a.4 Issue: AA

INTRODUCTION PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS
Each 795x Slave device is allocated one of the two lists. This is a user-selection and is made when defining
slaves whilst setting up the 795x Master device.
Once lists are programmed, peer-to-peer operations are commenced on the 795x Master by a selecting an
“Enable” option (‘soft-command’) through a menu data page. For each correctly listed parameter, a value is then
read from the database, incorporated into a MODBUS ‘write’ command message and transmitted from the 795x
Master device to the database on designated 795x Slave devices.
All peer-to-peer lists, in use, are processed in full during a single machine cycle. This is repeated once every cycle
until peer-to-peer operations are stopped by a “disable” ‘soft-command’.
In a network of two 795x Flow Computers – a Master device and a Slave device, the Master is able to detect all
failures to communicate with the slave and it raises a system alarm. With one slave, every MODBUS (‘write’)
command message is explicitly addressed and that solicits a response from that slave. The absence of a response
after a period (of retries) is how the Master detects a failure 3.
In a network of multiple slaves, MODBUS ‘write’ command messages use an all-slave broadcast address, which
does not solicit any response and, therefore, the Master does not detect a communication failure. In this case, the
system alarm is not raised.
When the system alarm can not be cleared without it re-appearing during the next machine cycle, there are
continuous communication failures. It is advisable to temporarily halt peer-to-peer operations, clear all related
alarms and investigate (and correct) the difficulty before resuming.
Figure 2: Peer-To-Peer - Basic RS232 Arrangement
MODBUS Logical
795x MODBUS Commands Link
Master Device
LIST ONE
RS-232 795x MODBUS

DATABASE P1 P2 DATABASE
LINK Slave Device 1
LIST TWO
Figure 3: Peer-To-Peer - Basic RS485 Arrangement
795x MODBUS 795x MODBUS

Master Device P3 DATABASE
Slave Device 1
LIST ONE
795x MODBUS
P2 DATABASE
Slave Device 2
RS-485
DATABASE P2
LINK
LIST TWO
795x MODBUS
P3 DATABASE
Slave Device 3
MODBUS Logical
Commands Link
3
This type of failure is normally the symptom of a faulty/unsuitable cable, incorrect set-up of communication parameters or the
absence of a physical connection to a MODBUS network.
Issue: AA Page 7a.5

PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS INSTRUCTIONS

7a.2.2 Configuring and activation instructions
Follow these instructions to configure and activate peer-to-peer communications…
1. Ensure that 795x Flow Computers are already interconnected to form a MODBUS network
Guidance on the necessary RS-232 or RS-485 wiring 4 connections is in Chapter 7. Several peer-to-peer
arrangements are shown on page 7a.5.
2. Program a 795x Flow Computer to be the MODBUS master device

(2a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Ports”>
(2b) Select the menu for the serial port that is connected to the MODBUS network
(2c) Program the basic communications parameters for that serial port, as shown in Menu Data List 1. Some
localised menu searching is required.
CONNECTING MORE THAN ONE SERIAL PORT TO THE A PEER-TO-PEER MODBUS

NETWORK WILL CAUSE UNPREDICTABLE RESULTS
Menu Data List 1: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters
Menu Data * Instructions and Comments

Comms port owner Select the option with “Modbus master” as the description
Port Baud rate Select a rate that is agreed for the 795x Master device and all the slaves devices
Port char format Select a character transmission format (as agreed for the MODBUS network)
Port handshaking Select either “None” or “XonXoff” unless the cable (wiring) supports “CTS/RTS”
Port RS232 / 485 Select the signalling standard for the MODBUS network **
P Modbus word order *** Not applicable to the 795x Master device
Port Modbus mode Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices.
P MODB slave addr *** Not applicable to a 795x Master device. The existing setting does not affect it.
P Modbus features Not applicable to a 795x Master device. The existing setting does not affect it.
P long reg access *** Choose either single register or multiple register formatted MODBUS commands
P MODB precision *** Choose a precision option that is agreed for the Master and all the slaves devices
* On-screen version of a menu data page descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port
** A 795x may perform ‘warm restarts’ if it is configured to use RS-232 when connected to an RS-485 network
*** Abbreviations: “P ” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
(2d) Navigate to this menu:

<”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Modbus master”>/<”Peer to peer”>
(2e) Program the peer-to-peer lists

Peer List One Menu: <Configure”>/…<”Modbus master”>/<”Peer to Peer”>/<”Peer list 1”>
Peer List Two Menu: <Configure”>/…<”Modbus master”>/<”Peer to Peer”>/<”Peer list 2”>
When programming a list, it is very important to use the first available (unused) entry and to not leave
gaps. This will avoid inadvertently shortening the list.
Programming a valid location number for a source will immediately result in the number changing to the
parameter descriptor. The destination does not do this because the edited location number stays
displayed as the edited number. Editing a location number for a parameter that does not exist is
responded with a “*** ERROR ***” message appearing briefly and the original setting is then restored.
By default, destinations (location IDs) are automatically synchronised with the corresponding sources.
This is ideal for when Flow Computers are running the same software release. However, the source and
destination (IDs) do not have to be the same. For each list, there is a peer-to-peer configuration
4
To avoid the risk of ‘warm restarts’, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard – RS-232 or RS-485 – for 795x serial ports
before establishing the physical connections.
Page 7a.6 Issue: AA

INSTRUCTIONS PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS
parameter, <PeerLn dest/src>, to stop the synchronising action and enable IDs to be different.
This feature allows 795x slave devices to run releases other software versions and still get updates from
the Master device. Re-enabling the synchronising will immediately trigger the overwriting of all destination
IDs with the source IDs, losing the destination IDs forever.
Values go directly into the 795x database of a slave unless serial communications is prohibited. Security
parameters for serial communications are found within <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”Security”>.
(2f) Inform the 795x Master about all 795x slave devices on the network
(Note: Start by programming details of your first slave using parameters within the “Device 1” menu)
Slave device func ** Select the option with “Peer” as the description.
Slv device port no ** Select the serial port that is connected to same the network as the slave
Slv device address ** Use “0” if there are multiple slaves. Otherwise, use the address of the slave
Device word swap Not applicable to the 795x but may be needed by protocol listening devices
Device precision Use a precision option that is the same as the 795x MODBUS Master
Device peer list Select the option that corresponds to one of the two peer-to-peer lists
* On-screen version of menu data descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port
** Abbreviations: “Slv” = Slave, “func” = Function, “port no” = port number
3. Program each remaining 795x to be a MODBUS slave device

(3b) Select a menu that corresponds to the serial port that is connected to the RS-485 network
(3c) Set-up basic communications parameters…
Comms port owner Select the option with “Modbus slave” as the description
Port Baud rate Select a rate that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices
Port char format *** Select a rate that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices
Port handshaking Select the same option as used for the 795x Master device
P Modbus word order *** Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices
Port Modbus mode Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices
P MODB slave addr *** Edit a value that does not conflict with other MODBUS network devices
P Modbus features *** Not applicable to peer-to-peer operations
P long reg access *** Select the same option as used for the 795x Master device
P MODB precision *** Select the same option as used for the 795x Master device
* On-screen version of menu data descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port
4. Start peer-to-peer communications at the 795x Master device

(4a) Navigate to: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Modbus master”>
(4b) Locate the menu data page with “Peer enable” on-screen
(4c) Select the “Enable” soft-command (option)
Once enabled, it is advisable to stop (deactivate) peer-to-peer communications prior to adjusting the
communications set-up. Once changes have been made, re-enable the peer-to-peer function with step 4.
Issue: AA Page 7a.7

Page 7a.8 Issue: AA

HIGH-SPEED LIST
COMMUNICATIONS
(CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM ‘B’)

158 Edinburgh Avenue, Addendum Issue: AA, July 2000
2000, Solartron
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications Software Version 1540, Issue 5.40 (or higher)
Page 7b.2 Issue: AA

Software Version 1540, Issue 5.40 (or higher) Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
ABOUT THIS ADDENDUM
7b.1 What is the purpose if this addendum?

This addendum has been written to provide a guide to the software support for HSL - High Speed List –
communications over a MODBUS protocol network.
To use this guide effectively, it is essential to be familiar with the 795x keypad functions, moving around the
menu system and editing. (Chapter 5 can help with this)
The data necessary for configuring a measurement/feature can be found in separate parts of the menu
structure. A notation has been used as a short method of explaining how to move from the present menu to
another menu.
As an example, the notation of <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”> translates into these steps:

Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key
Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW (‘V’) key to scroll through pages until the word “Configure” is seen.
Step 3: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Configure”.
Step 4: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word “Flow rate” is seen.
Step 5: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word “Flow rate”.
ARROW key is a much more common method of returning to a menu level.
Issue: AA Page 7b.3

Page 7b.4 Issue: AA

INTRODUCTION HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS

7B.2 FEATURE: COMMUNICATION OF PARAMETER DATA USING HIGH-SPEED LISTS
What to do here:
x An overview is in Section 7b.2.1…………..……………………………..Page 7b.3
x A list of configuration instructions is in Section 7b.2.2………..……... Page 7b.11
x A guided example in Section 7b.2.3……………………..…...…………Page 7b.14
x Wonderware compatibility notes are in Section 7b.3………….………..Page 7b.20
7b.2.1 WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THIS FEATURE?

This feature is typically used when a MODBUS Master device 1 must get parameter data from a 795x series
Flow Computer, where both are attached to the same MODBUS protocol network.
High-speed list communications facilitate the quick collection and transmission of data from up to 300 user-
nominated parameters. This is achieved by using just a small quantity of MODBUS protocol messages. It
would otherwise require an exchange of hundreds of messages.
The 795x Flow Computer also helps by collecting all the data of nominated (listed) parameters from its’
database and keeping it ‘local’. This activity is completed during every machine cycle. Keeping parameter
data ‘locally’ allows faster data access, allowing the 795x to service requests from a Master device as quickly
as possible. Hence, the term of ‘high-speed lists’.
There are two aspects to high-speed list communications:

x the MODBUS protocol (network arrangements, communication parameters and message exchanges)
x a list of parameters (i.e. 795x database locations) and
Read about each aspect in the sections that follow this overview and then look at the setting-up instructions
and the guided example.
USE OF THE MODBUS PROTOCOL

In MODBUS protocol terms, the MODBUS Master device is likely to be a supervisory system, such as
Solartron’s MCS (Modular Computer System). The Master device is responsible for acquiring parameter
data through an exchange of MODBUS protocol messages with one ore more a MODBUS networked
slave devices. The 795x Flow Computer is the MODBUS slave device, supporting RS-485 and RS-232
signalling standards.
When an RS-232 point-to-point network is the vehicle for this feature…

A Master device can request parameter data from one 795x slave device. The two MODBUS devices
can be wired together via any serial port supporting RS-232 Standard. (See Figure 1 on page 7b.5)
When an RS-485 multiple-drop network is the vehicle for this feature…

A Master device can request parameter data from one or more 795x slaves. The 795x MODBUS slave
devices can be wired together via any serial port supporting the RS-485 Standard.
(See Figure 2 on page 7b.6)
Figure 1: High Speed List Overview (RS-232 Example)

Read/Write
Database MODBUS
Operations Messages
795x MODBUS
Slave Device
High Speed List One

(Virtual Slave 2) MODBUS
Master Device
RS-232
DATABASE P1 P2 APPLICATION
LINK
High Speed List Two

(Virtual Slave 3)
Direction of flow
(HSL Data)
1
This MODBUS Master device cannot be a 795x series Flow Computer. Direct communication of a parameter value between
795x Flow Computers can be performed using the “Peer-To-Peer Lists” feature.
Issue: AA Page 7b.5
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS INTRODUCTION
Figure 2: High Speed List Overview (RS-485 Example)
MODBUS Master Device Read/Write MODBUS

Operations Messages
APPLICATION
Direction of flow
(HSL Data)
Serial
Port
High Speed List 1 High Speed List 1

(Virtual Slave '2') (Virtual Slave '2')
795x MODBUS 795x MODBUS

DATABASE P2 P3 DATABASE
Slave Device RS-485 Slave Device
Link
High Speed List 2 High Speed List 2

(Virtual Slave '3') (Virtual Slave '3')
Figure 3: High Speed List Activity Within 795x Slave Devices
HIGH SPEED LIST ONE
795x MODBUS 1 2 3 50
Slave Device Loc ID: 0661 Loc ID: 0662 Loc ID: 0000 Loc ID: 0000
V 450.015 V 448.011 V - V -
S Live S Live S - S -
LIST ONE
Copying Activity
DATABASE Every Cycle
LIST TWO Loc ID: 0661 Loc ID: 0662 Loc ID: 0663
V 450.015 V 448.011 V -
S Live S Live S -
795X DATABASE
Figure 4: Parameter List Block Organisation
HIGH-SPEED LIST ONE HIGH SPEED LIST TWO

BLOCK A BLOCK B BLOCK C BLOCK D BLOCK E BLOCK F
Indicated (Location IDs) (Location IDs) (Location IDs) (Location IDs) (Location IDs) (Location IDs)
Volume Prime
flow rate 661 01 0718 01 (Off) 01 Dynamic 2048 01 (Off) 01 (Off) 01
02 02 02 Viscosity 02 02 02
662 0595 (Off) 2111 (Off) (Off)
Gross 03 03 03 03 03 03
Volume
(Off) 1548 (Off) Prime (Off) (Off) (Off)
Kinematic
flow rate Viscosity
(Off) 50 (Off) 50 (Off) 50 (Off) 50 (Off) 50 (Off) 50
(Off) = Unused Entry (Off) = Unused Entry
Page 7b.6 Issue: AA

THE HIGH-SPEED PARAMETER LIST

2
On 795x slaves there are two individual lists for nominating the parameters – labelled as “High-speed List 1”
and “High Speed List 2” within the communications area of the menu system.
Each list has the capacity for nominating up to 150 parameters, organised into three blocks of 50 parameters.
Figure 4 on page7b.6 illustrates the three block structure for both lists. The figure shows that blocks are set-up
on an individual basis. Parameters are nominated using their own unique database location identification (ID)
number. Each entry in a block has a dedicated menu data page for editing in a location ID.
The parameter list is primarily for the 795x slave device to extract data of specific parameters from its’ database
during every machine cycle. All extracted data is stored ‘locally’ for faster and more efficient data access. It is
then accessible only to a Master device by means of MODBUS ‘read’ command messages. Figure 3 on page
7b.6 illustrates the process.
MODBUS ‘read’ command messages must be addressed to either virtual slave ‘2’ or virtual slave ‘3’ through any
MODBUS slave configured port. Virtual slave addressing is explained in Chapter 7.
MODBUS Address Information Available

Virtual Slave ‘2’ High-speed List One
Virtual Slave ‘3’ High-speed List Two
The register map at each virtual slave is initially in a pre-set format but it can be individually re-organised to suit
applications on the Master device. There are several basic styles available for selection. Follow the links in
Table 1 to get a graphical overview of default register maps for each basic style. You will also get to see how the
blocks of a parameter list are linked to a register map.
Table 1: Links to graphical overviews of high-speed lists and register maps
Styles Graphical Representation

Old Style (Legacy) * See Figure 5 on page 7b.8
Grouped See Figure 6 on page 7b.9
Ungrouped See Figure 7 on page 7b.10
* As found in 795x software released before the year 2000
2
These lists are wholly independent of the peer-to-peer lists that are set-up on a 795x MODBUS Master device.
Issue: AA Page 7b.7
Figure 5: Default Register Mappings for "Old Style" High-speed Lists 1 and 2
BLOCK A BLOCK B BLOCK C

PARAMETER LIST PARAMETER LIST PARAMETER LIST
01 01 01
02 02 02
50 50 50
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS

(VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP) (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP) (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
HSL-1 Grouped 0
1 1001 2001
Start Register = 0 00 200 d
Values - 10 d Values 1- Values
51 nuse 105 unus
e
50 e u 1050 e 2050
10001 a r 11001 a r 12001
2051 - 10000 Location IDs Location IDs Location IDs
are unused 10050 11050 12050
20001 21001 22001
Types and Sizes Types and Sizes Types and Sizes
20050 21050 22050
30001 31001 32001
Status Status Status
30050 31050 32050
40001 41001 42001
Full Attributes Full Attributes Full Attributes
40050 41050 42050
HSL-1 BLOCK A HSL-1 BLOCK B HSL-1 BLOCK C
Block A Block B Block C

HIGH-SPEED HIGH-SPEED LIST 1
LISTS HSL-1 BLOCKS
VIRTUAL SLAVE 2
HSL ONE
HSL TWO
VIRTUAL SLAVE 3
HSL-2 BLOCKS
HIGH-SPEED LIST 2
Block D Block E Block F
HSL-2 BLOCK D HSL-2 BLOCK E HSL-2 BLOCK F

BLOCK 'D' SECTIONS BLOCK 'E' SECTIONS BLOCK 'F' SECTIONS
HSL-2 Grouped
1 0 1001 00 2001
Start Register = 0
Values 100 Values - 20 d Values
51 - nused 051 use
50 u 1050 1 re un 2050
10001 are 11001 a 12001
2051 - 10000 Location IDs Location IDs Location IDs
are unused 10050 11050 12050
20001 21001 22001
20050 21050 22050
30001 31001 32001
30050 31050 32050
40001 41001 42001
40050 41050 42050
BLOCK D BLOCK E BLOCK F

01 01 01
02 02 02
50 50 50
Page 7b.8 Issue: AA

Figure 6: Default Register Mappings for "Grouped" High-speed Lists 1 and 2

01 01 01
02 02 02
50 50 50
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL
(VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP) (VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP) SLAVE 2 REGISTER M AP)
HSL-1 Grouped
0 50 100
Start Register = 0
Values Values Values
150 49 200 99 250 149
Location IDs Location IDs Location IDs
199 249 299
300 350 400
349 399 449
450 500 550
499 549 599
600 650 700
649 699 749

LISTS HSL-1 BLOCKS
VIRTUAL SLAVE 2
HSL ONE
HSL TWO
VIRTUAL SLAVE 3
HSL-2 BLOCKS
HIGH-SPEED LIST 2

BLOCK 'D' SECTIONS BLOCK 'E' S ECTIONS BLOCK 'F' SECTIONS
HSL-2 Grouped
0 50 100
Start Register = 0
150 49 200 99 250 149
199 249 299
300 350 400
349 399 449
450 500 550
499 549 599
600 650 700
649 699 749

01 01 01
02 02 02
50 50 50
Issue: AA Page 7b.9

Figure 7: Default Register Mappings for "Ungrouped" High-speed Lists 1 and 2

01 01 01
02 02 02
50 50 50

HSL-1 Grouped
0 250 500
Start Register = 0
50 49 300 299 550 549
99 349 599
100 350 600
149 399 649
150 400 650
199 449 699
200 450 700
249 499 749

LISTS HSL-1 BLOCKS
VIRTUAL SLAVE 2
HSL ONE
HSL TWO
VIRTUAL SLAVE 3
HSL-2 BLOCKS
HIGH-SPEED LIST 2

BLOCK 'D' SECTIONS BLOCK 'E' SECTIONS BLOCK 'F' SECTIONS
(VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER M AP) (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP) (VIRTUAL SLAVE 3 REGISTER MAP)
HSL-2 Grouped
0 250 500
Start Register = 0
50 49 300 299 550 549
99 349 599
100 350 600
149 399 649
150 400 650
199 449 699
200 450 700
249 499 749

01 01 01
02 02 02
50 50 50
Page 7b.10 Issue: AA

HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS INSTRUCTIONS

7b.2.2 Configuring and Activation Instructions
Follow these instructions to configure and activate high-speed list communications:
1. Ensure that 795x Flow Computers are already interconnected to form a MODBUS network
Guidance on the necessary RS-232 or RS-485 wiring 3 connections is in Chapter 7.
2. Program a 795x Flow Computer to be the MODBUS slave device

(2b) Select the menu that is appropriate for the serial port that is connected to the MODBUS network
(2c) Program the basic communications parameters for that serial port, as shown in Menu Data List 1. Some
localised menu searching is required.
Menu Data List 1: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters

Comms port owner Select the option with “Modbus slave” as the description
Port Baud rate Select a rate that is agreed for the Master device and all the 795x slaves devices
Port char format Select a character transmission format (as agreed for the MODBUS network)
Port handshaking Select either “None” or “XonXoff” unless the cable (wiring) supports “CTS/RTS”
P Modbus word order *** Select an option that is compatible with the Master device
Port Modbus mode Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices.
P MODB slave addr *** Program the base address of this slave
P Modbus features Select an option that includes “L1”/“List1” for HSL-1 and “L2”/“List2” for HSL-2
P long reg access *** Choose to accept either the single or multiple register MODBUS command format
P MODB precision *** Select a precision option that is compatible with the Master device
* On-screen version of a menu data page descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port
3. Program High Speed List ‘1’ (if applicable)

(3a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Modbus slave”>
(3b) Select the menu that is appropriate for HSL-1
(3c) Program the configuration parameters for HSL-1, as guided in Menu Data List 2
Menu Data List 2: HSL-1 Configuration Parameters (Part One)
Menu Data
Instructions and Comments
(as displayed)
List 1 word order x This selection overrides the serial port setting
List 1 block layout x Select default register map organisation: “Old Style”, “Grouped” or “Ungrouped” *
L1 grouped start reg x Program the number of the first register space for the complete register map **
* See pages 7b.8, 7b.9 and 7b.10 for a graphical view of the default register map for each selectable style
(3d) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in ‘Block A’ (if applicable)
Note: This step does not apply when the “Old Style” (legacy) register map layout is chosen in step 3c
Table 2 lists descriptors for identifying the menu data pages associated with viewing and editing the
existing register map in ‘Block A’. Alongside the descriptors are default settings for every selectable block
layout style.
3
To avoid the risk of ‘warm restarts’, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard – RS-232 or RS-485 – for 795x serial ports
before establishing the physical connections.
Issue: AA Page 7b.11

Editing of the start registers is only required when the default settings form a register map that is
unsuitable for the application on the Master device.
Table 2: Configuration Parameters for Section Start Registers of HSL-1 Block A
Menu Data Default Start Registers Default Start Registers Default Start Registers
(as displayed) (“Old Style” mapping) (“Grouped” mapping) (“Ungrouped” mapping)
L1A vals start reg 1 0 0
L1A locs start reg 10001 150 50
L1A types start reg 20001 300 100
L1A status start reg 30001 450 150
L1A attrs start reg 40001 600 200
Note: Also see Table 3 and Table 4 for the default settings of the other HSL-1 blocks
(3e) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in ‘Block B’ (if applicable)
Note: This step does not apply when “Old Style” (legacy) register map has been chosen in step 3c
present register map of ‘Block B’. Alongside the descriptors are the default settings for every selectable
block layout style.
Table 3: Configuration Parameters for Section Start Registers of HSL-1 Block B
Menu Data * Default Start Registers Default Start Registers Default Start Registers
(as displayed) (“Old Style” map) (“Grouped” map) (“Ungrouped” map)
L1B vals start reg 1001 50 250
L1B locs start reg 11001 200 300
L1B types start reg 21001 350 350
L1B status start reg 31001 500 400
L1B attrs start reg 41001 650 450
Note: Also see Table 2 and Table 4 for the default settings of the other HSL-1 blocks
(3f) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in ‘Block C’ (if applicable)
Note: This step does not apply when “Old Style” (legacy) register map has been chosen in step 3c
present register map of ‘Block C’. Alongside the descriptors are the default settings for every selectable
block layout style.
Table 4: Configuration Parameters for Section Start Registers of HSL-1 Block C
Menu Data * Default Start Registers Default Start Registers Default Start Registers
(as displayed) (“Old Style” map) (“Grouped” map) (“Ungrouped” map)
L1C vals start reg 2001 100 500
L1C locs start reg 12001 250 550
L1C types start reg 22001 400 600
L1C status start reg 32001 550 650
L1C attrs start reg 42001 700 700
Note: Also see Table 2 and Table 3 for the default settings of other HSL-1 Blocks

(3g) Program the high-speed list with the location ID of each parameter to be made available to the Master
Menu Data List 3 lists the descriptors of the menu data pages for programming the ‘Block A’ partition with
location IDs of up to 50 parameters. The menu data pages are easily located within the 795x menu
system under the <“Block A”> sub-menu.
Menu Data List 3 : ‘BLOCK A’ Parameter Entries 1–50
Menu Data (as displayed) Purpose

DBM list 1A ptr 1 * BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST ENTRY 1
DBM list 1A ptr 2 * BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST ENTRY 2
: :
DBM list1A ptr 50 * BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST ENTRY 50
* Abbreviation: “ptr” = pointer (a programming term)
The menu data pages for programming entries in ‘Block B’ and ‘Block C’ are easily located within the
menu system under the <“Block B”> and <“Block C”> sub-menus.
It is good practice to start with ‘Block A’ before progressing to ‘Block B’. Likewise, start with ‘Block B’
before progressing to ‘Block C’. It is not necessary to fully utilise a block before using another.
When programming in location identification numbers (IDs), it is very important to use the first available
(unused) entry and to not leave gaps. This will avoid inadvertently shortening the list. (See Figure 8)
Figure 8: Correct and Incorrect Programmed Parameter Lists
HIGH SPEED LIST '1' HIGH SPEED LIST '1'

(Programmed Correctly)
(Programmed Incorrectly)
BLOCK A BLOCK B BLOCK C BLOCK A BLOCK B BLOCK C
(Location IDs) (Location IDs) (Location IDs) (Location IDs) (Location IDs) (Location IDs)
"Indicated 01 01 01 "Indicated 01 01 01
Volume Rate"
661 0718 (Off) Volume Rate"
661 0718 (Off)
662 02 0595 02 (Off) 02 (Off) 02 (Off) 02 (Off) 02
"Gross (Off) 03 1548 03 (Off) 03 "Gross 662 03 0595 03 (Off) 03

Volume Rate" Volume Rate"
(Off) 50 (Off) 50 (Off) 50 (Off) 50 (Off) 50 (Off) 50
(Off) = Unused Entry (Off) = Unused Entry
Programming in a valid location number will immediately result in the number changing to the parameter
descriptor. Editing a location number for a parameter that does not exist is responded with a
“** ERROR **” message appearing briefly and the original setting is then restored.
4. Program High Speed List ‘2’ (if it is to be used )

Repeat steps 3a to 3g but this time it is for configuring HSL-2.

HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS GUIDED EXAMPLE

7b.2.3 Guided Example: Accessing a HSL over a MODBUS network
This section is a practical guide to collecting parameter data from a 795x MODBUS Slave through the high-speed list
feature. For this guided example, High-speed List ‘1’ (HSL-1) has been used.
What to do here:
1. Review the 795x slave configuration
Menu Data List 4 and Menu Data List 5, both on page 7b.15, show configuration details for this guided
example. These checklists should be used in conjunction with the “Instructions” section on page 7b.11.
MODBUS feature settings for the serial port have been chosen especially to obtain the MODBUS message
sequences that are shown later. For a full list of configuration parameters for serial communications, please
refer to the “Instructions” section on page 7b.11.
For the purpose of this guided example, instructions assume that the Master device is already set-up.
2. Review the MODBUS message sequences

MODBUS message sequences aim to show the best approach to accessing high-speed list parameter data
through a MODBUS register map at a virtual slave address. For this guided example, the “Old Style” default
register map has been used.
Every example features an objective, an action and a result…
Objective(s)
For an example, the objective could be to read a value from two listed parameters.
Action(s)
Actions consist of one or more ‘read’ and ‘write’ MODBUS protocol commands. They are represented in
this documentation as tabulated hexadecimal values in sequence for transmission by the Master device.
Expected replies from the 795x MODBUS slave device are also shown as tabulated values.
Table 5 is a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to
distinguish the important elements of the message.
Result
This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS slave response to an action. There may be a reference to
3. Experiment
Try out the examples and then adapt them to suit your requirements
Table 5 : Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences
Abbreviation Meaning
Slv. Virtual slave address. It is 0x03 for this guided example.
Fn. Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Reg. Cnt Number of registers requested
Reg. ID MOBUS register number
DC Number of ‘data bytes’ in reply

GUIDED EXAMPLE HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
Menu Data List 4: HSL-1 Set-up for Guided Example
Menu Data (as displayed) Value/Option Comment

List 1 word order “Modbus default”
List 1 block layout “Old-style” The register map for this example is shown in Figure 9.
L1 grouped start reg 0
DBM list 1A ptr 1 0661 ID is for Indicated Volume flow rate
DBM list 1A ptr 2 0662 ID is for Gross Volume flow rate
DBM list 1A ptr 3 0000 ID is for “Off” - terminates the parameter list for Block A
DBM list 1B ptr 1 0773 ID is for integer part of the Indicate Volume flow total
DBM list 1B ptr 2 0772 ID is for fractional part of the Indicate Volume total
DBM list 1B ptr 3 0779 ID is for integer part of the Gross Volume flow total
DBM list 1B ptr 4 0778 ID is for fractional part of the Gross Volume flow total
DBM list 1B ptr 5 0000 ID is for “Off” - terminates the parameter list for Block B
DBM list 1C ptr 1 0000 ID is for “Off” - terminates the parameter list for Block C
Notes:
1. Metering totals are stored in the database in two parts. There is one database location for the integer part and
one database location for the fractional part. They are usually not displayed within the menu system. When
communicating totals over MODBUS, transmit both the integer and fractional values. All totals displayed within
the menu system are also database locations. However, they are not suitable for transmission.
2. Abbreviations: “L1” = ‘High-speed List 1’, “reg” = register, “DBM” = Database Manager, “ptr” = pointer
3. Location identification numbers (IDs) and descriptors may differ to those listed here if you are using a later
software release
Menu Data List 5: Serial Port Set-up for Guided Example
Menu Data * Value/Option Comments

Comms port owner “Modbus slave”
P Modbus word order Modbus default
Port Modbus mode “RTU”
P MODB slave addr 1 x This is the base slave address
P Modbus features “Alarm+List1+List2” x Enables virtual slaves 1, 2 and 3
P long reg access “Single register” x Request 1 register per parameter
P MODB precision “Single” x Require 32-bit floating-point values
* Location descriptors may differ to those listed here if you are using a later software release
Figure 9: Register Map for Guided Example 1
HIGH-SPEED
LISTS HIGH-SPEED LIST
HSL BLOCKS
HSL ONE
HSL TWO
HSL-1 BLOCK A HSL 1 BLOCK B HSL 1 BLOCK C

(VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP) (REGISTER MAP) (REGISTER MAP)
1 00 1001 00 2001
Values - 10 d Values - 20 d Values
51 nuse 051 use
10001 50 re u
11001 1050 1 re un 12001 2050
a a
10050 11050 12050
20001 21001 22001
20050 21050 22050
30001 31001 32001
30050 31050 32050
40001 41001 42001
40050 41050 42050

MODBUS MESSAGE SEQUENCES:

All transmit and receive sequences 4, shown here, demonstrate use of default word ordering, single precision
(32-bit) data representation and ‘single register’ formatted commands. Transmitted messages are addressed to the
second virtual slave (base slave address + 2) for access to the “Old style” default register map of High-speed List 1.
(1a) Objective: Read values from all of the parameters listed in High-speed List One (HSL-1)
Action 1 of 3: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 1 (Values Section, ‘Block A’)
Values expected in the reply are 3600.125 and 3546.123, both in base units of m3/hour.
Transmit 03 03 00 01 00 02 94 29
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk Sum
Receive 03 03 08 45 61 02 00 45 5D A1 F8 D7 88
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The Data … The Data … The Data Chk sum
Result:
x 45610200 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3600.125 (in base units of m3/hour)
x 455DA1F8 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3546.123 m3/hour
Note:
When using the single register mode, the number of registers to be read is the same as the number of
parameters to be read from the associated block. This happens to be two for ‘Block A’ in this example.
Action 2 of 3: Read four registers starting from MODBUS register 1001 (Values Section, ‘Block B’)
Transmit 03 03 03 E9 00 04 94 5B
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. Chk. sum
Receive 03 03 10 46 18 3C 00 3F 19 0A B1 46 15
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The Data … The Data … The Data … The
Receive F4 00 3E E3 40 94 24 24
Meaning Data … The Data … … Chk. Sum
Result:
1st. Volume Flow Total… (Integer + Fraction)
x 46183C00 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 9743 (in base units of m3/hour)
x 3F190AB1 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.59781936 (in base units of m3/hour)
2nd. Volume Flow Total… (Integer + Fraction)
x 4615F400 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 9597 (in base units of m3/hour)
x 3EE34094 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.44385207 (in base units of m3/hour)
Note:
Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the selected
display format for volume categorised data.
Action 3 of 3: Read 1 register starting from MODBUS register 2001 (Values Section, ‘Block C’)
Transmit 03 03 07 D1 00 01 D4 A5
Receive 03 83 02 61 31
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. Chk sum
Result: Response indicates that there are no parameters listed in ‘Block C’
4
The MODBUS message sequences were all tested using the direct communication feature of Solartron’s free-of-charge
“FC-Config” software utility. You can find it on the Solartron web site at www.solartron.com

(1b) Objective: Write new fixed values to the two known parameters listed under ‘Block A’ of High-speed List One
Block A Decimal Value Decimal Value Block A Decimal Value Decimal Value
Entry 1 (Before Update) (After Update) Entry 2 (Before Update) (After Update)
IV rate 0 3664 GV rate 0 3712
Abbreviations: “IV” = Indicated Volume, “GV” = Gross Volume
Action 1 of 1: Write values to two registers starting from MODBUS register 1 (Values Section, ‘Block A’)
x 45650000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3664
x 45680000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3712
Transmit 03 10 00 01 00 02 08 45 65 00 00 45 68 00
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC The Data … The Data … The
Transmit 00 4C 7E
Meaning Data Chk Sum
Receive 03 10 00 01 00 02 11 EA
Result:
x Indicated Volume and Gross Volume rates are updated with new fixed values.
Notes:
x The new parameter values are expected by the slave device to be in base measurement units of m3/hour.
To find out the base units for other parameter categories, turn to Chapter 9.
(2a) Objective: Read the location IDs of the first three ‘entry’ configuration parameters of Block B
Block A Entry 1 Loc. ID Block A Entry 2 Loc. ID Block A Entry 3 Loc. ID

DBM list 1B ptr 1 2459 DBM list 1B ptr 2 2460 DBM list 1B ptr 3 2461
Action 1 of 1: Read three registers starting from MODBUS register 11001 (Loc. IDs Section, ‘Block B’)
Transmit 03 03 2A F9 00 03 DC 00
Receive 03 03 06 09 9B 09 9C 09 9D 59 1B
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The data … The Data … Chk sum
Result:
x 099B is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2459 – the database location ID of <”DBM list 1B ptr 1”>
x 099C is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2460 – the database location ID of <”DBM list 1B ptr 2”>
x 099D is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2460 – the database location ID of <”DBM list 1B ptr 3”>
Note:
2AF9 (Reg. ID) is the hexadecimal representation for 11001

GUIDED EXAMPLE HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
(2b) Objective: Add an entry to ‘High-speed List 1’ via the parameter list of Block C
Action 1 of 1: Write the database location ID of <”Gross std vol rate”> into the database location of
<”DBM list1C ptr 1”> (ID: 2509)
x 09CC is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2508 – the MODBUS address for <”DBM list1C ptr 1”>
x 029D is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 0669 – the database location ID of <”Gross std vol rate”>
Transmit 01 10 09 CC 00 01 02 02 9D EE 55
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. DC The Data Chk Sum
Receive 01 10 09 CC 00 01 C2 6A
Note:
x At present, the remote manipulation of a parameter list is achieved through the register map for the 795x
database (at the base slave address). See Chapter 7 for further examples of accessing the database.
(3a) Objective: Read data type and size of a value from all parameters listed in ‘Block A’ of High-speed List One
Action 1 of 1: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 20001 (Types Section, ‘Block A’)
Transmit 03 03 4E 21 00 02 82 CB
Receive 03 03 04 07 04 07 04 9A B5
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The Data … … Chk Sum
Result:
x 0704: “07” = 32-bit floating-point data type, “04” = 4 bytes for representing the value
Note:
x See Table 7 on page 7b.19 when interpreting other codes for the data type and size
(4a) Objective: Read value status from each parameter listed in ‘Block A’ of High-speed List One
Action 1 of 1: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 30001 (Status Section, ‘Block A’)
Transmit 03 03 75 31 00 02 8E 2A
Receive 03 03 04 00 01 00 00 88 33
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. The Data … … Chk Sum
Result:
There are four bytes of parameter data returned: 0x0001 and 0x0002
x 0x0001 = “Set” value status
x 0x0000 = “Live” value status
Note:
For the interpretation of other codes, refer to Table 6 on page 7b.19.

Table 6: Codes for all returned states
Value * State Return

0x0000 x Live
0x0001 x Set
0x0002 x Fail
0x0003 x Fallback
0x00FF x No state
* All values in this table are hexadecimal numbers
Table 7: Interpreting Data from Type and Size Requests
Database Location Type Size (Bytes) * Type (Code)

x Character 2 1
x 32-bit floating-point number 4 7
x 64-bit floating-point number 8 8
x Character String 22 9
x Multiple-choice (List) Option 2 10
x Location pointer 2 11
x Time and date 16 12
* All values in this column are decimal numbers

WONDERWARE COMPATIBILITY NOTES

7b.3 Using Wonderware’s Modbus I/O Server With High-Speed Lists
Background
The MODBUS specification glances over the concept of different address ranges containing different data
types (and only those types in that range), and therefore using different MODBUS command numbers to
manipulate the data. The specification goes on to say that ‘It is perfectly acceptable, and very common, to
regard all four tables as overlaying one another, if this is the most natural interpretation on the target
machine in question’. While individual manufacturers have mostly banded their data somewhat, but in
smaller bands that do not fit this ‘four-table’ approach, Wonderware’s software has stuck to the separate
address range method rigidly. For some individual manufacturers it has knowledge of, it has allowed them
to specify their own arrangements, and will honour them; without that, you must use absolute addressing,
which relies on the different command numbers for different ranges. Because Solartron flow computers only
support commands 3 and 16 covering the whole range of 0 – 65535, absolute addressing cannot be used;
up until now, none of the other manufacturers’ implementations could be used either.
Now
With the flexibility of the new high-speed lists, it is now possible to get most important data by simulating
one of the other manufacturers. In the future, Wonderware will support Solartron’s 795x series directly.
For now, here is how you can read floating-point data types and long integers (totals in their most accurate
representation) using Wonderware:
1. Configure the communications parameters on the 795x

<Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Communications><Ports>
<Port X>/<Modbus parameters>/<Slave features> Ö “Alarm+L1+L2+Dlog” (recommended)
<Port X>/<Modbus parameters>/<Long reg access> Ö “Single register”
<Port X>/<Modbus parameters>/<Real precision> Ö “Single precision”
<Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Communications>/<Modbus slave>

<High-speed list 1>/<Word order> Ö “Modbus default”
<High-speed list 1>/<Layout> Ö “Grouped” (recommended)
<High-speed list 1>/<Grouped start address> Ö 7001 (required for compatibility reasons)
<High-speed list 2>/<Word order> Ö “Modbus default”
<High-speed list 2>/<Layout> Ö “Grouped” (recommended)
<High-speed list 2>/<Grouped start address> Ö 15001 (required for compatibility reasons)
With this arrangement floating-point values can be read from ‘high-speed list 1’ and long integers read
from ‘high-speed list 2’. If you need to be able to read ‘floats’ and ‘longs’ from the same high-speed list,
you will need to choose the “Ungrouped” style of register map and re-organise the start registers for
each block section as appropriate. You will not be able to read ‘floats’ and ‘longs’ from within the same
block, as they require different address ranges.
2. Configure Wonderware’s Modbus I/O server:

(2a) Configure the “Topic Definition” - choose a name such as “Solar25x0L1”
(2b) Select the MODBUS slave address - the base address + 2 (for high-speed list 1)
(2c) Select “Omni” as the ‘Slave device type” – Omni’s arrangement is the only one currently which can
be used with the 795x series
(2d) Repeat for 2a – 2c for ‘High-speed List 2’ (if applicable)
You should now be able to use the I/O server via, for example, In Touch.

DUTY/STANDBY
REDUNDANCY
(HOT BACK-UP)
(CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM ‘C’)

158 Edinburgh Avenue, Addendum Issue: AB, October 2002
2002, Solartron Mobrey Limited

Chapter 7(c) Duty/Standby Redundancy Software Version 1540, Issue 5.40 (or higher)
Page 7c.2 Issue: AB

Software Version 1540, Issue 5.40 (or higher) Chapter 7(c) Duty/Standby Redundancy
DUTY/STANDBY (HOT BACK-UP)
7C.1 WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THIS FEATURE?
The duty/standby facility allows for up to two 795x series flow computers to be connected together in an
application where dual-redundancy is required.
Duty/Standby controls the selection of a flow computer that is to be the main fiscal accounting device
(‘Duty 795x’) and a flow computer that is to be the backup device (‘Standby 795x’).
The hand-over may be automatic or manual.
7C.2 AUTOMATIC HAND-OVER

Digital (status) inputs and outputs are utilised by both the ‘Duty 795x’ and ‘Standby 795x’ in the automatic
selection process, as seen in Figure 1. In the event of any system alarm, such as those in Table 1, the
status input-output link changes logic state to invoke a hand-over. On completion of the hand-over, the
‘Standby 795x’ becomes the ‘Duty 795x’.
Once a hand-over has occurred, the new ‘Duty’ computer will raise an input alarm to indicate that a hand-
over has occurred. The alarm message is “Dty/Stby handover”. As with all alarms, associated with this
message will be a time and date stamp.
Table 1: System alarms that will invoke a hand-over
Power fail mA output no cal. Timeperiod no cal.

PRT no cal mA out cal fail. Database corrupt
mA input no cal. mA input cal fail. DBM bad triple.
DBM bad chksum. DBM power chksum. Battery failed.
Battery low. Density cal fail. Turbine no cal.
Figure 1: Status Input and Output arrangement
Input DTip Output DTop
Output DTop Input DTip
Input WDip Output WDop
Output WDop Input WDip
Flow computer 1: Flow computer 2:
WDop: Watchdog status output for system alarms on this flow computer. This status output goes true for
5 seconds after initialisation and remains true as long as the flow computer is functioning correctly.
DTop: Duty status output for this flow computer. This output is true whenever this flow computer is the
‘Duty 795x’ in the dual-redundancy scheme.
WDip: Watchdog status input from connected flow computer. This flow computer will become the ‘Duty
795x’ if this status input goes false.
DTip: Duty status input from connected flow computer. This flow computer will relinquish Duty control if
this status input goes true.
Issue: AB Page 7c.3

7C.3 INVOKING A MANUAL DUTY/STANDBY HAND-OVER
A menu location is provided to enable you to invoke the Duty/Standby hand-over either by the 795x keypad,
by an external supervisory system (RS-232/RS-485 MODBUS link) or by the result of a FC-Basic script.
The menu location is toggled between “Be Duty” and “Be Standby”:
Be Duty – By making this location true within the ‘Standby 795x’ it will automatically become the ‘Duty
795x’. This is achieved by utilising the above input output arrangement.
Be Standby – By making this location go true within the ‘Duty’ flow computer it will automatically
become the ‘Standby’ flow computer. This is achieved by utilising the above input output arrangement.
7C.4 FUNCTION TRANSFERS

In addition to the hand-over of fiscal accounting control, the ‘Duty 795x’ will transfer other functions to the
‘Standby 795x’. With field instrumentation repeated to both 795x flow computers, function transfers can
include batch transactions, proving, PID control and valve control.
Proving Control (if supported in software)

Under Duty/Standby, a proving session can only be invoked by the ‘Duty 795x’.
If the ‘Duty 795x’ is part of the way through a prove session when a failure occurs, the ‘Standby 795x’
will take over as the new ‘Duty 795x’. However, the new ‘Duty 795x’ will not able to continue in
finalising the prove-session. Intervention by an operator or a MODBUS connected supervisory system
will be required to start a new proving session.
A hand-over INFO input alarm is raised by the new ‘Duty 795x’ and recorded in the Historical Alarm
Log. As with all alarms, the time and date stamp is also recorded. This alarm can be read by an
attached metering system, which can then invoke a new prove-session if required. The hand-over
INFO alarm will not invoke a hand-over.
Once a prove-session has been completed, the derived ‘Meter factor’ or ‘K-factor’ will be copied into
the respective meter-run location in the ‘Duty 795x’. If configured, peer-to-peer communications will
update locations in the ‘Standby 795x’.
Note: Prover set-up data, such as prover type, limits, etc., will need to be configured into both the
‘Duty 795x’ and ‘Standby 795x’ flow computers.
Note: Prover abort alarms are categorised into Input or Limit alarm types. This prevents an
occurrence of a hand-over if a prove-session has failed.
Batch Control (if supported in software)

Under Duty/Standby, batch transactions are operated in the ‘Duty 795x’ and ‘Standby 795x’ in tandem.
The ‘Duty 795x’ is responsible for controlling block valves and flow control valves (FCV). The
‘Standby 795x’ calculates the batch transaction in tandem to the ‘Duty 795x’. This will help ensure
minimal loss of the batch count if a hand-over occurs.
If a hand-over is invoked during a batch transaction, the ‘Standby 795x’ will continue to batch count.
All valve control is passed to the new ‘Duty 795x’.
Note: Under Duty/Standby, PID routines can run in the ‘Standby 795x’. This is achieved by sharing
the feedback loop current into the ‘Duty795x’ and ‘Standby 795x’ flow computers. Therefore,
all of the control outputs will be repeated within the ‘Standby 795x’. If a hand-over occurs
during a PID flow controlled batch transaction, the new ‘Duty 795x’ will continue to balance the
flow through the configured meter-runs based on demand, until the batch is complete.
Page 7c.4 Issue: AB

PID Control (if supported in software)

Under Duty/Standby, the ‘Duty 795x’ and ‘Standby 795x’ should be configured to perform the same
measurement tasks. PID routines and settings should be the same, as these are specific to a field device
such as a FCV (Flow Control Valve).
The PID algorithm utilised for flow control is typically a closed-loop routine that requires feedback from the
FCV in the field. Only the ‘Duty 795x’ will be connected to drive the FCV. It is possible to share the
feedback signal from the FCV to the ‘Duty 795x’ and ‘Standby 795x’ via a signal splitter. This method will
allow the two 795x flow computers to calculate the required drive output but only the ‘Duty’ computer drive
output will be connected to the FCV.
Note: PID parameters, such as the target control variable, can be copied to the ‘Standby 795x’ using
peer-to-peer communications.
When a hand-over is invoked, external relay logic can be used to connect the new ‘Duty 795x to the FCV
and therefore drive the valve as required. The relay logic may be driven though a user configured status
output that indicates if the flow computer is the ‘Duty 795x’. (For further information on the relay logic
required, contact Solartron Mobrey.)
Valve Control (if supported in software)

Under Duty/Standby, all valve related status inputs and outputs should be connected to both the ‘Duty 795x’
and ‘Standby 795x’ flow computers. External relay logic will be needed to ensure valve drive inputs and
outputs are switched to the ‘Duty 795x’’. Valve status inputs can be connected directly to the ‘Duty’ and
‘Standby’ flow computers. (For further information on the relay logic required, contact Solartron Mobrey.)
Fiscal Total Synchronisation

A feature of Duty/Standby is to provide synchronisation of fiscal totals.
The totals from the ‘Duty 795x’ are copied to the ‘Standby 795x’ in one of two ways:
1. When the ‘Standby 795x’ is initially powered up. This is to ensure the totals have been synchronised if
a double hand-over occurs within a periodic interval period.
2. At a periodic time interval configurable by the user. This is to prevent the two flow computers from
drifting apart, e.g. if an analogue input slightly out, particularly from a flow meter analogue output.
<Configure><Duty Standby><Total Sync><Total sync period>
The periodic time interval is configurable by the user to one of the following options:
“Disable”, “1 minute”, “2 minutes”, “5 minutes” {default}, “10 minutes”, “15 minutes”, “20 minutes”,
“30 minutes”, “1 hour”, “2 hours”, “3 hours”, “4 hours”, “6 hours”, “8 hours”, “12 hours” and “24 hours”
NOTE: If the period time interval is set to “inactive”, the totals will only be updated when the ‘Standby
795x’ initially comes on-line.
There are three different options when configuring duty standby:

“Disabled” – Duty standby operation disabled. (Factory default setting).
“Enabled without totals” – No synchronisation of totals during duty standby operation, but peer list active
“Enabled with totals” – Automatic total synchronisation between Duty and Standby 795x and peer list is active.
Totals synchronisation will be carried out automatically over the peer link, and will take place after the user
specified time interval has elapsed and at the next execution of the peer link data transfer. The totals do
not require configuration into a peer list. However, other data for example Meter factor (MF), Batch size,
etc. requires configuration into the peer list. (User list 1)
Issue: AB Page 7c.5

Before the fiscal totals can be transferred to the ‘Standby 795x’, the ‘Duty 795x’ has to write to a location
which will allow the totals to be overwritten via the peer-to-peer communication link. Once the totals have
been updated on the Standby 795x, the location is reset, and in doing so protecting the fiscal totals from
any other communication activity.
A user option menu will allow the user to select which combination of Stream totals, Station totals and Net
flow totals are synchronised across the peer link.
NOTE: Fiscal totals will only be written to if option 3 above is also configured.
7C.5 USAGE OF PEER TO PEER COMMUNICATIONS
Under Duty/Standby, peer-to-peer communications is utilised by the ‘Duty 795x’ to keep the ‘Standby 795x’
up-to-date with data. (You may wish to read Addendum 7A for a full description of peer-to-peer support.)
Duty/standby usage of the peer-to-peer function utilises List One of the two peer-to-peer parameter lists.
The ‘Duty 795x’ is considered to be the master and the ‘Standby 795x’ is the slave.
Note: Data will flow in one direction only – from MODBUS master to the MODBUS slave.
When a hand-over occurs, the new ‘Duty 795x’ will become the MODBUS master on the Duty/Standby
communications link. The ‘Duty 795x’ will enable the peer link within itself and the new ‘Standby 795x’ will
switch off the peer link within itself to inhibit communications contention.
The duty/standby function can also be configured to swap the slave addresses of user selected
communications ports. This feature is particularly useful in metering systems applications whereby only the
‘Duty’ flow computer is required to communicate with the supervisory computer.
Note: Slave address swapping is unavailable when using Ethernet.
In the example below, two flow computers are configured for a Duty/Standby application. Serial ports 1 and
2 are utilised by supervisory computers. Serial port 1 is connected to one system and Port 2 is connected
to the other. The two supervisory systems may also be operating a duty/standby function between
themselves.
Configure the Duty slave address and the Standby slave address for each communications port using
the following menu:
<Configure><Other parameters><communications><Port n >
Where n is the port number.
Flow computer communication port addresses would be changed when a hand-over occurs to ensure that
the supervisory computer system always accesses data from the ‘Duty’ flow computer.
Port 1 Port 1
Slave add #1 Slave add #3
Port 2 Port 2
Slave add #2 Slave add #4
Duty Standby
Computer Computer
Page 7c.6 Issue: AB

7C.6 CONFIGURING THE 795X FLOW COMPUTER FOR DUTY/STANDBY.

The following will guide the user through the necessary steps to configure the flow computer to perform
Duty/Standby. The approach to configuring this feature should be considered carefully. You must decide
which flow computer is to be the ‘Duty’ and which is to be the ‘Standby’. The cabling between the two flow
computers must be connected. It is advisable that configuring the Duty/Standby feature is carried out
systematically, performing simple verification tests after each step. The worked example will show how to
perform these configuration steps and the tests.
Step 1.
Connect Duty/Standby cabling. This example use status inputs 6 / 7 and status output 10. At this stage,
ensure that the DutyStandby enable location is set to Disable.
<Configure><Duty Standby><Duty/stndby Enable>…Set to Disable
This will ensure that during commissioning of the inputs, the two flow computers will not ‘hunt’ between duty
and standby operation.
SK2
SK2
WDip (ip#6)
WDip (ip#6) SK2-8
SK2-8
DTip (ip#7)
SK2-9
DTip (ip#7)
SK2-9
DTop (op#10) DTop (op#10)
SK2-46 SK2-46
0 Volt 0 Volt
SK2-14 SK2-14
0 Volt 0 Volt
SK2-34 SK2-34
SK3 1 K: SK3
1 K:
+24 Volt +24 Volt

SK3-35 SK3-35
+24 Volt +24 Volt

SK3-34 SK3-34
1 K: 1 K:
Alarm Alarm
SK3-1 SK3-1
Com Common
N/O Relay SK3-3
SK3-3 N/O Relay
SK3-20 SK3-20
0 Volt 0 Volt
WDop from Relay
Figure 2: Duty/Standby connection drawing.
Issue: AB Page 7c.7

Notes:
x Status input and Status output common returns must be connected to 0V power.
x Resistor values are 1Kohm.
x System Alarm Relay output is used in the NC mode.
To ensure that the flow computer executes a hand-over during a power outage on the Duty system, some of the
status inputs and outputs must be configured to be either positive or negative logic sense.
The Duty status input (Dtip Input #7) must be set to negative logic sense:
<Configure><Status Inputs><Status Input n><Logic sense>
The Duty status output (DTop output #10) must be set to positive logic sense using:
<Configure><Outputs><Status Outputs><Status output n><status output n logic>
The watchdog output (WDop) is from the NC (Normally Closed) ‘system alarm’ relay output.
Step 2.
With the cable connected, each 795x flow computer must now be configured. The Duty/Standby feature must have
the inputs and outputs defined under the following menu:
<Configure><Duty standby><I/O allocation>
Configure the Duty Input to be from Status input #7. Remember this input is to be negative logic input sense.
Configure the Duty output to be from Digital output #10. Remember this output is to be positive logic output.
Configure the Watchdog input to be from Status input #6. This status input is positive logic input sense.
It is advisable to configure the multi-view facility such that one of the pages displays the relevant locations for
Duty/Standby operation. This will be an aid when commissioning the flow computer to perform this task. Use the
following table:
Menu name Modbus ID number Comments

Duty Stby Mode 4956 Add to line 1 of multi-view page
Status i/p 0196 Add to line 2 of multi-view page
Duty standby state 4959 Add to line 3 of multi-view page
Status o/p 0199 Add to line 4 of multi-view page
Once the multi-view page has been configured and steps 1 and 2 have been completed, the Duty/Standby feature
can be tested.
Set-up both flow computers to be a Standby by accessing the multi-view page line 3 and toggle the option to Be
Standby. This forces both the flow computers to be a Standby and will help to prevent hand-over ‘hunting’
Once this is completed, the Duty/Standby feature in one flow computer can be enabled.
<Configure><Duty Standby<Duty/Stndby Enable>……Select the option Enable no totals.
This flow computer will now assume the task of ‘Duty 795x’. Once the ‘Duty 795x’ is running as Duty, the Duty/
Standby feature should be enabled on the other flow computer – this flow computer will be forced into the Standby
role by the current Duty 795x.
Duty/Standby will now be operating and can be tested. A Duty/Standby hand-over can be invoked via the multi-view
page line 3. In the Duty 795x, change the option under this location from Idle to Be Standby. The ‘Duty 795x’ will
now become the ‘Standby 795x’ whilst the ‘Standby 795x’ becomes the new ‘Duty 795x’.
Page 7c.8 Issue: AB

Step 3.
When the flow computers are running Duty/Standby, the ‘Duty 795x’ will periodically update the ‘Standby 795x’ via
the Peer to Peer communication link with the contents in Peer List 1. This list can be configured as explained in
Chapter 7B.
This can also be tested during commissioning to ensure correct operation. This is usually accomplished by setting a
process variable that is defined in the peer list and observing it is transferred across to the ‘Standby 795x’ at the
configured cyclic rate (e.g. every cycle).
Note: The peer transfer of data and totals will not be carried out whilst the ‘Standby 795x’ is powered down. If a
hand-over has occurred, due to failure of the ‘Duty 795x’, the new Duty will wait to see that new Standby is running
before it starts to transfer data and totals. This is accomplished by the ‘Duty 795x’ monitoring the watchdog input
(WDip).
However, it is advisable to remove the metering system communications (not the peer link) from any repaired flow
computer before it is powered up as the new standby. This will help to ensure that the connected metering system
does not inadvertently access the new Standby in assuming it is the true Duty.
Step 4.
The Duty/Standby feature allows the ‘Duty 795x’ to update to fiscal totals in the ‘Standby 795x’.
The following totals can be up-dated: stream totals, station totals and net totals. The update of totals on the
‘Standby 795x’ will only be done when the respective stream is in the ‘flowing’ mode. The following menu option
allows the user to configure flow computer.
<Configure><Duty Standby><Total Sync>
For a quad-stream system, whereby the flow totals need updating on the Standby, the following must be configured:
<Configure><Duty Standby><Total Sync><Stream total sync>…for streams 1, 2, 3 and 4.
<Configure><Duty Standby><Total Sync><Station total sync>…select yes.
If using the ultrasonic flow metering support, whereby the reverse flow totals need updating on the Standby, the
following must be configured:
<Configure><Duty Standby><Total Sync><Usonic rev tsync>…select yes.
This facility can be tested by setting the ‘Duty 795x’ into the flowing mode for all streams. This is achieved by
ensuring that the input frequency signal for turbines is above the low flow cut off.
Set nominal test flow rates into the ‘Duty 795x’ and ensure that it is totalising. Monitor the ‘Standby 795x’ and
observe the flow totals updating in the Standby as per the configured total sync period.
Issue: AB Page 7c.9

Page 7c.10 Issue: AB

CHROMATOGRAPH
ACCESS OVER A
MODBUS
NETWORK
(CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM ‘D’)

158 Edinburgh Avenue, Addendum Issue: AA, August 2002
2002, Solartron Mobrey Limited

Chapter 7(d) Chromatograph Support Software Version 1540, Issue 5.40 (or higher)
Page 7d.2 Issue: AA

Software Version 1540, Issue 5.40 (or higher) Chapter 7(d) Chromatograph Support
7D.1 CHROMATOGRAPH ACCESS OVER A MODBUS NETWORK

This section is a guide to setting up a 7955 Gas Flow Computer to operate with up to four MODBUS
1
networked gas chromatographs . A brief overview of the functionality is followed by a practical example
with connection diagrams and configuration instructions.
7D.1.1 Overview
Gas Flow Computer software version 1640 can be set-up to regularly request raw gas composition
information, the gas calorific value and the gas specific gravity value for a metering-run (stream)
directly from any one of four gas chromatography devices.
Retrieved raw gas composition data is normalised (against the totalled fractions) and then forwarded on
to 7955 MODBUS Slaves for calculations or collection by another system.
Requests are first made to the chromatograph for several status flags (MODBUS registers) so that a brief
series of checks can be performed.
Checks:
1. Has a new gas analysis been completed since the last time raw gas data was obtained?
2. Is data from that new analysis available for retrieval?
3. No errors reported by the Chromatograph?
The answer has to be “yes” to all questions before progressing with a request for new gas data.
Otherwise, the whole cycle re-starts with checking the flags again after a selected, fixed interval.
Table 1 is a list of raw gas components that can be obtained by a Gas Flow Computer:
Table 1: Raw Gas Composition Components
Methane Neo Pentane Water Argon

Ethane Iso Pentane Helium
Propane C6+ Oxygen
Neo Butane Nitrogen Carbon Monoxide
Iso Butane Carbon Dioxide Hydrogen
Each component in the table is identified to the 7955 by a programmed (SET) MODBUS register number.
These numbers are visible within the 7955 menu system and can be edited to correspond to a MODBUS
register map of all four chromatographs.
The raw C6+ component can, optionally, be split by the 7955 Master into ‘weighted’ fractions of C6 (Neo
Hexane), C7 (Neo Heptane) and C8 (Neo Octane). The C6 ‘split/no split’ option and the several
‘weighting’ options are determined during the configuration process.
Newly received raw gas component values are automatically forwarded to all known 7955 MODBUS
Slaves, and then automatically normalised locally by those slaves. Normalisation will also take place on
the 7955 Master.
Table 2: Normalised Gas Fractions
Methane Neo Pentane Neo Nonane ** Water Argon

Ethane Iso Pentane Neo Decane ** Helium
Propane Neo Hexane * C6+ * Oxygen
Neo Butane Neo Heptane * Nitrogen Carbon Monoxide
Iso Butane Neo Octane * Carbon Dioxide Hydrogen
1
ABB, Daniels 2551 or Hartmann & Braun BTU8000 models supported at present.
Issue: AA Page 7d.3

Notes for Table 2:

* C6 can be split into C6 (Neo Hexane), C7 (Neo Heptane) and C8 (Neo Octane)
** Neo Nonane and Neo Decane can be ‘set’ values but are always forced (‘set’) to 0 when splitting C6+.
There is presently no support for retrieving them from a chromatograph.
The MODBUS Master-Slave arrangement enables two different types of network topology. Two worked
examples are provided as a guide to what can be achieved. Adapt these examples to suit an installation.
Master Port 2, 3, RS-485 Chromatograph Port RS-232 Chromatograph

795X 4* or 5* (Slave Device 1) 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 (Slave Device 1)
Master
7955 RS-485
Port 2,3,4 or 5 Port Port 2, 3, 4* or 5*
7955 2, 3, 4* or 5* 7955
(Run #1) (Run #1)
* 7955 add-on (Slave Device 2) (Slave Device 2)
board required
Port 2,3,4 or 5 * 7955 add-on Port 2, 3, 4* or 5*
7955 7955
(Run #2) board required (Run #2)
(Slave Device 3) (Slave Device 3)
Port 2,3,4 or 5 7955 Port 2, 3, 4* or 5*

7955
(Run #3) (Run #3)
Port 2,3,4 or 5 7955 Port 2, 3, 4* or 5*

(Run #4)
7955
(Run #4)
Arrangement One Arrangement Two
Note: Each inter-connected 7955 must be running the same version and issue of application software version 1640.
The ability to have individual chromatography devices, providing a gas composition feed from each supported
metering-run, allows for an expansion of the first two basic network arrangements.
Master Port 2, 3, RS-485 Chromatograph 'A' Master Port 2, 3, RS-485 Chromatograph 'A'
795X 4* or 5* (Slave Device 1) 795X 4* or 5* (Slave Device 1)
(Run #1) (Run #1)
Port 2,3,4* or 5*
7955 Port 2,3,4* or 5*
7955
* 7955 add-on (Slave Device 2) * 7955 add-on (Slave Device 2)
board required board required
Chromatograph 'B' Chromatograph 'B'
(Run #2) (Run #2)
Port 2,3,4* or 5*
7955 Port 2,3,4* or 5*
7955
Chromatograph 'C' Chromatograph 'C'

(Run #3) (Run #3)
Port 2,3,4* or 5*
7955 Port 2,3,4* or 5*
7955
Chromatograph 'D' Chromatograph 'D'

(Run #4) (Run #4)
Port 2,3,4* or 5*
7955 Port 2,3,4* or 5*
7955
Arrangement Three Arrangement Four
Page 7d.4 Issue: AA

7D.1.2 Worked Example One

There are two parts to this worked example:
1. Physical Connections (See below)
2. Configuration Tasks (See page 7.6)
7D.1.2.1 Physical Connections

Network Arrangement Type One
Figure 1 shows the all the pin connections for a 7955 Master, a chromatography device and four 7955
Slaves, all networked with the same wiring.
Network Arrangement Type Three

Figure 2 shows the all the pin connections for a 7955 Master, four chromatography devices and four 7955
Slaves, all networked with two sets of wiring.
Figure 1: 7955 (D-Type) / RS-485 Wiring / No handshaking - Arrangement One
7955 7955 7955 7955 7955

Master Slave Device 5 Slave Device 4 Slave Device 3 Slave Device 2
Port 2 Port 3 Port 3 Port 3 Port 3
Rx/Tx+ SK5/8 SK5/8 SK5/8 SK5/8
SK5/11
Rx/Tx- SK5/20 SK5/20 SK5/20 SK5/20 Chromatograph
SK5/23
Slave Device 1
Signal Ground SK5/7 SK5/7 SK5/7 SK5/7
SK5/7
Note: 7955 Slaves do not all have to be connected to the same serial port
Figure 2: 7955 (D-Type) / RS-485 Wiring / No handshaking - Arrangement Three
7955 7955 7955

Master Slave Device 4 Slave Device 2
Port 2 Port 3 Port 3
Rx/Tx+ SK5/8 SK5/8
SK5/11
Rx/Tx- SK5/20 Chromatograph SK5/20 Chromatograph
SK5/23
Slave Device 3 Slave Device 1
Signal Ground SK5/7 SK5/7
SK5/7
7955 7955
Port 3 Port 3 Port 3
Rx/Tx+ SK5/8 SK5/8
SK5/8
Rx/Tx- SK5/20 Chromatograph SK5/20 Chromatograph
SK5/20
Signal Ground SK5/7 SK5/7
SK5/7
Note: 7955 Slaves do not all have to be connected to the same serial port
Issue: AA Page 7d.5

7D.1.2.2 Configuration Tasks

What to do here
Review the objectives list and then work through two configuration tasks: 7955 Master and 7955 Slaves.
Chromatography devices are assumed already operational. All MODBUS communication wiring is
assumed complete, as guided in Section 7D.1.2.1.
Objectives
1. Configure the 7955 Master with: -
x Basic Serial Port Details
x MODBUS Master Details
x MODBUS Slave Details
x Chromatography Device Details
2. Configure each 7955 Slave with: -

x Basic Serial Port Details (Page 7.10)
7955 Master Task

Follow these instructions for configuring the 7955 MODBUS Master: -
(Basic Serial Port Details)
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Communications”>/<“Ports”>
2. Select an appropriate menu for the 7955 serial port that connects the 7955 Master to the same
MODBUS network as the MODBUS Slaves (i.e. chromatography device and 7955 Slaves)
3. Work through this parameter checklist: (Some menu searching is required)

Parameter Instructions and Comments
Comms port owner x Select the option descriptor with “MODBUS master”.
Port Baud rate x Select a transmission rate that is suitable for all devices on the network.
Port Char Format x Select a common format for the chromatograph and the 7955 Slaves.
Port handshaking x Select the option descriptor of “None” (for no ‘handshaking’).
Port RS232 / 485 x Select the signal standard for the network. Note (B)
Port MODBUS mode x Select the transmission mode required for the MODBUS network.
MODBUS word order x The selection for this is dependent on what the chromatograph requires.
Long reg access x The selection for this is dependent on what the chromatograph requires.
Real precision x The selection for this is dependent on what the chromatograph requires.
Notes:
A On-screen parameter names incorporate a number to identify the associated serial port.
B Serial port ‘1’ does not support the RS-485 standard.
(MODBUS Master Details)

4. Navigate to this menu:
<“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Communications”>/<“MODBus master”>
5. Locate the parameter screen with a descriptor of “Length of timeout”
6. Select the maximum allowable interval for the MODBUS Master to transmit a command and then
receive a response, without invoking a time-out condition.
The MODBUS command is re-submitted following a time-out only if the maximum number of
command re-submissions is not exceeded.
7. Locate the parameter with a descriptor of “No of retries”
Page 7d.6 Issue: AA

8. Select the maximum number of times a MODBUS command can be re-submitted to a slave before it is
discarded and the failure is recorded by a raised alarm. The 7955 will automatically re-attempt to
communicate with the slave when there is a new gas composition analysis.
(Inform the 7955 MODBUS Master of all MODBUS Slaves)

9. Navigate to this MODBUS Master sub-menu: <“Slave devices”>
10. Work through this parameter checklist once for each Slave: (Some menu searching is required)
Slave device func x Select an option descriptor to specify the function of this slave. Note (B)
Port number x Select an option descriptor to specify the serial port of the 7955 Master that
is wired to the same network as this slave device.
Slv device address x Edit (SET) the value to the MODBUS address of this slave device. In the
case of a 7955 Slave, this is the base address as explained in Chapter 7.
Device word swap x Select the option that is compatible with all MODBUS slaves on the network.
Slave device data x Decide if energy values and specific gravity values are required. Note (C)
Notes:
A On-screen parameter names incorporate a number to identify the associated serial port
B Table 3 on page 7.7 lists applicable options for informing the 7955 Master of what devices are
connected to the network
C Table 4 on page 7. 7 lists available options
Table 3: Slave Device Function Options
Option Descriptor Purpose of Option

None x Slave device is not in use at present.
Chromat A x Slave device is Chromatograph ‘A’.
Chromat B x Slave device is Chromatograph ‘B’.
Chromat C x Slave device is Chromatograph ‘C’.
Chromat D x Slave device is Chromatograph ‘D.
FC Gas x Slave device is another 7955 Gas Flow Computer.
Table 4: Basic data and extended data options
Option Descriptor Purpose of Option

Gas basic data x Energy value and specific gravity are not required
from chromatograph.
Gas extended data x Energy value and specific gravity are required
from chromatograph.
Issue: AA Page 7d.7

11. Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Chromat”>/<“FCgas ConfigTypes”>
12. Select the menu for configuration type A, B or C

Each menu contains an editable ‘MODBUS register map’ of the 7955 Slave so that a 7955 Master can
broadcast information directly to the 7955 Slave.
13. Locate the parameter screen with “Cfg new gas reg”.
This is for a 7955 Master to notify the 7955 Slave that a new gas composition has been transmitted to it
and normalisation can be performed.
14. Ensure the value is the same as the location identification (ID) number of the ‘new gas data flag’
location on the 7955 Slave. DO NOT SET THIS VALUE TO ZERO.
15. Table 5 is a checklist of parameters. Ensure that each mapping value matches the location
identification (ID) number of a corresponding parameter in the <“Raw gas data”> menu on a 7955
Slave. Edit (SET) the mapping value to 0 if the data is not required to be transmitted, or is not available.
16. Repeat steps 12 to 15 for each applicable configuration type.
17. Repeat steps 11 to 16 on the Master for all 7955 Slaves.
Table 5: Parameter list for each MODBUS Slave register map
Cfg Methane reg Cfg Nitrogen reg Cfg C6+ reg

Cfg Ethane reg Cfg CO2 reg Cfg N-Hexane
Cfg Propane reg Cfg Water reg Cfg N-Heptane
Cfg N-Butane reg Cfg Helium reg Cfg N-Octane
Cfg I-Butane reg Cfg Oxygen reg Chromat CV reg
Cfg N-Pentane reg Cfg Hyrdogen reg Chromat SG reg
Cfg I-Pentane reg Cfg Argon reg
Note: On-screen parameter names may be different to those shown here.
(Inform 7955 Master about Chromatographs ‘A’, ‘B’, ‘C’ and ‘D’)
18. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Chromat”>
19. Work through this parameter checklist for each chromatograph (A, B, C and D):
Chromat poll rate x Select the fixed interval between requests for gas composition data.
Chromat C6+ type x Select a code for the weighting of a C6 split. (See Table 6)
Note: On-screen parameter names incorporate a letter to identify a chromatograph
Table 6: C6+ Split Codes and Corresponding Weightings
C6+ Split Code C6 C7 C8

Daniels_108 0.47466 0.3534 0.17194
Daniels_109 0.5 0.5 0.0
Daniels_110 0.5 0.25 0.25
Daniels_111 0.57143 0.28572 0.14285
Page 7d.8 Issue: AA

20. Navigate to this sub-menu: <“Chromat data”>

21. Table 7 is a checklist. Ensure that each mapping value corresponds to an appropriate MODBUS register of
the chromatograph. Edit (SET) the mapping value to 0 if data is not required or if not available.
Table 7: Parameter list for editing MODBUS register numbers to match a chromatograph
Chromat Methane reg Chromat Nitrogen reg Chromat C6+ reg

Chromat Ethane reg Chromat CO2 reg Chromat N-Hexane
Chromat Propane reg Chromat Water reg Chromat N-Heptane
Chromat N-Butane reg Chromat Helium reg Chromat N-Octane
Chromat I-Butane reg Chromat Oxygen reg Chromat CV reg
Chromat N-Pentane reg Chromat Hyrdogen reg Chromat SG reg
Chromat I- Pentane reg Chromat Argon reg
22. Navigate to this sub-menu: <”Chromat”>/<“Chromat conf regs”>

23. Work through this parameter checklist:
Chromat gas flag reg x ‘Set’ value to match ‘gas analysis complete’ register of chromatograph
Chromat anal flag reg x ‘Set’ value to match ‘gas analysis available’ register of chromatograph
Chromat ErrReg1 reg x (Error Register ‘1’) ‘Set’ value to match MODBUS register of chromatograph
Chromat ErrReg2 reg x (Error Register ‘2’) ‘Set’ value to match MODBUS register of chromatograph
Note: ‘Set’ all values to 0 if components are to be retrieved regardless of the chromatograph status.
24. Repeat steps 18 to 23 for other chromatography devices in use

25. Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Chromat”>/<“Master stream map”>
26. Select a sub-menu for one of the metering-runs (streams)
27. Select the option descriptor that corresponds to the chromatograph device providing a gas composition feed
from that stream
28. Repeat steps 25 to 27 for all metering-runs (streams).
(End of Master 7955 instructions)
Issue: AA Page 7d.9

7955 Slave Task

Follow these instructions when configuring each 7955 Slave: -
(Basic Serial Port Information)
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Communications”>/<“Ports”>
2. Select an appropriate menu for the 7955 serial port that connects this 7955 Slave to the same MODBUS
network as the chromatography device and the 7955 Master.
3. Work through this parameter checklist: (Some menu searching is required)

Comms port owner x Select the option descriptor with “MODBUS slave”.
Port Baud rates x Select a transmission rate that is suitable for all devices on the network.
Port Char Format x Select a common format for communications with the 7955 Master.
Port handshaking x Select the option descriptor of “None” (for no ‘handshaking’).
Port RS232 / 485 x Select the signal standard for the network. Note (B)
Port MODBUS mode x Select the transmission mode required for the MODBUS network.
P MODBUS word order x The selection for this is dependent on what the 7955 Master requires.
P MODB slave add x ‘Set’ the MODBUS address of this MODBUS Slave.
P Long reg access x The selection for this is dependent on what the 7955 Master requires.
P real precision x The selection for this is dependent on what the 7955 Master requires.
Notes:
A On-screen parameters incorporate a number to identify the associated serial port
B Serial port ‘1’ does not support the RS-485 signalling standard.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 on each 7955 Slave
(Inform 7955 Slave about chromatography devices supplying them direct)

5. Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Chromat”>/<“FC gas stream map”>
6. Select a sub-menu for one of the metering-runs (streams)
7. Select the option descriptor that corresponds to the chromatograph device providing a gas composition
feed from that stream
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 for all metering-runs (streams).
(End of 7955 Slave instructions)
Page 7d.10 Issue: AA

‘INTELLIGENT
TRANSMITTER’
MONITOR
(CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM E)
Chapter 7E: Intelligent Instrument Monitor Software Version 1540, Issue 5.80 (or higher)
Copyright © 2004
Solartron Mobrey Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
Solartron-Mobrey pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specification in this
document may therefore be changed without notice.
To the best of our knowledge, the information contained in this document is accurate and Solartron-Mobrey cannot
be held responsible for any errors, omissions or other misinformation contained herein. No part of this document
may be photocopied or reproduced without the prior written consent of Solartron-Mobrey.
Page 7E-2 (April 2004)

Software Version 1540, Issue 5.80 (or higher) Chapter 7E: Intelligent Instrument Monitor)
Chapter 7E ‘Intelligent’ Transmitter Monitor
7E.1 Overview
Chapter 7E is a guide to accessing process variables and diagnostic data from an ‘intelligent’ transmitter.
®
The transmitter must have a communication port that supports RS-485 MODBUS communications.
Data read or written by the 795x Flow Computer can be in integer or floating-point format. When a floating-
point value is read, it can be ‘forwarded’ to user-specified parameter (database location). In addition to this
forwarding process, a floating-point value can be automatically re-scaled into alternative units.
The monitoring feature operates with ‘intelligent’ transmitters, such as the Micro Motion® Series 2000
(multivariable) digital transmitter (liquid) and Daniel Senior Sonic™ flow meter (gas).
®
In the case of the Micro Motion digital transmitter, it may require some pre-configuring. This is explained
in Section 7E.2, along with a step-by-step procedure.
7E.1.1 Transmitter Monitor features

Features:
• Monitor on/off selection switch.
• Polling method selection.
• Polling interval selection.
• Up to 48 registers for accessing 16-bit integer data of transmitter variables (and other data.)
• Up to 4 registers for accessing 32-bit (Long) integer data of transmitter variables (and other data.)
• Up to 24 registers for accessing 32/64-bit floating-point data of transmitter variables (and other data.)
• Forwarding of floating-point data to target parameters (database locations) with optional re-scaling. *
• Support for accessing registers in Message Blocks, as used by Daniel Senior Sonic™ flow meter.
• Input alarm, “Modb fail slv” raised upon occurrence of communication error or time-out. **
* An Input alarm, “Modb bad target”, is raised if target parameter is not in a fixed list of parameters
(see Table 1, page 7E-6).
** The alarm message includes slave identification number (1-16) and activity (“R” – read failed or “W” – write failed).
7E.1.2 Where is the Transmitter Monitor in the 795x menu system?

Figure 1 (below) shows how to navigate from the MAIN MENU to the TRANSMITTER MONITOR menu,
and includes the keypad strokes needed to arrive at the menu.
Apart from this menu, basic details of a 795x serial port must also be configured. The menus for this task
are located in the COMMUNICATIONS menu. Note: The full setting-up procedure is in Section 7E.3.
x2
Configure d
x4
Other parameters c
Communications b
MODBus master c
Transmitter monitor a
Note: Menus illustrated here are for release of software version 1540 at time of publication of manual.
Figure 1: Navigation to the TRANSMITTER MONITOR menu
(April 2004) Page 7E-3

7E.1.3 What is in the TRANSMITTER MONITOR menu?

Figure 2 shows a map of the menu and gives a briefing on the main elements. A more detailed
explanation of each element follows the diagram, pages 7E-4 to 7E-7.
Note: The full setting-up procedure is included in Section 7E.3.
Polling menu leading to

screens for configuring poll Monitor on/off selection screen.
method and polling intervals.
Poll method Monitor enable

Int interval Disable
Float interval Transmitter
Monitor menu
Enable/disable a
b Polling
Registers c
Further menus for detailing up to
Message blocks 48 registers to handle variables
d
with 16-bit integer values.
a
Message block 1 Int registers
Message block 2 Long register
Message block 3 Float registers
Message block 4 c
Message block 5 Further menus for Further menus for

Message block 6 detailing up to 8 detailing up to 24
Message block 7 registers to handle registers to handle
Message block 8 variables with 32-bit variables with
integer values. floating-point values.
Message blocks menu leading to screens

for detailing up to 8 message blocks.
Figure 2: TRANSMITTER MONITOR menu map
Monitor On/Off
Switch options are “Enable” or “Disable”.
• “Enable” – switches the Monitor on
• “Disable” – switches the Monitor off
Monitor Polling
Polling method options are “Optmize” (factory default) or “1 poll/reg”:
• “Optmize” – monitor will read registers at successive addresses in single poll
• “1 poll/reg” – monitor will read a single register at a time, working through listed registers one-by-one
Integer Interval Polling:

The factory default setting for the interval between polling Integer and Long registers is 2.0 seconds.
This can be edited to be any period you require in whatever time units are selectable (seconds, minutes,
hours, etc). If a value of 0.0 is entered, the polling is once during every machine cycle.
Float Interval Polling:

The factory default setting for the interval between polling float registers is 2.0 seconds. This can be
edited to be any period you require in whatever time units are selectable (seconds, minutes, hours, etc).
If a value of 0.0 is entered, the polling is once during every machine cycle.

Integer Register List

(Note: This is for reading a 16-bit integer value from a 16-bit register of the transmitter.)
Each entry in the list comprises parameters to detail as follows:
• Value – If “Live”, integer value from transmitter shown. If status is “Set”, value is written to transmitter.
• Slave device – Select a MODBUS Slave Device record for the transmitter (see Section 7E.1.4)
• Register address – Enter full MODBUS register address of the transmitter variable (e.g. 40392)
• Message block – If supported by transmitter, select a Message Block (see page 7E-7 for details)
• Byte offset – Applicable only if using Message Block support (see page 7E-7 for details)
Note: Forwarding and re-scaling support is not offered for integer values.
Long Register List

(Note: This is for reading a 32-bit integer value from a 32-bit register of the transmitter.)
• Value – If “Live”, integer value from transmitter shown. If status is “Set”, value is written to transmitter.
• Register address – Enter full MODBUS register address of the transmitter variable (e.g. 40392)
• Message block – If supported by transmitter, select a Message Block (see page 7D-7 for details)
• Byte offset – Applicable only if using Message Block support (see page 7D-7 for details)
Note: Forwarding and re-scaling support is not offered for integer values.
Floating-point Register List

• Value – If “Live”, raw value from transmitter shown. If status is “Set”, value is written to transmitter.
• Register address – Enter the full MODBUS register address of a transmitter variable (e.g. 40392)
• Message block – If supported by transmitter, select a Message Block (see page 7E-7 for details)
• Byte offset – Applicable only if using Message Block support (see page 7E-7 for details)
• Target location – Enter location ID of parameter (Table 1), to which is forwarded the raw/post-scaled value
• Unit – Enter a code from Table 2 to identify units of Value. (If not listed, ignore and use Scale factor)
• Scaling factor – If needed, enter a multiplier factor to scale the raw value into base units for forwarding.
If Value is in units that are not listed in Table 2 and the value is to be forwarded to a Target location, use
Scaling factor to re-scale the forwarded value into base units. The setting for Unit is then ignored.
If Value is in units that are listed in Table 2 and the value is to be forwarded to a Target location, select
only the correct unit code for Unit and ensure that Scaling factor is set to 0.

Table 1: Allowed target parameters (database locations)

Parameter Stream/run 1 Stream/run 2 Stream/run 3 Stream/run 4 Non-strm/run
Location ID Location ID Location ID Location ID Location ID
Meter temp at sensor 1582 1583 1584 1585 -
Dens tempn value 1620 1632 1644 1656 -
Meter pressure 1341 1342 1343 1344 -
Atmospheric pressure - - - - 0607
DP value @ cell 1 5062 5063 5064 5065 -
DP value @ cell 2 5066 5067 5068 5069 -
DP value @ cell 3 5070 5071 5073 5073 -
DP value @ cell 4 5074 5075 5076 5077 -
DP value @ cell 5 5078 5079 5080 5081 -
Meter dens n sensor 1998 2020 2065 2086 -
Mass rate 0205 0206 0207 0208 -
Base density B value 2016 2017 2018 2019 -
Note: Attempts to enter any other location ID for Target Location

will result in an input alarm, “MODB bad target”.
Table 2: Codes for Unit parameter

Code Temperature Pressure Density Mass rate
0 “Deg.C” (B) “bar abs” (B) “g/cc” “g/s”
1 “Deg.F” “Pa abs” “g/litre” “g/min”
2 “Kelvin” “kPa abs” g/m3” “g/hour”
3 “Ohms” “MPa abs” “kg/cc” “kg/s”
4 “Deg.R” “psia” “kg/litre” “kg/min”
5 (No units) “kg/cm2 abs” “kg/m3” (B) “kg/hour” (B)
6 (No units) “bar gauge” “tonnes/m3” “kg/day”
7 (No units) “Pa gauge” “oz/in3” “tonnes/min”
8 (No units) “kPA gauge” “oz/ft3” “tonnes/hour”
9 (No units) “MPa gauge” “oz/barrel” “tonnes/day”
10 (No units) “psig” “oz/gallon (UK)” “ktonnes/min”
11 (No units) “kg/c2 gauge” “oz/gallon (US)” “ktonnes/hour”
12 (No units) (No units) “lb/in3” “ktonnes/day”
13 (No units) (No units) “lb/ft3” “mtonnes/hour”
14 (No units) (No units) “lb/barrel” “mtonnes/day”
15 (No units) (No units) “lb/gallon (UK)” “oz/s”
16 (No units) (No units) “lb/gallon (US)” “oz/min”
17 (No units) (No units) “tons/ft3” “oz/hour”
18 (No units) (No units) “tons/barrel” “lb/s”
19 (No units) (No units) “tons/gallon (UK” “lb/min”
20 (No units) (No units) “tons/gallon (US)” “lb/hour”
21 (No units) (No units) (No units) “lb/day”
22 (No units) (No units) (No units) “tons/min”
23 (No units) (No units) (No units) “tons/hour”
24 (No units) (No units) (No units) “tons/day”
(B) = Base units

Message Block List

The Daniel Senior Sonic™ transmitter is different to the Micro Motion® transmitter because it has registers
grouped into blocks. In the operation manual for models 3400/3410/3420 (April 1998), there are 32 blocks
of registers. Each block has a particular purpose and features multiple registers. For example, there is a
Message Block 12 that has registers 350 - 398 for reading 48 calculation results, all floating-point values.
On the 795x Flow Computer, the 795x Message Block List will allow read or write access to any part of any
Message Block on the Daniel transmitter. Each entry in the list comprises parameters to detail an access:
• Start register – address of first register in Daniel Message Block (e.g. 350, for Message Block 8)
• Byte size – enter size of Daniel Message Block in bytes: ((End register - Start register +1) x 2)
• Number of items – enter quantity of registers that equate to a full value
As an example, consider reading register 392 (flow rate) from Daniel Message Block 12. The details to
set-up on the 795x Flow Computer are as follows:
1. Edit an entry in the Floating-point Register List

• Value – Ensure status is “Live” to see raw flow rate value from transmitter. *
• Register address – Not applicable when accessing Daniel Message Blocks.
• Message block – Select “Message Block 8”
• Byte offset – Select register to be accessed, 392, by entering an offset = (392 - 350) x 2 = 84
• Target location – Not applicable for this example.
• Unit – Not applicable for this example.
• Scaling factor – Not applicable for this example.
* When a value is “Set”, the value is written to the register. However, if the register is read-only, as
in this case, the Daniel transmitter will accept it but the register value will simply not be changed.
2. Edit entry (record) 8 of Message Block List

• Start register – enter a value of 350
• Byte size – enter size of message block in bytes = [398 - 350 + 1) x 2] = 98
• Number of items – enter quantity of registers that equate to a full value (see note below)
The correct setting for Number of items will depend on the configuration of the 795x serial port and the
transmitter, in respect of data type and data size (16-bits, 32-bits or 64-bits) of the value involved.
When the 795x serial port is configured for multiple-register access and single-precision (32-bit)
floating-point values, enter a value of 2 for floating-point value or 1 for an integer value.
When the 795x serial port is configured for multiple-register access and double-precision (64-bit)
floating-point values, enter a value of 4 for floating-point value or 1 for an integer value.
When the 795x serial port is configured for single-register access, simply enter a value of 1.
7E.1.4 How to set-up a Slave Device record

A part of setting up the Transmitter Monitor is selecting a Slave Device record.
The Slave Device record informs the 795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Master) of what MODBUS slave it is
going to be talking to and what communication settings it requires.
Figure 3 (below) shows how to navigate from the MAIN MENU to the SLAVE DEVICES menu, with the
keypad strokes needed to arrive at the menu.

With the 795x Flow Computer acting as the MODBUS Master, as in this case, a MODBUS Slave Device
record must be detailed as follows:
• Device function – Select “Transmitter” option.
• Port number – Select the 795x serial port connected to the transmitter.
• Slave device address – Enter numerical MODBUS address of the transmitter.
• Word ordering – Keep “Modbus default” (factory default), unless transmitter requires Word swap.
• Precision – Select “single” if accessing floating-point values that are 32-bit or “double” if 64-bit.
• Slave MODBUS commands – Select ‘Offset’ or ‘Full’ addressing method, as appropriate for transmitter.
• Other record details are not applicable.
Note: The setting-up procedure is included in Section 7E.3.
x2
Configure d
x4
Other parameters a
Communications b
MODBus master c
Slave devices c
Figure 3: Navigation to the SLAVE DEVICES menu

7E.2 Preparing a Micro Motion® digital transmitter

The following procedure is for preparing a Micro Motion® digital transmitter, Series 2000 multivariable, for
®
MODBUS digital communications with the 795x Flow Computer.
This procedure requires a serial cable, a RS232/RS485 converter and Micro Motion’s ProLink II TM
transmitter configuration software on a PC.
Note: Installation, operation, maintenance, etc. and safety instructions for the transmitter are outside the
scope of this supplement and Flow Computer literature. For these details, refer to product literature of
the transmitter. In addition, PC requirements for running ProLink II TM are outside the scope of this
supplement and Flow Computer literature.
Since the Series 2000 transmitter has a universal service port that supports other communication
protocols, it must be configured to enable RS-485 MODBUS® communications. In addition to enabling this
protocol, the baud rate must be changed from 38400 to 19200. (The minimum for the transmitter is 1200.)
Procedure:
1. Using a suitable cable and a RS232/RS485 converter, interconnect the PC port (e.g. COM1) to
terminals 7 and 8 on the transmitter via the converter.
RS485 Converter MicroMotion Transmitter

Pin No: Terminal No:
2 7
7 8
2. Start the program ProLink II TM
3. Using Prolink II, establish communication between the PC and the transmitter through the menu
<Connection><Connect to device>.
Select the options, as shown below, and then click on the "Connect" button.
Note: This procedure might have to be repeated, as some RS232/RS485 converters do operate
properly at the baud rate of 38400.
Protocol:
Select “Universal Service Port”.
COM Port:
Select “COM 1” (for PC port COM1).
4. Using ProLink II, configure the communication port of the transmitter
To do this:
• Select the menu <ProLink><Configuration>
• Select the tab labelled "485 Comm"
• Select the options shown below
• Click on “Apply” – repeat this until there are no error messages.
Protocol:
Select “Modbus RTU”
Parity:
Select “None”
Baud Rate:
Select “19200”
Stop Bits:
Select “1”

5. Terminate the program ProLink II TM
6. Using a suitable cable and a RS232/RS485 converter, connect the PC port (e.g. COM1) to terminals
5 and 6 on the transmitter.
RS485 Converter MicroMotion Transmitter

Pin No. Terminal No.
2 6
7 5
7. Using Prolink II TM, establish communication between the PC and the transmitter through the menu
<Connection><Connect to device>.
Select options, as shown below, and then click on the "Connect" button.
Protocol: Modbus:
Select “RTU (8-bit)”
Baud Rate:
Select “19200”
Parity:
Select “None”
Connect via Address/Tag:

Select “Address/Tag 1”
COM Port:
Select “COM 1”
Stop Bits:
Select “1”
8. Using Prolink II TM, ensure process variables (e.g. Density) can be viewed through the menu
<ProLink><Process variables>
9. Terminate the program ProLink II TM.

7E.3 Configuring the 795x Flow Computer

Follow these instructions to configure and activate the Monitor on the 795x Flow Computer:
1. Using a suitable cable, connect a 795x serial port to the transmitter. Note: For details of the 795x
serial ports that support RS485, refer to main Chapter 7.
Serial Port Micro Motion® Transmitter

Pin No. Terminal No.
(Rx/Tx+) 5
(Rx/Tx-) 6
2. Program the 795x Flow Computer to be a MODBUS Master device
(a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Ports”>
(b) Select a Serial Port menu, as appropriate for the serial port connected to the transmitter.
(c) Configure the basic communication parameters for that serial port, as shown in Table 3. (Some
localised menu navigation is required to find the parameter screen.)
(d) Navigate to: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”Modbus master”>
(e) Configure the parameters, as shown in Table 4.
(f) Navigate to this sub-menu: <”Slave devices”>
(g) Select a Device menu (e.g. <”Device 1>)
(h) Configure the parameters, as shown in Table 5.
3. Program and activate the Monitor on the 795x Flow Computer.

(a) Navigate to this menu: <”Transmitter monitor”>
(b) Configure the POLLING menu parameters.
(c) Navigate to the MESSAGE BLOCK menu (if applicable to transmitter)
(d) Select the first available message block menu (e.g. MESSAGE BLOCK 1 menu).
(e) Configure the parameters, as guided on page 7E-7.
(f) Repeat Steps 3c to 3e for all other message blocks to be detailed.
(g) Navigate to the INT REGISTERS menu (if applicable).
(h) Select the first available register menu (e.g. INT REGISTER 1 menu).
(i) Configure the parameters, as guided on page 7E-5.
(j) Repeat Steps 3g to 3i for all other integer registers to be detailed.
(k) Navigate to the FLOAT REGISTERS menu (if applicable).
(l) Select the first available register menu (e.g. FLOAT REGISTER 1 menu).
(m) Configure the parameters, as guided on page 7E-5.
(n) Repeat Steps 3k to 3m for all other integer registers to be detailed.
(o) Configure <Monitor enable> parameter to show “Enable”.

Table 3: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters
Parameter * Factory Default

(Database Location) Setting
Comms port owner Select the multiple-choice option with “Modbus master”. “MODBUS slave”
Port Baud rate Keep the factory default, unless transmitter using lower baud rates. “19200”
Port char format Keep the factory default, unless transmitter using another format. “8 bits none 1 stop”
Port handshaking Keep the factory default setting. “None”
Port RS232 / 485 *** Select the RS485 signalling standard for the MODBUS network ** “RS 232”
Port Modbus mode Keep the factory default setting. “RTU”
P Modbus word order Keep the factory default setting. “Modbus default”
P MODB slave add (Not applicable) 1
P Modbus features (Not applicable) “None”
P long reg access Keep the factory default setting, unless using single-register access. “Multiple registers”
P MODB total format (Not applicable) “32-bit integer”
P real precision (Not applicable) “Single”
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a digit to identify the associated serial port.
** A 795x may perform unexpected ‘restarts’ if it is configured to be “RS 232” when it should be “RS 485”.
*** Parameter is not applicable to serial ports that support RS-232 only.
Abbreviations used: “P” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
Table 4: MODBUS Master details
Parameter Factory Default

Length of timeout Keep the factory default setting. “0.5 second”
No of retries Keep the factory default setting. * “3 retries”
* If attempts to communicate with a slave are unsuccessful and exceed the maximum retries, an input alarm, “Modb failed slv”,
is raised. The number of the slave 1 - 16 is given in the alarm message together with “R” (read failed) or “W” (write failed).
Abbreviation used here: “No” = number
Table 5: Slave device details

Slave device func Select “Transmitter” from the multiple-choice list. “None”
Slv device port no Select the 795x serial port that is connected to the transmitter. “Comms port 1”
Slv device address Edit the numeric MODBUS address of the transmitter. 0
Device word swap Keep the factory default, unless transmitter requires Word swap “Modbus default”
Device precision Keep the factory default, unless floating-point value is 64-bit. “Single”
®
Slv modb commands Select “3,4, 16 addr offset” option for a Micro Motion Transmitter ** “3, 16 full addr”
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a number to identify the slave device being detailed.
** The “offset” option applies where transmitters automatically add an offset (e.g. 40000) to get a register address specified in a
received MODBUS request. For transmitters that do not do this and require a full address, keep the factory default.
Abbreviations used: “func” = function, “Slv” = Slave, “no” = number, “modb” = Modbus

16-BIT
COMMUNICATIONS
(GOULD LIST)
(CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM F)
Chapter 7F: 16-bit Communications (Gould List) Software Version 15x0, Issue 5.50 (or higher)
Copyright © 2005
Solartron Mobrey Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
Solartron-Mobrey pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specification in this
document may therefore be changed without notice.
To the best of our knowledge, the information contained in this document is accurate and Solartron-Mobrey cannot
be held responsible for any errors, omissions or other misinformation contained herein. No part of this document
may be photocopied or reproduced without the prior written consent of Solartron-Mobrey.
Page 7F.2 (Jan 2005)

Software Version 15x0, Issue 5.50 (or higher) Chapter 7F: 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
Chapter 7F 16-bit Communications (Gould List)
7F.1 Overview
Chapter 7C is a guide to the software support for 16-bit only MODBUS protocol communications, which
utilises the Gould List in this 795x menu:
<”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<Communications>/<”MODBus slave”>/<”Gould list”>.
This feature is required when a MODBUS Master 1 is to exchange 16-bit 2 data with one or more 795x Flow
Computers operating as a MODBUS Slaves, where all are attached to the same MODBUS network.
16-bits (Word) = 1 Byte 1 Byte = 8 bits 8 bits
Figure 1: 16-bits
Note: For MODBUS network topologies and terminal connections, refer to main Chapter 7.
7F.1.1 Groundwork
On the 795x Flow Computer, integer and floating-point values of parameters (locations) are represented by
16-bits, 32-bits or 64-bits, depending on the data type of the value – see Table 1 and Figure 2 (below).
Note: Data representation theory is outside the scope of this guide – refer to a data communications book.
32-bits (2 Words) = 16-bits (Word) 16-bits (Word)
64-bits (4 Words) = 16-bits (Word) 16-bits (Word) 16-bits (Word) 16-bits (Word)
Figure 2: 32-bits and 64-bits
16-bit communications is unsuitable for accessing a value that is a character string (11x16-bits) or a value
that is a time and date (8x16-bits) – they are therefore not included in Table 1 or this guide.
Table 1: 795x Data types
Data Type Size

x Unsigned 8-bit integer 16-bits
x Signed 16-bit integer 16-bits
x Signed 32-bit integer 32-bits
x 32-bit floating point number * 32-bits
x 64-bit floating point number * 64-bits
x Multiple-choice (List) Option 16-bits
x Location pointer 16-bits
* Floating-point number is either single-precision (32-bit) or
double-precision (64-bit), depending on serial port option.
1
This MODBUS Master device cannot be a 795x series Flow Computer. Direct communication of a parameter value between
795x Flow Computers can be performed using the “Peer-To-Peer” communications feature.
2
16 binary bits e.g. 01010101 01010101
(Jan 2005) Page 7F.3
7F.1.2 795x 16-bit communication features

795x 16-bit communications allows a MODBUS Master to:
x read a 16-bit value – the full value – from a 16-bit parameter (location) – Multiple Register Access
x read a 16-bit value from any 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter (location) – Mult. Reg. Access
x read a full value from a 32-bit of 64-bit parameter (location) – Single Register Access
3
x write a 16-bit value – the full value – to a 16-bit parameter (location) – Multiple Register Access
x write a 16-bit value to any 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter (location) – Mult. Reg. Access
x write a full value to a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter (location) – Single Register Access
The ‘16-bit value’ may be scaled (x10, x100 or x1000) before transmission to the MODBUS Master and de-
scaled (y10, y100 or y1000) before being saved to an application parameter (location).
This optional feature is explained in Section 7F.1.9.
In addition, serial port parameters for selecting Single or Multiple (Long) Register Access, MODBUS Word
Order, Single or Double Precision and Totals format affect 16-bit communications – see Section 7F.1.13
for details of their effect.
7F.1.3 16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Multiple Register Access
Figure 3 shows how a 16-bit, 32-bit and 64-bit parameter value is viewed as one or more 16-bit segments.
When using Multiple Register Access, each segment is a Gould Register that can be individually read or
written if set-up in a Gould List.
16-bits (1 Word) 16-bit Parameter

(Database Location)
Gould Register
16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 32-bit Parameter

(Database Location)
Gould Register Gould Register
16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 64-bit Parameter
(Database Location)
Gould Register Gould Register Gould Register Gould Register
Note: A floating-point number is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on the
Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 3: 16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Multiple Register Access
It follows then that the Gould Register access for a 32-bit (or 64-bit) parameter is slightly different to
accessing a 16-bit parameter.
In Figure 4, a 16-bit value is written, as a full value, to the only 16-bit segment (Gould Register) of a 16-bit
parameter. Similarly, a whole value can be read from the same Gould Register.
MODBUS Master 795x Flow Computer (MODBUS Slave)
16-bit value 16-bits (1 Word)

Gould Register
Application 16-bit Parameter

(Database Location)
Figure 4: Accessing the full value of a 16-bit parameter in one step
3
The 795x will prevent writing to parameters (locations) dedicated to incremental totals, such as the Corrected Volume flow total.

In Figure 5, a 16-bit value is read from the first 16-bit segment (Gould Register) of a 32-bit parameter. A
further message (request) is required to read to the second 16-bit segment (Gould Register). With values
from both segments retrieved, the full value can be assembled by the MODBUS Master.
The same principle applies to 64-bit parameters, except there are four of the 16-bit segments.
Note: More than one Gould Register can be accessed at the same time if the 795x Gould List is set-up
appropriately.
16-bit value 16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word)

(Read first 16-bit segment)

(Database Location)
16-bit value 16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word)

(Read final 16-bit segment)

(Database Location)
Figure 5: Accessing a full value of a 32-bit parameter in two steps
7F.1.4 16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Single Register Access
Figure 6 shows how a 16-bit, 32-bit and 64-bit parameter value is viewed as one or more 16-bit segments.
When using Single Register Access, all 16-bit segments – the full value – equate to one Gould Register
that can be individually read or written if set-up in a Gould List.
Therefore, reading a Gould Register will retrieve the full value, irrespective of the parameter data type.
Similarly, a full value can be written to the Gould Register.
Note: More than one Gould Register can be accessed at the same time if the 795x Gould List is set-up
appropriately.
16-bits (1 Word) 16-bit Parameter

(Database Location)
Gould Register
16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 32-bit Parameter

(Database Location)
Gould Register
16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 16-bits (1 Word) 64-bit Parameter
(Database Location)
Gould Register
Note: A floating-point number is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit), depending on the
Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 6: 16-bit segments (Gould Registers) when using Single Register Access

7F.1.5 Gould List

On the 795x Flow Computer, the Gould List comprises menu entries for nominating up to 50 Gould Registers.
Each list entry requires user-entered details, which include:
x a user-nominated address for the Gould Register (e.g. 40001)
x the unique 4-digit location identification number of the associated parameter (e.g. Loc ID: 0144)
x Word Offset – 0, 1, 2 or 3 – for selecting a 16-bit segment of the parameter value (if applicable)
x Scaling factor – x10, x100, x1000 or none – for scaling/de-scaling the 16-bit data being exchanged
The 795x Gould List can be set-up for Multiple Register Access or Single Register (or a mixture if using
more than one serial port.)
Figure 7 shows an example 795x Gould List set-up for Multiple Register Access. There are 3 entries
populated with user-entered details.
Gould List entries 1 and 2 are set-up for accessing the first 16-bit segment (Gould Register 40001) and
final 16-bit segment (Gould Register 40002) of a 32-bit parameter (location), perhaps a flow rate.
Since the full value of parameter 0144 is represented in 32-bits, the Word Offset option must be used to
select which 16-bit segment is associated with the nominated Gould Register address.
Word Offset 0 selects first 16-bit segment. Word Offset 1 selects the final 16-bit segment. (Word Offset 2
and 3 are applicable only for a 64-bit parameter.)
Gould List entry 3 is set-up for accessing a 16-bit parameter, but there is a deliberate mistake. The Word
Offset is 1, which is incorrect since there is no second 16-bit segment in a 16-bit parameter. Likewise, Word
Offsets 2 and 3 would also be incorrect as there are no third and fourth segments. To correct the error,
Word Offset 0 must be selected.
Gould List entry 50 is not in use and shows the factory default settings.
Note: A location ID of 0 (“Off”) will terminate the 795x Gould List – do not skip entries in the 795x Gould List.
GOULD LIST DATABASE
1 Gould Reg: 40001

Location ID: 0144
Word Offset: 0
Scaling: No scaling
795x Flow Computer
Location ID: 0144
(MODBUS Slave)
2 Gould Reg: 40002 Value 459.21
Location ID: 0144 Data Size 32-bit

GOULD LIST
DATABASE
Word Offset: 1
Scaling: No scaling
3 Gould Reg: 50001

Location ID: 1429
Word Offset: 1
Scaling: No scaling Location ID: 1429
Value 0
Data Size 16-bit

50 Gould Reg: 0
Location ID: Off
Word Offset: 0
Scaling: No scaling
Note: A floating-point number (e.g. 459.21) is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit),
depending on the Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 7: 795x Gould List (Multiple Register Access)

Figure 8 shows an example 795x Gould List set-up for Single Register Access. Again, there are 3 entries
populated with user-entered details.
Gould List entry 1 is set-up for accessing the full value – all 16-bit segments – of Gould Register 40001.
Since the full value of parameter 0144 is read in one go, the Word Offset option is not used and it is kept
set to the factory default of Word Offset 0.
Gould List entry 2 is set-up for accessing the full value – all 16-bit segments – of Gould Register 40002.
Again, since the full value of parameter 0167 is read in one go, the Word Offset option is not used and it is
kept set to the factory default of Word Offset 0.
Since Gould Register 40001 and 40002 have addresses in sequence and are in consecutive entries, they
can both be read at the same time.
Gould List entry 3 is set-up for accessing the full value – a single 16-bit segment – of Gould Register
50001. Again, the Word Offset option is not used and it is kept set to the factory default of Word Offset 0.
Gould Register 40002 and 50001 are in consecutive entries but the addresses are not in sequence; they
cannot both be read at the same time.
Gould List entry 50 is not in use and shows the factory defaults.
Note: A location ID of 0 (“Off”) will terminate the 795x Gould List – do not skip entries in the 795x Gould List.
GOULD LIST DATABASE
1 Gould Reg: 40001

Location ID: 0144 Location ID: 0144
Word Offset: 0 Value 459.21
Scaling: No scaling Data Size 32-bit

795x Flow Computer
(MODBUS Slave)
2 Gould Reg: 40002
Location ID: 0167
GOULD LIST
DATABASE
Word Offset: 0
Location ID: 0167
Scaling: No scaling
Value 2359.54
Data Size 32-bit

3 Gould Reg: 50001
Location ID: 1429
Word Offset: 0
Scaling: No scaling
Location ID: 1429
Value 0
50 Gould Reg: 0
Data Size 16-bit
Location ID: Off
Word Offset: 0
Scaling: No scaling
Note: A floating-point number (e.g. 459.21) is either single-precision (32-bit) or double-precision (64-bit),
depending on the Real Precision option selected for the serial port.
Figure 8: 795x Gould List (Single Register Access)

7F.1.6 Gould List: Gould Register Addressing

The address of a Gould Register can be edited to be any number in the range 0 to 65535 (0x0000 to
0xFFFF), as long as it is unique in the Gould List.
Attempts to enter an address outside this range will be responded to with an “** ERROR **” message, on-
screen for a few seconds, and the original setting is then restored.
When accessing more than one Gould Register at a time, the user-entered addresses must be in sequence
(e.g. 1300, 1301, etc) and in consecutive entries in the Gould List.
When accessing one Gould Register at a time, the addresses of consecutive entries in the Gould List do not
have to be in sequence (e.g. 1300, 1400, etc.)
7F.1.7 Gould List: Parameters (Locations)

To find the unique identification number of a parameter (location), navigate to the parameter screen and
press the A-key to display the number.
7F.1.8 Gould List: Word Offset

Word Offset settings in the Gould List are only applicable when using Multiple Register Access (rather than
using Single Register Access).
With Multiple Register Access, each Gould Register equates to a 16-bit segment of data. Therefore, you
select the segment that will equate to the register.
Word Offset 0
The Gould Register is mapped to the only 16-bit segment of a 16-bit parameter value or it is mapped to the
first 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter value.
Word Offset 1
The Gould Register is mapped to the second 16-bit segment of a 32-bit or 64-bit parameter value.
Word Offset 2
The Gould Register is mapped to the third 16-bit segment of a 64-bit parameter value.
Word Offset 3
The Gould Register is mapped to the fourth 16-bit segment of a 64-bit parameter value.
Examples can be found in Section 7F.3.
Note: With Single Register Access, each Gould Register equates to the whole value (all 16-bit segments).
7F.1.9 Gould List: Scaling Factor

The scaling factor, 10, 100 or 1000, is effective only when accessing floating-point values.
If selected for a Gould Register, the factor is applied, therefore converting it into a whole number (integer)
before or transmitted or vice versa if being saved.
If no scaling factor is to be applied, select “No Scaling” – this is the factory default for each Gould List entry.
The purpose of this feature is for systems that cannot handle float conversions – they may ask for
temperature x 100 (as an integer). You cannot get scaled values as a floating-point value.
Practical examples can be found in Section 7F.3.

7F.1.10 MODBUS Message Exchanges

The MODBUS Master can access more than one Gould Registers in one request.
To access the registers, it must transmit a read or write MODBUS protocol message addressed to the
795x MODBUS slave. The slave will then reply with a MODBUS protocol message.
Note: Write messages can be broadcast to all 795x MODBUS slaves with a MODBUS slave address of 0.
Gould registers can be accessed through any serial port configured to be a MODBUS slave and the Gould List
access is enabled by the port MODBUS feature parameter. (Full configuration details are in Section 7F.2.)
7F.1.11 Read Message Format (Single or Multiple Gould Register Access)

Figure 9 shows the MODBUS function 03 command format. Practical examples, showing other Read
messages and responses, can found in Section 7F.3.
Slave Function G. Reg. G. Reg. # Of Reg. # Of Reg. EC LRC

Address (H.O.) (L.O.) (H.O.) (L.O.)
06 03 9C 41 00 02 X X
Figure 9: MODBUS message for reading from Gould Registers 40001 and 40002
Slave Address – On the 795x, this is a Virtual Slave address: Base Slave Address +5 (= 06 if factory default)
Function – 03 (0x03) is the function code for MODBUS read messages.
G. Reg. – Address of Gould Register, e.g. 40001 (Decimal) or 0x9C41 (Hexadecimal)
# of Reg. – Specify number of Gould Registers to be read, e.g. 0002 (Decimal and Hexadecimal)
EC – Error check number, generated is accordance with the MODBUS specification
LRC – Longitudinal redundancy check number, generated in accordance with the MODBUS specification
7F.1.12 Write Message Format (Single or Multiple Gould Register Access)

Figure 10 shows the MODBUS function 16 command format. Practical examples, showing other Write
messages and responses, can found in Section 7F.3.
Slave Funct. G. Reg. G. Reg. Quantity Byte 16-bit data 16-bit data EC LRC
Add. (H.O.) (L.O.) Count
06 10 9C 41 00 02 04 (H.O.) (L.O.) (H.O.) (L.O.) X X
Figure 10: MODBUS message for writing to Gould Registers 40001 and 40002
Slave Address – On the 795x, this is a Virtual Slave address: Base Slave Address +5 (= 06 if factory default)
Function – 16 (0x10) is the function code for MODBUS write messages.
Gould Register – Address of Gould Register, e.g. 40001 (Decimal) or 0x9C41 (Hexadecimal)
Quantity – Specify number of Gould Registers to be write to, e.g. 2 for 40001 (0x9C41) and 40002 (0x9C42)
Byte Count – Specify number of bytes of data e.g. 0x02 for a 16-bit value, 0x04 for two 16-bit values, etc.
16-bit data – Up to fifty 16-bit IEEE values, dependent on Quantity field
EC – Error check number, generated is accordance with the MODBUS specification
LRC – Longitudinal redundancy check number, generated in accordance with the MODBUS specification

7F.1.13 Serial port parameters (locations)

Each serial port has parameters for selecting Single or Multiple (Long) Register Access, MODBUS Word
Order, Single or Double Precision and Totals format affect 16-bit communications.
<Long Register Access>

The 795x Flow Computer has support for both Single Register Access and Multiple Register Access.
Each serial port is configured to allow one type of register access.
Multiple Register Access:

With this type of access, each Gould Register equates to a single 16-bit segment. Therefore, to read a 32-
bit value, two Gould Registers are required. Similarly, to read a 64-bit value, four Gould Registers are
required.
Single Register Access:

With this type of access, each Gould Register equates to all the 16-bit segments required for a full value.
Therefore, to read a 16-bit value, 32-bit value or 64-bit value, only one Gould Register is required.
<MODBUS Word Order>

The 795x Flow Computer provides the facility to choose the Word (double-byte) ordering of data fields in
MODBUS messages. This feature is individually selectable for each serial port.
Figure 11 shows the effect of the Default Order option and Word Swap option for single-precision (32-bit)
and double-precision (64-bit) values. For 64-bit values, the second double Word is the most significant.
Default Order (16 Bits) (16 Bits) Default Order (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits)
42 C2 3F 0D 40 58 47 E1 9B 90 EA 9E
Word Swap (16 Bits) (16 Bits) Word Swap (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits)
3F 0D 42 C2 EA 9E 9B 90 47 E1 40 58
Figure 11: Word Ordering Examples
<Real Precision>
Floating-point values (e.g. flow rates) are made available as a 32-bit IEEE (single-precision) number or as a
64-bit IEEE (double-precision) number. The precision level is individually selectable for each serial port.
<Total Format>
Each incremental total can be read as two separate 32-bit integers or as a single floating-point value,
depending on the option selected. The format is individually selectable for each serial port.
When a flow total value (e.g. 2983.54) is to be read as a 32-bit integer, there is one parameter (location)
with the “2953” and another parameter (location) with the “54”.
When a flow total value (e.g. 2983.54) is to be read as a floating-point value, there is just one parameter
(location) with the “2953.54”.
Page 7F.10 (Jan 2005)

7F.2 Configuring and Activation Instructions

Follow these instructions to configure and activate 16-bit communications on the 795x Flow Computer:
1. Ensure that 795x Flow Computers and MODBUS Maste device are already interconnected to form a
MODBUS network. (Guidance on the necessary RS-232 or RS-485 wiring 4 is in the main Chapter 7.)
2. Program a 795x Flow Computer to be the MODBUS slave device

(2b) Select a Serial Port menu, as appropriate for the serial port connected to the MODBUS network.
(2c) Configure the basic communication parameters for that serial port, as shown in Table 2. (Some
localised menu navigation is required to find the parameter screen.)
3. Configure entries in the Gould List

(3a) Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Communications”>/<”MODBus slave”>
(3b) Select this menu: <“Gould list”>
(3c) Configure each list entry, as guided in Table 3. Start with configuring Entry 1, then configure Entry 2,
and so forth. Avoid skipping an entry, since the list is terminated by a location ID of 0.
The MODBUS Master can read and write to the Gould Registers.
4
To avoid the risk of flow computer restarts, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard – RS-232 or RS-485 – for 795x serial
ports before establishing the physical connections.
(Jan 2005) Page 7F.11

Table 2: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters

Comms port owner Select the multiple-choice option with “Modbus slave”. “MODBUS slave”
Select a rate that will be the same for the MODBUS Master
Port Baud rate “19200”
device and all 795x MODBUS slave devices.
Select a character transmission format (as agreed for the
Port char format “8 bits none 1 stop”
MODBUS network). If unsure, keep the factory default.
Select either “None” or “XonXoff” unless the cable supports
Port handshaking “None”
“CTS/RTS”. (If unsure, keep the factory default.)
Port RS232 / 485 *** Select signalling standard for the MODBUS network ** “RS 232”
Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS

Port Modbus mode “RTU”
network devices. (If unsure, keep the factory default.)
Select an option that is compatible with the Master device. (If
P Modbus word order “Modbus default”
unsure, keep the factory default.)
P MODB slave add Edit the Base Slave Address of this slave. 1
P Modbus features Select the multiple-choice option that includes “Gou“ (Gould) “None”
P long reg access Choose single or multiple Gould Register access. “Multiple registers”
Select how total values are to be transmitted – either 32-bit

P MODB total format “32-bit integer”
integers or as a single/double-precision floating-point value.
Select the accuracy of all floating-point values for this serial
P MODB precision “Single”
port: single-precision (32-bits) or double-precision (64-bits).
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a digit to identify the associated serial port.
** A 795x may perform ‘warm restarts’ if it is configured to be “RS 232” when it should be “RS 485”.
*** Parameter is not applicable to Serial Port One since it is for RS-232 devices only.
Abbreviations used: “P” = Port, “reg” = register, “addr” = address, “char” = character, “MODB” = MODBUS
Table 3: Gould List Entry Parameters (Locations)

List1 Gould reg Enter a numeric address for the Gould Register e.g. 40001. 0
Enter the unique identification number (Loc ID) of the parameter

List1 mapped loc ** Off
(location) to be mapped to the Gould Register.
If using multiple register access and mapped parameter has a
List1 Word Offset 32-bit/64-bit value, select the 16-bit segment of the value to be “Word Offset 0”
accessed.
If the 16-bit data is a floating-point number, it can be scaled into
List1 scale factor an integer (x10, x100 or x1000) just before transmission to the “No scaling”
MODBUS Master. Similarly, it can be de-scaled before saving it.
* The on-screen parameter descriptor includes a number to identify the list entry.
** Entering a valid location number will immediately result in the number changing to the parameter descriptor. Editing
a location number for a parameter that does not exist is responded to with a “** ERROR **” message appearing
briefly, and the original setting is then restored.
Abbreviation used: “reg” = register, “loc” = location
Page 7F.12 (Jan 2005)

7F.3 Guided Examples

This section is a practical guide to accessing Gould Registers of a 795x MODBUS Slave through the
Gould List feature.
What to do here:
1. Ensure that the 795x Flow Computer is suitably configured as guided in Section 7F.2.
2. Follow examples from Table 4 or Table 5.

In the examples, MODBUS message sequences aim to show the how to read from Gould Registers
and write to Gould Registers. Every example features an objective, an action and a result
Objective(s)
For an example, the objective could be to read a 16-bit parameter value.
Action(s)
Actions consist of one or more MODBUS protocol commands. They are represented in this
documentation as tabulated hexadecimal values in sequence for transmission by the Master device.
Expected responses from the 795x MODBUS slave device are also shown as tabulated values.
Table 6 is a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to
distinguish the important elements of the message.
Result
This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS slave response to an action. Note: Values are
communicated in base units, which may not be the same as the displayed units – see Table 7.
3. Experiment
Try out the examples and then adapt them to suit your requirements.
Table 4 : Summary of examples (reading from Gould Registers)

Example Totals Word Register Access Consecutive
Precision Scaling Page
Number format Order Access Beyond Value Registers
1 X Single Default Multiple None No Yes 15
2 X Single Default Multiple None No No 16
3 X Single Default Multiple None Yes Yes 17
4 X Single Default Multiple x100 No Yes 18
5 X Single Default Single None No Yes 19
6 X Double Default Multiple None No Yes 20
7 X Double Default Single None No Yes 21
8 Integer Single Default Single None No Yes 22
9 Integer Single Default Multiple None No Yes 23
10 Fl. point Double Default Single None No Yes 24
Table 5: Summary of examples (writing to Grould Registers)

Example Totals Word Register Access Consecutive
Precision Scaling Page
Number format Order Access Beyond Value Registers
3 X Single Default Single None No Yes 27
4 X Single Default Multiple x100 No Yes 28
5 X Single Default Single x100 No Yes 29
(Jan 2005) Page 7F.13

Table 6: Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Response Sequences
Abbreviation Meaning
Slv. Base Slave Address +5. It is 0x06 for the examples.
Fn. Function code. E.g. 03 = Read Gould Register(s)
Reg. Cnt Quantity of Gould Registers
Reg. ID Gould Register number
D.C. Number of ‘data bytes’ in reply
Data Data byte
EC & LRC Calculated checksum, which is two bytes at the end
Table 7: Base units of measurement
Category Base units

Temperature Deg. C
Pressure bar abs
Differential pressure mbar
3
Density kg/m
Frequency Ps
Fraction
Time seconds
3
Flow factor pulse/m
3
Volume total m
3
Base volume total std m
Mass Total kg
Energy Total MJ
Mass rate g/min
Volume rate m3/hour
Energy rate MJ/hour
Energy value (mass) MJ/kg
Energy value (volume) MJ/m3
Base volume rate Std m3/hour
Length m
Dynamic viscosity cP
Absolute zero Deg.C
Velocity m/s
Orifice Coeffient PPM/Deg.C
Page 7F.14 (Jan 2005)

7F.3.1 Gould List Read Access: Example 1

Objective:
Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (database location ID: 0666) which has a 32-bit (single-precision)
floating-point value.
Totals Word Register Access Consecutive

Precision Scaling
format Order Access Beyond Value Registers
X Single Default Multiple None No Yes
This example involves reading two Gould Registers 1300 and 1301; this is to get the two lots of 16-bit data.
Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.
Serial Port Configuration

Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access, single-precision.
Gould List Configuration
Gould List Entry 1:

<List1 Gould reg 1> = 1300
<List1 mapped loc 1> = 0666 (Meter temperature)
<List1 WordOffset 1> = “Word offset 0”
<List1 scale fact 1> = “No scaling”
Gould List Entry 2:

Action
Read Gould Registers 1300 and 1301
Transmit 06 03 05 14 00 02 85 74
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. EC LRC
Response 06 03 04 42 0C 00 00 58 88
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
x 420C0000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC)
x 420C is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1300 and 0000 is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1301
(Jan 2005) Page 7F.15


Note: This is an error response example, which is a variation of Example 1.
Objective:

Precision Scaling
X Single Default Multiple None No No
This is similar to example 1, except Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 are not given consecutive entries in
the Gould List. Subsequently, there is an error response transmitted by the 795x Flow Computer.

Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, Multiple Register Access, Single-precision.
Gould List Entry 1:

Gould List Entry 2:

<List1 mapped loc 2> = 0144 (Corrected volume flow rate)
Gould List Entry 3:

Action
Transmit 06 03 05 14 00 02 85 74
Response 06 83 02 71 30
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. Chk sum
Result
x An error reponse (code 83) is given since Gould Registers 1300 and 1301 are not given consecutive
entries in the Gould List.
Page 7F.16 (Jan 2005)


Note: This is an error response example, which is a variation of Example 1.
Objective:

Precision Scaling
X Single Default Multiple None Yes Yes
This is similar to Example 1, except there is an attempt to read beyond Gould Register 1300 and 1301 by
using the Word Offset 2 option and Word Offset 3 option.
Subsequently, there is an error response transmitted by the 795x Flow Computer, since the parameter
does not have a 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point value.

Gould List Entry 1:

Gould List Entry 2:

Action
Transmit 06 03 05 14 00 02 85 74
Response 06 83 02 71 30
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. EC LRC
Result
x An error response (code 83) is given since parameter does not have a 64-bit (double-precision)
(Jan 2005) Page 7F.17


Objective:

Precision Scaling
X Single Default Multiple Yes No Yes
This example, which is a variation of Example 1, involves reading scaled (x100) values from two Gould
Registers 1300 and 1301.

Gould List Entry 1:

<List1 scale fact 1> = “Int (value x 100)”
Gould List Entry 2:

Action
Transmit 06 03 05 14 00 02 85 74
Response 06 03 04 00 00 0D AC 88 1E
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
x 00000DAC is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3500.0 (in base units of qC)
Page 7F.18 (Jan 2005)


Objectives:
x Read Meter-run Temperature (Loc. ID: 0666), a 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point value.
x Read Meter-run Temperature (Loc. ID: 0666) and Corrected Volume Rate (loc. ID: 0144), which both
have 32-bit (single-precision) floating-point values.

Precision Scaling
X Single Default Single None No Yes
Importantly, and unlike previous examples, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is
required to get the full value (all 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect.
This example involves:

x Reading the whole temperature value from a single Gould Register – Action 1
x Reading whole values of temperature and flow rate from two consecutive Gould Registers – Action 2

Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, single register access, single-precision.
Gould List Entry 1:

Gould List Entry 2:

Action 1
Read whole temperature value from Gould Register 1305
Transmit 06 03 05 19 00 01 54 B6
Response 06 03 04 42 0C 00 00 58 88
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
x The data, 420C0000, is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC)
x 420C is the first 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the integer part, 35)
x 0000 is the final 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the fractional part, .0)
Action 2
Transmit 06 03 05 19 00 02 54 B6
Response 06 03 04 42 0C 00 00 42 20 00 00 D3 F8
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
x The data, 420C0000, is the IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC)
x 420C is the first 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the integer part. 35); the
0000 that follows final 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the fractional part, .0)
x The data, 42200000, is the IEEE hexadecimal representation for 40.0 (in base units of m3/hour)
x 4220 is the first 16-bit segment of data read from Gould Register 1306; the 0000 is the other segment
(Jan 2005) Page 7F.19


Objective:
Read Meter-run Temperature parameter (Loc. ID: 0666) which has a 64-bit (double-precision) floating-
point value.

Precision Scaling
X Double Default Multiple None No Yes
This example involves reading four Gould Registers 1300 - 1303; this is to get four lots of 16-bit data.
Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.

Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, multiple register access and double-
precision.
Gould List Entry 1:

Gould List Entry 2:

Gould List Entry 3:

Gould List Entry 4:

Action
Transmit 06 03 05 14 00 04
Response 06 03 08 40 41 80 00 00 00 00 00
Meaning Slv. Fn. D.C. Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
x 404180000000 is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC)
x 4041 is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1300, 8000 is the 16-bit data from Gould Register 1301, and
so forth.
Page 7F.20 (Jan 2005)


Objectives:
x Read Meter-run Temperature (Loc. ID: 0666), a 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point value.
x Read Meter-run Temperature (Loc. ID: 0666) and Corrected Volume Rate (loc. ID: 0144), which both
have 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point values.

Precision Scaling
X Double Default Single None No Yes
Importantly for this example, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full
value (i.e. all four 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect.
This example involves:

x Reading the whole temperature value from one Gould Register – Action 1
x Reading whole values of temperature and flow rate from two consecutive Gould Registers – Action 2

Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, single register access, double-precision.
Gould List Entry 1:

Gould List Entry 2:

<List1 mapped loc 2> = 0144 (Corrected Volume flow rate)
Action 1: Read whole temperature value from Gould Register 1305

Transmit 06 03 05 19 00 01 54 B6
Response 06 03 08 40 41 80 00 00 00 00 00 C5 57
Result
x 4041 8000 0000 0000 is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC)
x The first 8 bytes of data, 4041 8000, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the integer part, 35)
x The last 8 bytes of data, 0000 0000, is the third and fourth 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1305 (i.e. the fractional part, .0)
Action 2: Read Gould Registers 1305 and 1306

Transmit 06 03 05 19 00 02 14 B7
Response 06 03 10 40 41 80 00 00 00 00 00 40 44
Meaning Slv. Fn. DC Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
Response 00 00 00 00 00 00 60 99
Meaning Data Data Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Result
x 4041 8000 0000 0000, is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 35.0 (in base units of qC)
x 4042 0000 0000 0000, is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 40.0 (in base units of m3/hour)
(Jan 2005) Page 7F.21


Objectives:
x Read Indicated Volume total in 32-bit integer format.

Precision Scaling
Integer X Default Multiple None No Yes
Importantly for this example, Multiple Register Access is used – more than one Gould Register is required
to get a full 32-bit value (i.e. all 16-bit data segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option is required.
This example involves reading two whole integer values, requiring four Gould Registers.

Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1 and Multiple Register Access.
Gould List Entry 1:

<List1 mapped loc 1> = 0174 (Indicated Volume total, whole part) *
<List1 WordOffset 1> = “Word Offset 0”
Gould List Entry 2:

Gould List Entry 3:

<List1 mapped loc 3> = 0172 (Indicated Volume total, fractional part) *
Gould List Entry 4:

* Parameter is not visible within the menu system. For a full location listing, contact factory.
Action 1: Read Gould Registers 1400 - 1403

Transmit 06 03 05 78 00 04 C5 6B
Response 06 03 10 45 09 A0 00 3F 7D 0B 5C 51 09
Result
x 4509 A000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 2202.0 (in base units of m3)
x The first 8 bytes of data, 4509 A000, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the integer part, 2202.0)
3
x 3F7D 0B5C is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.98845457 (in base units of m )
x The last 8 bytes of data, 3F7D 0B5C, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1401 (i.e. the fractional part, 0.98845457)
Note:
display format for volumetric values.
Page 7F.22 (Jan 2005)


Objectives:
x Read Indicated Volume total in 32-bit integer format.

Precision Scaling
Integer X Default Single None No Yes
Importantly, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full value (i.e. all
16-bit data segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect.
This example involves reading two whole integer values from two Gould Registers.

Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1 and Single Register Access.
Gould List Entry 1:

Gould List Entry 2:

* Parameter is not visible within the menu system. For a full location listing, contact factory.
Action 1: Read whole value from Gould Registers 1400 and 1401
Transmit 06 03 05 78 00 02 45 69
Response 06 03 08 45 09 A0 00 3F 7D 0B 5C 51 09
Result
x 4509 A000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 2202.0 (in base units of m3)
x The first 8 bytes of data, 4509 A000, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the integer part, 2202.0)
x 3F7D 0B5C is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.98845457 (in base units of m3)
x The last 8 bytes of data, 3F7D 0B5C, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 32-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1401 (i.e. the fractional part, 0.98845457)
Note:
display format for the value.
(Jan 2005) Page 7F.23


Objectives:
x Read Indicated Volume total (Loc. ID: 0167) as a 64-bit (double-precision) floating-point value.

Precision Scaling
Fl. Point Double Default Single None No Yes
Importantly, single register access is used – only one Gould Register is required to get a full value (i.e. all four
16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect.
This example involves reading the whole double-precision value from one Gould Register.

Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, single register access, double-precision.
Gould List Entry 1:

<List1 mapped loc 1> = 0167 (Indicated Volume total)
Action 1: Read whole value from Gould Register 1400

Transmit 06 03 05 78 00 01 05 68
Response 06 03 08 40 A7 4F 14 44 35 79 DD 84 52
Result
x 40A7 4F14 4435 79DD is the 64-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 2983.54 (in base units of m3)
x The first 8 bytes of data, 40A7 4F14, is the first and second 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the integer part, 2983)
x The last 8 bytes of data, 4435 79DD, is the third and fourth 16-bit data segments (of the 64-bit value)
read from Gould Register 1400 (i.e. the fractional part to 8 decimal places)
Note:
display format for the value.
Page 7F.24 (Jan 2005)

7F.3.11 Gould List Write Access: Example 1
Objective:
Write 35.5 (qC) to Meter-run Temperature parameter (Loc. ID: 0666) as a 32-bit (single-precision) floating-
point value.

Precision Scaling
This example involves writing to two consecutive Gould Registers 1300 and 1301; this is to write two separate
16-bit values (35 and 5). Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.

Gould List Entry 1:

Gould List Entry 2:

Action
Write “35” (420E, IEEE hex.) to Gould Register 1300. Write “5” (0000, IEEE hex.) to Gould Register 1301
Transmit 06 10 05 14 00 02 04 42 0E 00 00 A3 CF
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. D.C. Data Data Data Data EC LRC
Response 06 10 05 14 00 02 00 B7
Result
x Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 2 (0x02) indicate success.
(Jan 2005) Page 7F.25


Objectives:
1. Write 50.2 (qC) to Meter-run Temperature parameter (Loc. ID: 0666) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value.
3
2. Write 3600.0 (m /hour) to Corrected Volume flow rate (Loc. ID: 0144) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value.

Precision Scaling
This example involves writing to four consecutive Gould Registers 1300 - 1303; this is to write four 16-bit
values (50, 2, 3600 and 0). Importantly, they are given consecutive entries in the Gould List.

Gould List Entry 1:

Gould List Entry 2:

Gould List Entry 3:

Gould List Entry 4:

Action
Write “50” (4248 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1300 and “2” (CCCD in IEEE) to Gould Register 1301
Write “360” (43B4 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1302 and “0” (0000 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1303
Transmit 06 10 05 14 00 04 08 42 48 CC CD 43 B4
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. D.C. Data Data Data Data Data Data
Transmit 00 00 E9 1E
Meaning Data Data EC LRC
Response 06 10 05 14 00 04 80 B5
Result
Page 7F.26 (Jan 2005)


Objectives:
1. Write 50.2 (qC) to Meter-run Temperature parameter (Loc. ID: 0666) as a 32-bit (single-precision) value.
3

Precision Scaling
X Single Default Single None No Yes
This is a variation of Example 2. Importantly, Single Register Access is used – only one Gould Register is
required to get a full value (i.e. all 16-bit segments). Therefore, the Word Offset option has no effect.
This example involves writing whole single-precision values to two Gould Registers.

Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, single register access, single-precision.
Gould List Entry 1:

Gould List Entry 2:

Action
Write “50.2” (4248CCCD in IEEE) to Gould Register 1300
Write “360.0” (43B40000 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1301
Transmit 06 10 05 14 00 02 08 42 48 CC CD 43 B4
Meaning Slv. Fn. Reg. ID Reg. Cnt. D.C. Data Data Data Data Data Data
Transmit 00 00 09 01
Meaning Data Data EC LRC
Response 06 10 05 14 00 02 00 B7
Result
(Jan 2005) Page 7F.27


Objectives:
3

Precision Scaling
X Single Default Multiple x100 No Yes
Importantly with this example, the 36000.0 is de-scaled to be saved as 360.0. Since Multiple Register Access
is to be used, two Gould Registers are required to write the full 32-bit value (i.e. two 16-bit data segments).
Therefore, the Word Offset option is required.
This example involves writing whole single-precision values – 36000.0 and 0.0 – to two Gould Registers.

Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, Multiple Register Access, Single-precision.
Gould List Entry 1:

Gould List Entry 2:

Actions
1. Write “36000.0” (470C in IEEE hexadecimal) to Gould Register 1300
2. Write “0.0” (A000 in IEEE hexadecimal) to Gould Register 1301
Transmit 06 10 05 14 00 02 04 47 0C A0 00 7A C3
Response 06 10 05 14 00 02 00 B7
Result
x Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 02 (0x02) indicates success.
Page 7F.28 (Jan 2005)


Objectives:
3

Precision Scaling
X Single Default Single x100 No Yes
Importantly with this example, the 36000.0 is de-scaled to be saved as 360.0. Since Single Register Access is
to be used, only one Gould Register is required to write the full 32-bit value (i.e. all 16-bit data segments).
Therefore, the Word Offset option is not used.
This example involves writing a whole single-precision value, 36000.0, to a Gould Register.

Modbus default Word order, MODBUS (Base) Slave Address = 1, Single Register Access, Single-precision.
Gould List Entry 1:

Action
Write “36000.0” (470C A000 0000 0000 in IEEE) to Gould Register 1300
Transmit 06 10 05 14 00 01 04 47 0C A0 00 7A F0
Response 06 10 05 14 00 01 40 B6
Result
x Echo of Gould Register address field, 1300 (0x0514), and Quantity field, 0001 (0x01) indicates success.
(Jan 2005) Page 7F.29

Page 7F.30 (Jan 2005)

Chapter 8 Alarms and events
8. Alarms and Events

8.1 Alarms
8.1.1 Alarm types
The types of alarms that are detected and recorded are:
System alarms, caused by one or more of:

• Power failure
• Battery low (if a battery is fitted)
• Watchdog
• RAM checksum failure
• ROM checksum failure.
Input alarms, caused by one or more of:

• Failure of analogue inputs
• Failure of density transducers
• Incorrect data has been entered.
Limit alarms, caused by one or more of:

• Limits which you have set
• Limits defined by the system.
These always result in two alarms - one when the change first happens and another when the system
returns to its normal state.
8.1.2 Alarm indicators

The 795x has three LED indicators to show alarm status; one each for Input, System and Limit Alarms.
Each alarm indicator can be in one of three states:
Off The system is working normally.

Flashing An alarm has been received but has not yet been accepted.
On All alarms has been accepted but not yet cleared. The conditions that caused the alarms in
the first place may still exist.
1. System alarm 2. Input Alarm 3. Limit Alarm
Figure 8.1.1: Alarm indicators on the front panel
7955 1540 (Ch08/FA) Page 8.1

8.1.3 How alarms are received and stored

When a new alarm is received, the appropriate indicator LED on the front panel starts flashing. If the
indicator is already flashing because of a previous alarm, it continues to do so. If the indicator is already ON
(steady), it starts to flash.
Information about alarms is stored in two logs:
• The Alarm Status Display This gives:

(1) a summary of the contents of the Historical Alarm Log
(2) an indication of the current status of the system.
• The Historical Alarm Log This contains an individual entry for every alarm stored in the log.
The Historical Alarm Log can store up to 30 entries. When a new alarm is received, one of two things can
happen:
If the Historical Alarm Log is NOT full:

An entry for the new alarm is simply added to the list.
If the Historical Alarm Log is full:

It depends on how the system is set up: Either (1) the oldest entry is deleted and the new one is added to the
top of the list, or (2) the new alarm is discarded. In either case, the Status Display is updated automatically.
8.1.4 Examining the Alarm Status Display and Historical Alarm Log
Press the INFORMATION MENU (i) key If you want to examine the Alarm Status Display or the Historical Alarm Log.
• To bring up the Alarm Status Display, select the Alarm Summary option.
• To bring up the first entry in the Historical Alarm Log, select the Alarm History option.
• To return to the INFORMATION MENU from the two screens , you can use the BACK key
Figure 8.1.2: How to get to the alarm log
Page 8.2 7955 1540 (Ch08/FA)

8.1.5 What the Alarm Status Display tells you

A typical Alarm Status Display is shown in Figure 8.1.2. The display lists, for each type of alarm (System,
Input or Limit), the number of alarms that are live and new.
• New alarms are alarms that have been received but not accepted.
• Live alarms are alarms that refer to conditions still active.
An example of a live alarm is when there is a fault in the system. This produces two alarms - one when the
fault first occurs (‘ON’) and the second when it is put right (‘Off’). If only the first alarm of the pair has been
received, the alarm is said to be live because the condition still exists.
The number of live alarms tells you how many faults are still active. If you look at the Historical Alarm Log
this tells you more about these faults.
8.1.6 What the entries in the Historical Alarm Log tell you
Figure 8.1.3 shows a typical display and the function of the relevant keys.
Key to figure:
1. Indicates if there are entries BEFORE this one
2. Alarm is either ‘ON’ (fault occurrence) or ‘OFF’ (fault cured).
3. Type of alarm
4. Indicates alarm not accepted
5. Accept this alarm
6. Alarm description and extra identifier to qualify the alarm
7. Clear this alarm entry
8. Date and time that this alarm (message) was raised.
9. Identifies a metering-run/stream - not applicable to single
meter-run/stream software
10. Indicates that there are alarm entries AFTER this one
11. Scroll DOWN through the entries
12. Scroll UP through the alarm entries
13. Clear all alarm entries.
Figure 8.1.3: A typical entry in the log
Each alarm has its own entry in the Historical Alarm Log that tells you:
• Type of alarm
Whether it is a System alarm, Input alarm or Limit alarm and if the alarm is ‘on’ or ‘off’.
• Extra identifier for the alarm

This is not always shown for every entry but, where it is shown, it could be one of the following:
• A digit This indicates the channel number on which the fault occurred.
• A letter H and L are for high and low Limit alarms, S is for a step alarm.
• Date and time

The date is in the format DD-MM-YY and the time HH:MM:SS. These are entered automatically by the
system when the alarm is received. The time is accurate to within one second.
• Acceptance indication
This is only shown for those entries that have not been accepted. When the entry is accepted, the
indicator disappears.
7955 1540 (Ch08/FA) Page 8.3

• Other entries indication

An up-arrow symbol shows that there are entries before the present one, whilst a down-arrow symbol
shows that there are others after. If the entry currently shown is first in the list, there is no up-arrow. If it
is last, there is no down-arrow.
• Description of the alarm

This is an abbreviated description of the alarm and should be sufficient to help you trace the cause of
the problem. A full list of all alarm messages and what they mean, are listed on page 8.3.
8.1.7 Clearing all entries in the Historical Alarm Log

To clear all the alarm entries in the historical log, press the CLR key. This clears all entries in the Historical
Alarm Log, zeroes the entries in the Status Display and sets all LED indicators to OFF.
Page 8.4 7955 1540 (Ch08/FA)

8.1.8 User-defined Alarms X and Y

Two user limit alarms, nominated as ‘X’ and ‘Y’, are available for monitoring values of measurements that do
not have alarm limits.
Configuring the flow computer involves: -

1. Supplying the unique identification (ID) number of the parameter to be monitored by the 795x
2. Supplying high and low alarm limits for the parameter.
Configuration task
Follow these instructions if you want to configure a user-defined alarm (X or Y):
1. Navigate to the menu of the parameter to be monitored, and then press the ‘a’ key once to display
the identification (ID) number of the parameter. Make a note of that ID number
2. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Alarms”>
3. Select the menu for either ‘Alarm X’ or ‘Alarm Y’
4. Locate and edit associated parameters as listed in Table 8.1.1
5. The user alarm will now appear in the Historical Alarm Log when the parameter value exceeds the
limits.
Table 8.1.1: User-defined Alarm Parameters
User alarm ptr • Use this to select a measurement to be monitored.

• Press the ‘b’ key once.
• Use the numeric keypad to edit the parameter number.
• Press the ‘b’ key once to confirm your selection.
User alarm HI lmt • This parameter defines the highest allowable value for the selected
measurement. A high limit alarm is raised when this upper limit is exceeded.
• Edit a value using the numeric keypad.
• Press the ‘b’ key once to confirm your programmed value.
User alarm lo lmt • This parameter defines the lowest allowable value for the selected
measurement. A low limit alarm is raised when this lower limit is exceeded.
* On-screen descriptions include an extra letter to identify the alarm nomination.
7955 1540 (Ch08/FA) Page 8.5

8.1.9 User-defined ‘Comparison’ limit alarm

Two user comparison alarms (nominated as ‘A’ and ‘B’) are available for comparing values of two
parameters and raising an alarm when the difference is outside a ‘Set’ limit.
Configuring involves:
1. Supplying the identification numbers of the two parameters to be monitored
2. Supplying a value for the comparison limit
Configuration task
Follow these instructions if you want to configure a user-defined alarm (A or B):
1. Navigate to the menu pages of the two parameters to be compared. Use the ‘a’ key to display the
parameter identification (ID) number. Make a note of each ID number.
2. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“ Other parameters”>/<“Alarms”>
3. Locate and edit parameters as shown in Table 8.1.2.
4. The user alarm will now appear in the Historical Alarm Log when the difference in value between the
two parameters exceed the comparison limit.
Table 8.1.2: User Comparison Alarm Parameters
Parameter * Instructions and Comments
• Use this to select the first parameter in the comparison.

Compare alarm ptr1
• Enter the ID number of the parameter.
• Use this to select the second parameter in the comparison.

Compare alarm ptr2
• Enter the ID number of the parameter.
• This parameter defines the maximum allowed difference between values of
the two parameters without needing to raise an alarm.
Comp alarm lmt • Press the ‘b’ key once.
* On-screen descriptions include an extra letter to identify the alarm nomination
Summary
The up-to-date state of all user-defined alarms are shown in this menu: <“Health check”>/<“User Alarms”>
Alarms ‘A’ and ‘B’ each have a dedicated digit:

‘0’ = Not in use/No Alarm/Alarm accepted
‘1’ = Alarm active
Page 8.6 7955 1540 (Ch08/FA)

8.1.10 ‘Status Input’ triggered alarms

Digital (status) inputs can be used by an external system to signal the 795X to raise a general input alarm.
The signal must be maintained to keep that alarm active. Loss of signal is equivalent to accepting that alarm.
Support is provided for two general input alarms, nominated as ‘I’ and ‘J’.
Some configuration is required - a status input must be chosen for triggering alarm ‘I’. Another status input
must be chosen for triggering alarm ‘J’. By default, no Status Inputs are selected.
Configuration task
Follow these instructions only if you want to configure the 795x without using a Wizard.
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”> /<“Alarms”>
2. Navigate to a “Status in alm src” parameter screen.
3. Press the ‘b’ key
4. Use the UP-ARROW key to scroll through a list of descriptions associated with status inputs. The
objective is to select which status input is to be the alarm trigger.
5. Press the ENTER key when the description for the required status input is on-screen.
Summary
The up-to-date state of all user-defined alarms are summarised in the menu:
<“Health check”>/<“User Alarms”>.
Alarms ‘I’ and ‘J’ each have a dedicated digit:

‘0’ = Not in use/No Alarm/No active signal
‘1’ = Alarm/Active signal
7955 1540 (Ch08/FA) Page 8.7

8.1.11 Alarm Logger Output (ALO)

Status Outputs 1 to 5 are dedicated to indicating the presence of active alarms. By default, the ALO is
enabled and pre-configured as shown in Table 8.1.3.
Table 8.1.3: ALO Default Set-up
Digital Output Default Function

Status Output 1 • Indicate System Alarms only
Status Output 2 • Indicate Limit Alarms only *
Status Output 3 • Indicate Input Alarms only
Status Output 4 • Indicate User Limit Alarm ‘X’
Status Output 5 • Indicate User Limit Alarm ‘Y’
* User Comaprison Alarms ‘A’ and ‘B’ are also indicated
ALO Re-configuration Options

ALO use of the first three status outputs can be re-configured at any time by changing the selected alarm
grouping. Parameters for making a change are found within the menu system.
To change the alarm grouping…

1. Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”Alarms”>/<”Alarm logger”>
2. Locate parameters as identified in Table 8.1.4 and change the alarm grouping option to suit your
requirements. Available options are summarised in Table 8.1.5.
Table 8.1.4: ALO Configuration Parameters
Parameter Purpose of Configuration Parameter
Alarm output 1 • Show/Change alarm group for Status Output 1

Table 8.1.5: Alarm Grouping Options
Option Purpose of option

None • Do not indicate presence of any alarms *
System • Indicate System alarms only
Input • Indicate Input alarms only
Limit • Indicate Limit alarms only
Any • Include System, Input and Limit alarms.
System Input • Indicate System alarms and Input alarms
System Limit • Indicate System alarms and Limit alarms
Input Limit • Indicate Input alarms and Limit alarms
* This does not free up the digital (status) output for another function
Notes:
1. For further information on Digital (Status) Outputs, refer to Chapter 2 and Appendix ‘C’.
2. The presence of active User-defined Comparison Alarms (‘A’, ‘B’, etc.) are indicated by Status Outputs
nominated to include Limit Alarms.
Page 8.8 7955 1540 (Ch08/FA)

8.1.12 Alarm Message List

* Alarm can be cleared immediately
Base Alarm
Type What it means
Message
Limit for Orifice diameter exceeded.
5167 orif dia lmt Limit
Additional alarm message letters: ‘H’ = High limit, ‘L’ = Low limit
Limit for Orifice pipe diameter exceeded.
5167 orif pipe lmt Limit
Limit for (Reynolds number/Beta ratio) value exceeded.
5167 re/beta lmt Limit
Arch refmt failed System The Archiving re-format command was not successful. There was not enough memory.
Not enough archive space is available. Reduce the number of items.
Archive too small System Additional alarm message letters:
‘A’ = Alarm archive, ‘D’ = Daily archive, ‘I’ = Interval archive, ‘M’ = Manual archive
The AGA-8 calculation could not be performed due to the energy value measurement being
AGA8 energy limit Limit outside a limit as defined in the AGA 8 Standard.
The AGA-8 calculation could not be performed due to the normalised gas percentage being
AGA8 <Gas> lmt Limit outside a limit as defined in the AGA 8 Standard.
The AGA-8 calculation could not be performed due to the Line Pressure measurement
AGA8 press limit Limit being outside a limit as defined in the AGA 8 Standard.
The AGA-8 calculation could not be performed due to the relative density measurement
AGA8 rel dens lmt Limit being outside a limit as defined in the AGA 8 Standard.
The AGA-8 calculation could not be performed due to the Line Temperature measurement
AGA8 temp limit Limit being outside a limit as defined in the AGA 8 Standard.
Limit for Atmospheric Pressure exceeded.
Atmos press limit Limit
Additional alarm message letters: ‘H’ = High limit, ‘L’ = Low limit, ‘S’ = Step limit
Bad gas data System Raw gas composition data is incorrect.
Limit for Base Density exceeded.
Base dens limit Limit
Limit for Base Volume flow rate exceeded.
Base volume limit Limit
Battery failed System 795X needs a new battery. Configuration has been lost.
Battery low System 795X needs a new battery as soon as possible. (See “Battery failed” message)
Chromat error Limit Chromatograph problem. Check configuration.
Chromat slv fail Limit Slave Chromatograph is not responding. Check cabling and configuration.
User-defined alarm.
Comparison limit Limit Additional alarm message letters:
‘A’ = User Comparison Alarm ‘A’, ‘B’ = User Comparison Alarm ‘B’
Compress. fail Limit Compressibility calculation could not be completed. Check configuration.
The 795X Database has become corrupted. It is normal to see this alarm when software is
Database corrupt System
started for the first time. Clear the alarm and then configure the 795X.
The memory checksum has failed.
DBM bad chksum System
Additional alarm message letters: ‘V’ = Volatile Memory, ‘N’ = Non-Volatile Memory
This is a notification that one or more of the copies of data were corrupted. Corruption is
corrected automatically but check the configuration.
DBM bad triple System Additional alarm message characters:
‘0’ = RAM copy, ‘1’= Non-Volatile Memory copy #1,
‘2’ = Non-Volatile Memory copy #2, ‘3’= Padding, ‘!’ = Beyond repair.
Limit for differences between Density ‘A’ and ‘B’ values exceeded.
Dens comp limit Limit
Additional alarm message letters: ‘B’ = Base Density, ‘L’ = Line density
Limit for ‘Density loop’ Temperature ‘1’ exceeded.
Dens temp 1 limit Limit
7955 1540 (Ch08/FA) Page 8.9

(Alarm Message List continued…) * Alarm can be cleared immediately

Limit for ‘Density loop’ Temperature ‘2’ exceeded.
Dens temp 2 limit Limit
Calibration of a Time Period Input (‘Density’ Input) has failed.
Density cal fail System
Additional message digits:‘1’=Time Period Input #1, ‘2’=Time Period Input #2, etc.
Limit for Differential Pressure exceeded.
Diff press limit Input
An attempt has been made to configure an Archive parameter list with a parameter that
DLG list non-real Limit does not have a floating point value.
This message is simply for notification only and can be cleared at any time.
Calibration error check failed while a selected (prime) DP Cell was in a range transition
region.
DP calib error Limit
Additional alarm message letters:
‘L’ = Low range, ‘M’ = Medium range, ‘H’ = High range
Gas slave fail Limit Unable to communicate with a 795X Modbus Slave. Check cabling and configuration.
SMART field transmitter has failed or not wired to the appropriate SMART Analogue Input.
Hart input fail Input
Additional alarm message letters: ‘1’ = Hart Input #1, ‘2’ = Hart Input #2, etc.
Hart unit error Input HART unit of measurement not supported. (See Chapter 16 for a list)
High Speed List address conflict due to a HSL block overlapping.
HSL addr conflict System
Additional alarm message letters: “A” = Block ‘A’, “B” = Block ‘B’, … , “F” = Block ‘F’
Limit for Beta ratio value exceeded.
ISO 5167 beta lmt Limit
Limit for Line Density value exceeded
Line dens limit Limit
Limit for Line Temperature value exceeded.
Line temp limit Limit
Limit for Linear Flow (Volume rate) value exceeded.
Linear mtr limit Limit
LineTxdr calc fail Input Transducer Density calculation not completed.
Linear Flowmeter ‘K-factor’ could not be linearised from a programmed “Frequency versus
Linr K-factor err Input
‘K-factor’ ” correction curve profile.
Limit for CO2 value exceeded.
Live CO2 limit Limit
Limit for Energy value exceeded.
Live energy limit Limit
Limit for N2 value exceeded.
Live N2 limit Limit
A mA input calibration has failed.
mA input cal fail System Additional alarm message digits:
‘1’ = Analogue Input #1, ‘2’ = Analogue Input #2, etc.
mA-type transmitter failed or not wired to 795X.
mA input failed Input Additional alarm message digits:
A mA-type Analogue Input is not been calibrated
mA input no cal System Additional alarm message digits:
A mA output calibration has failed.
mA out cal fail System Additional alarm message digits:
‘1’ = Analogue Output #1, ‘2’ = Analogue Output #2, etc.
A mA output is not configured correctly or is not working.
mA output failed System Additional alarm message digits:
A mA Output is not calibrated
mA output no cal System Additional alarm message digits:
Limit for Mass Rate value exceeded.
Mass rate limit Limit
Page 8.10 7955 1540 (Ch08/FA)


Serial Port configuration conflicts with the configuration of another port
MODB slave clash System
Extra Message Character: “1” = Serial Port ‘1’, “2” = Serial Port ‘2’, etc.
The AGA-NX19 calculation could not be performed due to the normalised gas percentage being
NX19 <Gas> lmt Limit outside a limit as defined in the supported Standard.
The AGA-NX19 calculation could not be performed due to the Line Pressure measurement being
NX19 press limit Limit outside a limit as defined in the supported Standard.
The AGA-NX19 calculation could not be performed due to the Specific Gravity measurement
NX19 SG limit Limit being outside a limit as defined in the supported Standard.
The AGA-NX19 calculation could not be performed due to the Line Temperature measurement
NX19 temp limit Limit being outside a limit as defined in the supported Standard.
The AGA-NX19mod3h calculation could not be performed due to the energy value measurement
NX19m3h energy lmt Limit being outside a limit as defined in the Standard.
The AGA-NX19mod3h calculation could not be performed due to the normalised gas percentage
NX19m3h <Gas> lmt Limit being outside a limit as defined in the supported Standard.
The AGA-NX19mod3h calculation could not be performed due to the Line Pressure measurement
NX19m3h press lmt Limit being outside a limit as defined in the Standard.
The AGA-NX19mod3h calculation could not be performed due to the Specific Gravity
NX19n3h SG limit Limit measurement being outside a limit as defined in the supported Standard.
The AGA-NX19mod3h calculation could not be performed due to the Line Temperature
NX19m3h temp lmt Limit measurement being outside a limit as defined in the Standard.
The AGA-NX19mod calculation could not be performed due to the normalised gas percentage
NX19mod <Gas> lmt Limit being outside a limit as defined in the supported Standard.
NX19mod LO T/HI P Limit The AGA-NX19mod calculation could not be performed due the E4 range limit.
The AGA-NX19mod calculation could not be performed due to the Line Pressure measurement
NX19mod press lmt Limit being outside a limit as defined in the supported Standard.
The AGA-NX19mod calculation could not be performed due to the Line Temperature
NX19mod temp lmt Limit measurement being outside a limit as defined in the Standard.
An ISO 5167-1 orifice calculation limit has been exceeded.
Orif ISO5167 lmt Limit Check all configured Discharge Coefficient calculation parameters against the limits that are written
in the Standard.
Pbase<>101.325kPa Input Base pressure must be 101.325kPa for the ISO 6976 (MJ/m3) calculation
Peer-to-peer communication failed.
Peer target fail System
Additional alarm message letter: <MODBUS Slave device number>
Power fail System Power to the system has failed
Limit for Line Pressure exceeded.
Pressure limit Limit
Limit for prover temperature exceeded.
Prover temp limit Limit
RTD/PT100 transmitter failed or not wired to 795X.
Prt input failed Input Additional alarm message digits:
A PRT-type Analogue Input is not calibrated
Prt no cal System Additional alarm message digits:
Limit for prover pressure exceeded.
Prv press limit Limit
Maximum pulse output frequency reached. (10 pulses/second)
Pulse out limit Input
Additional alarm message digits: ‘1’ = Pulse Output #1, ‘2’ = Pulse Output #2, etc.
SG compare limit limit Limit for the difference between SG ‘A’ and SG ‘B’ values exceeded.
7955 1540 (Ch08/FA) Page 8.11


Limit for Specific Gravity value exceeded.
SG limit Limit
The SGERG calculation could not be performed due to a conflict:
Case (1) CO2+H2 fractions, when combined, exceed limit for Specific Gravity. Case (2)
SGERG data confl. Limit N2+CO2+H2 fractions, when combined, exceed limit for Specific Gravity.
Case (3) N2 + H2 fractions, when combined, exceed limit for Specific Gravity.
Additional alarm message letters: None
The SGERG calculation could not be performed due to the energy value measurement being
SGERG energy limit Limit outside a limit as defined in the S-GERG Standard.
The S-GERG calculation could not be performed due to the relative density measurement being
SGERG rel den lmt Limit outside a limit as defined in the supported S-GERG Standard.
The S-GERG calculation could not be performed due to the normalised gas percentage being
SGERG <Gas> lmt Limit outside a limit as defined in the S-GERG Standard.
The S-GERG calculation could not be performed due to the Line Pressure measurement being
SGERG press limit Limit outside a limit as defined in the S-GERG Standard.
The S-GERG calculation could not be performed due to the Line Temperature measurement
SGERG temp limit Limit being outside a limit as defined in the S-GERG Standard.
SpEq1 calc fail Input Incorrect data caused Special Equation 1 to fail
SpEq2 calc fail Input Incorrect data caused Special Equation 2 to fail
Tbase <> 0, 15, 20 Input Base temperature must be 0°C, 15°C or 20°C
Tcombust<>0,15,20 Input Combustion temperature must be 0°C, 15°C, 20°C or 25°C for the ISO 6976 (MJ/M3) calc.
Transducer failed or not wired to 795X.
Timeperiod failed Input
Additional message digits: ‘1’=Time Period Input #1, ‘2 =Time Period Input #2, etc.
An anomaly has occurred. There have been unusual frequency readings for longer than is
tolerated. An adjustment to a ‘filter’ (menu data) value may be required. (Refer to Density
Timeperiod glitch Input configuration pages)
Additional alarm message digits:
‘1’ = Time Period Input #1, ‘2’ = Time Period Input #2, etc.
A Time Period Input (‘Density’ Input) is not been calibrated.
Timeperiod no cal System Additional alarm message digits:
‘1’ = Time Period Input #1, ‘2’ = Time Period Input #2, etc.
Roll-over of a main (standard) total has ocurred.
Additional alarm message letters:
Totaliser limit System
‘I’ = Indicated Volume Total, ‘V’ = Corrected Volume Total, ‘M’=Mass Total,
‘B’=Base Volume Total, ‘E’ = Energy Total, ‘A’ = Alarm Total
Limit for calculated pulse input frequency value exceeded.
Turb freq limit Limit
Additional alarm message digits: ‘M’ = Main turbine
‘K-factor’ could not be linearised from a programmed “Frequency versus ‘K-factor’ ” correction
Turb K-factor err Input
curve profile.
Count of missing pulses from Turbine Flowmeter exceeded ‘Set’ limit.
Turb limit failed Input Additional alarm message digits:
‘1’ = Pulse (Turbine) Input #1, ‘2’ = Pulse (Turbine) Input #2, etc.
Percentage of missing (error) pulses, in terms of pulses accumulated for the pulse frequency
calculation, has exceeded 0.05%.
Turb pcent failed Input
Additional alarm message digits:
A Pulse Input is not calibrated.
Turbine no cal System Additional alarm message digits:
‘Status Input’ activated alarm. See page 8.7 for details.
User input alarm Input
Additional alarm message letters: ‘I’ = Alarm ‘I’, ‘J’ = Alarm ‘J’
User-defined hi/low limit alarm.
User limit alarm Limit
Additional alarm message letters: ‘X’ = Alarm ‘X’, ‘Y’ = Alarm ‘Y’,
Water content is in excess of a defined limit.
Water cntnt limit Input Additional qualifying letters seen after the base message:
‘H’ = High limit, ‘L’ = Low limit, ‘S’ = Step limit
Page 8.12 7955 1540 (Ch08/FA)

8.2 Events
8.2.1 Introduction to 795x events
The 795x instrument keeps a record of important system changes in an Event Log. This is very similar, in
concept, to the alarm log, but the nature of the information kept is different.
Event details that can be viewed in the event log:

†
• Changes to the status of pre-determined data that affects calculations
• Changes to the value of data pre-determined data that affects calculations.
Event details that can be seen only in a printout of the event log:
• Messages from hardware diagnostics
• Download of a configuration completed.
8.2.2 Event indicators

Unlike alarms, there are no event indicators on the front panel of the 795x.
8.2.3 How events are received and stored

Information about events is stored in two logs:
• Event Status Display This gives:

(1) a summary of the contents of the Historical Event Log
(2) an indication of the current status of the system.
• Historical Event Log This contains an individual entry for every event stored in the log.
There is enough room, in the historical event log, to store up to 150 event records. When a new event is
received, one of two things can happen:
If the event log is NOT full:

A new event record is simply added
If the event log is full:

The parameter, Event full action, has two options: “Replace” and “Ignore”, for determining how to deal
with a new event when the event log is full. (See Table 8.2.1.)
Table 8.2.1: Event Full Action - Available Options
<Event full action>

Purpose of Option
Option
Replace Always overwrite the oldest event in the event log
Ignore Always discard a new event when the event log is full
Note: The default action is “Replace”
†
This can not be changed. The list of auditable data is fixed.
7955 1540 (Ch08/FA) Page 8.13

8.2.4 Examining the Event Summary and the Event Log

Press the INFORMATION MENU (i) key if you want to examine the Event Status Display or the Historical
Event Log.
• To bring up the Event Status Display, select the Event Summary option.
• To bring up the first entry in the Historical Event Log, select the Event History option.
• To return to the INFORMATION MENU from the two screens , you can use the BACK key
Figure 8.2.1: How to get to the event log
8.2.5 What the Event Status Display tells you

A typical Status Display is shown in Figure 8.2.1. It summarises, for each type of event (Auto, User or
Periodic) the numbers of alarms that are active and live.
• Active events are events that have been received but not accepted.
• Live events are events that refer to conditions still active.
The number of live events tells you how many of them are still active. If you look at the Historical Event Log
this tells you more about these events.
Page 8.14 7955 1540 (Ch08/FA)

8.2.6 What the entries in the Historical Event Log tell you
Figure 8.2.2 shows a typical display and the function of the relevant keys.
Key to figure:
1. Indicates if there are entries BEFORE this one
2. Location identifier
3. Type of event
4. Indicates event not accepted
5. Accept this event
6. Event description
7. Clear this entry
8. Date and time that this event (message) was raised
9. Indicates that there are entries AFTER this one
10. Scroll DOWN through the entries
11. Scroll UP through the entries
12. Clear all event entries.
Figure 8.2.2: A typical entry in the Historical Event Log
Each event has its own entry in the Historical Event Log that tells you:
• Type of event
Whether it is Auto, User or Periodic and on or off.
Type What it means

Auto Changes made by the 795x application software.
User Changes made by the keypad or done over serial communications.
Periodic This event type is not used at present.
• Date and time

The date is in the format DD-MM-YY and the time HH:MM:SS. These are entered automatically by the
system when the alarm is received. The time is accurate to within one second.
• Acceptance indication
This is only shown for those entries that have not been accepted. When the entry is accepted, the
indicator disappears.
• Other entries indication

An up-arrow shows that there are entries before the present one, whilst a down-arrow shows that
there are others after. If the entry currently shown is first in the list, there is no up-arrow. If it is last,
there is no down-arrow.
• Description of the event

This is an abbreviated description of the event and should be sufficient to help you trace the reason for it.
• Old value and new value

Pressing the RIGHT-ARROW key displays another screen
with the old and new values of data.
Press the LEFT-ARROW (or the RIGHT-ARROW ) key for

the previous display to re-appear.
Pressing the DOWN-ARROW key leads to displays that are

explained in Section 8.3.
7955 1540 (Ch08/FA) Page 8.15

8.2.7 Clearing all entries in the Historical Event Log

To clear the entire Historical Event log, press the CLR key. This clears all entries in the Historical Event Log
and zeroes the entries in the Event Status Display.
Page 8.16 7955 1540 (Ch08/FA)

8.3 Enhanced Auditing

There is an optional enhanced auditing facility for recording user initiated changes to application software
parameters that have an influence on the metering results. This enhanced feature is the result of an
essential requirement from North Sea practices and the Department of Trade and Industry (DTI).
This feature allows a 795x series Flow Computer to continuously monitor and report on changes to existing SET
values, changes to option selections and to changes to several parameter attributes (value status and individual
audit control settings). The facility will report changes by recording Audit User Events and Audit System
Alarms that will enable the back-calculation of fiscal values and account for changes that have occurred.
Figure 8.3.1: Example of Audit Event pages from Historical Log
8.3.1 Audit User Events

All generated events are stored in the Historical Event Log, as explained in Section 8.2.
Audit events are either sub-classed as “USER” triggered or “AUTO” triggered.
An example of a “USER” event is the act of manually changing a software parameter status to be “SET”
instead of “LIVE”.
An example of an “AUTO” triggered event is the 795X automatically changing a software parameter status to
“Fail” when a live input source fails.
Every event has a date and time for the occurrence, an on-screen location descriptor and a summary of the
change.
This information is divided into several pages, as seen in Figure 8.3.1. Use the arrow keys to navigate
around the pages.
To enable Audit User Events…

• Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”>
• Locate the parameter screen with “Audit inactive locs”
• Select “On” from the multiple-choice option list
7955 1540 (Ch08/FA) Page 8.17

8.3.2 Audit System Alarms

All generated alarms are stored in the Historical Alarm Log, as explained in Section 8.1. Auditing Control
alarms are sub-classed as “SYSTEM” alarms.
An Audit Control alarm is normally raised whenever the value status attribute of a database location is
changed to “Set”. This alarm entry can be identified visually with the word “ON” on the first display line.
A subsequent value status change, from “SET” to “LIVE”, “FB” or “FAIL” will then raise a matching system
alarm. That matching alarm entry can be identified visually with the word “OFF” on the first display line.
To enable Audit System alarms…

• Navigate to the menu <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”>
• Locate the menu data page with “Alarm active locs”
New “ON” alarm raised because Matching “OFF” alarm raised

status of parameter has changed because status of parameter has
to “Set” changed from “Set”
Figure 8.3.2: Example of Audit System Alarm pages from Historical Log
Figure 8.3.3 shows how the Audit Control alarm message can appear in one of two optional formats.
To change format…
• Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”>
• Locate the menu data page with “DB loc alarm text” as the descriptor
• Select an option descriptor from the multiple-choice list
• Any change is activated for the next 795x machine cycle
Alarm Message Format: Alarm Message Format:

“Descriptor Text” option “Loc:XXXX is set” option
Figure 8.3.3: Optional Formats for Alarm Control Message
Page 8.18 7955 1540 (Ch08/FA)

8.3.3 Audit Control Attributes

Each application software parameter has two independent, programmable attributes for adjusting how the
auditing of it operates. Adjustments can be determined either by the 795x, in automatic mode, or by the
user, in manual mode. Select a method by editing the parameter <”Auditing attrib ctrl”>, which is located
within the <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameter”>/<”DB attributes”> menu.
The programmable attributes are:

1. Auditing Event Suppression Control (Audit/No Audit)
When the automatic mode is in use…
Critical “USER” events, such as a “LIVE” to “SET” status change, are never suppressed. They
always appear in the Historical Event Log.
Less critical “USER” events, such as a valve command selection, can be suppressed by editing the
attribute setting to be “No Audit”.
However, be aware that the 795x Flow Computer can, by default, automatically override and
change the setting under certain conditions. There is a logic table for this in the “Audit Event
Suppression Control” section on the next page.
Note: An “AUTO” (795X triggered) event is never suppressed.
When the default manual mode is in use…

A “USER” event can be suppressed by editing the attribute setting to be “No Audit”.
2. Auditing Alarm Suppression Control (Alarm/No Alarm)

When the automatic mode is in use…
The “SET” audit alarm can be suppressed by editing the attribute setting to be “No Alarm”.
However, be aware that the 795x Flow Computer can, by default, automatically override and
change the setting under certain conditions. There is a logic table for this in the “Audit Alarm
Suppression Control” section on the next page.
When the default manual mode is in use…

The “SET” audit alarm can be suppressed by editing the attribute setting to be “No Alarm”.
Figure 8.3.4 shows where to find Audit Control attributes. Navigate to any parameter screen and then use
the DOWN-ARROW and UP-ARROW key switch between pages.
There is a third attribute on the same page, which can also be edited; it is the security level required for
editing the software parameter.
Security levels are as explained in Chapter 11. The exception to this is the “Super User” security level,
which is not selectable and is not attainable by anyone apart from the 795x Flow Computer itself.
The existing setting for each Audit Control attribute is displayed within the menu system and is available
for retrieval by an external Modbus networked device. (See Chapter 7.)
By default, Audit Control attributes are not accessible in the menu system.
To make them accessible, follow these steps:
• Navigate to the menu <”Configure”>/<”Other parameters”>/<”DB attributes”>
• Locate the menu data page with “Attribute display”
Note: This action also automatically enables the auditing control functions (if not already enabled by the
software parameters <Alarm active locs”> and <”Audit inactive locs”>).
7955 1540 (Ch08/FA) Page 8.19

1. Auditing Alarm Suppression Control 2. Auditing Event Suppression Control

3. Security Level required for editing
Figure 8.3.4: Typical parameter screen showing all attributes
Page 8.20 7955 1540 (Ch08/FA)

8.3.4 Audit Event Suppression Control: Automatic Mode

Under automatic mode, adjustments to the setting of the Audit Event Suppression Control attribute are in
accordance with a built-in logic table.
Table 8.3.1 shows:

(a) the impact on the “Audit” or “No Audit” setting when using the front panel keyboard (or Modbus
protocol communications) to manipulate the value status of a software parameter.
(b) when a “USER” event is generated as the result of a user initiated action.
(c) when an “AUTO” event is generated as the result of a 795X initiated action.
Automatic mode is selected by editing the multiple-choice list of the parameter <”Attribute control”>, which
is located within the <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Db attributes”> menu.
Table 8.3.1: Logic for 795X changes to attribute settings and if events are recorded
Value Status Attribute Setting Attribute Setting USER Event AUTO Event
Notes?
Change (Before Change) (After Change) on change? on change?
Live to Set No Audit Audit Yes No
Live to Set Audit Audit Yes No
Live to FB No Audit No Audit No Yes
Live to FB Audit Audit No Yes
Live to Fail No Audit No Audit No No Alarm raised instead
Live to Fail Audit Audit No No Alarm raised instead
Fail to Set No Audit Audit Yes No
Fail to Set Audit Audit Yes No
Fail to Live No Audit No Audit No No Alarm raised instead
Fail to Live Audit Audit No No Alarm raised instead
FB to Set No Audit Audit Yes No
FB to Set Audit Audit Yes No
FB to Live No Audit No Audit No Yes
FB to Live Audit Audit No Yes
Set to Live No Audit No Audit No No
Set to Live Audit No Audit Yes No
Set to Fail No Audit No Audit No No
Set to Fail Audit No Audit Yes No
Set to FB No Audit No Audit No Yes
Set to FB Audit No Audit Yes Yes Read Table Note A
Table Notes:
A A “USER” event is generated for a “SET” to “LIVE” action by the user. An “AUTO” event is generated for the
“Live” to “FB” action by the 795X.
B Selecting an alternative unit of measurement (for display) is recorded as a “USER” event even with a “No Audit”
setting.
C An event is recorded for all user initiated changes to the “No Audit” or “Audit” setting.
Table 8.3.2 shows if an event is logged when a user makes changes to the “No Audit” or “Audit” setting without
changing the value or value status.
D Status changes that are not possible: “FB to Fail” and “Fail to FB”
E Changing a ‘Set’ value to another ‘Set’ value is always recorded as a “USER” event.
Table 8.3.3 shows if an event is recorded when the value status (e.g. “SET”) is not changed but the value does
change or an option is selected from a multiple-choice list.
7955 1540 (Ch08/FA) Page 8.21

Table 8.3.2: Logic for recording an event when the attribute setting is changed
Attribute Setting Attribute Setting USER Event AUTO Event

Value Status
(Before) (After) on change? on change?
(Any) No Audit Audit Yes No
(Any) Audit No Audit Yes No
Table 8.3.3: Logic for recording events when a value/option selection changes
Value Action to trigger Attribute USER Event AUTO Event

Status an event Setting on change? on change?
Set Edit new value Audit Yes No
Set Edit new value No Audit Yes No
Live Value fluctuates Audit No No
Live Value fluctuates No Audit No No
FB FB value edited Audit No No
FB FB value edited No Audit No No
Fail Value fluctuates Audit No No
Fail Value fluctuates No Audit No No
(None) Select new option Audit No No
(None) Select new option No Audit No No
Key: - “FB” = Fallback state
Page 8.22 7955 1540 (Ch08/FA)

8.3.5 Audit Alarm Suppression Control: Automatic Mode

Under automatic mode, adjustments to the setting of the Audit Alarm Suppression Control attribute are in
accordance with a built-in decision table.
Table 8.3.4 shows:

(a) the impact on the “Alarm” or “No Alarm” setting when using the front panel keyboard (or a Modbus
protocol command) to manipulate the value status.
(b) when an “ON” flagged SYSTEM alarm is raised as the result of a user initiated action.
(c) when an “OFF” flagged SYSTEM alarm is raised as the result of a user initiated action.
Automatic mode is selected by editing the multiple-choice list of the <”Attribute control”> menu data page,
located within the <”Configure”>/<”Other Parameters”>/<”Db attributes”> menu.
Table 8.3.4: Logic for 795X changes to attribute settings and if an alarm is recorded
Attribue Setting Attribute Setting Alarm raised

Value Status Notes?
(Before Change) (After Change) on change?
Live to Set No Alarm No Alarm No
Live to Set Alarm Alarm Yes (ON) Read Note B
Live to FB No Alarm No Alarm No
Live to FB Alarm Alarm No
Live to Fail No Alarm No Alarm No
Live to Fail Alarm Alarm No
Fail to Set No Alarm No Alarm No
Fail to Set Alarm Alarm Yes (ON) Read Note B
Fail to Live No Alarm No Alarm No
Fail to Live Alarm Alarm No
FB to Set No Alarm No Alarm No
FB to Set Alarm Alarm Yes (ON) Read Note B
FB to Live No Alarm No Alarm No
FB to Live Alarm Alarm No
Set to Live No Alarm Alarm No
Set to Live Alarm Alarm Yes (OFF) Read Note A
Set to Fail No Alarm Alarm No Read Note C
Set to Fail Alarm Alarm Yes (OFF) Read Note A
Set to FB No Alarm Alarm No
Set to FB Alarm Alarm Yes (OFF) Read Note A
Table Notes:
A The 795x will also raise a matching “ON” alarm if one does not already exist in the Historical
Alarm Log. This is normal and allows the system alarm to be cleared in the normal manner.
B The 795X will raise a matching “OFF” alarm if the Audit Alarm Suppression Control setting is
then changed to “No Alarm”. This is matching alarm is normal and allows the system alarm to
be cleared in the normal manner.
C The 795x will raise an ordinary Live INPUT alarm with an “ON” flag.
D The 795x will raise an ordinary Live INPUT alarm with an “OFF” flag. This alarm can be
cleared in the normal manner.
7955 1540 (Ch08/FA) Page 8.23

(Table Notes continued…)
E Table 8.3.5 shows what happens when changes are made to the Audit Alarm Suppression Control
attribute setting without changing the value or (value) status.
Table 8.3.5: Logic for determining if an alarm is generated when

the “Alarm” or “No “Alarm” setting is changed
Value Attribute: Alarm Attribute: Alarm Alarm

Status (Before) (After) Raised?
Set No Alarm Alarm Yes (ON)
Set Alarm No Alarm Yes (OFF)
Fail No Alarm Alarm No
Fail Alarm No Alarm No
FB No Alarm Alarm No
FB Alarm No Alarm No
Live No Alarm Alarm No
Live Alarm No Alarm No
F Status changes that are not possible: “FB to Fail” and “Fail to FB”.
G A “USER” classed event is generated for all user initiated changes to the “No Alarm” or “Alarm” setting.
Table 8.3.6 shows if an event will appear in the Historical Event Log when a user makes changes to the
Audit Alarm Suppression Control setting without changing the value or value status.
Table 8.3.6: Logic for determining if an event is generated when the “Alarm” or
“No alarm” setting is changed
Value Audit Event Audit Alarm Ctrl Audit Alarm Ctrl USER Event
Status Control Setting Setting (Before) Setting (After) on change?
(Any) Audit No Alarm Alarm Yes
(Any) Audit Alarm No Alarm Yes
(Any) No Audit No Alarm Alarm No
(Any) No Audit Alarm No Alarm No
Page 8.24 7955 1540 (Ch08/FA)

Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9. Additional facilities
9.1 Feature: Archiving
9.1.1 Introduction
The 795x Series can perform data logging to generate historical records – archives - of parameter data. The
archived data can be retrieved on-demand and displayed within the menu system. It can also be printed out as
a report and data can be retrieved by MODBUS compliant devices.
Values from user-selected parameters can be statistically prepared (e.g. average, maximum, etc.) according to
user requirements. Statistical results are recorded at intervals that are defined by the type of data logging. Each
logging type has a separate archive with a 20-parameter capacity and the ability to keep statistics from the past.
There are five types of data logging available:
1. Interval
Statistical results are automatically recorded in an “Interval Log” archive at a user-selected time-span.
An interval can be as short as a 795X machine cycle or as long as twelve hours.
A user-selected date and time marks the start of the very first interval.
2. Daily
Statistical results are automatically recorded in a “Daily Log” archive at the same time each day (i.e. 24-
hour intervals). A user-selected date and time marks the start of the very first 24-hour period.
3. Manual
Statistical results are recorded in a “Manual Log” archive only when triggered manually from the front panel
or over serial communications. The beginning of this variable time-span occurs on enabling this type of
data logging.
4. Alarm
Statistical results are recorded in an “Alarm Snapshot Log” archive whenever an alarm is raised or is
removed. (This is separate from the Alarm History log). The beginning of this variable time-span occurs on
enabling this type of data logging.
5. Monthly
Statistical results are automatically recorded in a “Monthly Log” archive once a calendar month. A user-
selected date and time marks the start of the first month.
All the types can operate at the same time, if required.
The size of an archive is finite but flexible enough to allow re-sizing by hand. Re-sizing actions cause all
previously recorded values to be lost forever and should be done prior to data logging commencing.
Archives can be selectively viewed on screen and printed out as a report. Printouts of reports can also occur
automatically after new statistical results have been archived. Associated parameters (database locations)
can be manipulated or retrieved by MODBUS networked device.
IMPORTANT NOTICE!
The two sections that follow should be read and understood before embarking on the
configuration task. It is also advisable to try out at least one of the worked examples.
795x 1540 (Ch09/EB) Page 9.1

9.1.2 Statistical Information

The following statistical options are available:
1. Time Average Calculate the time-weighted average. Parameter values are sampled once during
every 795x machine cycle. The resulting time-weighted average is copied to an
archive.
2. Flow Average Calculate the flow-weighted average. Parameter values are sampled once during
every 795x machine cycle. The resulting flow-weighted average is copied to an
archive.
3. Difference Calculate the difference between the latest sampled parameter value and the result
that was last copied to an archive. The result is copied to an archive.
4. Maximum Results in the largest sampled parameter value (since that last archived statistic)
being copied to an archive.
5. Minimum Smallest sampled parameter value, since that last archived statistic, is copied to an
archive.
6. None Sampled parameter value is copied straight to an archive.
9.1.3 Analysis of an archive

This section explains:
x Archive space and how it can change.
x How new statistical data is added to an archive.
Archive space
Each archive has a default amount of memory space in the 795x. The initial amount is the same for each
archive. Archive memory space is 2 dimensional:
x Depth Depth corresponds to the quantity of parameter values that can be kept.
x Width Width corresponds to the total number of bytes required to store a single value from every
nominated parameter. (See Table 1.)
Available memory space for archiving can be viewed by pressing the PRINT MENU key and then navigating
to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Re-size archives”>/<“Spare arch. memory”>.
The value shown is always in units of bytes but the actual amount will vary in different software versions and
members of the 795x Series.
Table 1: Bytes required for different parameters
Width
Parameter Type
(bytes)
1 Selection code for an option in a multiple-choice list.
4 A parameter value without a status e.g. “Set” or “Live”. (This does not include totals.)
5 A parameter value with a status e.g. “Set” or “Live”.
8 Totals only – e.g. Indicated Volume flow total.
16 Dates and/or times.
21 Text only.
It is very important to carefully plan the set-up of all archive space before data logging to archives
commences. Otherwise, be prepared for inevitable data loss when making changes or setting up other
archives at a later stage.
Page 9.2 795x 1540 (Ch09/EB)

Archive space can be changed as follows:

Action Effects on associated archive Extent of data loss
Parameter added to nomination list Width increases. Depth decreases to compensate. Associated archive
Parameter removed from list. Width decreases. Depth increases to compensate. Associated archive
Space increase granted Depth increases. All archives
This is best illustrated in the following sequence of diagrams involving one archive:
1. Archive with an initial depth of 8 and a list with Item 1 = Line temperature
one defined item, Line Temperature.
Item 1
Value 1
Width = 5
Value 2
Value 3 Depth = 5
: : :
Value 4
Value 5
The last available record
Item 2 = Time and date 2. Archive depth is reduced following the

addition of Item 2, Time and Date.
Item 1 Item 2
Value 1
Width = 5 Width = 16
Value 2
Value 3 Depth = 5
: : : :
Value 4
3. Archive after a re-sizing request to allow 9 Item 1 Item 2

entries for each item. Value 1
Width = 21
Value 2
Value 3
: : : : Depth = 9
Value 7
Value 8
Value 9
795x 1540 (Ch09/EB) Page 9.3

Item 1 4. Archive after removing Item 2 from list.

Value 1
Width = 4
Value 2
Value 3 Depth = 9
: : :
Value 8
Value 9
Adding new statistics to an archive:
(a) Fixed time-span data logging

This is described with two sequences of diagrams.
Sequence 1: Archive is not full

This shows what will happen when adding values to an empty archive. Notice how older values are
pushed downwards.
1. Fixed time-span data Record: Record: Record: Record:

logging over 4 intervals 1 second
(1)14.55 (1)14.50 (1)14.53 (1)?
of 8 seconds. samples
(2)1.0132 (2)1.0133 (2)1.0130 (2)?
T0 T5
T1 = 8s T2 = 8s T3 = 8s T4 = 8s
Notes:
(a) "Interval" type data logging is shown with an 8 second time-span. "Daily" type logging operates in the
same way except T1=24 hours, T2=24 hours, etc.
(b) A sampled value is obtained from each defined item during a 1 second cycle time.
(c) Items 1 and 2 are defined only.
(e) T0 is the date and time that this data logging first began.
(f) Data logging continues beyond T5 until disabled.
Newest and oldest value at present 2. Archive state after 8 seconds.

Item 1 Item 2 Item 3
Value 1 14.55 1.0132 (Not used)
Value 2
Value 3
: : : : :
Value 6
The last possible record for a value in this archive
Page 9.4 795x 1540 (Ch09/EB)

3. Archive state after 24 seconds. Newest value

at present
Value 1 14.53 1.0130 (Not used)
Value 2 14.50 1.0133 (Not used)
Value 3 14.55 1.0132 (Not used)
: : : : :
Value 6
Oldest value at
The last possible present
record for a value
in this archive
Sequence 2: Archive is full

This shows what will happen when adding values to a full archive. Notice how the oldest values have to be lost to
make space for new values.
1. Fixed time-span data logging over 8 intervals of 8 seconds.
Record: Record: Record: Record: Record: Record: Record: Record:

1 second
(1)14.55 (1)14.50 (1)14.53 (1)14.51 (1)15.0 (1)15.1 (1)15.2 (1)?
samples
(2)1.0132 (2)1.0133 (2)1.0130 (2)1.0130 (2)1.0129 (2)1.0128 (2)1.0127 (2)?
T0 T9
T1 = 8s T2 = 8s T3 = 8s T4 = 8s T5 = 8s T6 = 8s T7 = 8s T8 = 8s
Notes:
(a) "Interval" type data logging is shown with an 8 second time-span. "Daily" type logging operates in the same way
except T1=24 hours, T2=24 hours, etc.
2. Archive state after 48 seconds. Newest value at present

Value 1 15.1 1.0128 (Not used)
Value 3 14.51 1.0130 (Not used)
: : : : :
Value 6 14.55 1.0132 (Not used)
Oldest value at present

The last possible
record for a value in
this archive
795x 1540 (Ch09/EB) Page 9.5

Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 3. Archive state after 56 seconds.

: : : : :
Value 6 14.50 1.0133
14.55 is 1.0132 is
The last possible now lost now lost
record for a value
(b) Variable time-span data logging

This is described with two sequences of diagrams.
Sequence 1: Archive is not full

This shows what will happen when adding values to an empty archive. Notice how older values are pushed
downwards.
Record: Record: Record: 1. Variable time-span data logging and

1 second
samples (1)14.55 (1)14.50 (1)? archiving over two completed periods of
(2)1.0132 (2)1.0133 (2)? 8 seconds and 16 seconds.
T0 T4
T1 = 8s T2 = 16s T3 = ?s
Notes:
(a) "Manual" or "Alarm" type data logging is shown here with two complete periods. Third period is unknown until
an alarm is raised (or cleared) or logging is next triggered manually by an operator.
2. Archive state after 8 seconds. Newest and oldest value at present

Value 1 14.55 1.0132 (Not used)
Value 2
Value 3
: : : : :
Value 6
The last possible record for a

value with this archive
Page 9.6 795x 1540 (Ch09/EB)

Newest value 3. Archive state after 24 seconds.

at present
Value 1 14.50 1.0133 (Not used)
Value 2 14.55 1.0132 (Not used)
Value 3
: : : : :
Value 6
Oldest value at
The last possible record present
for a value in this archive
Sequence 2: Archive is full

This shows what will happen when adding statistics to a full archive. Notice how the oldest statistics have to be lost
to make space for new statistics.
Record: Record: Record: Record: Record: Record: Record: Record:

1 second (1)14.55 (1)14.50 (1)14.53 (1)14.51 (1)15.0 (1)15.1 (1)15.2 (1)?
samples (2)1.0132 (2)1.0133 (2)1.0130 (2)1.0130 (2)1.0129 (2)1.0128 (2)1.0127 (2)?
T0 T9
T1 = 6s T2= 7s T3 = 9s T4= T5 = 8s T6 = 12s T7 = 8s T8 = ?s
5s
Notes:
(a) "Manual" or "Alarm" type data logging is shown here with two complete periods. Third period is unknown until an
alarm is raised (or cleared) or logging is next triggered manually by an operator.
2. Archive state after 48 seconds. Newest value at present

Value 3 14.51 1.0130 (Not used)
: : : : :
Value 6 14.55 1.0132 (Not used)
Oldest value at present

The last possible record
for a value in this archive
795x 1540 (Ch09/EB) Page 9.7

Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 3. Archive state after 56 seconds.

: : : : :
Value 6 14.50 1.0133 (Not used)
The last possible 14.55 is 1.0132 is

record for a value now lost now lost
in this archive
Page 9.8 795x 1540 (Ch09/EB)

9.1.4 Configuration details

Use the following table to find the instructions for configuring an archiving activity. It is advisable to try out an
example before embarking on the configuration task.
Configuration task Page
x Interval Archiving 9.10
x Daily Archiving 9.11
x Manual Archiving 9.12
x Alarm (snapshot) Archiving 9.13
x Monthly Archiving 9.14
x Re-sizing of archives 9.15
795x 1540 (Ch09/EB) Page 9.9

Configuration task: “Interval logging”

Objectives:
x Set-up parameter list.
x Set a start date/time.
x Set a fixed interval.
x Enable this data logging type.
Instructions:
1
1. Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs . The
identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
2. Press the PRINT MENU key
3. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Interval log”>
4. Nominate the parameters to be archived:

(a) Browse through the “Configure list” menu to locate the ‘Pointer’ and ‘Action’ parameters.
(b) Starting with first item, Item 1, manually enter (SET) the location ID of a parameter and then select
a statistical (action) function. (See Table 2 for further guidance.)
(c) Repeat step 4b with the next item until all parameters have been nominated.
5. Work through the remaining configuration parameters as guided in Table 3.
Table 2: Interval Archive – First Item Configuration Parameters

Menu Data *
(as displayed)
Int snap locn 1 x Manually enter (SET) the location ID of a parameter.
Int snap action 1 x Manually select an action to be applied to all values sampled from the parameter.
* Abbreviations used: “Int” = Interval, “locn” = location, “snap” = snapshot
Table 3: Interval Archiving Configuration Parameters

Menu Data *
(as displayed)
Interval start time x Manually edit (SET) the date and time for start of the first interval period.
Interval time x Manually select the data logging frequency.
Interval log/print x Options:
(1) “Disabled” – deactivate data logging type / already deactivated.
(2) “Log data only” – activate data logging type but do not printout a report after archiving.
(3) “Log and print data” – activate data logging type and printout a report after archiving. *
* Requires an RS-232 port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7.
Interval Archiving Notes:

A Interval data logging can operate independently of the others.
B Intervals are always synchronised to the 795x calendar clock. For example, a 10-second interval will first
occur on the minute rollover and then re-occur every multiple of 10 seconds. An interval start time that is
not divisible by the interval will effectively be delayed to the next multiple of the interval.
C Values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-
synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
1
The location identification of a parameter can be seen by navigating to the parameter screen and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
Page 9.10 795x 1540 (Ch09/EB)

Configuration task: “Daily” logging details

Objectives:
Instructions:
2
2. Press the PRINT MENU key.
3. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>
Table 4: Daily Archive – First Item Configuration Parameters

(as displayed)
Daily snap locn 1 x Manually enter (SET) the location ID of a parameter.
Daily snap action 1 x Manually select an action to be applied to all values sampled from the parameter.
* Abbreviations: “locn” = Location, “snap” = snapshot
Table 5: Daily Archive Configuration Parameters

(as displayed)
Daily start time x Manually edit (SET) the date and time for commencement of the first 24-hour period.
Daily log/print x Options:
* Requires a serial port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7.
Daily Archive Notes:

A Daily data logging can operate independently of the others.
B A period that falls within an adjustment for daylight saving will be 24 +/- 1 hour.
2
The identification number of a parameter can be seen by navigating to the parameter screen and then pressing the ‘a’-key.
795x 1540 (Ch09/EB) Page 9.11

Configuration task: “Manual” logging details

Objectives:
Instructions:
1. Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs 3. The
3. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Manual log”>
Table 6: Manual Trigger Archive – First Item Configuration Parameters

(as displayed)
Manual snap loc 1 x Manually enter (SET) the location ID of a parameter.
Manual trig actn 1 x Manually select an action to be applied to all values sampled from the parameter.
* Abbreviations: “snap” = snapshot, “loc” = location, “actn” = action, “trig” = trigger
Table 7: Manual Trigger Archive Configuration Parameters

(as displayed)
Manual log/print x Options:
* Requires an RS-232 port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7
Manual Trigger Archive Notes:

A Manual type data logging is activated and triggered by selecting a command through the parameter
under this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Trigger manual log”>
B Manual type data logging can operate independently of the others.
3
Page 9.12 795x 1540 (Ch09/EB)

Configuration task: “Alarm” (snapshot) logging details

Objectives:
Instructions:
4
3. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Alarm log”>
Table 8: Alarm Triggered Archive – First Item Configuration Parameters

Menu Data *
(as displayed)
Alarm snap locn 1 x Manually enter (SET) the location ID of a parameter.
Alarm snap action 1 x Manually select an action to be applied to all values sampled from the parameter.
* Abbreviations: “snap” = snapshot, “locn” = location
Table 9: Alarm Triggered Archive – Configuration Parameters

Menu Data *
(as displayed)
Log/print on alarm x Options:
Alarm-Trigger Archive Notes:

A Alarm type data logging can operate independently of the others.
B Values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging will re-
4
795x 1540 (Ch09/EB) Page 9.13

Configuration task: “Monthly” logging details

Objectives:
Instructions:
5
3. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Monthly log”>
Table 10: Daily Archive – First Item Configuration Parameters

(as displayed)
Month snap locn 1 x Manually enter (SET) the location ID of a parameter.
Month snap action 1 x Manually select an action to be applied to all values sampled from the parameter.
* Abbreviations: “locn” = Location, “snap” = snapshot
Table 11: Daily Archive Configuration Parameters

Menu Data *
(as displayed)
Month start time x Manually edit (SET) the date and time for commencement of the first month.
Month log/print x Options:
Monthly Archive Notes:

A Monthly data logging can operate independently of the others.
B Interval between monthly logging is exactly one calendar month to the day and time on that day. For
example if the start time is “01-03-2004 09:00:00”, the first data logging occurs on “01-04-2004 09:00:00”.
Subsequent data logging then occurs on 1st day of the month at 9am.
5
Page 9.14 795x 1540 (Ch09/EB)

9.1.5 Re-sizing Archive Space
IMPORTANT NOTICES!
1. Adding a parameter to a data logging list causes all recorded statistics to be immediately
lost from the associated archive. This does not affect other archives.
2. Removing a parameter from a data logging list causes all recorded data to be immediately
lost from the associated archive. This does not affect other archives.
3. Increasing or decreasing space will result in all recorded data being lost from all archives.
Re-size Instructions:
2. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Re-size archives”>
3. Check how much spare archive memory is available.

Note: If the spare archive memory is reported as 0 bytes and archiving has not been in use, re-
format the archives and then re-check the reported value
4. There are ‘re-size’ menus for each archive:

x “Alarm log” – Alarm Trigger Archive re-sizing.
x “Manual log” – Manual Trigger Archive re-sizing.
x “Daily log” – Daily Archive resizing.
x “Interval log” – Interval Archive resizing.
x “Monthly log” – Monthly Archive resizing.
Each ‘re-size’ menu features two parameters; one parameter is for requesting an increase or
decrease to the depth – i.e. the maximum quantity of values per parameter that can be stored. The
other parameter shows the maximum quantity allowed at present.
To request more space for an archive:

(4a) Manually enter (SET) a new quantity in the appropriate ‘request’ parameter.
(4b) Confirm this request for more space by selecting the "Reformat” command through the
parameter under the ”Re-format archives” menu.
Warning! Increasing or decreasing space will cause all recorded values to be lost from all
archives. Use the ‘max snaphot’ parameter to check on the result of a request.
795x 1540 (Ch09/EB) Page 9.15

9.1.6 Operation details (Reporting)

Operations involve selective viewing and printing out of the archives.
Viewing Archives
Recorded values can be viewed on the 795x display. No configuration is required for this feature, just follow the
instructions that are provided below.
How to view an archive:

1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<”View/print logs”>
2. Select the menu associated with the archive you want to view e.g. “Alarm log”.
3. Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the “Num snaps stored” menu. The
parameter shows how many values (per parameter) are available from data logging.
4. There are menus for displaying a previously recorded value for every listed (nominated) parameter. For
example, the value of the first nominated parameter is found in the “Snap item 1 value” menu.
By default, the most recently recorded values from the last data logging can be seen. The “Select
snapshot” menu is for selecting other data logging occurrences. For example, manually entering a “1” is
for showing the oldest recorded values. Selecting a ‘snapshot’ that does not yet exist will always cause
the most recent recorded values to be selected and then displayed.
5. Select the “View snapshot time” menu to see the date and time of when the presently displayed
statistics were recorded.
Printing Archives (through a configured RS-232 port)

Archives can printed out in several ways:
1. Method: On-demand
(1a) From outside the “Archives” menu:
This feature requires no configuration. To activate, press the PRINT MENU key and then select
the “Print report” menu. Now choose a report by selecting from the multiple-choice of options.
Option
Purpose of option
(as displayed)
Print interval arc x Printout the ‘Interval’ archive as a report.
Print daily arc x Printout the ‘Daily’ archive as a report.
Print manual arc x Printout the ‘Manual’ archive as a report.
Print alarm arc x Printout the ‘Alarm’ archive as a report.
Print monthly arc x Printout the ‘Monthly’ archive as a report.
(1b) From inside the “Archives” menu

This feature requires no configuration. To activate, press the PRINT MENU key and then follow
the instructions below.
Instructions:
1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“View/print logs”>
2. Select a menu that is name-associated with the archive.
3. Select the “Print” menu.
4. Select the “Print snapshot” or “Print archive” command.
2. Method: Automatic Printed Report

Archiving can be configured to automatically printout a report whenever data is archived.
Alarm archive instructions:

1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Alarm log”>/<”Enable / Disable”>
2. Select the “Log and print data” option.
Page 9.16 795x 1540 (Ch09/EB)

Manual archive instructions:

1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Manual log”>/<”Enable / Disable”>
Daily archive instructions:

1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>/<”Enable / Disable”>
Interval archive instructions:

1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Interval log”>/<”Enable / Disable”>
2. Select the “Log and print data” option..
Monthly archive instructions:

1. Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Monthly log”>/<”Enable / Disable”>
2. Select the “Log and print data” option
All methods require an RS-232 Communications Port to be set-up (see Chapter 7). Printouts are
transmitted through the port that is configured exclusively for connection to a printer.
795x 1540 (Ch09/EB) Page 9.17

9.1.7 Guided example of archiving

This guided example involves configuring the “Daily log” archive to record (snapshot) the average of all
pressure readings during a 24-hour period. It is assumed that the measurement task is already set-up.
Objective: Set-up 795x to record the average of line pressure measurements on a daily basis
Instructions:
1. Add the parameter to the “Daily log” archive list:
(1a) Press the PRINT MENU key.
(1b) Navigate to: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>/<“Configure list”>/<“Item 1”>
(1c) Select the “Pointer” menu to displays a parameter, <“Daily snap locn 1”>.
(1d) Press the ‘b’ key and then type in the location ID for the Line Pressure parameter e.g. “0321”.
(1e) Confirm the edited location ID by pressing the ENTER key.
(1f) Select the “Action” menu and then change the parameter option selection to “Averaging”.
2. ‘Set’ an initial date and time:

(2a) Navigate to this menu: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>/<“Daily report time”>
(2b) Press the ‘b’ key and then edit a date and time for the commencement of the first 24-hour period.
Notes:
x The 795x date/time is displayed within menu system. Look inside this menu: <”Time”>
x Leaving the date as “00-00-0000” is the same as specifying the present 795x calendar date.
x Leaving the time as “00:00:00” is the same as specifying the present 795x time.
3. Activate the data logging activity:

(3a) Navigate to: <“Archives”>/<“Configure logs”>/<“Daily log”>/<“Enable / Disable”>
(3b) Choose an option as guided in the table:
Option
Purpose of option
(as displayed)
Log data only x Data copied into the “Daily log” archive. No printed report following archive.
Log and print data x Data copied into the “Daily log” archive. Print a report following archive. *
* An RS-232 port should be configured for connection to a “Printer”.
4. Check on the data logging after 24 hours:

Results are best viewed on a connected printer or a PC running a terminal emulation program.
Alternatively, results can be viewed within the menu system.
(4a) Navigate to: <“Archives”>/<“View / print logs”>/<“Daily log”>

(4b) Select various parameters:
Parameter
Purpose
(as displayed)
Num daily snapshots x The number of snapshots per parameter inside the “Daily log” archive.
Daily snap, 0=latest x View selection: 0 = recent snap, 1 = oldest snap, 2 = 2nd oldest snap, etc.
Daily snap value n x Selected view of a value from the parameter nominated as Item n.
Daily snapshot at x Shows the date and time of the last daily snapshot.
Page 9.18 795x 1540 (Ch09/EB)

9.2 Feature: Printed Reports

This section is a guide to how printable reports can be defined and enhanced. Chapter 12 has a section on
how to print reports.
9.2.1 “Current” report definition

The content of the “Current” report is defined by setting up a list of up to 20 parameters. An example is
shown in Figure 1.
How to define a list of parameters:

1. Find a parameter within the 795x menu system e.g. Line Pressure.
2. Press the ‘a’ key to display the location number (ID) on line four of the display
3. Write down the location ID number of the parameter e.g. “0321”.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each parameter to be shown in the report.
6. Navigate to this menu: <“Define reports”>/<“Current report”>
7. Select a menu e.g. “Entry 1”.
8. Edit the value to be one of noted the location numbers e.g. “0321”.
9. Press the ENTER key to confirm it.
A valid location number is automatically replaced with the parameter name. Attempts to use location
numbers that do not exist are greeted with the message “Bad location ID” or “** Error **” before re-using
the original setting.
10. Repeat steps 7 to 9 for each parameter to be shown in the report.
Figure 1: Current Report with two parameters
CURRENT REPORT
================
Report printing time: 21/03/1998 15:26:29
Tag number HB5X1510
Software Version 1510 Iss 4.20
Indicated vol rate 200.000 m3/hour SET
Ind volume total 4039565.849 m3
******************** END OF REPORT ********************
795x 1540 (Ch09/EB) Page 9.19

9.2.2 Report Enhancements

Reports can be enhanced to include more information. Use this section to review options for each report and
then take advantage of enhancements as guided.
1. Define a Tag Number
This is automatically included in all reports. By default, the tag number is left blank. Edit a tag number to
avoid this and uniquely identify the 795x.
Note: If you have more than one 795x, it is advisable to define a tag number for each one.
(See MAIN menu: <“Tag number”>)
2. Headers and Footers
By default, these are left blank. They automatically appear in all reports once defined.
Header lines 1 to 5
A maximum of five lines can be edited, with free-form text, to appear between the “tag number” line and
the “report printing time” line. Blank lines are not shown.
Footer lines 1 to 5
A maximum of five lines can be edited, with free-form text, to appear prior to the end of report message.
Blank lines are not shown.
To find these options, Press the PRINT MENU key and select the “Headers/Footers” menu.
3. Include settings and values of listed parameters in a report
How to define a list of parameters for a Current report, Alarm report or Event report:
1. Find a parameter within the 795x menu system e.g. Line Pressure.
2. Press the ‘a’ key to display the location number (ID) on line four of the display.
3. Note down the location number e.g. “0321”.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each parameter to be included in the report.
5. Press the PRINT MENU key
6. Navigate to this menu: <“Define reports”>
7. Select a menu relating to the report e.g. “AlarmLogger report” menu.
8. Select a menu relating to an unused entry in the report e.g. “Entry 1”.
9. Edit the value to be one of the noted location numbers.
10. Press the ENTER key to confirm it.
11. Repeat steps 8 to 10 for each parameter to be included in the report.
Note: For Archive reports, refer to Section 9.1.
Page 9.20 795x 1540 (Ch09/EB)

9.3 Selecting units and data formats

You can select the units which the 795x uses for its calculations and in which it displays the data, as well as the
formats in which the data is displayed.
You can choose the units and data display formats for:
x Flow rates.
x Flow totals.
x Line density.
x Base density.
x Temperature.
x Static pressure.
x Base pressure.
x Differential pressure.
x Dynamic viscosity.
x Turbine ‘k’ factor.
x Gas data.
x Energy.
x Length.
x Time.
x Periodic time (Frequency).
x Orifice Coefficients.
A full list of the units (metric and imperial) is given at the end of this chapter. Note that, if you change the units,
the values are converted automatically to reflect the change.
9.4 Limits
You can set limits for some parameters so that an alarm is generated if the limits are exceeded.
There are several types of limit:
x High limit
The highest value that the parameter can have before an alarm is generated in the Historical Alarm Log.
x Low limit
The lowest value that the parameter can have before an alarm is generated in the Historical Alarm Log.
x Step limit
The greatest allowable step between successive values before an alarm is generated in the Historical Alarm Log.
x Comparison limit
The greatest allowable difference between values from separate measurement channels before an alarm is
generated in the Historical Alarm Log.
The parameters, and the types of limit that you can set for them, are:
x Mass flow rate: high and low
x Line density: high, low, step and comparison
x Base density: high, low, step and comparison
x Line temperature: high, low and step
x Line pressure: high, low and step
x Alarm X and Y: high and low.
x Alarm A and B: Comparison
x Specific gravity: high, low, step and comparison
x Base volume flow rate: high and low
x Turbine frequency: high
x Differential pressure: high
795x 1540 (Ch09/EB) Page 9.21

9.5 Fallback values and modes

A fallback value is used as a temporary substitute for a parameter if a live input (i.e. the transducer,
transmitter or wiring), that is normally used to calculate the parameter, should fail.
A fallback must have one of the following modes:
x None The system uses whatever value is available for the parameter regardless
of whether or not the live input has failed.
x Last good value The system uses, for the parameter, the last value prior to failure.
x Fixed value The system uses whatever fixed value you have specified for the fallback.
You can set fallback values for:

x Differential pressure
x Line density
x Base density
x Line temperature
x Line pressure
x Specific gravity
x Density temperature ‘A’ and ‘B’ (separate channels)
x Master meter temperature
x Atmospheric pressure
x CO2 and N2
x Cv/m
9.6 Units which the 795x can display

The 795x can display data values with many different units of measurement, as listed on the next two pages.
However, when communicating with other devices, the data is always sent using the base units.
The following definitions are used:
x Base units: The 795x will transmit parameter values in base units (over a MODBUS
link). Parameter values in the 795x database are stored in base units.
x Default units: Units which the 795x displays unless you choose an alternative.
x Other units: Units which you can choose instead of the default.
Note that many of the abbreviations used in the tables are defined in the glossary.
Page 9.22 795x 1540 (Ch09/EB)

Units of measurement: Part 1 of 3

Default units
Parameter Category Base units Other units available for on-screen (as displayed)
(on-screen)
Deg. F Kelvin Ohms
Temperature Deg. C Deg. C
Deg. R
Temperature offset Deg.C Deg.C Deg. F Kelvin Deg. R
Pa abs KPa abs MPa abs
Pressure bar abs bar abs 2
psia Kg/cm abs
Pa abs KPa abs MPa abs
2
psia Kg/cm abs bar gauge
Base pressure bar abs bar abs
Pa gauge kPa gauge MPa gauge
2
psig Kg/cm gauge
Pa Abs KPa Abs MPa Abs
Atmospheric pressure bar Abs bar Abs
psiA
bar Pa kPa
2 2
N/m kN/m mmWG
Differential pressure mbar mbar
mmHg inWG inHg
psi
3 3 3
tonnes/m oz/in oz/ft
oz/barrel oz/gallon (UK) oz/gallon (US)
3 3
lb/in lb/ft lb/barrel
3 3 3
Density kg/m kg/m lb/gallon (UK) lb/gallon (US) tons/ft
tons/barrel tons/gallon(UK) tons/gallon (US)
3
g/cc g/litre g/m
kg/cc kg/litre
ns Hz day
Frequency us us hour min s
ms
Fraction % % PPM Mole fraction
ms us day
Time s (seconds) s (seconds)
hour min
pulse/litre pulse/cc gallon (US)/pulse
3
gallon (UK)/pulse barrel/pulse ft /pulse
3 3 3 3
Flow factor pulse/m pulse/m in /pulse m /pulse litre/pulse
cc/pulse pulse/gallon (US) pulse/gallon (UK)
3 3
pulse/barrel pulse/ft pulse/in
3 3 3
100m m x E3 m x E6
3 3 3
in ft 100ft
3 3 3 3
Volume total m m 1000ft MM ft barrel
gallon (UK) gallon (US) cc
litres
3 3 3 6
std 100m3 std m x E std m x E
3 3 3
std in std ft std 100ft
3
std 1000ft3 std MM ft std barrel
std gallon (UK) std gallon (US) norm cc
3 3 3 3
Base volume total std m std m norm litres norm m norm 100m
3 3 3 6 3
norm m X E norm m x E norm in
3 3 3
norm ft norm 100ft norm 1000ft
3
norm MM ft norm barrel norm gallon (UK)
norm gallon (US) std cc std litres
tonne ktonne Mtonne
Mass Total kg kg oz lb ton
g
GJ TJ BTU
Therm kWh Cal
Energy Total MJ MJ
kCal MCal GCal
J kJ
795x 1540 (Ch09/EB) Page 9.23


Default units
(on-screen)
kg/day tonnes/min tonnes/hour
tonnes/day ktonnes/min ktonnes/hour
ktonnes/day mtonnes/hour mtonnes/day
oz/s oz/min oz/hour
Mass rate g/min kg/hour lb/s lb/min lb/hour
lb/day tons/min tons/hour
tons/day g/s g/min
g/hour kg/s kg/min
kg/hour
m3/min m3/s litres/day
litres/hour litres/min litres/s
cc/hour cc/min cc/s
gallon(US)/day gallon(US)/hour gallon (US)/min
gallon (US)/s gallon (UK)/day gallon (UK)/hour
gallon(UK)/min gallon (UK)/s barrel/day
barrel/hour barrel/min barrel/s
Volume rate m3/hour m3/hour MM ft3/day MM ft3/hour MM ft3/min
MM ft3/s 100ft3/day 100ft3/hour
100ft3/min 100ft3/s ft3/day
ft3/hour ft3/min ft3/s
in3/hour in3/min in3/s
m3xE6/day m3xE6/hour m3xE6/min
m3xE6/s m3xE3/day m3xE3/hour
m3xE3/min m3xE3/s m3/day
MJ/min MJ/s kJ/day
kJ/hour kJ/min kJ/s
J/hour J/min J/s
GCal/day GCal/hour GCal/min
GCal/s MCal/day MCal/hour
MCal/min MCal/s kCal/day
kCal/hour kCal/min kCal/s
Energy rate MJ/hour MJ/hour Cal/day Cal/hour Cal/min
Cal/s kWh/day kWh/hour
kWh/min kWh/s therms/day
therms/hour therms/min Btu/day
Btu/hour Btu/min Btu/s
TJ/day TJ/hour TJ/min
GJ/day GJ/hour GJ/min
GJ/s MJ/day
MJ/g kJ/ktonne kJ/tonne
kJ/kg kJ/g J/kg
J/g therms/ton therms/lb
therms/oz Btu/ton Btu/lb
Energy value (mass) MJ/kg MJ/kg Btu/oz TJ/Mtonne TJ/ktonne
TJ/tonne TJ/kg GJ/Mtonne
GJ/ktonne GJ/tonne GJ/kg
GJ/g MJ/Mtonne MJ/ktonne
MJ/tonne
MJ/litre kJ/m3 kJ/litre
kJ/cc J/litre J/cc
GCal/m3 GCal/litre MCal/m3
MCal/litre kCal/m3 kCal/litre
Cal/m3 Cal/litre kWh/m3
Energy value (volume) MJ/m3 MJ/m3
kWh/litre Therms/gallon (US) therms/gallon (UK)
therms/barrel Therms/ft3 therms/in3
Btu/gallon (US) Btu/gallon (UK) Btu/barrel
Btu/ft3 Btu/in3 TJ/m3
GJ/m3 GJ/litre
Page 9.24 795x 1540 (Ch09/EB)


Default units
(on-screen)
Std m3/min Std m3/s Std litres/day
Std litres/hour Std litres/min Std litres/s
Std cc/hour Std cc/min Std cc/s
norm gallon (US)/d norm gallon (US)/h norm gallon (US)/m
norm gallon (US)/s norm gallon (UK)/d norm gallon (UK)/h
norm gallon (UK)/m norm gallon (UK)/s norm barrel/day
norm barrel/hour norm barrel/min norm barrel/s
norm MM ft3/day norm MM ft3/hour norm MM ft3/min
norm MM ft3/s norm100ft3/day norm 100ft3/hour
norm 100ft3/min norm 100ft3/s norm ft3/day
norm ft3/hour norm ft3/min norm ft3/s
norm in3/hour norm in3/min norm in3/s
norm m3xE6/day norm m3xE6/hour norm m3xE6/min
norm m3xE6/s norm m3xE3/day norm m3xE3/hour
norm m3xE3/min norm m3xE3/s norm m3/day
Base volume rate Std m3/hour Std m3/hour norm m3/hour norm m3/min norm m3/s
norm litres/day norm litres/hour norm litres/min
norm litres/s norm cc/hour norm cc/min
norm cc/s Std gallon (US)/da Std gallon (US)/hr
Std gallon (US)/mi Std gallon (US)/s Std gallon (UK)/da
Std gallon (UK)/hr Std gallon (UK)/min Std gallon(UK)/s
Std barrel/day Std barrel/hour Std barrel/min
Std barrel/s Std MM ft3/day Std MM ft3/hour
Std MM ft3/min Std MM ft3/s Std 100ft3/day
Std 100ft3/hour Std 100ft3/min Std 100ft3/s
Std ft3/day Std ft3/hour Std ft3/min
Std ft3/s Std in3/day Std in3/hour
Std in3/min Std in3/s Std m3xE6/day
Std m3xE6/hour Std m3xE6/min Std m3xE6/s
Std m3xE3/day Std m3xE3/hour Std m3xE3/min
Std m3xE3/s Std m3/day
cm mm ft
Length m m
in
Pa.s Kgf.s/m2 P
Dynamic viscosity cP cP
Reyn slug/fts lbf.s/ft2
Absolute zero Deg.C Deg.C Deg. F
Velocity m/s m/s

%/Deg.C Per Deg.C PPM/Deg.F
%/Deg.F Per Deg.F PPM/Deg.R
Orifice Coeffient PPM/Deg.C PPM/Deg.C
%/Deg.R Per Deg.R PPM/Deg.K
%/Deg.K Per Deg.K
795x 1540 (Ch09/EB) Page 9.25

Page 9.26 795x 1540 (Ch09/EB)

Chapter 10 Configuring using Wizards
10. Configuring using Wizards
10.1 Introduction to Wizards

Solartron recommends that you use software Wizards to configure the 795x for your installation.
Wizards are easy to use facilities that will take a user through all the data locations and decisions
that are required to satisfy the requirements of a measurement task.
There are individual wizards available for each measurement task. For example there is a
“Pressure” wizard for configuring line pressure and atmospheric pressure.
To fully configure a 795X, it is very likely that several measurement tasks are required and,
therefore, several wizards will need to be used. It is often more efficient to use a “full set-up”
wizard. This wizard can guide users through setting up more than measurement task.
Section 10.3 has a “Quick-view” guide (table) for finding out what wizards are available and what
can be achieved with them.
Section 10.4 features a special wizard for selecting a standard for units of measurement.
10.2 Using Wizards

Although wizards are easy to use, some preparation is still required. Use the following check-list
to prepare.
Ensure that:
• All physical connections to the rear panel have been completed.
If this is not the case, refer to Chapter 2 (Getting Started) and Chapter 3 (About the 795X) for
details of supported connections.
• Front panel keyboard buttons and the menu system are familiar.
Chapters 5 and 6 are provided to assist with this. It might be a good idea to bookmark the
summary of keys in Chapter 5 for quick reference.
• Identification numbers of important result data are written down.
These numbers will be required for configuring facilities such as analogue outputs. There
are two ways to find out data location numbers:
1
(1) Examine the “.man” file that is supplied on the FC-Config media or
(2) Locate the data within the menu system and then press the ‘a’-key to display the
unique identification number on line 4. (Pressing the ‘a’-key toggles the number
display on or off.)
• Calibration certificates (and supporting data sheets) for all field instrumentation are
available.
• there is a comprehensive list of all the 795X input and output connections that are being
used and a list of the measurement tasks that are required.
1
A free PC utility developed by Solartron. Available on request.
795X Op Man/AB Page 10.1

Starting a Wizard from the front panel is easy.

Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key.
Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the “Configure” option
appears.
Step 3: Press the blue key that is alongside the “Configure” option.
Step 4: Press the ‘a’-key twice so that “Setup Wizard” appears on line one of the display.
Do not worry about what line two is presently displaying.
Step 4: Press the ‘b’-key once to start the wizard selection process.
Step 5: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through all available wizards (on line two).
Step 6: Press the ENTER key twice to select and then start a wizard that was named is on-
screen.
Once a Wizard is started, follow the prompts to supply the information it asks for and then, if
necessary, use Chapter 11 and the menu system to edit the resulting configuration to match your
exact needs.
Wizard interactions involve several keys:

a, b, c ,d keys Answer a question (e.g. “Yes” or “No”) or used for normal data location editing
ENTER key Confirm a selection or edited setting (e.g. new value), move on to next prompt
< key Go back to a previous important decision prompt.
After completing a Wizard, the screen with “Setup Wizard” re-appears. Further wizards can
then be selected in the same way as before. Note that it is not necessary for the “None” option to
be selected before proceeding to other 795X work.
Page 10.2 795X Op Man/AB

10.3 Quick-view Guide (Set-up Wizards)
Wizards Measurement Tasks Comments
Full Setup • Multiple measurement tasks You can skip tasks.
Flow meter • Frequency (Turbine or Ultrasonic Flow) See pages 11.9, 11.13 and
• Differential pressure (Orifice Flow) 11.33 of Chapter 11 to find
• Volume (Linear Flow) detailed information.
• Base volume
Flow rate
• Mass
• Gas density ‘A’ (Transducers)
See page 11.53 of Chapter 11
Line density • Gas density ‘B’ (PTZ 1, PTZ2, mA, HART)
for detailed information.
• Prime Meter Density
• Base density ‘A’ (SG)
Base Density • Base density ‘B’ (PTZ1, PTZ2 or mA)
to find detailed information.
• Prime base density
• SG ‘A’ (Transducers)
Specific gravity • SG ‘B’ (Base Density, mA or Chromat)
• Prime specific gravity
• Metering temperature (Analogue or HART) See page 11.50 of Chapter 11
Temperature
‘Density’ temperatures (Analogue or HART) to find detailed information
• Metering pressure (mA or HART) See page 11.52 of Chapter 11
Pressure
• Atmospheric pressure (mA or HART) to find detailed information.
• Cv/m from ISO6976, AGA5, mA or Chromat
Energy Value • Relative density
• Wobbe Index
Transmitters • Live CO2, N2 and Cv/m (mA sources)
• Special equation type 1 See pages 11.79 - 11.80 of
Special calc.
• Special equation type 2 Chapter 11 for information.
Analogue outputs • mA signal outputs
Pulse outputs • Pulse outputs
Alarms • User alarms Chapter 8 is about alarms.
Multi view • Multi-page multi-view (key display)
• Printer
Chapter 7 is a full guide to
Communications • Modbus Slave 7955 Communications
• Modbus Master
• Live inputs from SMART type transmitters Chapter 16 is a full guide to
HART inputs
(for other measurements) HART support
Initialise • Clear all user programming to defaults Use this with caution!!
• Clear all user selected options to defaults

Reset Use this with caution!!
and zero parameter values
795X Op Man/AB Page 10.3

10.4 Units Wizard Selection

Follow these instructions to select a standard for the units of measurement:
Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key.
Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the “Configure” option appears.
Step 3: Press the blue key that is alongside the “Configure” option.
Step 4: Press the blue key that is alongside this description: “Units wizard”‘
Step 5: Press the ‘b’-key once to start the selection process.
Step 6: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through all available options (see map below).
Step 7: Press the ENTER key twice to select the standard that is named is on-screen.
Units wizard
(Selection)
Choosing this will not do anything. Use scroll up/down keys
Choose option to move through the wizard options.
"Metric"
Metric
"Imperial"
Imperial Exit Wizard
SI
"SI"
Units Wizard Selection
Page 10.4 795X Op Man/AB

Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11. Configuring without using Wizards
11.1 What does this Chapter tell me?

This chapter is a configuration reference for those who are reasonably experienced with configuring the
7955 series computer. It is also useful for those who provide technical support.
It is primarily organised for a structured approach to configuring - the live inputs, the calculations and the
live outputs - after the first power-on.
However, for those in a support role, a ‘quick-find’ index is provided for locating just the reference pages
required for configuring or trouble-shooting a measurement task.
If you are not experienced, return to Chapter 10 (Configuring with Wizards) unless directed here by this
Operating Manual or by someone providing support.
Not all features are covered in this Chapter. For example, configuring the 7955 to work with HART
networked transmitters can be a complex task and is therefore kept in Chapter 16. Other non-core features
can be found in Chapters 7, 8, 9 and 12.
Quick-find Index .................................................11.2
A Structured Approach To Configuring...............11.3
Reference Page Conventions.............................11.6
Reference information. .......................................11.7
If you require WET GAS ORIFICE METERING support, please use Chapters 11A that
immediately follows this main Chapter 11.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.1

11.2 Quick-find Index

Use this table to quickly find the pages that are of interest.
CATEGORY MEASUREMENT TASK PAGE
Live Inputs x Analogue Inputs (mA and RTD/PT100) 11.7
x Digital (Status) Inputs 11.8
x Pulse Inputs (Turbine or Ultrasonic) 11.9
Orifice Flow x Differential Pressure 11.13
ISO 5167 x Mass rate 11.13
x Corrected Volume rate 11.15
Orifice Flow x Differential Pressure 11.14
AGA 3 x Mass rate 11.14
Turbine Flow x Indicated Volume rate 11.30
x Mass rate 11.31
x Base Volume rate 11.40
Ultrasonic Flow x Indicated Volume rate 11.34
x Flow Velocity 11.34
x Mass rate 11.35
Linear Flow x Indicated Volume rate 11.38
x Mass rate 11.38
Totalling x Ultrasonic Totalling (by stream/run) 11.43
x Ultrasonic Totalling (by Sub-Station) 11.45
x Ultrasonic Totalling (by Station) 11.47
x Turbine/Orifice/Linear Flow Totalling (by Stream/run) 11.49
x Turbine/Orifice/Linear Flow Totalling (by Sub-Station) 11.46
x Turbine/Orifice/Linear Flow Totalling (by Station) 11.53
x Tariff Totalising 11.55
Temperature x Meter temperature 11.57
x ‘Density Loop’ Temperatures 11.57
Pressure x Meter pressure 11.59
x Atmospheric Pressure 11.59
Density x Gas Density ‘A’ 11.60
x Gas Density ‘B’ 11.60
x Prime Gas Density 11.60
Base Density x Base Density ‘A’ 11.70
x Base Density ‘B’ 11.70
x Prime Base Density 11.70
Specific Gravity x Specific Gravity ‘A’ 11.77
x Specific Gravity ‘B’ 11.77
x Prime Specific Gravity 11.77
Energy x Energy value 11.80
x Energy rate 11.80
Live Outputs x Analogue Outputs 11.84
x Digital (Status) Outputs 11.85
x Pulse Outputs 11.86
Special Equations x Special Equation Type 1 11.87
x Special Equation Type 2 11.88
7955 Security x Passwords and security levels 11.89
x Security level fallback 11.89
Multi-view x Multi-View Multi-Page display 11.91
Page 11.2 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

11.3 A Structured Approach To Configuring

At this stage, it is expected that all the physical connections have already been made to the 7955. If
possible, check on this by asking the relevant authority. Familiarity with the front panel keyboard and menu
system are also expected.
Careful preparation will help ensure that configuration work progresses smoothly. Work through the
preparation and configuration stages that are listed below.
Note: In a multiple stream/run installation, it is strongly advisable to complete and check the configuration
for an individual run before proceeding with another.
11.3.1 Preparation Stage

1. Ensure that all of the information needed is at hand:
x A plan of the pipeline layout.
x A summary of instrumentation with the connections made to the 7955.
(e.g. Analogue Input 1: mA Transmitter providing temperature at stream/run #1)
x Calibration certificates of connected instrumentation
x Operational data (e.g. minimum and maximum flow rates)
x A summary of core measurements to be set-up (e.g. flow rates, flow totals, density, etc.)
(It may be useful to look in Chapter 3 and browse through this chapter).
x Identification number for each important parameter.
This is essential for configuring the Multi-page Multi-view feature and when configuring an Analogue
Output stream to transmit values from an unlisted parameter.
In the event of no list being available, use the following procedure:

(a) Navigate to the parameter screen.
(b) Press the BLUE ‘a’-key to display the unique identification number.
(c) If applicable, use the STREAM/RUN/STREAM SELECT key to cycle through the
parameter details for different stream/runs/streams.
(d) Press the BLUE ‘a’-key to stop displaying the identification number.
x A plan of what is required from additional features (e.g. Archiving)

(It may be useful to browse through Chapters 3, 7, 8 and 9).
2. Read the information on conventions used in this Chapter. (See page 11.6)
3. Browse through the rest of this chapter and see how the reference pages are organised.
(End of preparation stage)
11.3.2 Configuration Stage

1. Get the 7955 into the programmer security level.
To do this, perform one of the following actions:
(a) Turn the security key to the furthest position to the right.
(b) Navigate to the <”Enter password”> parameter screen and then type in the programmer password to
change security level.
2. Set up the basic elements.

Display Contrast
x The display contrast may be quite dim when first powering on the 7955 with new software. Look
within the <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”> menu for the appropriate parameter and then change
the setting to suit the environment.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.3

Display Formats
x Display formats are important when decimal places of results are critical. They are categorised
under general headings (e.g. temperature, pressure, etc.). Look in the <“configure”>/<“ Other
parameters”> menu for the appropriate menu and then change the settings if the defaults are not
appropriate. Units of measurement can be changed also.
Cycle Time (Menu: <”Time”>)

x The necessary amount of machine cycle time required is dependent on how much work the 7955 is
performing. Examine the idle cycle time indicator to see if the ‘Set’ cycle time needs to be
increased or decreased.
Tag Number (Menu: <”Tag Number”>)

x Edit a unique text reference to identify the 7955.
Date/Time (Menu: <”Time”>)

x Ensure that the clock and calendar are ‘Set’ correctly.
DO NOT CHANGE ANY SETTINGS UNDER THE CALIBRATION MENUS. SETTINGS ARE
MADE BY SPECIALIST CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AT THE FACTORY.
3. Switch the 7955 into the maintenance mode of operation on a stream by stream basis.
(Warning! This step will prevent the incrementing of main totals prior to going live)
x Press the INFORMATION MENU (‘I’) key.
x Use the DOWN-ARROW (V) key to page down until “Operating mode” (or similar) is seen.
x Press the BLUE (letter) key that is alongside that description.
x If necessary, use the STREAM/RUN/STREAM SELECT key to switch to another stream/run.
x Change the option description (value) to “Maintenance”.
(Note: Value quickly reverts to “Normal” if the 7955 is not in ‘Flow Stop’ state for the stream/run)
x Repeat the last two steps if configuring for further stream/runs.
x Press the MAIN MENU key.
4. Configure the live inputs to get raw readings from instrumentation.

x HART Inputs All reference information is in Chapter 16.
x Analogue Inputs Turn to page 11.7
x Digital Inputs Turn to page 11.8
5. Choose the Flow Metering system.

x Navigate to this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Flowmeter details”>
x Locate the parameter screen for “Flow meter”
x Change the option (value) selection to the applicable system.
6. Set-up the core calculation processes.

Pulse inputs (page 11.9), Flow metering (page 11.10), Density measurements (pages 11.60 to 11.76),
Specific gravity measurements (11.77), Energy measurements (page 11.80),
Temperature measurements (page 11.57) and Pressure measurements (page 11.59)
7. Configure the live outputs.

x Analogue Outputs Turn to page 11.84
x Digital Outputs Turn to page 11.85
x Pulse Outputs Turn to page 11.86
8. Configure Multi-page Multi-view display (User key 1)
9. Configure Alarms and Events (All reference information is in Chapter 8)
Page 11.4 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

10. Configure Serial communications ports (All reference information is in Chapter 7)
11. Set-up final 7955 security

Set passwords for all security levels and set-up the optional security fallback feature. If not using the
security key, change to the Engineer security level for the remainder of the configuration work.
12. Switch the 7955 into the normal mode of operation on a stream by stream basis.
(Warning! This step will allow the main totals to increment)
x Press the INFORMATION MENU (‘I’) key.
x Use the DOWN-ARROW (V) key to page down until “Operating mode” (or similar) is seen.
x Press the BLUE (letter) key that is alongside that description.
x If necessary, use the STREAM/RUN/STREAM-SELECT key to switch to another stream/run.
x Change the option description (value) to “Normal”.
(Note: Value quickly reverts to “Maintenance” if 7955 is not in a ‘Flow Stop’ state for the
stream/run)
x Press the MAIN MENU key.
(End of configuration stage)
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.5

11.4 Reference Page Conventions

Core reference pages consist of:
x A short bullet-point list of measurements or features that can be configured.
x A process drawing showing key blocks and how menu data / parameters interacts (See section 11.4.1).
x A list of menu navigation references (See section 11.4.2 below).
x A list of parameter associated with the process drawing (See section 11.4.3 below).
x A list of equations.
11.4.1 Process Drawings
These drawings are very important because they show how menu data interacts to get a result. Drawings
are generic for configuring more than one channel or stream/run.
Note: A circled number refers to an entry in the Menu Data / Parameter list. They are NOT location numbers.
11.4.2 Menu Navigation Lists
The data necessary for configuring a measurement or feature can be found in separate parts of the menu
structure. A list of the applicable menu structure parts, in a simple notation format, is therefore provided to
assist with navigating to a sub-menu. Data can then be quickly located by some localised searching within
that sub-menu.
A notation has been used as a much shorter method of explaining how to move from the present menu to
another menu. As an example, the notation of <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”> translates into these steps:
Step 1: Press the MAIN MENU key
Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word “Configure” is seen.
Step 3: Press the BLUE (letter) key that is alongside “Configure”.
Step 4: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until “Flow rate” is seen.
Step 5: Press the BLUE (letter) key that is alongside “Flow rate”.
ARROW (curved arrow) key is a much more common method of returning to a higher menu level.
11.4.3 Menu Data / Parameter Lists
There are two kinds of menu-based parameter to be aware of:
1. ‘Common’ Menu-based Parameter

This type of menu-based parameter comprises a single 795x database location. The parameter value,
state and units are common to streams/runs 1, 2, 3 and 4.
It is easy to identify this type by the absence of a numerical digit – Stream/run ID – next to the triangular
shaped mark on display line four.
2. ‘Multiple stream/run’ Menu-based Parameter

This type of menu-based parameter comprises multiple 795x database locations, two locations in the
case of dual stream/run software, accessible from the same parameter menu. The value, state and
units of such a database location is associated with streams/runs 1, 2, 3 or 4.
It is easy to identify this parameter type by the presence of a single numerical digit - Stream/run ID -
next to the triangular shaped mark on display line four. The Stream/run ID will be a 1 if the present
value, state and units are for stream/run 1. Similarly, the Stream/run ID will be a 4 for stream/run 4.
The STREAM/RUN SELECT key will instantly switch to the location (value, state, etc) associated with
the other stream/run. So, by using this key, you may cycle between the database location for
stream/run 1 and the location for stream/run 2. (The descriptor on display line 1 stays the same).
Also, look out for cÖf indicator in the “notes?” column of Menu Data / Parameter lists in this chapter,
and elsewhere is this manual.
Page 11.6 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

ANALOGUE INPUTS
Features:
x Analogue Inputs supported by 7955:
RTD/PT100 input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 4)
mA input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 16)
What to do:
Use this page to configure the analogue channels that are being used by analogue field transmitters. After the
menu-based parameters are configured, check that a live reading is displayed by the “value” parameter.
Later reference pages, which deal with configuring measurement tasks such as temperature, pressure, etc., will
expect transmitters to be connected and supplying a live reading. Configuring a measurement task will involve
providing range (scaling) information and choosing the analogue channel.
Analogue Inputs are not pre-allocated to a measurement or feature and are not directly associated with a stream/run.
Menu Navigation List:

(1) <“Configure”>/<”Analog inputs”> and (2) <“Health check”>/<”Analog inputs”>
Parameter list: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”

Analogue Channel Parameter names Analogue Channel Parameter names
(and signal types) (as displayed) (and signal types) (as displayed)
Analogue Input 1 Analog 1 input value * Analogue Input 9 Analog 9 input value *
(RTD/PT100 or mA) Analog input 1 type (mA only) Analog input 9 type
Analog in 1 ave type Analog in 9 ave type
(mA only) Analog input 5 type (mA only) Analog input 13 type
(mA only) Analog in 7 type (mA only) Analog input 15 type
Analog input 7 ave type Analog in 15 ave type
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.7

DIGITAL INPUTS
Features:
x Digital inputs supported by 7955 - Status Input channels 1 to 26.
What To Do:
This reference page will assist when configuring basic data (see list below) for all the digital input channels that are
supported. Digital inputs are not associated with any stream/run and they do not have a default function allocated.
They can be allocated these functions:
Flow Direction: Indicate flow direction for Ultrasonic Flow Metering. See also the Ultrasonic Flow
Metering section (page 11.34) for all associated menu data / parameters.
Flow Stop: Force the 795X into a ‘flow stopped’ state. Select a digital input using the menu-based
parameter: <“Configure”>/<“Status inputs”>/<”Flowstop status i/p”>.
(See also the various Flow Metering pages in Chapter 11 for further information .)
Remote Print: Transmit the Current Report (Chapter 8) through a 795x serial port that is configured for
connection to a printer (Chapter 7). Select a digital input using the menu-based
parameter: <“Configure”>/<“Status inputs”>/<”Print req status i/p”>
Maintenance Mode: Switch to the Maintenance (operating) mode from Normal (operating) mode if the795X is
in a 'flow stopped' state. Select a digital input using the menu-based parameter:
<“Configure”>/<“Status inputs”>/<”Maintenance sts i/p”>.
(See also the various Totalising pages in Chapter 11 for further information on these modes.)
In the <“Health Check”) menu there are

two Status Input menus. Each menu a
contains a page with a series of digits on Status inputs
0010010000100000 b
the display. Each digit indicates the This Status Input 11
c is presently active
present state of the individual digital (positive logic)
(status) inputs. d

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Status inputs”> and (2) <“Health check”>/<“Status Inputs”>
Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”

Status I/P Menu Data Status I/P Menu Data Status I/P Menu Data
Channel (as displayed) Channel (as displayed) Channel (as displayed)
Input 1 DIN 1 logic level Input 11 DIN 11 logic level Input 21 DIN 21 logic level
DIN 1 mode level DIN 11 mode level DIN 21 mode level
Input 7 DIN 7 logic level Input 17 DIN 17 logic level
DIN 7 mode level DIN 17 mode level
Page 11.8 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

PULSE INPUTS (TURBINE/ULTRASONIC)

x Pulse Inputs supported by 7955:
Pulse input channels 1 to 4 (for pulse flowmeters)
What To Do:
Use this page to configure the basic live input information (listed parameter) for each pulse input channel that is
being used by a supported volumetric flowmeter. Later reference pages, for configuring further flow details, will
expect the instrumentation to be wired to the 7955, and expect a pulse frequency value.
After a channel is configured, check on the pulse frequency that is being indicated by the ‘frequency’ parameter.
Use the STREAM/RUN SELECT key to cycle between screens for different streams/runs.
Also, use the <“Health Check”> menu to view other diagnostic information such as the missing pulse counter.

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Flowmeter details”> and (2) <“Health check”>/<”Flowmeter inputs”>
Menu Data / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Pulse Channel Parameter names Pulse Channel Parameter names
Note? Note?
(fixed allocation) (as displayed) (fixed allocation) (as displayed)
Flow meter frequency * c Flow meter frequency * e
Pulse Input 1 Flow meter type c Pulse Input 3 Flow meter type e
(Stream/Run 1) Flow meter error lmt (Stream/Run 3) Flow meter error lmt
Meter pulses c Meter pulses e
Flow meter frequency * d Flow meter frequency * f
Pulse Input 2 Flow meter type d Pulse Input 4 Flow meter type f
(Stream/Run 2) Flow meter error lmt (Stream/Run 4) Flow meter error lmt
Meter pulses d Meter pulses f
Notes:
c Stream/run 1.
d Stream/run 2.
e Stream/run 3.
f Stream/run 4.
A The configurable (Set) error limit for missed pulses is not applicable unless there are dual pulse trains being
received by the 795X.
B The pulse frequency (pulse/second) for a stream/run is calculated as follows:

P
Using: F
t
Where: F is the pulse frequency ....................................................{Menu Data: <”Flow meter frequency”>}

P is the number of accumulated pulses since time ‘t’ ........{Menu Data: <"Meter pulses">}
t is the elapsed time (seconds) since the last calculation.{Not in menu}
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.9

DRY GAS FLOW METERING

This page summarises all the dry gas flow metering measurements that are supported by the Gas Flow Computer.
Orifice Flow Metering

x Differential Pressure (Single or Multiple D.P. Cell System).....................Page 11.13
x Plate Orifice System Calculations (ISO 5167-1, AGA 3, or HART) .........Page 11.13
x V-Cone Orifice System Calculations (ISO 5167-1 or HART) ..................Page 11.13
x Venturi Orifice System Calculations (ISO 5167-1 or HART) ...................Page 11.13
x Mass flow rate.........................................................................................Page 11.13
x Corrected Volume flow rate ....................................................................Page 11.15
x Base Volume flow rate ............................................................................Page 11.40
x Energy rate .............................................................................................Page 11.80
x Stream/run Totalling................................................................................Page 11.49
x Station Totalling ......................................................................................Page 11.53
Turbine Flow Metering

(Single or Dual Pulse Train. Uni-directional Flow)
x Indicated Volume flow rate......................................................................Page 11.30
Ultrasonic Flow Metering

(Single Pulse Train. Uni-directional and Bi-directional Flow)
x Flow Velocity...........................................................................................Page 11.34
x Mass flow rate.........................................................................................page 11.35
Linear Flow Metering

(4-20mA Input, Uni-directional Flow)
If you require WET GAS ORIFICE METERING support, please use Chapter 11A that
immediately follows this main Chapter 11.
Page 11.10 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

FLOW METERING
ORIFICE SYSTEM (SIMPLIFIED OVERVIEW)
TURBINE SYSTEM (SIMPLIFIED OVERVIEW)
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.11

FLOW METERING
ULTRASONIC SYSTEM (SIMPLIFIED OVERVIEW)
LINEAR FLOW SYSTEM (SIMPLIFIED OVERVIEW)
Page 11.12 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

ORIFICE FLOW METERING (ISO 5167)

Measurements and Features: (For Corrected Volume flow rate details, see page 11.15)
x Differential Pressure from a mA transmitter, HART transmitter or via Modbus.
x Mass flow rate from ISO5167, AGA3 (page 11.14), HART transmitter (page 11.15), or via Modbus.
x Station Flow Rates and Station Totalling (Turn to page 11.53) x Stream/run Totalling (Turn to page 11.49)
To
24 30 32 47
48
U 43 Orifice
XX Index for use with listed parameters
P, t Calculations
(Venturi)
Range Details 33 42 44
To
3 4 5 Intermediate Results
1 2 10 11 12 HI
6 7 8 To
GP 24 31 47 48
Modbus 18 23 45
1..n D.P. Cell 17
%GP U 43 Orifice
Source Scaling 9 Config. & Orifice Method MASS
mA Inputs 1..n GP 22 Calculations OR 44 FLOW
Selection Selection Select Selection
P, t (Plate) RATE
HART Inputs (HART) GP 13 14 15 16 19 33 39 42 44
To AGA 3 or HART or
LO
20 21 46 MODBUS
Intermediate Results
F/B FLOW
STOP To
24 30 47 48
Orifice
P, t Calculations
U 43 (V-Cone)
33 To
42

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Flowmeter details”>/<“Orifice”>, (2) <“Health check”>/<“Flowmeter inputs”>/<“Orifice”>
(3) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rates”>, (4) <“Line density”>, (5) <“Pressure”>, (6) <“Temperature”>
(7) <“Health check”>/<“Analog inputs”> and (8) <“Health check”>/<“HART inputs”>
Menu Data List / Parameter List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Index Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
- Select flow meter cÖf 28 Pipe expans coeff cÖf
1 DP cell 1 source cÖf A 29 Orif expans coeff cÖf
2 DP cell 1 ain/hart cÖf (A) 30 Orifice cal temp cÖf
3 Diff press HI @ 100% cÖf 31 Orif tapping code cÖf
4 Diff press HI @ 0% cÖf 32 Venturi type cÖf
5 Diff press med @ 100% cÖf 33 Orif discharge coeff cÖf J
6 Diff press med @ 0% cÖf 34 Orif expansibility cÖf J
7 Diff press LO @ 100% cÖf 35 Vel of approach cÖf J
8 Diff press LO @ 0% cÖf 36 Reynolds number cÖf
9 DP value @ cell n cÖf 37 Corr pipe diameter cÖf
10 Diff press config cÖf B 38 Corr orifice diam cÖf
11 Diff press HI switch C 39 Mass rate Beta cÖf
12 Diff press LO switch C 40 Pressure loss cÖf M
13 Diff press cal error D 41 Pressure ratio cÖf
14 Diff press cal time D 42 Mass rate K factor cÖf
15 DP deviation limit E 43 Prime density value * cÖf
16 DP input alarms F 44 Mass rate * cÖf H, (O)
17 Diff press range cÖf G 45 Orif mass flow calc cÖf O
18 Diff press HI lmt cÖf 46 DP flow stop limit cÖf (I)
19 Diff press LO lmt cÖf 47 Adiabatic * cÖf K
20 Diff press FB type 48 Isentropic calc src K
21 Diff press FB value cÖf t Line temperature * cÖf P. 11.57
22 Diff pressure value * cÖf P Line pressure * cÖf P. 11.59
23 Orifice type cÖf - Rate flowstop action cÖf I
24 Pipe diameter cÖf - Flow mode cÖf I
25 Orifice diameter cÖf - ISO5167 alarm ctrl N
26 Dynamic visc * cÖf L
27 Isentropic cÖf K
Notes are on page 11.16 cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.13

ORIFICE FLOW METERING (AGA 3)

Measurements: (For Corrected Volume flow rate, see page 11.15)
x Differential Pressure from a mA transmitter, HART transmitter or via Modbus
x Mass flow rate from AGA3, HART transmitter (page 11.15), ISO5167 (page 11.13) or via Modbus
Range Details
HI 43 44
3 4 5 To
1 2 10 11 12 18 40 23 30 U 41
6 7 8
Modbus 17 P,t 39
D.P. Cell Orifice Mass Rate MASS
%GP GP
Source Scaling 9 Config. & GP 22 Calculations Calculation 40 FLOW
mA Inputs 1..n 1..n 38 RATE
Selection Selection (Plate) (AGA 3)
Kf
HART Inputs (HART) GP 13 14 15 16 19 31 37
To ISO 5167
LO or HART
20 21 42 Interim or Modbus
Results
F/B Flow
Stop

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Flowmeter details”>/<“Orifice”>, (2) <“Health check”>/<“Flowmeter inputs”>/<“Orifice”>
(3) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rates”>, (4) <“Line density”>, (5) <“Pressure”>,
(6) <“Health check”>/<“Analog inputs”> and (7) <“Health check”>/<“HART inputs”>
- Select flow meter cÖf 26 Isentropic cÖf K
1 DP cell 1 source cÖf A 27 Pipe expans coeff cÖf
2 DP cell 1 ain/hart cÖf (A) 28 Orif expans coeff cÖf
3 Diff press HI @ 100% cÖf 29 Orifice cal temp
4 Diff press HI @ 0% cÖf 30 Orif tapping code cÖf
5 Diff press med @ 100% cÖf 31 Orif discharge coeff cÖf J
6 Diff press med @ 0% cÖf 32 Orif expansibility cÖf J
7 Diff press LO @ 100% cÖf 33 Vel of approach cÖf J
8 Diff press LO @ 0% cÖf 34 Reynolds number cÖf
9 DP value @ cell n cÖf 35 Corr pipe diameter cÖf
10 Diff press config cÖf B 36 Corr orifice diam cÖf
11 Diff press HI switch C 37 Mass rate Beta cÖf
12 Diff press LO switch C 38 Mass rate K factor cÖf
13 Diff press cal error cÖf D 39 Prime density value * cÖf
14 Diff press cal time cÖf D 40 Mass rate * cÖf H, (O)
15 DP deviation limit E 41 Orif mass flow calc cÖf O
16 DP input alarms F 42 DP flow stop limit cÖf (I)
17 Diff press range cÖf G 43 Adiabatic * cÖf K
18 Diff press HI lmt cÖf 44 Isentropic calc src K
19 Diff press LO lmt cÖf t Line temperature * cÖf P. 11.57
20 Diff press FB type P Line pressure * cÖf P. 11.59
21 Diff press FB value cÖf - Rate flowstop actions cÖf I
22 Diff pressure value * cÖf - Flow mode cÖf I
23 Pipe diameter cÖf
24 Orifice diameter cÖf
25 Dynamic visc * cÖf L
Page 11.14 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

ORIFICE FLOW METERING (HART)

Measurements: (For Base Volume flow rate, turn to page 11.40.)
x Mass flow rate from HART transmitter, ISO5167 (page 11.13), AGA3 (page 11.14) or Modbus
x Corrected Volume flow rate (calculated)
HI
4
1 2 3 MASS
Q CORRECTED
RATE m Corrected QIV
Source Method VOLUME
HART Inputs Qm Qm 6 Volume 9
Selection Selection RATE
(Calculation)
7 8 5 9
ISO 5167, AGA 3 or Modbus
F/B LO
Ub

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Flowmeter details”>/<“Orifice”>,
(3) <”Flow rates”> and (4) <”Base density / SG”>
Menu Data List: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”

- Select flow meter cÖf 7 Mass rate * cÖf (O)
1 Mass rate HART chl cÖf A 8 Rate flowstop action cÖf I
2 Orif mass flow calc cÖf O 9 Corrected vol rate * cÖf
3 Mass rate HI limit cÖf UB Prime base density * cÖf
4 Mass rate LO limit cÖf - Flow mode cÖf I
5 Mass rate FB type cÖf
6 Mass rate FB value cÖf
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.15

ORIFICE FLOW METERING (ISO 5167-1/AGA3/HART)

Notes: (for all previous “Orifice Flow Metering” pages)
A (1) Mixing of DP sources (HART/mA input/Modbus) is not supported. Only one type of source can be selected.
(2) When mA Input is the selected source, all mA-type DP transmitters must be wired to analogue inputs in
numerical series. For example, if DP Cell #1 is wired up to the first Analogue Input, DP Cell #2 must then
be wired to the second Analogue Input. Parameter <”DP cell 1 ain/hart”> selects the analogue input that
starts the series. For wiring examples, see Chapter 2.
(3) When HART is the selected source, the HART transmitters providing DP must use the <HART Input n value>
parameters in numeric series. Parameter <”DP cell 1 ain/hart”> selects the HART Input that starts this series.
For all details of the HART support, see Chapter 16.
(4) When Modbus is the selected source, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can supply the prime
DP selection block with raw measurements from up to five ‘DP cells’. For all details of the ITM feature, refer
to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
B The following table shows supported cell configurations:

Configuration Code Application
H=DP:1 Cell #1 covers a high pressure range only.
H=DP:12 Two cells cover the same high pressure range.
H=DP:1 L=DP:2 Cell #1 covers the high pressure range. Cell #2 covers the low pressure range.
Cell #1 (‘Master’) and Cell #2 (‘Check’) cover the high pressure range.
H=DP:12 L=DP:3
Cell #3 covers the low pressure range.
Cell #1 (on high pressure range). Cell #2 (on medium pressure range).
H=DP1 M=DP2 L=DP3
Cell #3 (on low pressure range).
Cell #1 (‘Master’) and Cell #2 (‘Check’) cover the high pressure range.
H=DP:12 L=DP:34
Cell #3 (‘Master’) and Cell #4 (‘Check’) cover the low pressure range.
Cell #1 (‘Master’), Cell #2 (‘Check’) and Cell #3 (‘Check’) on high pressure range.
H=DP:1p23 L=DP:4p5
Cell #4 (‘Master’) and Cell #5 (‘Check’) cover the low pressure range.
DP A (= cell1) See “Prime Re-Selection Procedure” that follows these notes.
DP B (= cell2) See “Prime Re-Selection Procedure” that follows these notes.
AutoA (=cell1, or 2) See “Prime Re-Selection Procedure” that follows these notes.
AutoB (=cell2, or 1) See “Prime Re-Selection Procedure” that follows these notes.
Avg A/B (=cell1/2) Average of readings from Cell#1 and Cell#2 each cycle is used as the DP value.
C DP cell switching is based on the low range cell. The Flow Computer will automatically switch-up a range when
the low range cell reading exceeds the HIGH SWITCH point. Similarly, the Flow Computer will automatically
switch-down a range when the low range cell reading is less than the LO SWITCH limit
D Optional feature: ‘Calibration error’ (i.e. limit) Checks.

x <“Diff press cal error“> is the alarm limit for the maximum difference in differential pressure measurements
between a selected (prime) DP Cell and the next suitable (prime) DP Cell. An alarm is raised if the limit is
exceeded for longer than a period as ‘Set’ by <“Diff press cal time”>. (Not enabled when limit is ‘Set’ to 0).
E Deviation refers to difference in differential pressure measurements between two comparable cells e.g. ‘Master’
(or ‘Pay’) DP Cell and ‘Check’ DP Cells, or DP ‘A’ and DP ‘B’.
F Automatic selection of a ‘higher’ range DP Cell can cause a mA input failure alarm to be raised even though the
transmitter has not actually failed. The cause of this alarm is the mA signal from a ‘lower’ range cell exceeding
111% of the 20mA analogue input range as the cell continues to measure beyond it’s effective range. This
alarm condition remains until the lower range cell is re-selected.
The <“DP inputs alarm”> parameter gives the option of suppressing the alarm under this particular situation.
By default, there is no suppression.
Page 11.16 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

Notes continued…
G This is a read-only parameter that identifies the range of the selected (prime) DP Cell.
H The Reynolds Number calculation is iterative and requires a previous value for the Mass Rate. This is why the
Mass Rate is shown by an Orifice calculation block.
I The <“Flow mode”> menu, within the INFORMATION (‘i’) key menu, shows if the Flow Computer considers
there to be either normal flow or zero flow in the stream/run pipe.
x Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as <“DP flow stop limit”>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and
therefore halt flow totals even when there is negligible flow – <“Flow mode”> will show “Flow stopped”.
However, negligible flow rate values may still be displayed if enabled by <“Rate flowstop actions”>.
x In the case of an Orifice System, the prime differential pressure value must be greater than the setting of
<“DP flow stop limit”> for normal flow, whereby <“Flow mode”> will show the state of “Flowing”.
J Support for the use of other Primary DP devices, such as a Dall Tube, is made possible with the ability to use
fixed (SET) values for the Expansibility factor, the Velocity of approach and the Discharge coefficient.
In the case of a Dall Tube, a Reynolds Number Correction value must be combined with one of those ‘Set’
values if it is not 1.00.
K There are two supported methods for calculating the Isentropic and Adiabatic exponents: the ‘GOSST’
method and the ‘RD-50-213-80’ method. You may select either method. Also, see the Equation List for terms
and associated parameters.
Configuration Instructions:
x Navigate to the <Isentropic> sub-menu under orifice flowmeter details menu.
x Locate the calculation selection parameter.
x Select either “GOSST” or “RD-50-213-80”.
x Set-up the associated parameters, as listed in the Equation List.
L There are two methods available for calculating gas dynamic viscosity: ‘GOSST’ and ‘VDE/VDI 2040’. You
may select either method. Also, see the Equation List for terms and associated parameters.
x Navigate to the <Dynamic viscosity> sub-menu under orifice flowmeter details menu.
x Select either “GOSST” or “VDE/VDI 2040”.
M Pressure loss is applicable only when using a venturi DP device. There are two methods available for
calculating the pressure loss: ‘ISO5167’ and ‘A.beta^2+B.beta+C”.
x Navigate to the <”Pressure loss calc”> sub-menu under orifice flowmeter details menu.
x Select either “ISO5167” or “A.beta^2+B.beta+C”.
N ISO 5167 related alarms can be suppressed by this parameter. By default, this feature is not enabled.
O When ISO5167 (1991), ISO5167:Am1 (1998) or ISO5167 (2003) is selected, the mass rate is calculated in
accordance with the referenced issue of the ISO 5167 Standard.
When Modbus is selected, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can be set-up to supply the mass
flow rate. For all details of the ITM feature, refer to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
When AGA3 is selected, the mass rate is calculated in accordance with AGA report 3 (1992, Third edition).
When HART is selected, the mass rate is supplied by a HART transmitter. For all details of HART support, see
Chapter 16.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.17

Prime DP Re-Selection Procedure

In the event of a DP cell (e.g. DP ‘A’) failing or returning to a live state, the 795x will perform a re-selection procedure
for obtaining a live prime DP value. This procedure involves evaluating a user-selected logic decision table to
determine where now to get the prime value.
x The logic table below is shown in full for the “Auto A” configuration option, where Cell #1 (DP‘A’) is preferred.
DP ‘A’ DP ‘B’ A#B (Comp.) DP ‘A’ input DP ‘B’ input Prime DP Key:
out of limit out of limit out of limit failed failed Selected
A = DP Cell #1 (DP ‘A’)
YES YES YES - - FB B = DP Cell #2 (DP ‘B’)
- YES YES - - A
FB = Fallback
YES - YES - - B
- - YES - - B
YES YES - - A Notes:
- YES - - A 1. The “Auto B”
YES - - - B configuration option
- - - - A
uses the same logic
YES YES YES YES - FB
table except DP ‘B’ is
- YES YES YES - FB
the preferred channel.
YES - YES YES - B
- - YES YES - B This preference
YES YES - YES - B reverses the A and B
- YES - YES - FB selection in the last
YES - - YES - B column of this table.
- - - YES - B
YES YES YES - YES FB 2. “Out of limit”
- YES YES - YES A columns 1 and 2 are
YES - YES - YES FB concerned with the HI
- - YES - YES A or LO alarm limits.
YES YES - - YES FB
- YES - - YES A
3. The “Input failed”
YES - - - YES FB
columns are
- - - - YES A
concerned with ‘Live’
YES YES YES YES YES FB
inputs.
- YES YES YES YES FB
YES - YES YES YES FB
- - YES YES YES FB
YES YES - YES YES FB
- YES - YES YES FB
YES - - YES YES FB
- - - YES YES FB
x The logic table (below) is shown in full for the “DP A” configuration option, where Cell #2 (DP ‘B’) is not involved
DP ‘A’ DP ‘A’ Prime DP

out of limit input failed Selected
- - A
- YES FB
YES - A
YES YES FB
Key: A = DP ‘A’, FB = Fallback
x The logic table (below) is shown in full for the “DP B” configuration option, where Cell #2 (DP ‘A’) is not involved
DP ‘B’ DP ‘B’ Prime DP

- - B
- YES FB
YES - B
YES YES FB
Key: B = DP ‘B’, FB = Fallback
Page 11.18 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

ORIFICE FLOW METERING (PLATE/VENTURI EQUATIONS)

The equations that follow are common to both ISO 5167-1:1991, ISO 5167-1:1991/Amd:1998 and AGA 3 standards
unless otherwise stated. Refer to the appropriate Standard for information on any restrictions not listed here.
Note: Support for the use of other Primary DP devices, such as a Dall Tube, is made possible with the ability to
‘Set’ values for the Expansibility factor, the Velocity of approach and the Discharge coefficient.
In the case of a Dall Tube, a Reynolds Number Correction value must be combined with one of those ‘Set’
values if it is not 1.00.
Equation OR#1: Mass flow rate

The Mass flow rate is related to differential pressure by the following equation:
§ GP ·
Using: qm = K* ¨ * U ¸ * 3600
© 1000 ¹
Where: qm = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)................................ {Parameter: <“Mass rate”>}

K = Mass flow rate ‘K’ factor..................................... {See Equation OR#2}
GP = Differential pressure measurement (in mbar)..... {Parameter: <“Diff pressure value”>}
U = Density of measured gas................................... {Parameter: <“Prime density value”>}
Equation OR#2: Mass flow rate ‘K’ factor
Using: K = Cd * E * H * d2 * N1
Where: K = Mass flow rate ‘K’ factor..................................... {Parameter: <“Mass rate k factor”>}
Cd = Discharge coefficient.......................................... {See equations OR#9a to #9d}
E = Velocity of approach factor................................. {See Equation OR#7}
H = Expansibility factor............................................. {See Equation OR#6a (Plate), #6b (Venturi) }
d' = Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion.......... {See Equation OR#3a}
2
N1 = S* * 10 5 * 1000 = 0.0003512407367 .. {Actual constant used}
4
S = 3.141592654...................................................... {Actual constant used}
Equation OR#3: Correction for area expansion of the orifice and pipe
Using: d' > @

= d * 1 t t c * E o * 10 6 ……………………….. #3a
Where: d' = Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion.......... {Parameter: <“Corr orifice diam”>}
d = Orifice diameter at calibration temperature ‘tc’.. {Parameter: <“Orifice diameter”}
t = Temperature at the stream/run....................... {Parameter: <“Meter temperature”>}
tc = Orifice calibration temperature........................... {Parameter: <“Orifice cal temp”>}
Eo = Orifice expansion coefficient.............................. {Parameter: <“Orif expans coeff”>
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.19

Using: D' > @

= D * 1 t t c * EP * 10 6 …………….………. #3b
Where: D' = Pipe diameter, corrected for expansion............ {Parameter: <“Corr pipe diameter”>}
D = Pipe diameter at calibration temperature ‘toc’... {Parameter: <“Pipe diameter”>}
t = Temperature at the stream/run...................... {Parameter: <“Meter temperature”>}
tc = Orifice plate calibration temperature................. {Parameter: <“Orifice cal temp”>}
EP = Pipe expansion coefficient................................ {Parameter: <“Pipe expans coeff”>}
Equation OR#4: Diameter ratio

d'
Uses: E =
D'
Where: E = Beta ratio (no units)……………………………. {Parameter: <“Mass rate Beta”>}

d' = Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion....... {Parameter: <“Corr orifice diam”>}
D' = Pipe diameter, corrected for expansion........... {Parameter: <“Corr pipe diameter”>}
Equation OR#5a: Expansibility factor (Plate)
GP * 10 3
Using: H
= 1 0.41 0.35 * E 4 * KH * P
Where: H = Gas expansibility factor (no units).……........... {Parameter: <“Orif expansibility”>}

E = Beta ratio (no units)………...............…….…… {See Equation OR#4}
GP = Differential pressure (in mbar).........………..... {Parameter: <“Diff pressure value”>}
P = Operating pressure.........................………...... {Parameter: <“Meter pressure”>}
KH = Isentropic or Adiabatic exponent ........…..…... {Parameter: <“Isentropic”>} or Equation OR#10
Equation OR#5b: Expansibility factor (Venturi)

1
ª§ 2 · § · § K H 1 ·º 2
«¨ kH ¸ ¨ ¸ ¨ KH ¸»
K * PR 1 E4 1 PR
Using: H = «¨¨ H ¸*¨
¸ ¨
¸*¨ ¸»
« KH 1 2 ¸ ¨ 1 PR ¸»
«¨¨ ¸¸ ¨ 4 KH ¸ ¨ ¸»
¬© ¹ © 1 E * PR ¹ © ¹¼
Where: H = Expansibility factor...…................................... {Parameter: <“Orif expansibility”>}

E = Diameter ratio............…................................. {See Equation OR#4}
KH = Isentropic or Adiabatic exponent ........………. {Parameter: <“Isentropic”>} or Equation OR#10
PR = Pressure ratio..............…................................ {Parameter: <“Pressure ratio”>
P
= 2 ...............................…........................…. {Note: Value must be t 0.75)
P1
P1 = Pressure at up-stream tapping (in Bar)…........ {No Parameter}

= P PLoss
P2 = Pressure at down-stream tapping (in Bar)...... {No Parameter}

= P1 GP
Page 11.20 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

And: P = Pressure measured at the stream/run....... {Parameter: <“Meter pressure”>}
PLOSS = Pressure loss (in Bar)................................... {Parameter: <“Pressure loss”>}

= GP * 1.3 1.25 * E
E = Diameter ratio............................................... {See Equation OR#4}

GP = Differential Pressure..................................... {Parameter: <“Diff pressure value”>}
Equation OR#6: Velocity of approach factor

1
Using: E
= 1 E4

2
Where: E = Velocity of approach factor............................. {Parameter: <“Vel of approach”>}

E = Diameter ratio................................................. {See Equation OR#4}
Equation OR#7a: (ISO 5167) Reynolds number for discharge coefficient
§ q · § 4 * 10 6 ·¸
Using: Red = ¨¨ m ¸¸ * ¨
© 3600 ¹ ¨© S * D * P ¸¹
Where: Red = Reynolds number......................................... {Parameter: <“Reynolds number”>}

qm = Mass flow rate.............................................. {See Equation OR#1}
S = 3.141592654................................................ {Actual constant used}
D = Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)...... {See Equation OR#4}
P = Dynamic viscosity......................................... {See Equation OR#9}
Equation OR#7b: (AGA3) Reynolds number for discharge coefficient
§ q · § 4 * 10 6 ·
Using: Red = N2 * ¨¨ m ¸¸ * ¨ ¸
© 3600 ¹ ¨© D * P ¸
¹
Where: Red = Reynolds number......................................... {Parameter: <“Reynolds number”>}

N2 = 1273239.5.................................................... {Actual constant used}
qm = Mass flow rate.............................................. {See Equation OR#1}
P = Dynamic viscosity......................................... {See Equation OR#9}
Equation OR#8a: STOLZ (ISO 5167-1:1991) Discharge coefficient for Orifice Plate
x Basic Equation Component
0.75
§ 10 6 ·
Use: C1 = 0.5959 0.312 * E 2.1 0.184 * E 8 0.0029 * E 2.5 * ¨ ¸
¨ R ed ¸
© ¹
Where: C1 = Basic equation component
E = Diameter ratio................................................ {See Equation OR#5}
Red = Reynolds number........................................... {See Equation OR#8a}
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.21

x For Corner Tappings only
Use: C = C1
Where: C = Discharge coefficient...................................... {Parameter: <“Orif discharge coeff”>}

C1 = The basic equation component...................... {See above}
x For D and D/2 tappings only
Use: C
= C1 0.039 * E 4 * 1 E 4 0.015839 * E
1 3
Where: C = Discharge coefficient.................................... {Parameter: <“Orif discharge coeff”>}

C1 = Basic equation component........................... {See above}
x For Flange Tappings where the pipe diameter (corrected for expansion) is larger than 58.62mm
Use: C
= C1 0.039 * E 4 * 1 E 4 1 § 0.85598
¨
© D
·
* E3 ¸
¹
Where: C = Discharge coefficient.................................... {Parameter: <“Orif discharge coeff”>}

C1 = Basic equation component........................... {See above}
x For Flange Tappings where the pipe diameter (corrected for expansion) is less than or equal to 58.62mm
Use: C
§ 2.286
= C1 ¨
© D
·
¹

* E4 ¸ * 1 E4 1 § 0.85598
¨
© D
·
* E3 ¸
¹
Where: C = Discharge coefficient...................................... {Parameter: <“Orif discharge coeff”}

C1 = Basic equation component............................. {See above}
E = Diameter ratio................................................. {See Equation OR#5}
D = Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)........ {See Equation OR#4}
Equation OR#9b: (ISO 5167-1:1991) Discharge coefficient for a Venturi tube

C= 0.984 when there is an ‘as cast’ convergent section where :-
100mm d D t 800mm
0.3 d E t 0.75
2 * 105 d Red t 2 * 106
C= 0.995 when there is a machined convergent section where :-

50mm d D t 250mm
0.4 d E t 0.75
2 * 105 d Red t 1 * 106
C=0.985 when there is a rough welded sheet iron convergent section where :-
200mm d D t 1200mm
0.4 d E t 0.7
2 * 105 d Red t 1 * 106
Page 11.22 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

Equation OR#8c: Discharge coefficient for an Orifice Plate (AGA3)

Refer to part 4 of AGA report 3 (November 1992, Third edition) for details of the Reader-Harris/Gallagher equation.
Equation OR#8d: Discharge coefficient for an Orifice Plate (ISO 5167-1:1998)

Terms and Parameter:
Cd = Discharge coefficient……………………………………………… {Parameter: <“Orif discharge coeff”>}
D = Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)....…………………..... {See Equation OR#4}
E = Diameter ratio..................................……………………............ {See Equation OR#5}
Red = Reynolds number..................................………………….......... {See Equation OR#8a}
Refer to section 8.3.2.1 of the ISO 5167-1:1991(E)/Amd.1:1998(E) Standard for details of the Reader-
Harris/Gallagher equation.
Equation OR#9: Gas Dynamic Viscosity

When enabled and LIVE, the gas dynamic viscosity on the Reynolds Number calculation is defined as follows:
ª PR ² º
P = 3.24 * [(TF 0.5 + 1.37 - 9.09GS0.125) / ( GS0.5 + 2.08 - 1.5(XB + XY))] * «1 »
¬ 30 TR 1 ¼
Where:
P = Dynamic viscosity in kgf s/m2…………………………….……. {Parameter: <”Dynamic visc“>}

GS = Gas density at the normal conditions in kg/Sm3…………….… {Parameter: <”Prime density value“>}
TF = Operating temperature in °K…………………………….…….... {Parameter: <”Meter temperature“>}
XB = Percentage of nitrogen in the natural gas (N2)…………..……..{Parameter: <”Norm Nitrogen“>}
XY = Percentage of carbon dioxide in the natural gas (CO2)….…... {Parameter: <”Norm CO2“>}
The reduced pressure and temperature will be calculated as follows:
PF
PR =
PPC
TF
TR =
TPC
Where:
PR = Reduced pressure [dimensionless]…………………………….. {Not Available}

TR = Reduced temperature [dimensionless]…………..……..……… {Not Available}
PF = Operating pressure in BarA…………………………..…….……. {Parameter: <”Meter pressure“>}
TF = Operating temperature in °K…………………………..………… {Parameter: <”Meter temperature“>}
PPc = Pseudo critical pressure in BarA…………………………..……. {See Below}
TPc = Pseudo critical temperature in °K…………………….…………. {See Below}
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.23

The pseudo critical pressure and temperature is calculated using the following formulae:
PPc = 2.9585 * (1.608 - 0.05994GS + XY - 0.392 XB)
TPc = 88.25 * (0.9915 + 1.759GS - XY - 1.681 XB)
Where:
PPc = Pseudo critical pressure in BarA……………………...…..… {Not Available}
TPc = Pseudo critical temperature in °K…………………………... {Not Available}
GS = Gas density at reference conditions………………..…….… {Parameter: <”Prime base density“>}
XB = Percentage of nitrogen in the natural gas (N2)…..……….. {Parameter: <”Norm Nitrogen“>}
XY = Percentage of carbon dioxide in the natural gas (CO2).…. {Parameter: <”Norm CO2“>}
Equation OR#10: Adiabatic Exponent

When enabled and LIVE, the adiabatic exponent calculation is used instead of the Isentropic exponent in the
expansion factor calculation.
AE = 1.556 * (1 + 0.074 XB) - 3.9 * 10-4T (1-0.68XB)-0.208 GS + (PF / TF)1.43 [384 (1-XB)**(PF / TF)0.8 + 26.4XB]
Where:
AE = Adiabatic exponent [dimensionless]………….....…………. {Parameter: <”Adiabatic“>}

PF = Operating pressure in BarA…………………………..……… {Parameter: <”Meter pressure“>}
TF = Operating temperature in °K…………………………….……{Parameter: <”Meter temperature“>}
GS = Gas density at the reference conditions in kg/Sm3…….… {Parameter: <”Prime base density“>}
XB = Percentage of nitrogen in the natural gas (N2)………….… {Parameter: <”Norm Nitrogen“>}
Page 11.24 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

ORIFICE FLOW METERING (V-CONE EQUATIONS)

Listed equations OVC#1 to OVC#5 are formulated from the standard flow equations as published by McCrometer,
the V-Cone manufacturer. The remaining equations (OVC#6 to OVC#9) are provided for completeness and comply
with the ISO 5167-1:1991 and ISO 5167-1:1991/Amd:1998 Standards.
Equation OVC#1: Mass Flow Rate

The mass flow rate is related to differential pressure by the following equation:
§ 2 ·
¨ D * E2
Using: Qm =
S
4
* 2*g c *U *¨
¨ 1 E4
¸
¸ * GP * C f * H * 3600 * Fa
¸
© ¹
Where: Qm = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)............……......……........... {Parameter: <“Mass rate”>}

gc = Dimensional conversion constant = 1…….………...….. {Actual constant used}
U = Density of measured gas (in Kg/m3).........……….......... {Parameter: <“Prime density value”>}
D = Cone inner diameter (in metres), uncorrected…..…….. {Parameter: <“Pipe diameter”>}
E = Meter beta (diameter) ratio (no units)……...………..… {See Equation OVC#4b}
GP = Differential pressure measurement (in Pa)…….…….... {Parameter: <“Diff pressure value”>}
Cf = Flow coefficient of the meter (no units)…………...……. {Parameter: <“Orif discharge coeff”>}
H = Gas expansibility factor (no units)…...............……....... {See Equation OVC#6}
Fa = Meter thermal expansion factor…………………...…….. {See Equation OVC#2}
Note: The flow coefficient is not calculated when using a V-Cone meter. It is necessary to locate Cf on the
calibration certificate and then ‘Set’ a value.
Equation OVC#2: Thermal expansion factor (Fa)

If the material expansion coefficients of the pipe and the cone are the same…
Use: Fa = 1 2 * D PE * t 528 ……………….……….……….…. #2a
Where: Fa = Meter thermal expansion factor………..…….…………. {No Parameter}
DPE = Coefficient for thermal expansion per degree Rankine. {No Parameter}
t = Operating temperature (in degrees Rankine)….……… {Parameter: <”Meter temperature”>}
If the material expansion coefficients of the pipe and the cone are not the same…
1
Use: Fa =
D' *E' * 1 E ………………..…………………….. #2b
2 2 4 2
1 E' D * E
1 2 2
4 2
Where: Fa = Meter thermal expansion factor………..………...……… {No Parameter}

D' = Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion……..…. {See Equation OVC#4a}
D = Cone inner diameter (in metres), uncorrected…..…….. {Parameter: <“Pipe diameter”>}
E' = Beta ratio, corrected dimensions (no units)…….……… {Parameter: <“Mass rate Beta”>}
E = Beta ratio, uncorrected dimensions (no units)…...….… {No Parameter}
Equation OVC#3: Beta Ratio

1
ª § d'2 ·º 2
Use: E' = «1 ¨ ¸» ………………….………………………….. #3a
«¬ ¨© D'2 ¸¹»¼
Where: E ' = Meter beta ratio (no units)………….………….………... {Parameter: <“Mass rate Beta”>}
d' = Cone outside diameter, corrected for expansion…...… {See Equation OVC#4b}
D' = Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion……..…. {See Equation OVC#4a}
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.25

(Equation OVC#3: Beta Ratio)

1
ª § d2 ·º 2
Use: E = «1 ¨¨ 2 ¸¸ » ………………………………..……...……… #3b
«¬ © D ¹ »¼
Where: E = Meter beta ratio (no units)……….…………….………... {Parameter: <“Mass rate Beta”>}
d = Cone outside diameter, uncorrected for expansion…... {Parameter: <“Orifice diameter”>}
D = Cone inner diameter, uncorrected for expansion…..…. {Parameter: <“Pipe diameter”>}
Equation OVC#4: Corrections for thermal expansion of V-Cone

If the expansion coefficients of the pipe and the cone are not the same…
Use: D' = D D * D * t t c ……………………....………….…….. #4a
Where: D' = Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion……....… {Parameter: <“Corr pipe diameter”>}
D = Cone inner diameter (in metres), uncorrected……..….. {Parameter: <“Pipe diameter”>}
D = Coefficient for thermal expansion per degree Rankine. {No Parameter}
t = Operating temperature (in degrees Rankine)………….. {Parameter: <”Meter temperature”>}
tc = Calibration temperature (in degrees Rankine)..………. {Parameter: <”Orifice cal temp”>}
Use: d' = d d * D * t t c ………………………..………...…….. #4b
Where: d' = Cone outer diameter, corrected for expansion….…..… {Parameter: <“Corr orifice diam”>}
d = Cone outer diameter (in metres), uncorrected……..….. {Parameter: <“Orifice diameter”>}
D = Coefficient for thermal expansion per degree Rankine. {No Parameter}
t = Operating temperature(in degrees Rankine)……….….. {Parameter: <”Meter temperature”>}
tc = Calibration temperature (in degrees Rankine)…..……. {Parameter: <”Orifice cal temp”>}
Equation OVC#5: Expansibility factor

(For Top-plate V-Cone Flowmeters only)
Using: H
= 1 0.649 0.696E 4 KG*PP
Where: H = Expansibility factor......................................................{Menu Data: <“Orif expansibility”>}
E = Meter Beta ratio ..........................................................{See OVC#3b}
GP = Differential pressure (in Bar).......................................{Menu Data: <“Diff pressure value”>}
P = Line pressure (in Bar Absolute) ..................................{Menu Data: <“Meter pressure”>}
K = Isentropic exponent (no units)…......…....................… {See OVC#11a or OVC#11b}
Page 11.26 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

Equation OVC#6: Velocity of approach
§ 4 * QV ·
Use: E = ¨¨ ¸¸
© S * D2 ¹
Where: E = Velocity of approach factor………………….….……… {Parameter:<”Vel of approach”>}

D = Cone inner diameter, uncorrected for expansion..…. {Parameter: <“Pipe diameter”>}
§Q /U·
And: QV = ¨¨ m ¸¸
© 3600 ¹
Where: QV = Volume rate (in m3/second)……………………………. {No Parameter}

Qm = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)……………………………. {See Equation OVC#1}
U = Density of measured gas (in Kg/m3).........…...…........ {Parameter: <“Prime density value”>}
Equation OVC#7: Reynolds number
Use: Red =
D * E * U
P
Where: Red = Reynolds number……………………………………….. {Parameter: <”Reynolds number”>}
E = Velocity of approach factor………………………..…… {See Equation OVC#6}
D = Cone inner diameter, uncorrected for expansion..…. {Parameter: <“Pipe diameter”>}
P = Dynamic viscosity………………………………………. {See Equation OVC#10}
U = Density of measured gas (in Kg/m3).........…...…........ {Parameter: <“Prime density value”>}
Equation OVC#8: Pressure ratio

P2
Use: PR =
P1
Where: PR = Pressure ratio...............................…………............... {Parameter: <“Pressure ratio”>
P1 = Pressure at up-stream tapping (in Bar)...…..……...... {No Parameter}

= P PLoss * 10 3
P2 = Pressure at down-stream tapping (in Bar).……...…... {No Parameter}
= P1 GP
And: P = Pressure measured at the stream/run……...…....... {Parameter: <“Meter pressure”>}

PLOSS = Pressure loss (in Bar)..........………..…...................... {Parameter: <“Pressure loss”>}
= GP * 1.3 1.25 * E
Equation OVC#9: Mass rate ‘K factor’

Qm
Using: K =
GP * U
Where: K = Mass flow rate ‘K’ factor........................…...……....... {Parameter: <“Mass rate k factor”>}
Qm = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)............……...…............... {Parameter: <“Mass rate”>}
GP = Differential pressure (in Bar).......………….………..... {Parameter: <“Diff pressure value”>}
U = Density of measured gas (in Kg/m3).......………........ {Parameter: <“Prime density value”>}
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.27

Equation OVC#10: Gas Dynamic Viscosity

When enabled and LIVE, the gas dynamic viscosity on the Reynolds Number calculation is defined as follows:
ª PR ² º
P = 3.24 * [(TF 0.5 + 1.37 - 9.09GS0.125) / ( GS0.5 + 2.08 - 1.5(XB + XY))] * «1 »
¬ 30TR 1 ¼
Where:
P = Dynamic viscosity in kgf s/m2…………………………….……. {Parameter: <”Dynamic visc“>}

GS = Gas density at the normal conditions in kg/Sm3…………….… {Parameter: <”Prime density value“>}
TF = Operating temperature in °K…………………………….…….... {Parameter: <”Meter temperature “>}
XB = Percentage of nitrogen in the natural gas (N2)…………..……. {Parameter: <”Norm nitrogen“>}
XY = Percentage of carbon dioxide in the natural gas (CO2)….…... {Parameter: <”Norm CO2“>}
The reduced pressure and temperature will be calculated as follows:
PF
PR =
PPC
TF
TR =
TPC
Where:
PR = Reduced pressure [dimensionless]…………………………….. {Not Available}

TR = Reduced temperature [dimensionless]………………..…..…… {Not Available}
PF = Operating pressure in BarA…………………………..…….……. {Parameter: <”Meter pressure“>}
TF = Operating temperature in °K……………………………..……… {Parameter: <”Meter temperature“>}
PPc = Pseudo critical pressure in BarA…………………………..……. {See Below}
TPc = Pseudo critical temperature in °K…………………….…………. {See Below}
The pseudo critical pressure and temperature is calculated using the following formulae:
PPc = 2.9585 * (1.608 - 0.05994GS + XY - 0.392 XB)
TPc = 88.25 * (0.9915 + 1.759GS - XY - 1.681 XB)
Where:
PPc = Pseudo critical pressure in BarA………………………..……….. {Not Available}
TPc = Pseudo critical temperature in °K……………………………..… {Not Available}
GS = Gas density at reference conditions…………………….………. {Parameter: <”Prime base density“>}
XB = Percentage of nitrogen in the natural gas (N2)…………..……. {Parameter: <”Norm nitrogen“>}
XY = Percentage of carbon dioxide in the natural gas (CO2)………. {Parameter: <”Norm CO2“>}
Page 11.28 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

Equation OVC#11: Adiabatic Exponent

When enabled and LIVE, the adiabatic exponent calculation is used instead of the Isentropic exponent in the
expansion factor calculation.
AE = 1.556 * (1 + 0.074 XB) - 3.9 * 10-4T (1-0.68XB)-0.208 GS + (PF / TF)1.43 [384 (1-XB)**(PF / TF)0.8 + 26.4XB]
Where:
AE = Adiabatic exponent [dimensionless]…………...………….……. {Parameter: <”Adiabatic“>}

PF = Operating pressure in BarA…………………………..………….. {Parameter: <”Meter pressure“>}
TF = Operating temperature in °K…………………………….………. {Parameter: <”Meter density“>}
GS = Gas density at the reference conditions in kg/Sm3…………… {Parameter: <”Prime base density“>}
XB = Percentage of nitrogen in the natural gas (N2)………….…….. {Parameter: <”Norm nitrogen">}
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.29

TURBINE FLOW METERING

Measurements and Features Supported: (For Pulse Frequency details, see Page 11.9)
x Indicated Volume flow rate (calculated) and Corrected Volume flow rate (calculated).
x Mass flow rate – turn to page 11.30 for details.
x Base Volume flow rate – turn to page 11.40 for details.
x Stream/run Totalling (Turn to page 11.49)
Calibration
Certificate
HI
2 4 5 6 25 55
Kf Calibration
K Factor Indicated Certificate
PULSE 26 tr Kt KP
FREQUENCY 1 f Calculation Volume Rate
(from Pulse Input) (Conversion) Calculation 4 27 28 47 50 51 52 53 55
f
48
3 Error % Corrections Corrected
f
26 55 49 Calculation QIV for ‘t’ and ‘P’ Volume Rate CORRECTED

Flow Stop QIV (Corrected) Effects Calculation VOLUME
Threshold Correction route P, t
Indicated RATE
Volume Rate
Calculation tr Kt KP 54
50 51 52 53 48 55
Conversion route
QIV
Corrections Corrected
for ‘t’ and ‘P’ Volume Rate
Effects Calculation
P, t

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Flowmeter details”>, (2) <“Health check”>/<“Flowmeter inputs”>,
(3) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>, (4) <“Temperature”> and (5) <“Pressure”>
- Select flow meter cÖf 30 Mtr curve flowrate 2 cÖf
1 Flow meter frequency * cÖf 31 MtrError deviation 2 cÖf
2 Meter freq HI lmt cÖf D 32 Mtr curve flowrate 3 cÖf
3 Meter flow stop lmt cÖf 33 MtrError deviation 3 cÖf
4 Correction method cÖf B 34 Mtr curve flowrate 4 cÖf
5 Mtr K curve points 35 MtrError deviation 4 cÖf
6 Mtr K curve freq 1 cÖf 36 Mtr curve flowrate 5 cÖf
7 Meter K factor 1 cÖf 37 MtrError deviation 5 cÖf
18 Mtr K curve freq 7 cÖf 48 Meter % error * cÖf
19 Meter K factor 7 cÖf 49 Indicated vol rate * cÖf
20 Mtr K curve freq 8 cÖf 50 Meter correct select cÖf
21 Meter K factor 8 cÖf 51 Meter temp reference cÖf
22 Mtr K curve freq 9 cÖf 52 Meter temp correct cÖf
23 Meter K factor 9 cÖf 53 Meter press correct cÖf
24 Mtr K curve freq 10 cÖf 54 Corrected vol rate * cÖf
25 Meter K factor 10 cÖf 55 Rate flowstop action cÖf C
26 Meter K factor * cÖf - Flow mode cÖf C
27 Mtr err curve points P Meter pressure * cÖf P. 11.59
28 Mtr curve flowrate 1 cÖf t Meter temperature * cÖf P. 11.57
29 MtrError deviation 1 cÖf
Notes are on page 11.30. cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
Page 11.30 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)


Measurements:
x Mass flow rate from a HART transmitter, calculation or via Modbus.
x Base Volume flow rate – turn to page 11.40 for details.
x Station Flow Rates (page 11.53) and Station Totalling (page 11.53)
57
56
Input
HART Inputs Qm
Selection
58 59
CORRECTED
54 Qv
VOLUME RATE Limits &
Mass Rate Method MASS
Qm Qm Fallback 62
Calculation Selection Qm RATE
Checks
PRIME DENSITY 55 U
60 61
Modbus Qm

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Flowmeter details”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rates”> and (3) <“Line density”>
- Flow meter cÖf 59 Mass rate LO limit cÖf A
54 Corrected vol rate * cÖf 60 Mass rate FB type cÖf
55 Prime density value * cÖf 61 Mass rate FB value * cÖf
56 Turb mass flow calc cÖf E 62 Mass rate * cÖf (E)
57 Mass rate HART chl cÖf - Rate flowstop action cÖf C
58 Mass rate HI limit cÖf A - Flow mode cÖf C
Notes: cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
A Keep both ‘HI’ and ‘LO’ values ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
B (1) “K curve + err fac” option:

x This requires a fixed ‘error percentage’ value and a ‘K-factor’ that is linearised from a configurable ‘frequency
versus k-factor’ curve. (See also ‘Frequency Versus K-factor Referral’ description on the next page.)
(2) “K fac + err curve” option:
x This requires a fixed ‘K-factor’ value and an ‘error percentage’ value that is linearised from a configurable
‘flow versus error’ curve. (See also ‘Flow Versus Error Percentage Referral’ on the next page.)
Curve profile values are normally obtained from the calibration certificate of the flowmeter.
C The <“Flow mode”> menu, within the INFORMATION (‘i’) key menu, shows if the Flow Computer considers
there to be normal flow or zero flow in the stream/run pipe.
x Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as <“Meter flow stop”>, are used to force live flow rates to 0,
therefore freezing flow totals even when there is negligible flow. The parameter <“Flow mode”> will then
show the state of “Flow stopped”. However, negligible flow rate values may still be displayed if enabled by
the <“Rate flowstop actions”> parameter.
x In the case of a Turbine Flow Meter, the pulse frequency must be greater than the setting for <“Meter flow
stop”> for normal flow, whereby <“Flow mode”> will show the state of “Flowing”.
D Keep programmed (SET) to 0 if this alarm limit check is not required.
E When Density is selected, the mass rate is calculated from prime density (page 11.60) and the corrected
volume flow rate (page 11.30).
When HART is selected, the mass rate is supplied by a HART transmitter. In addition, the corrected volume
rate is then calculated from mass irrespective of configuration. For all details of HART support, see Chapter 16.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.31


Frequency Versus ‘K-factor’ Referral
'K' Factor x Graphic shows a curve profile with 4 points out of a
(Pulse/m3) possible 10 selected and set-up.
x Lowest frequency on curve is point (F1, Kf1). This point
Kf2 corresponds to the “Meter frequency 1” menu data and the
“K factor 1” menu data respectively.
Kf3 Kf4 x Highest frequency on curve is point (F4, Kf4). This
Kf1 corresponds to the “Meter frequency 4” menu data and the
Kfm “K factor 4“ menu data respectively.
Pulse x Point (FM, Kfm) corresponds to a live pulse frequency and
Frequency resulting ‘K-factor’.
F1 F2 F3 Fm F4
Flow Versus Error Percentage Referral

Turbines are supplied with a calibration certificate that describes the actual flow rates against percentage error in
readings by a test meter.
Example of Certificate Data:

Flow rate (m3/h) 400 280 160 100
Error % 0.11 0.17 0.06 -0.24
The raw data on the certificate has to be turned into corrected values by the 795x. To do this, a single curve profile
must be set-up in the following way:
Menu Data (as displayed) Raw value

Correction method “K fac + err curve”
Mtr err curve points “4 curve points”
Mtr curve flowrate 1 100
MtrError deviation 1 -0.24
Please note that this is an example and that only data from the
Mtr curve flowrate 2 160 calibration certificate of the flowmeter should be entered into the 795X.
MtrError deviation 2 0.06
Corrected values are not displayed by the 795X but the calculations used are as follows:
§ Va * E a ·
Vt ¨ ¸ Va
© 100 ¹
Et
Vt * Va * 100
Va
Where:
Vt = Corrected volume from test flowmeter
Va = Actual volume (e.g. 100 from the above data)
Et = Corrected percentage error in test turbine reading
Ea = Actual error in Vt reading (e.g. -0.24 from the above data)
The 795X calculations (for Vt and Ve) use the configured (‘Set’) curve profile to get a modified curve profile:
Flow rate (m3/h) 400.44 280.476 160.096 99.76
Error % 0.1098 0.1697 0.05996 -0.241
With a ‘Live’ (or ‘Set’) Indicated Volume flow rate, an error percentage can be interpolated from the modified
curve. The error percentage is then used to adjust the Corrected Volume flow rate value.
Page 11.32 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

TURBINE FLOW METERING (EQUATIONS)
The 7955 can perform the following calculations for Turbine Flow Metering:
Equation TU#1: Indicated Volume Flow Rate (un-corrected)
§ f ·
Using: VU = ¨¨ ¸ * 3600
¸
©Kf ¹
Where: VU = Indicated Volume rate per hour (un-corrected)……... {Parameter: <“Indicated vol rate”>}
f = Flow meter frequency (pulses per second).....…….... {Parameter: <“Flow meter frequency”>}
Kf = ‘K- factor’ (pulses per m3)............................……........ {Parameter: <“Meter K factor”>}
Equation TU#2: Corrections for turbine error deviation

(i.e. Indicated volume flow rate corrected for a turbine error deviation)
K ed
Using: VC1 = VU
100
Where: VC1 = Corrected Volume flow rate (in m3/hour).................... {Parameter: <“Corrected vol rate”>}
VU = Indicated volume flow rate per hour (un-corrected).... {See Equation TU#1}
K ed = Turbine error deviation result...................................... {Parameter: <“Meter % error”>}
Equation TU#3: Corrections for temperature effects

(i.e. Indicated volume flow rate corrected for a turbine error deviation and temperature effects)
Using: VC2 = VC1 * 1 K t * t t r
VC1 = Corrected volume flow rate (in m3/hour)..................... {See Equation TU#2}
Kt = Turbine temperature correction factor........................ {Parameter: <“Meter temp Correct”>}
t = Meter temperature...................................................... {Parameter: <“Meter temperature”>}
tr = Turbine reference temperature................................... {Parameter: <“Meter temp
reference”>}
Equation TU#4: Corrections for pressure effects

(i.e. Indicated volume flow rate corrected for all effects)
Using:
VC3 = VC2 * 1 K p * P 1.01325
VC2 = Corrected Volume flow rate (in m3/hour).................... {See Equation TU#3}
KP = Turbine pressure correction factor.............................. {Parameter: <“Meter press correct”>}
P = Meter pressure........................................................... {Parameter: <“Meter pressure”>}
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.33

ULTRASONIC FLOW METERING

Measurements and Features: (For Base Volume flow rate, turn to page 11.40.)
x Indicated Volume flow rate (calculated) and Corrected Volume flow rate (calculated)
x Forward/Reverse Flow, Flow Velocity (calculated) and Conversion Factor (calculated)
x Mass flow rate – see page 11.36.
x Station Flow Rates (page 11.47) and Station Totalling (page 11. 47)
6 8 9
Direction 'Forward' Signal (by Digital Output)
Flow Flow
Digital Inputs Direction 7 Direction
(Input) (Outputs)
'Reverse' Signal (by Digital Output)
Fwd/Rev
Curve Profile
HI E D hspool
4 10 11 12 13 16 37 10 19 20 21 22
1
K Factor Kf Indicated +QIV Ultrasonic
PULSE TRAIN 'A' Pulse
f 3 f Calculation 17 Volume Rate 18 'Meter Factor' 27 MF
(from Pulse Input) Count A
(f v K-factor) Calculation -QIV Calculation
f
2 P, t
5
f
PULSE 25 26 23 24
Flow Stop
COUNT Indicated +QIV t r Pr
Threshold
Volume Rate Interim
Calculation -QIV Results
Kf 17 37
MF
QCV
+QIV Error % Corrected Flow X
18 Calculation 34 Volume Rate 35 Velocity 36
-QIV (Flow v Error) Calculation Calculation
Err%
11 12 28 33 34 37 21
D
Fwd/Rev QCV
Curve Profile Conversion
Factor 38
QIV 18 |QCV - QIV|

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Flowmeter details”>, (2) <“Health check”>/<“Flowmeter inputs”>/<“Ultrasonic”> (3) <“Flow rates”>

- Select flow meter cÖf 21 Mtr spool inner dia cÖf
1 Flow meter type cÖf 22 Mtr spool wall thick cÖf
2 Meter pulses cÖf 23 Meter spool cal temp cÖf
3 Flow meter frequency * cÖf 24 Meter spool cal press cÖf
4 Flow mtr freq HI lmt cÖf 25 Thermal expansion * cÖf
5 Meter flow stop lmt cÖf E 26 Pressure expansion * cÖf
6 Flow direction Din cÖf B 27 Meter factor * cÖf
7 Flow direction cÖf 28 US fwd error n cÖf n=1..10
8 Forward flow Dout cÖf C 29 US fwd corr rate n cÖf n=1..10
9 Reverse flow Dout cÖf C 30 US fwd ind rate n cÖf n=1..10
10 US curve type A 31 US rev error n cÖf n=1..10
11 US curve size 32 US rev corr rate n cÖf n=1..10
12 US curve interpolate 33 US rev ind rate n cÖf n=1..10
13 US fwd kfactor n n=1..10 34 Meter % error * cÖf (A)
14 US fwd freq n n=1..10 35 Corrected vol rate * cÖf D
15 US rev kfactor n n=1..10 36 Flow velocity * cÖf D
16 US rev freq n n=1..10 37 Rate flowstop action cÖf E
17 Meter K factor * cÖf A 38 Conversion factor cÖf Menu(3)
18 Indicated vol rate * cÖf D t Line temperature * cÖf P. 11.57
19 Mtr spl expans coef cÖf P Line pressure * cÖf P. 11.59
20 Mtr spl elast coef cÖf - Flow mode cÖf E
cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
Page 11.34 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)


Notes:
A (1) Curve type = “K-factor vs Freq”:

x This requires a fixed (SET) ‘error percentage’ value and a LIVE ‘K-factor’ that is linearised from a user-
configurable ‘frequency versus k-factor’ curve. (See also ‘Frequency Versus K-factor Referral’
description in the earlier Turbine Flow Metering pages.)
(2) Curve type = “Error vs Flow”:

x This requires a fixed (SET) ‘K-factor’ value and a LIVE ‘error percentage’ value that is linearised from a
user-configurable ‘flow versus error’ curve. (See also ‘Flow Versus Error Percentage Referral’ in the
earlier Turbine Flow Metering pages.)
Curve profile values are normally obtained from the calibration certificate of the flowmeter.
B Identifies a Status Input to be monitored for a ‘reverse flow’ signal. An ‘active’ signal (assuming a positive logic
configuration) will automatically enable a negative flow value and an immediate switchover from normal
(forward flow) totals to a different (reverse flow) set of totals.
C Identifies a Status Output to signal an external system.
D Value will be negative when there is reversed flow.
E The <“Flow mode”> page, within the INFORMATION (‘i’) key menu, shows if the Flow Computer considers
there to be normal flow or zero flow in the meter-run pipe.
x Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as <“Meter flow stop lmt”>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and
therefore halt flow totals even when there is negligible flow. <“Flow mode”> will show “Flow stopped”.
However, negligible flow rate values may still be displayed if enabled by the <“Rate flowstop actions”>
menu data.
x In the case of an Ultrasonic Flow Meter, the frequency value must be greater than the setting of parameter
<“Meter flow stop”> for there to be normal flow, whereby <“Flow mode”> will show the state of “Flowing”.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.35


Flow Measurement: (For Base Volume flow rate, turn to page 11.40.)
x Mass Rate from a HART transmitter, calculation or via Modbus.
41 37
CORRECTED VOLUME RATE 35 QCV
Mass Rate
Qm
Calculation
PRIME DENSITY 39 U
42 43
40 Limits &
Method MASS
Qm Fallback Qm 46
Selection RATE
Source Checks
HART Inputs Qm
Selection
44 45
Modbus Qm
Index for use with
xx listed parameters

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Flowmeter details”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rates”> and (3) <“Line density”>
- Select flow meter cÖf 43 Mass rate HI limit cÖf A
35 Corrected vol rate * cÖf B, (C) 43 Mass rate LO limit cÖf A
37 Rate flowstop action cÖf C 44 Mass rate FB type cÖf
39 Prime density value * cÖf 45 Mass rate FB value * cÖf
40 Mass rate HART chl cÖf 46 Mass rate * cÖf B,(C),(D)
41 Turb mass flow calc cÖf D
Notes:
A Keep both ‘HI’ and ‘LO’ values programmed (SET) to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
B Value will be negative when there is reversed flow. See also Flow Direction functionality on page 11.34.
C Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as <“Meter flow stop lmt”>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and
therefore halt flow totals even when there is negligible flow. However, negligible flow rate values may still be
displayed if enabled by the <“Rate flowstop actions”> parameter.
D When Density is selected, the mass rate is calculated from prime density (page 11.60) and the corrected
When HART is selected, the mass rate is supplied by a HART transmitter. For all details of HART support,
see Chapter 16.
Page 11.36 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

ULTRASONIC FLOW METERING (EQUATIONS)

The Flow Computer can perform the following calculations for Ultrasonic Flow Metering:
Equation US#1: Indicated volume flow rate

Note: This flow rate is also known as the Gross (uncorrected) volume flow rate.
§f ·
Using: Q IV = ¨ ¸ * 3600
©K ¹
Where: Q IV = Indicated Volume flow rate (m3 per hour)........ {Parameter: <“Indicated vol rate”>}
f = Ultrasonic frequency (pulses per second)....... {Parameter: <“Flow meter frequency”>}
Kf = ‘K’ factor (pulses per m3)................................. {Parameter: <“Meter K factor”>}
Equation US#2: ‘Meter factor’
Using: MF
= 1 3 * CTVsp 3 * CPVsp
Where: MF = The ‘Meter Factor’........................................... {Parameter: <“Meter factor”>}
CTVsp = Thermal expansion of spool piece..........…..... {Parameter: <“Thermal expansion”>}
CPVsp = Pressure expansion of spool piece.........…..... {Parameter: <“Pressure expansion”>}
And: CTVsp = D * t t r
Where: D = Expansion coefficient...................................... {Parameter: <“Mtr spl expans coef”>}

t = Meter temperature (in qC)............................... {Parameter: <“Meter temperature”>}
tr = Calibration temperature of spool piece (in qC) {Parameter: <“Meter spl cal temp”>}
ª D º
And: CPVsp = P Pr * « »
¬« 2 * E * h spool ¼»
Where: D = Internal diameter of spool piece (in mm)......... {Parameter: <“Internal diameter”>}
E = Elasticity coefficient......................................... {Parameter: <“Mtr spl elast coef”>}
h spool = Wall thickness of spool piece (in mm)............. {Parameter: <“Mtr spool wall thick”>}
P = Meter pressure (in Bar Absolute).................... {Parameter: <“Meter pressure”>}
Pr = Calibration pressure of spool piece (in BarA).. {Parameter: <“Meter spl cal press”>}
Equation US#3: Corrected Volume flow rate

Note: This flow rate is also known simply as the Volume flow rate.
Using: Q CV = QIV * MF * 24
Where: Q CV = Corrected Volume flow rate (in m3/day)............. {Parameter: <“Corrected vol rate”>}
Q IV = Indicated volume flow rate per hour................... {See Equation US#1}
MF = The ‘Meter Factor’.............................................. {See Equation US#2}
Equation US#4: Flow velocity
Q CV
Using: X =
S * D * 0.25 * 10 6
2
Where: X = Flow velocity (in m/s)............................................ {Parameter: <“Flow velocity”>}

Q CV = Corrected Volume flow rate.................................. {See Equation US#3}
D = Internal diameter of spool piece (in mm).............. {Parameter: <“Mtr spool inner dia”>}
S = 3.141592654......................................................... {Actual constant used}
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.37

LINEAR FLOW METERING

Measurements:
x Indicated Volume flow rate – from a Linear Flowmeter.
x Corrected Volume flow rate (calculated).
x Mass flow rate – from a HART transmitter, calculated or via Modbus.
x Base Volume flow rate – turn to page 11.40.
x Station Flow Rates (page 11.53) and Station Totalling (page 11.53)
Index for use with Optional Calibration

xx
list of parameters Alarm Limits Curve Profile
0% 100%
INDICATED
1 2 3 4 5 6 12 13 14
LINEAR VOLUME
FLOW RATE % Error CORRECTED
Volume Error Corrected
Source Fallback &
mA Input Calculation 9 11 Deviation 15 Volume 16 VOLUME
Selection Limits Check QIV RATE
(Scaling) Calculation Calculation
QCV
QIV
7 8 10
Flow Stop
Threshold
19 25
CORRECTED VOLUME RATE 16 QCV
Mass Rate
Qm
Calculation
PRIME DENSITY 17 U
20 21
18 Limits &
Method MASS
Qm Fallback Qm 24
Selection RATE
Source Checks
HART Inputs Qm
Selection
22 23
Modbus Qm

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Flowmeter details”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rates”>, (3) <“Line density”>,
(4) <“Flow rates”>, (5) <“Health check”>/<“Analog inputs”> and (6) <“Health check”>/<“HART inputs”>
- Select flow meter cÖf 15 Linear % error * cÖf E
1 Linear flow i/p chl cÖf A 16 Corrected vol rate * cÖf
2 Linear flow @ 0% cÖf 17 Prime density value * cÖf P.11.60
3 Linear flow @ 100% cÖf 18 Mass rate HART chl cÖf
4 Linear flow HI limit cÖf C 19 Linr mass flow calc cÖf G
5 Linear flow LO limit cÖf C 20 Mass rate HI limit cÖf C
6 Linear flow step lmt cÖf D 21 Mass rate LO limit cÖf C
7 Linear FB type E 22 Mass rate FB type cÖf E
8 Linear FB value cÖf E 23 Mass rate FB value cÖf E
9 Linear value * cÖf B 24 Mass rate * cÖf (G)
10 Linear flow stop cÖf H 25 Rate flowstop actions cÖf F
11 Indicated vol rate * cÖf B - Flow mode cÖf F
12 Linr err CurvePoints
13 Lnr curve flowrate n cÖf n=1..10
14 Linear error dev n cÖf n=1..10
Page 11.38 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

LINEAR FLOW METERING

Notes:
A The number of mA-type Analogue Inputs varies between the different models of the 795x series. For further
information on supported connections, refer to Appendix ‘C’ of this Operating Manual.
See also “Analogue Inputs” on page 11.7 for set-up details.
B Scaled <“Linear value”> value is copied over to a live <“Indicated vol rate”> once every machine cycle.
C Keep both high and low limits programmed (SET) to 0 if these alarm limit checks are not required.
D Keep ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit check is not required.
E This can be either be a fixed (SET) value or a ‘Live’ value that is linearised (each cycle) from a user-
configurable ‘flow versus error’ curve. Curve profile values are normally obtained from the calibration
certificate of the flowmeter.
F The <“Flow mode”> menu, within the INFORMATION (‘i’ key) menu, shows if the Flow Computer considers
there to be normal flow or zero flow in the meter-run pipe.
x Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as <“Linear flow stop”>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and
therefore halt flow totals even when there is negligible flow. <“Flow mode”> will show “Flow stopped”.
However, negligible flow rate values may still be displayed if enabled by the <“Rate flowstop actions”>
menu data.
x In the case of a Linear Flow Meter, the flow value must be greater than the setting of <“Linear flow stop”>
for there to be normal flow. <“Flow mode”> will then show “Flowing”.
G When Density is selected, the mass rate is calculated from prime density (page 11.60) and the corrected
When HART is selected, the mass rate is supplied by a HART transmitter. For all details of HART support,
see Chapter 16.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.39

BASE VOLUME RATE

Note: Pages 40 to 42 are common to all presently supported flow metering methods unless otherwise stated.
Diagram Note:
1 Q 6 7 19 Calculating the Base Volume
C V
2 t Base Volume
rate with the “Water Correction”
P Flow Rate method is not applicable to
3 Qbv
Calculation Turbine, Orifice or Linear Flow
4 Z (Conversion Factor) Metering.
5 Zb
10 19
8 Qm Base Volume
High Limit
Flow Rate
Qbv 14
Calculation 13
9 RD (Relative Density)
Calculation BASE VOLUME
16 Correction
Selection 17
19 Factor
1 QCV
Base Volume 15
8 Qm
Flow Rate Low Limit
Qbv
Calculation
11 UB (Base Density)
19
8 Qm Base Volume
Flow Rate
11 UB Qbv
Calculation
12 (Water Corrected)

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Flow rate”>, (2) <“Base density / SG”>, (3) <“Temperature”>, (4) <“Pressure”>, (5) <“Flow rates”>
(6) <“Configure”>/<“Flowmeter details”>
- Select flow meter cÖf 10 Base density of Air
1 Corrected vol rate * cÖf A 11 Prime base density * cÖf
2 Meter temperature * cÖf P.11.57 12 Water content corr * cÖf D
3 Meter pressure* cÖf P.11.59 13 Base vol calc sel cÖf
4 Cf Line compress * cÖf B 14 Base vol rate HI lmt cÖf E
5 Cf base compress * cÖf B 15 Base vol rate LO lmt cÖf E
- Cf Z calc select (B) 16 Base volume rate * cÖf F
6 Base temp value 17 Correction factor * cÖf
7 Base pressure value 19 Rate flowstop actions cÖf G
8 Mass rate * cÖf A
9 Relative dens value * cÖf C
A Refer to relevant Flow Metering reference pages for information on configuring to get Flow Rate values.
Orifice Flow (Page 11.13), Turbine Flow (Page 11.30), Ultrasonic Flow (Page 11.34), Linear Flow (Page 11.38)
B Refer to the Density reference pages (11.60 - 68) for information on configuring to get compressibility values.
(A compressibility calculation is selected ‘locally’ as the source for Z and Zb values)
C Refer to the Energy value (ISO 6976) calculation to see how Relative Density is generated.
D Refer to the Base Volume Rate Equation List (next page) for information on this.
E Optional. Keep both ‘HI’ and ‘LO’ values ‘Set’ to 0 if this (alarm) limit checking is not required.
F Value will be negative when there is reversed flow. (Ultrasonic Flow Metering only)
G By default, a 795X in a ‘Flow Stop’ state will not show live flow rates with a forced zero value. This feature can
be changed with the <“Rate flowstop actions”> menu data.
Page 11.40 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

BASE VOLUME RATE (EQUATIONS)

Calculations that can be performed by the 7955 (for each stream/run) are as follows:
Equation BVR#1: Base Volume flow rate (from a Conversion Factor)

Note: The ‘conversion factor’ is the difference between values of QBV and QCV.
§ P · § TB · § ZB ·
Using: Q BV = Q CV * ¨¨ ¸ * ¨¨
¸ ¸¸ * ¨¨ ¸¸
© PB ¹ © t ¹ © Z ¹
Where: Q BV = Base Volume flow rate........……............................. {Parameter: <“Base volume rate”>}

Q CV = Corrected volume flow rate........……...................... {Parameter: <“Corrected vol rate”>}
P = Stream/run pressure.......................……............... {Parameter: <“Meter pressure”>}
PB = Base pressure.....................................……............. {Parameter: <“Base pressure value”>}
t = Stream/run temperature................……................. {Parameter: <“Meter temperature”>
tB = Base temperature..............................……............... {Parameter: <“Base temp value”>}
Z = Copy of line compressibility................…….............. {Parameter: <“Cf Line compress”>}
ZB = Copy of base compressibility.................……........... {Parameter: <“Cf base compress”>}
Equation BVR#2: Base Volume flow rate (from Relative density)

Qm
Using: Q BV =
RD
Where: Q BV = Base Volume flow rate.....……................................ {Parameter: <“Base volume rate”>}

Qm = Mass flow rate...................……............................... {Parameter: <“Mass rate”>}
RD = Relative density....................……........................... {Parameter: <“Relative dens value”>}
Equation BVR#3: Base volume flow rate (from Base density)

Qm
Using: Q BV =
UB
Where: Q BV = Base Volume flow rate......……............................... {Parameter: <“Base volume rate”>}

Qm = Mass flow rate..........................……........................ {Parameter: <“Mass rate”>}
UB = Base density...................................…….................. {Parameter: <“Prime base density”>}
Equation BVR#4: Base volume flow rate (from ‘water correction’)

Note: This is for an Ultrasonic Flow Metering application.
§Q ·
Using: VB = ¨¨ m ¸ * ucf * Fw
¸
© UB ¹
Where: VB = Base Volume flow rate.....……................................ {Parameter: <“Base volume rate”>}

Qm = Mass flow rate.........................……......................... {Parameter: <“Mass rate”>}
UB = Base density...................................…….................. {Parameter: <“Prime base density”>}
ucf = 0.01 (to convert mass from Tonnes to Kg……........ {Actual value used}
Fw = Water content correction factor................……........ {See Equation BVR#5}
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.41

BASE VOLUME RATE (EQUATIONS)
Equation BVR#5: Water Correction Factor

Note: This is for an Ultrasonic Flow Metering application.
1
Using: Fw =
§ Wc ·
1 Xw * ¨¨1 ¸¸
© Wc s ¹
Where: Fw = Water Content Correction Factor..................…....... {Menu Data: <“Water content corr”>} *
Xw = Mole fraction of water at base conditions.......…...... {Menu Data: <“Base mole frac water”>} *
Wc s = Total water content at base conditions (in kg/m3).... {Menu Data: <“Base water content”>} *
Wc = Actual water content (in kg/m3)................…............ {Menu Data: <“Meter water content”>} *
* Parameters located under: <"Configure">/<"Flowmeter details">/<"Ultrasonic">/<"USonic correction">

and <”Health check”>/<”Flow meter details”>/<”Ultrasonic details”>/<”Water corr factor”>
Page 11.42 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

ULTRASONIC TOTALISING by individual stream/run

Note: Configure totalling for individual streams/runs before configuring sub-station and station totalling.
795X totalling features 3 basic types of incremental, rollover totals:
Flow Total ................ 5 x flow rate based totals for each stream/run.
Each total is enabled by configuring the associated stream/run flow rate.
Alarm Total .............. 1 x Total for each stream/run. This is for alarm condition totalling of either a flow rate or
missing pulses from a flowmeter. It increments only when there is an ‘active’ alarm.
Error Pulse Total...... 1 x Total for each stream/run. This is for totalling of missing pulses from a flowmeter.
This feature is permanently enabled by 795X.
Ultrasonic flow metering also features 3 complete sets of flow totals for each stream/run:
5 x Forward Flow Totals, 5 x Reverse Flow Totals and 5 x Net (difference) Flow Totals
3 8 9
A Status Input controlled parameter, XX Index for use with
listed parameters Totaliser
<“Flow Direction”>, determines whether 17 (Non-Maintenance)
12
increments are calculated for either the FORWARD
+ Mode FLOW
‘forward flow’ or the ‘reverse flow’ set of Totaliser
2 TOTAL
totals. Select a Status Input for each run. (Maintenance)
13
‘Net Flow’ is the difference between
16 NET FLOW
‘forward flow’ and ‘reverse flow’. TOTAL
Increments are always calculated for a FLOW
1
Flow
+/-
Totaliser
6
RATE Direction (Non-Maintenance)
‘net’ flow’ total regardless of the present
flow direction. 7 8 11
Further separation of a total is made by

the Flow Computer mode: 5 8 10
Totaliser Pulse
x Normal-mode (Main) total 17 (Non-Maintenance)
14
Outputs
Total is frozen whilst 795X is in REVERSE
- Mode FLOW
‘Maintenance-mode’. Totaliser TOTAL
4
(Maintenance)
x Maintenance-mode total
15
Total is frozen whilst 795X is in
‘Normal-mode’.
19 21 ALARM
Every stream/run can have a different 18 TOTAL
+ Totaliser
Flow Computer mode selected. Selection 20
(Non-Maintenance)
(Menu Data: <“Flow computer mode”>)
24 27
Totaliser
23
(1) <“Configure”>/<“Totalisers”> 17 (Non-Maintenance)
ERROR
(2) <“Flow totals”>/<”Stream totals”> PULSE 22 Mode
ERROR
PULSE
(3) <“Health check”>/<“Totals”> COUNT Totaliser
25 TOTAL
(4) INFORMATION (‘i’ key) Menu (Maintenance)
26 17
Menu Data List 1 of 2: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”

Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data
Index Notes?
(as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed) (as displayed)
1 Indicated vol rate * Corrected vol rate* Mass rate * Base volume rate * Energy rate * cÖf, A
2 Ind volume total Corr volume total Mass total Base vol total Energy total cÖf, A
3 Ind volume increm.. Corr vol increment Mass increment Base vol increment Energy increment cÖf, D
4 Rev ind. vol total Rev corr vol total Rev mass total Rev base vol total Rev energy total cÖf
5 Rev ind. vol inc Rev corr vol inc Rev mass increment Rev base vol inc Rev energy increme.. cÖf, D
6 Net ind. vol total Net corr vol total Net mass total Net base vol total Net energy total cÖf
7 Net ind. vol inc Net corr vol inc Net mass increment Net base vol inc Net energy increme.. cÖf, D
8 Ind volume rollover Corr vol rollover Mass rollover Base vol rollover Energy rollover E
9 Ind vol tot inhibit CorrVolTotal inhibit Mass total inhibit BaseVolTotal inhibit Energy total inhibit C
10 Rev ind. vol inhibit Rev corr vol inhibit Rev mass inhibit Rev base vol inhibit Rev energy inhibit C
11 Net ind. vol inhibit Net corr vol inhibit Net mass inhibit Net base vol inhibit Net energy inhibit C
12 Maint indicated vol Maint CorrVol total Maint mass total Maint base vol total Maint energy total cÖf
13 Maint ind vol inc Maint corr vol inc Maint mass inc Maint base vol inc Maint energy inc cÖf, D
14 Maint rev ind tot Maint rev corr tot Maint rev mass tot Maint rev base total Maint rev energy tot cÖf
15 Maint rev ind inc Maint rev corr inc Maint rev mass inc Maint rev base inc Maint rev energy inc cÖf, D
See next page for continuation of list and notes.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.43
ULTRASONIC TOTALISING by individual stream/run

16 Flow Direction cÖf 22 Meter error pulses cÖf B
17 Flow computer mode cÖf F 23 Main meter err total cÖf B
- Flow mode cÖf F 24 Main meter Err inc cÖf D
18 Alarm total src ptr cÖf C 25 Maint main err total cÖf B
19 Alarm increment cÖf D 26 Mnt main err Inc cÖf D
20 Alarm total C 27 Main mtr err roll E
21 Alarm rollover E
Notes:
A Indicated Volume measurement is not available in an Orifice system.
B Missing (error) pulses are detectable when using a dual pulse train configuration.
C Alarm condition totalling operates independently of all other totalling. A flow total can be frozen under alarm
conditions when enabled by the corresponding ‘inhibit’ menu data.
D An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added
to a corresponding total once during every machine cycle.
(a) Orifice or Linear Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘actual cycle time’. This value is the elapsed time
between a flow measurement. It is available for viewing from within the <“Time”> menu.
(b) Ultrasonic or Turbine Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the ‘pulse sample time’. It is the period of time that pulses
were accumulated for use in calculating the present value of the Indicated Volume flow rate. This time
value is not available for viewing within the menu system.
Editing an increment value has no effect on the associated total.
E By default, rollover (to zero) limits are ‘Set’ to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is
sufficient for the metering application.
F There are two Flow Computer modes to be aware of:

1. Normal-mode
In this mode, a main total (e.g. “Ind volume total”) can increment. The corresponding maintenance-mode
total (e.g. “Maint indicated vol”) will never increment.
2. Maintenance-mode
In this mode, a maintenance-mode total can increment. The corresponding main total will never increment.
A mode can be selected for an individual stream/run. However, the selection can only be performed when the
795X is in a ‘Flow Stopped’ state for the meter-run concerned.
For information on how the 795X can be in a ‘Flow Stopped’ state, refer to the <”Flow mode”> menu data
notice (with the menu data list) on the Ultrasonic Flow Metering pages:
Page 11.44 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

ULTRASONIC TOTALISING by Sub-Station

Note: Configure totalling for individual stream/runs (page 43) before configuring sub-station totalling.
795X totalling features 3 basic types of incremental, rollover sub-station total:
Flow Total................ 5 x Sub-station Flow Rate based totals for sub-station ‘1’ (i.e. streams/runs 1+2).
5 x Sub-station Flow Rate based totals for sub-station ‘2’ (i.e. streams/runs 3+4).
Alarm Total.……...… 1 x Total for sub-station ‘1’ (streams/runs 1+2).
1 x Total for sub-station ‘2’ (streams/runs 3+4).
This is for alarm-condition totalling of a sub-station flow rate or missing pulses from a pair of
flowmeters. It increments only when there is an ‘active’ alarm.
Error Pulse Total…... 1 x Total for sub-station ‘1’ (streams/runs 1+2).
1 x Total for sub-station ‘2’ (streams/runs 3+4).
This is for totalling of missing pulses from flowmeters of a sub-station. This feature is
permanently enabled.
Ultrasonic flow metering also features 3 complete sets of sub-station ‘1’ flow totals and sub-station ‘2’ flow totals:
5 x Forward Sub-Station Flow Totals, 5 x Reverse Sub-Station Flow Totals and 5 x Net Sub-Station Flow Totals
Forward Flow:
A ‘forward flow’ sub-station total XX Index for use with 6 7
listed parameters FORWARD FLOW
increments only when the Sub-Station Totaliser SUB-STATION
corresponding sub-station flow rate is a SUB- + 3
(Forward Flow) TOTAL
positive value. STATION
FLOW FLOW
6 9
RATES RATE NET FLOW
Reverse Flow: Meter-run Sub-Station Totaliser SUB-STATION
1 2 +/- 5
A ‘reverse flow’ sub-station total Summation (Net Flow) TOTAL
increments only when the
corresponding sub-station flow rate is a 6 8
REVERSE FLOW
negative value. Sub-Station Totaliser SUB-STATION Pulse
- 4
(Reverse Flow) TOTAL Outputs
Net Flow:
A ‘net flow’ sub-station total either ALARM
10 13 to 16
SUB-STATION
increments or decrements depending + Source Sub-Station 11
TOTALS
on whether the corresponding sub- Selection Totaliser 12
station flow rate is a positive or
20 to 23
negative value.
ERROR Sub-Station ERROR PULSE
18
(Individual stream/run flow rates may PULSE 17 Totaliser SUB-STATION TOTALS
be positive or negative depending on COUNT (Missing pulses) 19
the present direction of flow).

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Totalisers”>, (2) <“Flow totals”>/<”Sub Station totals”>, (3) <“Health check”>/<“Totals”> and
(4) INFORMATION MENU (‘i’ key)
Sub-Station ‘1’ Parameter list: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Notes?
1 Indicated vol rate * Corrected vol rate * Mass rate * Base volume rate * Energy rate * cÖd
2 SubStn1 ind vol r.. * SubStn1 cor vol rate * SubStn1 mass rate* SubStn1 BaseVol r * SubStn1 energy rate * F
3 SubStn1 ind vol tot SubStn1 cor vol tot SubStn1 mass total SubStn1 base vol t.. SubStn1 energy total D, E
4 SubStn1 RevIndTot SubStn1 RevCorVol.. SubStn1 rev mass t. Sub1 rev BaseVol t. SubStn1 RevEnergyT. D, E
5 SubStn1 NetIndVol. SubStn1 NetCorVolT. SubStn1 net mass t. Sub1 net BaseVol t. SubStn1 net engy tot D, E
6 SubStn1 ind vol roll SubStn1 cor vol roll SubStn1 mass roll SubStn1 BaseVol r.. SubStn1 energy roll C
7 Sub1 GrosVolInhib.. Sub1 CorrVolInhibit SubStn1 mass inhi... Sub1 BaseVolInhi.. Sub1 energy inhibit I
8 Sub1RevIndVolInh.. Sub1RevCorVolInhib. Sub1 RevMass inhi.. Ss1RevBaseVolinh.. Sub1RevEnergyInhib. I
9 Sub1NetIndVolInhi.. Sub1NetCorVolInhib.. Sub1 NetMass inhib. Ss1NetBaseVolInhi. Sub1NetEnergyInhib.. I
Notes are on the next page. cÖd = Separate data for stream/runs 1 and 2
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.45

ULTRASONIC TOTALISING by Sub-Station
Index Notes?
1 Indicated vol rate * Corrected vol rate * Mass rate * Base volume rate * Energy rate * eÖf
2 SubStn2 ind vol r.. * SubStn2 cor vol rate * SubStn2 mass rate* SubStn2 BaseVol r * SubStn2 energy rate * F
3 SubStn2 ind vol tot SubStn2 cor vol tot SubStn2 mass total SubStn2 base vol t.. SubStn2 energy total D
4 SubStn2 RevIndTot SubStn2 RevCorVolT. SubStn2 rev mass t. Sub2 rev BaseVol t. SubStn2 RevEnergyT. D
5 SubStn2 NetIndVol. SubStn2 NetCorVolT. SubStn2 net mass t. Sub2 net BaseVol t. SubStn2 net engy tot D
8 Sub2RevIndVolInh.. Sub2RevCorVolInhib. Sub2 RevMass inhi.. Ss2RevBaseVolinh.. Sub2RevEnergyInhib. I
9 Sub2NetIndVolInhi.. Sub2NetCorVolInhib.. Sub2 NetMass inhib. Ss2NetBaseVolInhi. Sub2NetEnergyInhib.. I
Notes are listed below. eÖf = Separate data for stream/runs 3 and 4
Sub-Stations ‘1’ & ‘2’ Parameter list: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
10 Alarm total src ptr 17 Meter error pulses cÖf, B
11 SubStn1 alarm total A, D 18 SubStn1 MeterErr tot D
13 SubStn1 alarm inc H 20 SubStn1 MeterErr inc H
15 SubStn1 alarm roll C 22 SubStn1 MeterErrRoll C
Notes:
A The alarm condition-based total increments even if there is ‘reverse flow’.
C By default, rollover (to zero) limits are ‘Set’ to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is
D A sub-station total is a normal-mode total. There is no equivalent maintenance-mode total. Increments for a
sub-station total only involve stream/runs that are not operating in maintenance-mode.
F * Sub-station ‘1’ flow rate = (Stream/run ‘1’ flow rate + Stream/run ‘2’ flow rate)
* Sub-station ‘2’ flow rate = (Stream/run ‘3’ flow rate + Stream/run ‘4’ flow rate)
H An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added
I A flow total can be frozen under alarm conditions, if enabled by the corresponding ‘inhibit’ parameter.
Page 11.46 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

ULTRASONIC TOTALISING by Station

Note: Configure totalling for individual streams/runs (page 11.43) before configuring station totalling, which is the
summation of values (e.g. flow rates) from streams/runs 1, 2, 3 and 4.
795X totalling features 3 basic types of incremental, roll-over station total:

Flow Total ................ 5 x Station Flow Rate based totals.
Each total is enabled by configuring the associated flow rate for at least one stream/run.
Alarm Total .............. 1 x Total for all streams/runs. This is for alarm condition totalling of either a station flow rate
or missing pulses from flowmeters. It increments only when there is an ‘active’ alarm.
Error Pulse Total...... 1 x Total for all streams/runs. This is for totalling of missing pulses from all flowmeters.
Ultrasonic flow metering also features 3 complete sets of station flow totals:
5 x Forward Station Flow Totals, 5 x Reverse Station Flow Totals and 5 x Net (difference) Station Flow Totals
XX Index for use with

Forward Flow listed parameters 6 9 10 FORWARD FLOW
A ‘forward flow’ station total increments only +
Station Totaliser
3
STATION TOTAL
(Forward Flow)
when the corresponding station flow rate is a STATION
positive value. FLOW 21 FLOW 7 9 11
RATES RATE NET FLOW
Meter-run Station Totaliser STATION TOTAL
Reverse Flow 1
Add/Sub
2 +/-
(Net Flow)
5
A ‘reverse flow’ station total increments only
when the corresponding station flow rate is a 8 9 12
REVERSE FLOW
negative value. Station Totaliser STATION TOTAL Pulse
- 4
(Reverse Flow) Outputs
Net Flow
A ‘net flow’ station total either increments or ALARM
13 15 16 STATION
decrements depending on whether the
+ Source Station TOTAL
corresponding station flow rate is a positive Selection Totaliser
14
or negative value.
19 20 ERROR PULSE
(Individual stream/run flow rates may be ERROR
Station Totaliser STATION TOTAL
PULSE 17 18
positive or negative depending on the COUNT
(Missing pulses)
present direction of flow).

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Totalisers”>, (2) <“Flow totals”>/<”Station totals”>, (3) <“Health check”>/<“Totals”> and
(4) INFORMATION (‘i’ key) Menu

Index Notes?
1 Indicated vol rate * Corrected vol rate * Mass rate * Base volume rate * Energy rate * cÖf
2 Station ind vol rate * Station corr vol rate * Station mass rate * Station BaseVol ra. * Station energy rate *
3 Station ind vol tot Station cor vol tot Station mass total Station base vol tot Station energy total E, F
4 Stn rev ind total Stn rev corr total Stn rev mass total Stn rev base total Stn rev energy total E, F
5 Stn net ind. total Stn net corr total Stn net mass total Stn net base total Stn net energy total E, F
6 Station ind vol inc Station cor vol inc Station mass inc Station base vol inc Station energy inc G
7 Station RevIndVolInc Station RevCorVolIn. Station rev mass inc Stn rev BaseVol tot Station RevEnergyIn. G
8 Station NetIndVolInc Station NetCorVolInc Station net mass inc Stn net BaseVol inc Station NetEnergyIn. G
9 Station ind vol roll Station cor vol roll Station mass roll Station BaseVol roll Station energy roll D
10 StnGrosVolTotInhibit StnCorrVolTotInhibit Stn mass tot inhibit StnBaseVolTotInhibit StnEnergyTot inhibit H
11 StnRevIndVol inhibit StnRevCorrVolInhibit Stn rev mass inhibit StnRevBaseVolInhib. StnRevEnergy inhib.. H
12 StnNetIndVol inhibit StnNetCorrVolInhibit Stn net mass inhibit StnNetBaseVolInhibit StnNetEnergy inhibit H
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.47

ULTRASONIC TOTALISING by Station

13 Alarm total src ptr 18 Station MeterErr tot E
14 Station alarm total 19 Station MeterErr inc G
15 Station alarm inc B, E, G 20 Station MeterErrRoll D
16 Station alarm roll D 21 Station totalise cÖf A
17 Meter error pulses cÖf C
Notes:
A By default, corresponding values from all individual streams/runs are added together to get the station value.
This summation process can be changed for all station totals, with immediate effect, by adding/removing
streams/runs from the totalising process.
Always check the stream/run ID on display line 4 before making any changes with this parameter.
B The alarm based station total increments irrespective of flow direction.
C Missing (error) pulses are detectable when using a dual pulse train configuration.
D By default, rollover-to-zero limits are ‘Set’ to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is
E A Station total is a normal-mode total. There is no equivalent maintenance-mode total. Increments for a
Station total will only involve streams/runs that are not operating in maintenance-mode. See also page 11.43.
F Calculated increments for station totals are not displayed within the menu system.
G An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added


H A flow total can be frozen under alarm conditions if allowed to by the corresponding ‘inhibit’ parameter.
Page 11.48 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

TOTALISING (Orifice/Turbine/Linear Flow) by stream/run

Note: Configure totalling for individual streams/runs before configuring sub-station and station totalling.
795X totalling features 3 basic types of incremental, roll-over total:
Flow Total ................ 5 x flow rate based totals for each stream/run.
Each total is enabled by configuring the associated meter-run flow rate.
Alarm Total .............. 1 x Total for each stream/run. This is for alarm condition totalling of either a flow rate or
missing pulses from a flowmeter. It increments only when there is an ‘active’ alarm.
Error Pulse Total...... 1 x Total for each stream/run. This is for totalling of missing pulses from a flowmeter.
Further separation of a total is made by the XX Index for use with

Flow Computer mode: listed parameters
3 4 5
x Normal-mode (Main) total Flow Totaliser
2
18 (Non-Maintenance)
Total is frozen whilst 795X is in FLOW
1 + Mode FLOW
‘Maintenance-mode’. RATE TOTAL
Flow Totaliser
6
x Maintenance-mode total (Maintenance)
Total is frozen whilst 795X is in 7
‘Normal-mode’.
9 11 ALARM
8
Every stream/run can have a different Flow Totaliser
TOTAL
Pulse
Computer mode selected. Selection 10
(Maintenance) Outputs
(Menu Data: <“Flow computer mode”>) 14 15

Totaliser
Menu Navigation List: 13
18 (Non-Maintenance)
ERROR
(1) <“Configure”>/<“Totalisation”> PULSE 12 Mode ERROR
COUNT Totaliser PULSE
(2) <“Flow totals”>/<”Stream totals”> (Maintenance)
16 TOTAL
(3) <“Health check”>/<“Totals”> 17
(4) INFORMATION (‘i’-key) Menu

Index Notes?
1 Indicated vol rate * Corrected vol rate * Mass rate * Base volume rate * Energy rate * cÖf
2 Ind volume total Corr volume total Mass total Base vol total Energy total cÖfA
3 Ind volume incre… Corr vol increment Mass increment Base vol increment Energy increment cÖfD
4 Ind volume rollover Corr vol rollover Mass rollover Base vol rollover Energy rollover E
5 Ind vol tot inhibit CorrVolTotal inhibit Mass total inhibit BaseVolTotal inhibit Energy total inhibit C
6 Maint indicated vol Maint corr vol total Maint mass total Maint base vol total Maint energy total cÖf
7 Maint ind. vol inc Maint corr vol inc Maint mass inc Maint base vol inc Maint energy inc cÖfD

8 Alarm total src ptr cÖ f C 14 Main meter err inc cÖf D
9 Alarm increment cÖ f D 15 Main mtr err roll E
10 Alarm total cÖf C 16 Maint main err total cÖf
11 Alarm rollover C, E 17 Maint main err inc cÖf D
12 Meter error pulses cÖf B 18 Flow computer mode cÖf F
13 Main meter err total cÖf B - Flow mode cÖf F
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.49

TOTALISING (Orifice/Turbine/Linear Flow) by stream/run

Notes:
C A flow total can be frozen under alarm conditions if enabled by the corresponding ‘inhibit’ parameter.
D An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added

E By default, roll-over (to zero) limits are ‘Set’ to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is
F There are two Flow Computer modes to be aware of:

1. Normal-mode
In this mode, a main total (e.g. “Ind volume total”) can increment. The corresponding maintenance-mode
total (e.g. “Maint indicated vol”) will never increment.
2. Maintenance-mode
In this mode, a maintenance-mode total can increment . The corresponding main total will never increment.
A mode can be selected for an individual metering-run. However, the selection can only be performed when
the 795X is in a ‘Flow Stopped’ state for the meter-run concerned.
For information on how the 795X can be in a ‘Flow Stopped’ state, refer to the <”Flow mode”> menu data
notice (with the menu data list) on the Flow Metering pages:
Page 11.50 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

TOTALISING (Orifice/Turbine/Linear Flow) by Sub-Station

Note: Configure totalling for individual stream/runs (page 49) before configuring sub-station totalling.
795x totalling features 3 basic types of incremental, rollover sub-station total:
Flow Total................ 5 x Sub-station Flow Rate based totals for sub-station ‘1’ (i.e. streams/runs 1+2).
5 x Sub-station Flow Rate based totals for sub-station ‘2’ (i.e. streams/runs 3+4).
Alarm Total.……...… 1 x Total for sub-station ‘1’ (i.e. streams/runs 1+2).

1 x Total for sub-station ‘2’ (i.e. streams/runs 3+4).
This is for alarm condition totalling of a sub-station flow rate or missing pulses from a pair of
flowmeters. It increments only when there is an ‘active’ alarm.
Error Pulse Total…... 1 x Total for sub-station ‘1’ (i.e. streams/runs 1+2).
1 x Total for sub-station ‘2’ (i.e. streams/runs 3+4).
This is for totalling of missing pulses from flowmeters, paired by sub-stations. This feature is
permanently enabled.
SUB-STATION
FLOW FLOW
RATE 4 5 6
RATES FORWARD FLOW
Meter-run Sub-station Totaliser SUB-STATION
1 2 + 3
Summate (Forward Flow) TOTAL
ALARM
7 10 to 13
SUB-STATION
8
XX Index for use with + Source Sub-station TOTALS Pulse
listed parameters Selection Totaliser Outputs
9
17 to 20
ERROR ERROR PULSE
Sub-station Totaliser 15
PULSE 14 SUB-STATION
(Missing pulses) 16 TOTALS
COUNT

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Totalisers”>, (2) <“Flow totals”>/<”Sub Station totals”>, (3) <“Health check”>/<“Totals”> and
(4) INFORMATION MENU (‘i’ key)
Index Notes?
1 Indicated vol rate * Corrected vol rate * Mass rate * Base volume rate * Energy rate * cÖd, G
2 SubStn1 ind vol r.. * SubStn1 cor vol rate * SubStn1 mass rate* SubStn1 BaseVol r * SubStn1 energy ra. * F
5 Sub1 GrosVolInhib.. Sub1 CorrVolInhibit SubStn1 mass inhi... Sub1 BaseVolInhi.. Sub1 energy inhibit
6 SubStn1 ind vol inc SubStn1 corr vol inc SubStn1 mass inc SubStn1 base vol i.. SubStn1 energy inc
Notes are on the next page. cÖd = Separate data for streams/runs ‘1’ and ‘2’
Index Notes?
1 Indicated vol rate * Corrected vol rate * Mass rate * Base volume rate * Energy rate * eÖf, G
2 SubStn2 ind vol r.. * SubStn2 cor vol rate * SubStn2 mass ra.. * SubStn2 BaseVol r * SubStn2 energy ra. * F
6 SubStn2 ind vol inc SubStn2 corr vol inc SubStn2 mass inc SubStn2 base vol i.. SubStn2 energy inc H
Notes are on the next page. eÖf = Separate data for streams/runs ‘3’ and ‘4’
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.51

TOTALISING (Orifice/Turbine/Linear Flow) by Sub-Station
Sub-Stations ‘1’ & ‘2’ Parameter list: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
7 Alarm total src ptr 14 Meter error pulses cÖf B
Notes:
A The alarm based station total increments even if there is ‘reverse flow’.
C By default, rollover (to zero) limits are ‘Set’ to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is
D A sub-station total is a normal-mode total. There is no equivalent maintenance-mode total. Increments for a
sub-station total only involve ‘stream/runs’ that are not operating in maintenance-mode.
F * Sub-station ‘1’ flow rate = (Stream/run ‘1’ flow rate + Stream/run ‘2’ flow rate)
* Sub-station ‘2’ flow rate = (Stream/run ‘3’ flow rate + Stream/run ‘4’ flow rate)
H An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added
I A flow total can be frozen under alarm conditions, if enabled by the corresponding ‘inhibit’ parameter.
Page 11.52 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

TOTALISING (Orifice/Turbine/Linear Flow) by Station

Note: Configure totalling for individual streams/runs (page 11.49) before configuring station totalling, which is the
summation of values (e.g. flow rates) from stream/runs 1, 2, 3 and 4.
795X totalling features 3 basic types of incremental, roll-over station total:
Flow Total ................ 5 x Station Flow Rate based totals.

Each total is enabled by configuring the associated flow rate for at least one stream/run.
Alarm Total .............. 1 x Total for all streams/runs. This is for alarm condition totalling of either a station flow rate
or missing pulses from flowmeters. It increments only when there is an ‘active’ alarm.
Error Pulse Total...... 1 x Total for all streams/runs. This is for totalling of missing pulses from all flowmeters.
STATION
FLOW 15 FLOW 4 5 6
RATES RATE FORWARD FLOW
Meter-run Station Totaliser STATION TOTAL
1 2 + 3
Add/Sub (Forward Flow)
ALARM
7 9 10 STATION
XX Index for use with + Source Station
8
TOTAL Pulse
listed parameters Selection Totaliser Outputs
13 14 ERROR PULSE
ERROR STATION TOTAL
Station Totaliser
PULSE 11 12
(Missing pulses)
COUNT

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Totalisation”>, (2) <“Flow totals”>/<”Stream totals”>, (3) <“Health check”>/<“Totals”>
(4) INFORMATION (‘i’-key) Menu

Index Notes?
1 Indicated vol rate * Corrected vol rate * Mass rate * Base volume rate * Energy rate * cÖ fA
2 Station ind vol rate * Station corr vol rate * Station mass rate * Station BaseVol rate* Station energy rate *
3 Station ind vol tot Station cor vol tot Station mass total Station base vol tot Station energy total E
4 Station ind vol roll Station cor vol roll Station mass roll Station BaseVol roll Station energy roll D
5 StnGrosVolTotInhibit StnCorrVolTotInhibit Stn mass tot inhibit StnBaseVolTotInhibit StnEnergyTot inhibit G
6 Station ind vol inc Station cor vol inc Station mass inc Station base vol inc Station energy inc F

7 Alarm total src ptr 12 Station MeterErr tot E
8 Stn alarm total E 13 Station MeterErrRoll D
9 Station alarm roll D 14 Station MeterErr inc F
10 Station alarm inc F 15 Station totalise cÖf B
11 Meter error pulses cÖf C
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.53

TOTALISING (Orifice/Turbine/Linear Flow) by Station

Notes:
B By default, corresponding values from all individual streams/runs are added together to get the station value.
This summation process can be changed for all station totals, with immediate effect, by adding/removing
streams/runs from the totalising process.
Always check the stream/run ID on display line 4 before making any changes with this parameter.
C Missing (error) pulses are detectable when using a dual pulse train configuration.
D By default, rollover (to zero) limits are ‘Set’ to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is
E A Station total is a normal-mode total. There is no equivalent maintenance-mode total. Increments for a
Station total will only involve streams/runs that are not operating in maintenance-mode. See also page 11.49.
F An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is added
G A flow total can be frozen under alarm conditions, if enabled by the corresponding ‘inhibit’ parameter.
Page 11.54 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

TARIFF TOTALISING
Tariff totalisers produce separate flow totals, each associated with a different flow rate band (A, B, C and D).
The philosophy is based upon being billed at different rates for gas depending on the rate of consumption. Users
are generally charged at higher rates if the flow rate exceeds various levels or bands.
Setting up involves:
x Selecting the type of flow rate (Energy, Mass, Standard Volume, etc.)
x Programming limits for flow rate bands A, B, C and D – see “Flow rate bands”.
x Selecting a tariff mode (how tariff totaliser will operated) – see “Tariff modes”.
XX Index for use with 2 3 4 5

listed parameters TARIFF
6 7 8 9 TOTALS
A
14 10
B
1 15 11 Pulse
FLOW Tariff C Outputs
Selection 16 12
RATES Totaliser D
17 13
18 Band

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Totalisers”>/<”Tariff”>, (2) <”Flow Totals”>/<”Stream totals”><”Tariff totals”> and
(3) <”Health check”>/<”Totals”>/<”Tariff”>
1 Tariff total src cÖf 10 Tariff band A total cÖf
2 Tariff calc method cÖf A 11 Tariff band B total cÖf
3 Tariff switch AB cÖf 12 Tariff band C total cÖf
4 Tariff switch BC cÖf 13 Tariff band D total cÖf
5 Tariff switch CD cÖf 14 Tariff bandA tot inc cÖf
6 Tariff band A factor cÖf B 15 Tariff bandB tot inc cÖf
7 Tariff band B factor cÖf B 16 Tariff bandC tot inc cÖf
8 Tariff band C factor cÖf B 17 Tariff bandD tot inc cÖf
9 Tariff band D factor cÖf B 18 Tariff band cÖf
Notes:
A Tariff mode selection: For capped mode, select “Full flow rate”. For individual mode, select “Excess flow rate”.
Also, see “Tariff modes”.
B Use this parameter to add a premium to the associated band total. The increment is multiplied by the factor
before being added to the total.
C The tariff totals can be logged in the normal way, and have the same attributes as the main fiscal totals. For
further details, see Chapter 9 (Archiving). Also, see “Analogue Output” and “Pulse Output” pages in this chapter.
Flow rate bands

The upper limits for each band must be programmed. To illustrate, consider:
A to B switch point = 400 SM3/Hr A B C

B to C switch point = 600 SM3/Hr
C to D switch point = 0 SM3/Hr
0 400 600
Flow rate (SM3/Hr)
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.55

TARIFF TOTALISING
In this example, Band A covers 0 to 400 SM3/Hr, B covers 400 to 600 and C covers 600 to infinity. Band D is not
used in this case, but would be used from the upper limit of Band C to infinity if Band C had an upper limit.
If any band has an upper limit of zero, as Band C in this example, it is treated as an infinite flow rate and the
associated tariff total for the next band is not used. In this case, the tariff total for Band D is not used.
Each band has its own tariff total, which is separate from the main fiscal totals. The tariff totaliser totalises in the
units as presently selected for the flow rate (Energy, Mass, etc.) In addition, each tariff total has a programmable
(SET) factor, the default of which is 1.0. This factor can be used to add a premium to each total.
Tariff modes
There are two tariff modes :-
“Capped” In Capped mode, if the flow exceeds the upper limit of a band (e.g. 400 – Band A), the total for
that band continues to count at the maximum rate (e.g. 400). The next band (e.g. B) then
totalises just the flow above the maximum rate (> 400). See “Example 1” below.
“Individual” In Individual mode, only one totaliser increments at any time. If the flow rate is above the upper
limit for Band A and below the upper limit for band B, ONLY the total Band B will increment,
and it will count all of the flow (applying the relevant tariff totaliser factor as required).
Should the rate increase further above the upper limit for Band B and into the range for Band C,
the tariff total for Band B will freeze and the tariff total for Band C will start to increment
recording all of the flow. (See “Example 2” below.)
In the following examples, changes of flow are shown every hour for simplicity. In reality, the tariff totals will be
calculated and incremented every machine cycle as normal for fiscal totals.
Example 1: Capped mode
Flow rate bands: Tariff total factors:

A to B switch point = 400 SM3/Hr A = 1.0
B to C switch point = 600 SM3/Hr B = 1.3
C to D switch point = 0 SM3/Hr C = 1.5
Hour Flow rate Tariff total band A Tariff total band B Tariff total band C Tariff total band D
1 350 SM3/Hr 000 + 350 = 350 0 0 0

2 500 SM3/Hr 350 + 400 = 750 000+ (100*1.3) = 130 0 0
3 800 SM3/Hr 750 + 400 = 1150 130+ (200*1.3) = 390 000 + (200*1.5) = 300 0
4 200 SM3/Hr 1150 + 200 = 1350 390 300 0
Example 2: Individual mode
Flow rate bands: Tariff total factors:

A to B switch point = 300 MJ/Hr A = 1.0
B to C switch point = 600 MJ/Hr B = 1.2
C to D switch point = 900 MJ/Hr C = 1.5
D = 2.0
Hour Flow rate Tariff total band A Tariff total band B Tariff total band C Tariff total band D
1 500 MJ/Hr 0 000 + (500*1.2) = 600 0 0

2 250 MJ/Hr 000 + 250 = 250 600 0 0
3 1050 MJ/Hr 250 600 0 (1050*2.0) = 2100
Page 11.56 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

TEMPERATURE
Measurements: (Turn to page 11.58 for the Equation List)
x Meter temperature – from scaled mA Input, RTD/PT100 Input, HART transmitter or via Modbus.
x (Stream/run 1) Density Temperature ‘1’ – from scaled mA Input, RTD/PT100 Input, HART input or via Modbus.
xx Index for use with

list of parameters
2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11
1
P
Analogue Inputs Temperature Referral Limits &
Source Method Apply
mA Calculation 5 Calc. Fallback 15 TEMPERATURE
HART Inputs Selection Selection Offset
(Scaling) (Orifice) Checks
12 13 14
HART or RTD/PT100
Modbus

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Transmitter detail”>/<”Temperature”>, (2) <”Temperature”> and (3) <”Pressure”>
Index Meter Temperature Parameters Notes? Index ‘Density Loop’ Temperature ‘n’ Notes?
1 Meter temp ain/hart cÖf A 1 Dens temp n ain/hart n=1..4 A
2 Meter temp @ 100% cÖf 2 Dens temp n @100% n=1..4
3 Meter temp @ 0% cÖf 3 Dens temp n @ 0% n=1..4
4 Meter temp source E 4 Dens temp n source n=1..4 E
5 Meter temp at sensor cÖf (E) 5 Dens temp n value n=1..4 E
6 Meter temp offset cÖf 6 Dens temp n offset n=1..4
7 Meter temp position cÖf C 7 Dens temp n position n=1..4 C
8 Temp referral KTe C 8 Temp referral KTe C
9 Pressure loss cÖf C 9 Pressure loss cÖf C
P Meter pressure * cÖf P Meter pressure * cÖf
10 Meter temp FB type 10 Dens temp n FB type n=1..4
11 Meter temp FB value cÖf 11 Dens temp n FB value n=1..4
12 Meter temp HI limit cÖf B 12 Dens temp n HI limit n=1..4 B
13 Meter temp LO limit cÖf B 13 Dens temp n LO limit n=1..4 B
14 Meter temp step lmt cÖf B 14 Dens temp n step lmt n=1..4 B
15 Meter temperature * cÖf C, (E) 15 Density n temperature * n=1..4 D
A Ensure that the basic configuration of the analogue or HART input has been completed.
mA: Refer to the “Analogue Input” reference page (11.7) for basic configuration details.
HART: Refer to Chapter 16 for basic configuration details.
B Alarm limits are optional.
HI/LO: Keep both high and low limits ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
STEP: Keep the step limit ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
C Orifice calculations expect temperature readings from the flow point (e.g. orifice plate). Temperature
transmitter measurements have to be adjusted by a referral calculation when the flow point and the
Temperature Field Transmitter are not positioned together.
D Temperature measurements at the gas density measurement point are used by the 795x to correct density
measurements for temperature effects. (See reference page 11.60)
E When Modbus is selected, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can be set-up to supply the
temperature measurement. For all details of the ITM feature, refer to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
When Analog/HART is selected, the temperature measurement is supplied by a HART transmitter or by an
analogue transmitter. You must also select a HART Input or Analogue Input. See also Note A.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.57

TEMPERATURE
Equation List:
(Note: Meter temperature parameters are used here but also applicable to Density Temperature.)
Equation TE#1: Up-stream Temperature Referral (ORIFICE ONLY)

This calculation is applied when the temperature field transmitter is positioned a distance down-stream from
the orifice plate.
KTe
§ P ·
Using: Tu = Td * ¨ ¸
© P PL ¹
Where: Tu = Temperature up-stream…………………………….….. {Parameter: <“Meter temperature”>}

Td = Temperature from down-stream field transmitter…… {Parameter: <“Meter temp at sensor”>}
P = Pressure at the flow point……………………………… {Parameter: <“Meter pressure”>}
PL = Pressure loss…………………………………………… {Parameter: <“Pressure loss”>} *
KTe = Temperature referral exponent……………………….. {Parameter: <“Temp referral KTe”>}
* See Orifice Metering calculations, listed earlier in this chapter.
Equation TE#2: Down-stream Temperature Referral (ORIFICE ONLY)

This calculation is applied when the temperature field transmitter is positioned a distance up-stream from the
orifice plate.
Kte
§ P ·
Using: Td = Tu * ¨¨ ¸¸
© P PL ¹
Where Td = Temperature down-stream………………………………. {Parameter: <“Meter temperature”>}

Tu = Temperature from up-stream field transmitter………… {Parameter: <“Meter temp at sensor”>}
P = Pressure at the flow point……..………………………… {Parameter: <“Meter pressure”>}
PL = Pressure loss across orifice..…………………………… {Parameter: <“Pressure loss”>} *
KTe = Temperature referral exponent………………………….. {Parameter: <“Temp referral KTe”>}
* See Orifice Metering calculations, listed earlier in this chapter.
Page 11.58 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

PRESSURE
Measurements:
x Stream/run pressure – from a scaled mA Input, HART Input or via Modbus.
x Atmospheric Pressure – from a scaled mA Input, HART Input or via Modbus.
Index for use with

xx
list of parameters
2 3 4 5 6
1
Analogue Inputs Pressure Limits &
Source Method
mA Calculation Fallback 10 PRESSURE
HART Inputs Selection Selection
(Scaling) Checks
7 8 9
HART
Modbus

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Transmitter detail”>/<”Pressure”> and (2) <”Pressure”>
Index Meter Pressure Parameters Notes? Index Atmospheric Pressure Param. Notes?
1 Meter press ain/hart cÖf A 1 Atmos press ain/hart A
2 Meter pressure @ 100% cÖf 2 Atmos p 100% value
3 Meter pressure @ 0% cÖf 3 Atmos p 0% value
4 Meter press source D 4 Atmos press source D
5 Meter press FB type 5 Atmos p FB type
6 Meter press FB value cÖf 6 Atmos p FB value
7 Meter press HI limit cÖf B 7 Atmos press HI limit B
8 Meter press LO limit cÖf B 8 Atmos press LO limit B
9 Meter press step lmt cÖf B 9 Atmos p step limit B
10 Meter pressure * cÖf C, (D) 10 Atmospheric pressure * (D)
Notes:
A Ensure that the basic configuration of the Analogue/HART Input has been completed.
B Optional feature. Limits are for the prime selected value.

C The pressure field transmitter must be near the flowmeter point.
D When Modbus is selected, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can be set-up to supply the
pressure measurement. For all details of the ITM feature, refer to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
When Analog/HART is selected, the pressure measurement is supplied by a HART transmitter or by an

analogue transmitter. You must also select a HART Input or Analogue Input. See also Note A.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.59

DENSITY
Measurements and Features: (Turn to page 11.64 for the “Equation List”)
x Gas Density A (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from density transducers (1 - 4).
x Gas Density B (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from mA input, HART input, PTZ1 (p.11.66) or PTZ2 (p.11.68).
x Prime Density (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from Gas density A, Gas density B or Fallback function.
1 10 11 12
3 17
Time Period Input 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 14 15 16 18 19 UA)
Time Period Input 2 Time PS) Apply
Density A Temperature VOS Density
Period 2
Calculation Correction Correction
Density
Referral
20 GAS DENSITY 'A'
Time Period Input 3 Selection Offset
Time Period Input 4 HI
t 'A' P
26 29
SG GP
Prime
PRIME
A#B 28 Density 33
HART DENSITY
Selection
27
22 23 30 31 32
21 24
LO F/B
mA Inputs Density B UB)
Source
mA Calculation
HART inputs Selection Density B
(Scaling)
Method 25 GAS DENSITY 'B'
UB) Selection
Modbus UB)
Index for use with

xx
list of parameters
UB UB
from from
PTZ1 PTZ2

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Transducer details”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Transmitter detail”>/<”Line density B”>,
(3) <“Health check”>/<“Time period inputs”>, (4) <“Configure”>/<“Line density”> and (5) <“Line density”>
Menu Data / Parameter List (1 of 3): * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
Index Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Notes?
1 Mtr dens A Tpin src Mtr dens B Tpin src Mtr dens C Tpin src Mtr dens D Tpin src A
2 Time period input n * Time period input n * Time period input n * Time period input n * B, (C), D
See next page for notes:
Index Transducer ‘1’ Transducer ‘2’ Transducer ‘3’ Transducer ‘4’ Notes?
3 Mtr dens1 glitch lmt Mtr dens2 glitch lmt Mtr dens3 glitch lmt Mtr dens4 glitch lmt (B), C
4 Transducer 1 K0 Transducer 2 K0 Transducer 3 K0 Transducer 4 K0
7 Density 1 correction Density 2 correction Density 3 correction Density 4 correction
10 Mtr dens 1 VOS type Mtr dens 2 VOS type Mtr dens 3 VOS type Mtr dens 4 VOS type
11 Density Transducer 1 Density Transducer 2 Density Transducer 3 Density Transducer 4
16 Transducer 1 gamma Transducer 2 gamma Transducer 3 gamma Transducer 4 gamma
17 Density 1 offset Density 2 offset Density 3 offset Density 4 offset
18 Density 1 position Density 2 position Density 3 position Density 4 position
See next page for notes:
Page 11.60 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

DENSITY
Index Parameter Notes? Index Parameter Notes?
19 Density referral Kde 31 Prime dens FB type I
20 Meter dens A value * cÖf 32 Prime density FB val cÖf I
21 Mtr dens B Ain/H src cÖf H 33 Prime density value * cÖf
22 Meter density B 100% cÖf t ‘A’ (a) Density1 temperature * (c) P. 11.57
23 Meter density B 0% cÖf (b) Density2 temperature * (d) P. 11.57
24 Meter dens calc sel cÖf E (c) Density3 temperature * (e) P. 11.57
25 Meter dens B value * cÖf (d) Density4 temperature * (f) P. 11.57
26 Meter dens prime sel cÖf F P Meter pressure * cÖf P. 11.59
27 Meter dens selected SG SG prime value * cÖf P. 11.77
28 Meter dens cmp lmt cÖf A#B GP Diff pressure value * cÖf P. 11.13
29 Meter density HI lmt cÖf G
30 Meter density LO lmt cÖf G
- Meter dens step lmt cÖf
Notes:
A Select a transducer by nominating the time period input 2 being used by that transducer. [Menu (1)]
This flexibility extends to, and directly affects, the use of time period inputs by gas specific gravity transducers.
See table below for suggested allocations of transducers and time period inputs.
Time Period Input GAS DENSITY A (Stream/run 1 to 4)

Connection Suggestions TPIN1 TPIN2 TPIN3 TPIN4
1=DT 9 8 8 8
1=DT 2=DT 9 9 8 8
1=DT 2=DT 3=DT 9 9 9 8
1=DT 2=DT 3=DT 4=DT 9 9 9 9
1=SG 8 8 8 8
1=SG 2=SG 8 8 8 8
1=SG 2=SG 3=SG 8 8 8 8
1=SG 2=SG 3=SG 4=SG 8 8 8 8
1=DT 2=SG 9 8 8 8
1=DT 2=SG 3=SG 9 8 8 8
1=DT 2=SG 3=SG 4=SG 9 8 8 8
1=DT 2=DT 3=SG 9 9 8 8
1=DT 2=DT 3=SG 4=SG 9 9 8 8
Key:
N
=DT Connect density transducer ‘n’ to Time Period Input ‘n’.
n=SG Connect SG transducer ‘n’ to Time Period Input ‘n’.
TPIN Time Period Input.
9 Time period input is used.
8 Time period input is not used.
B Limit is applied to raw periodic time values from the selected transducer. [Menu (1)]
C A frequency measurement ‘glitch’ is an anomalous reading that is unusually different to previous readings.
Anomalous readings can be filtered out by the 795X before use in calculations. A user-defined tolerance for a
frequency change is used to distinguish between good and anomalous readings. A frequency change that is
above the tolerance limit means that the frequency is anomalous. Following an anomalous reading, there must
be three consecutive “good” readings within the tolerance limit before the frequency is acceptable. An alarm is
raised whenever there are five consecutive anomalous readings; it can be cleared at any time.
2
Time Period Inputs (or Periodic Time Inputs) are referred to as “Density inputs” in rear panel pin designations. (See Chapter 2).
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.61
DENSITY
Note continued…
D Time Period Input 1 is associated with the Density Input 1 rear panel connections. Likewise, Time Period Input 2
corresponds to the Density Input 2 rear panel connection. (See Chapter 2 for Density Input connections.)
E When Modbus is selected, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can be set-up to supply the density
B measurement. For all details of the ITM feature, refer to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
When PTZ 1 is selected, density B is calculated using the PTZ1 method. (See page 11.66 for details).
When PTZ 2 is selected, density B is calculated using the PTZ2 method. (See page 11.68 for details).
When Analog/HART Input is selected, density B is supplied by a HART transmitter or by an analogue

transmitter. You must also select a HART Input or Analogue Input, whichever is appropriate. See also Note H.
The Transducer option applies to 795x software version 1510 only.
F Select the logic table for the prime density (channel) selection. (See also “Re-selection Procedure” below).
G High and low limits are for the selected prime density. Keep them ‘Set’ to 0 if no limit checking is required.
H Ensure that the basic configuration of the Analogue/HART Input has been completed.
I Fallback is not optional with Density measurements. By default, a ‘Set’ fallback value of 0 is copied to the
prime data in the event of a fallback situation. See “Prime re-selection procedure” for further information.
Page 11.62 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

DENSITY
Prime Density Re-Selection Procedure

In the event of a density input channel (e.g. Density ‘A’) failing or returning to a live state, the 7955 will perform a
re-selection procedure for obtaining a live Prime Density value. This procedure involves evaluating a user-selected
logic decision table to determine where now to get the prime value.
x The logic table below is shown in full for the “Automatic A” configuration option. (Density ‘A’ is given preference.)
Density ‘A’ Density ‘B’ A#B (Comp) Density ‘A’ Density ‘B’ Prime Density
out of limit out of limit out of limit input failed input failed Selected
YES YES YES - - FB Key:
- YES YES - - A
A = Density ‘A’,
YES - YES - - B
- - YES - - B B = Density ‘B’,
YES YES - - A FB = Fallback
- YES - - A
YES - - - B Notes:
- - - - A
YES YES YES YES - FB 1. The “Automatic B”
- YES YES YES - FB configuration option uses
YES - YES YES - B the same logic table
- - YES YES - B except Density ‘B’ is the
YES YES - YES - B preferred channel.
- YES - YES - FB
This preference
YES - - YES - B
- - - YES - B
reverses the A and B
YES YES YES - YES FB selection in the last
- YES YES - YES A column of this table.
YES - YES - YES FB
- - YES - YES A 2. “Out of limit” columns
YES YES - - YES FB 1 and 2 are concerned
- YES - - YES A with the HI or LO alarm
YES - - - YES FB limits.
- - - - YES A
YES YES YES YES YES FB 3. “Input failed” columns
- YES YES YES YES FB are concerned with
YES - YES YES YES FB ‘Live’ inputs.
- - YES YES YES FB
- YES - YES YES FB
YES - - YES YES FB
- - - YES YES FB
Logic table for the “Density A” configuration option (Density ‘B’ is not involved)
Density ‘A’ Density ‘A’ Prime Density

- - A
- YES FB
YES - A
YES YES FB
Logic table for the “Density B” configuration option (Density ‘A’ is not involved)
Density ‘B’ Density ‘B’ Prime Density

- - B
- YES FB
YES - B
YES YES FB
Key: A = Density ‘A’, B = Density ‘B’, FB = Fallback
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.63

DENSITY
Density Equation List:
Notice
As an example, parameters shown here are for calculating Metering gas density
‘A’ from a gas density transducer that is wired to Time Period Input ‘1’.
Equation DE#1: Uncorrected density from a transducer
Using: D
= K 0 K1 * t K 2 * t 2
Where: D = Density (uncorrected).........………………………............... {Parameter: <“Meter dens A value”>}
K0 = Calibration factor K0 ............……………………….............. {Parameter: <“Transducer 1 K0”>}
K1 = Calibration factor K1 ......………………………..................... {Parameter: <“Transducer 1 K1”>}
K2 = Calibration factor K2.........………………………................... {Parameter: <“Transducer 1 K2”>}
t = Periodic time from transducer (Ps)………………………...... {Parameter: <“Time period input 1”>}
Equation DE#2: Density from a transducer with the correction for temperature effects
Using: D' = D * >1 K18 * ( t t c )@ K19 * t t c
Where: D' = Density (corrected)..........…………………………................ {Parameter: <“Meter dens A value”>}

D = Density (uncorrected).....…………………………................ {See Equation DE#1}
K18 = Calibration factor K18....…………………………................... {Parameter: <“Transducer 1 K18”>}
K19 = Calibration factor K19.....………………………….................. {Parameter: <“Transducer 1 K19”>}
t = ‘Density loop’ temperature ….....………………………........ {Parameter: <”Density1 temperature“>}
tc = 20qC = Calibration temperature…………...……….…......... {No Parameter}
Equation DE#3: Density from a transducer with the correction for the effect of V.O.S.
§ 2 ·
¨ § K · ¸
¨ 1 ¨¨ ¸
¸ ¸
Using: U U'*¨¨ © W * Cc ¹ ¸
2 ¸
¨ § K · ¸
¨ ¸
¨¨ 1 ¨ W * C ¸ ¸¸
© © g¹ ¹
Where: U = Metering density..….......……………………………………... {Parameter: <“Meter dens A value”>}
U ' = Density (uncorrected or temperature corrected)……...…… {See Equation DE#1 or DE#2}
Cc = V.O.S. of calibration gas (m/s)..........………………...…...... {See Appendix ‘F’}
Cg = V.O.S. of measured gas (m/s)......………………….…......... {See Appendix ‘F’}
K = Density transducer VOS constant
= 2.10 * 104 for a 7812 Gas density transducer
= (1.35 * 104 for a 7810 Gas density transducer)
W = Periodic time of density transducer output signal (Ps).…... {Parameter: <“Time period input 1”>}
Page 11.64 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

DENSITY
Equation DE#4: Meter gas density ‘B’ (from PTZ1)
§ Z0 * tb · § P * Ub ·
Using: ¨ ¸ * ¨¨ ¸¸
¨ P ¸
© b ¹ © Z*t ¹
Where: U = Stream/run density………………..…………………….… {Parameter: <“Meter dens B value”>}

Z0 = Base compressibility……………………….……………….. {Parameter: <“Meter density Zbase”>}
tb = Temperature at base conditions (in Kelvin)……………… {Parameter: <“Base temp value”>}
Pb = Pressure at base conditions……………………….………. {Parameter: <“Base pressure value”>}
P = Stream/run pressure………………………………..…….. {Parameter: <“Meter pressure”>}
t = Meter temperature (in Kelvin)…………..…………………. {Parameter: <“Meter temperature”>}
Ub = Density at base conditions………………….……………… {Parameter: <“Prime base density”>}
Z = Line compressibility………………………….……………… {Parameter: <“Meter density Zline”>}
Equation DE#5: Meter gas density ‘B’ (from PTZ2)

M*P
Using: U =
R
Z*t*
100
Where: U = Stream/run Density………….………………………….… {Parameter: <“Meter dens B value”>}

M = Molecular mass of measured gas………………………… {Parameter: <“Meter mass of gas”>}
P = Stream/run pressure…………….……….……………….. {Parameter: <“Meter pressure”>}
t = Stream/run temperature (in Kelvin)…..…………………. {Parameter: <“Meter temperature”>}
Z = Line compressibility……………………….………………… {Parameter: <“Meter density Zline”>}
R = Universal gas constant…………………….……..………… {Parameter: <“Gas const R J/mol.K”>}
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.65

DENSITY B FROM PTZ1/COMPRESSIBILITY

Measurements: (Turn to page 11.64 for the “Equation List”)
x Density B – from PTZ1
This method allows Density ‘B’ to be derived from a prime Base Density input. Corrections are applied for the
pressure, temperature, line compressibility (factor ‘Z’) and base compressibility of the gas.
tb Pb 1 2
3 4 5
t The following compressibility sources for PTZ1 are
P M 6 supported by the 7955:
Cv/m Compressibility
CO2 Calculation Z0 x S-GERG 1988
N2
(S-GERG) x AGA-NX19 (Standard or surface fit)
SG
Z x AGA-NX19Mod
x AGA-NX19Mod3h
x AGA-8
tb P b 1 9
x Linear Interpolation
10 11
t
'Z' Factor M 6
P
Cv/m* Calculation
(NX19, Z0
CO2 NX19mod, 1
N2 NX19mod3h*) Z Z
7 Density B
SG Source UB GAS
Calculation 43
8 Selection Density 'B'
(PTZ1)
Z0
Gas Composition
(Normalised)
14 to 35
Gas Composition (Normalised)
M 38 6
t
'Z' Factor % Nitrogen % Neo-Pentane
Calculation Z0 36
P (AGA8)
% Carbon Dioxide % Iso-Pentane
Z 37 % Hydrogen Sulphide % Neo-Hexane
12 13 % Water % Neo-Decane
tb Pb 1 % Helium % Neo-Heptane
% Methane % Neo-Octane
tb P b
% Ethane % Oxygen
1
% Argon % Carbon Monoxide
t
'Z' Factor Z0 % Propane % Hydrogen
P Calculation
UB (Linear) Z % Neo-Butane % C6+
% Iso-Butane % Neo-nonane
39 40 41 42

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Compressibility”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Line density”>/<”Line density B”>, (3) <”Temperature”>
(4) <”Pressure”>, (5) <“Configure”>/<“Energy”> and (6) <”Health check”>/<”Normalise gas data”>
Menu Data / Parameter List 1 of 2: * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
t Meter temperature * cÖf P.11.57 5 SGERG ref conditions
tB Base temp value M, 6 Meter mass of gas * cÖf C
P Meter pressure * cÖf P.11.59 Z0, 7 Meter density Zbase * cÖf
PB Base pressure value Z, 8 Meter density ZMeter * cÖf
SG SG prime value * cÖf P.11.77 9 Mass of air
Cv/m Energy value * cÖf P.11.80 10 Tor temp offset B
1 Meter PTZ 1 calc sel 11 AGA-NX19 method A
2 H2 cÖf D 12 AGA8 Z uncertainty cÖf
3 SGERG selector 13 AGA8 compositn range
4 SGERG report errors 14 Norm Methane E
See next page for notes. cÖf = Multi-stream/run type data (page 11.6) (X) = Indirect reference in Note X
Page 11.66 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

15 Norm Ethane cÖf E 30 Norm Oxygen cÖf E
16 Norm Propane cÖf E 31 Norm CO cÖf E
17 Norm n-Butane cÖf E 32 Norm Hydrogen cÖf E
18 Norm i-Butane cÖf E 33 Norm Argon cÖf E
19 Norm n-Pentane cÖf E N2, 34 Norm Nitrogen cÖf E, F
20 Norm i-Pentane cÖf E CO2, 35 Norm CO2 cÖf E, F
21 Norm n-Hexane cÖf E 36 AGA8 Z base value * cÖf
22 Norm n-Heptane cÖf E 37 AGA8 Z value * cÖf
23 Norm n-Octane cÖf E 38 AGA8 M value * cÖf
24 Norm n-Nonane cÖf E 39 Linear Z K10 cÖf
25 Norm n-Decane cÖf E 40 Linear Z K11 cÖf
26 Norm C6+ cÖf E 41 Linear Z K12 cÖf
27 Norm H2S cÖf E 42 Linear Z K13 cÖf
28 Norm Water cÖf E 43 Meter dens B value * cÖf
29 Norm Helium cÖf E UB Prime base density * cÖf
Notes:
A This parameter (menu data) is not applicable to AGA-NX19mod and AGA-NX19mod3h calculations.
B This parameter (menu data) is applicable to the AGA-NX19mod3h calculation.
C Molecular weight of measured gas. This is used when deriving Gas density B from PTZ2.
D Mole percentage of Hydrogen in measured gas.
E Raw gas constituent that has been normalised on-demand (by manipulating menu data) or normalised
automatically if received from a Chromatograph. Refer to Chapter 7 for information on Chromatograph support.
(MENU: <”Health Check”>/<”Normalise gas data”>)
F Raw N2 and CO2 values can be obtained from mA-type field transmitters instead of a Chromatograph.
Associated parameters (Menu Data) are located under <”Configure”>/<”Transmitter detail”>.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.67


Measurements: (Turn to page 11.64 for the “Equation List”)
x Density B – from PTZ2
This method is similar to PTZ1 except Density ‘B’ is derived using the molecular weight. Corrections are
applied for pressure, temperature and line compressibility (factor ‘Z’) of the measured gas.
tb Pb 1 2
3 4 5 The following compressibility sources for PTZ2 are supported
t
P M
by the 7955:
Cv/m Compressibility x S-GERG 1988
CO2 Calculation Z0 7
(S-GERG) x AGA-NX19 (Standard or surface fit)
N2 x AGA-NX19Mod
Z
SG
x AGA-NX19Mod3h
x AGA-8
tb Pb 1 9
10 11
t
'Z' Factor M
P
Calculation 1 39
Cv/m* Z0 7 M
(NX19, 6 Density B
CO2 NX19mod, Source Z GAS
Calculation 40
N2 NX19mod3h*) Z 8 Selection t Density 'B'
(PTZ2)
P
SG
Gas Composition
(Normalised) Gas Composition (Normalised)
14 to 35
% Methane % Neo-Octane
% Nitrogen % Neo-nonane
M 38
'Z' Factor % Carbon Dioxide % Neo-Decane
t
Calculation Z0 36 7 % Ethane % Hydrogen Sulphide
P (AGA8)
Z 37 % Propane % Water
12 13 % Neo-Butane % Helium
tb Pb 1 % Iso-Butane % Oxygen
% Neo-Pentane % Carbon Monoxide
% Iso-Pentane % Hydrogen
% Neo-Hexane % C6+
% Neo-Heptane % Argon

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Compressibility”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Line density”>/<”Line density B”>, (3) <”Temperature”>
(4) <”Pressure”>, (5) <“Configure”>/<“Energy”> and (6) <”Health check”>/<”Normalise gas data”>

t Meter temperature * cÖf P.11.57 9 Mass of air
tB Base temp value 10 Tor temp offset B
P Meter pressure * cÖf P.11.59 11 AGA-NX19 method A
PB Base pressure value 12 AGA8 Z uncertainty
SG SG prime value * cÖf P.11.77 13 AGA8 compositn range
Cv/m Energy value * cÖf P.11.80 14 Norm Methane cÖf E
1 Meter PTZ2 calc sel 15 Norm Ethane cÖf E
2 H2 cÖf D 16 Norm Propane cÖf E
3 SGERG selector 17 Norm n-Butane cÖf E
4 SGERG report errors 18 Norm i-Butane cÖf E
5 SGERG ref conditions 19 Norm n-Pentane cÖf E
M, 6 Meter mass of gas * cÖf C 20 Norm i-Pentane cÖf E
Z0, 7 Meter density Zbase * cÖf 21 Norm n-Hexane cÖf E
Z, 8 Meter density ZMeter * cÖf 22 Norm n-Heptane cÖf E
See next page for notes.
Page 11.68 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)


23 Norm n-Octane cÖf E 32 Norm Hydrogen cÖf E
24 Norm n-Nonane cÖf E 33 Norm Argon cÖf E
25 Norm n-Decane cÖf E N2, 34 Norm Nitrogen cÖf E, F
26 Norm C6+ cÖf E CO2, 35 Norm CO2 cÖf E, F
27 Norm H2S cÖf E 36 AGA8 Z base value * cÖf
28 Norm Water cÖf E 37 AGA8 Z value * cÖf
29 Norm Helium cÖf E 38 AGA8 M value * cÖf
30 Norm Oxygen cÖf E 39 Gas const R J/mol.K
31 Norm CO cÖf E 40 Meter dens B value * cÖf
Notes:
B This parameter (menu data) is applicable to the AGA-NX19mod3h calculation.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.69

BASE DENSITY
Measurements and Features:
x Base density A (streams/runs 1 - 4) – from calculation using Prime Specific Gravity.
x Base density B (streams/runs 1 - 4) – from mA Input, HART Input, PTZ1 (p.11.73), PTZ2 (p.11.75) or via Modbus.
x Prime Base density (streams/runs 1 - 4) – from Base density A, Base density B or Fallback function.
Index for use with 2 GAS BASE

xx DENSITY 'A'
list of parameters
Base Density A
SG 1 3
Calculation 10 12 13 14
HART Limits & PRIME

Prime
A#B 9 Fallback 17 BASE
4 5 6 7 Selection
Check DENSITY
11
mA Inputs
Base Density B 15 16
Source Method
mA Calculation 8
Selection Selection
(Scaling) GAS BASE
HART inputs
DENSITY 'B'
UB from PTZ2
UB from PTZ1
Modbus
(1) <“Configure”>/<“Base density”>, (2) <”Configure”>/<”Transmitter detail”>/<”Base density B”> and
(3) <“Base density / SG”>
1 SG prime value * cÖf P.11.77 10 Base dens prime sel cÖf C
2 Base density of Air 11 Base den selected cÖf
3 Base density A value * cÖf 12 Base density HI lmt cÖf A
4 Base dens B input chl cÖf (D), E 13 Base density LO lmt cÖf A
5 Base density B 100% cÖf 14 Base density stp lmt cÖf A
6 Base density B 0% cÖf 15 Base density FB type B
7 Base dens calc sel cÖf D 16 Base density FB val cÖd B
8 Base density B value * cÖf (D) 17 Prime base density * cÖf
9 Base density cmp lmt cÖf A
A Optional feature. By default, alarm limit checking is not enabled. ‘Set’ values to enable checking.
HI/LO LIMIT: Keep both limits ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
STEP LIMIT: Keep limit ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
COMPARISION LIMIT: Keep limit ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
High and low limits are for the selected prime base density. Step limit is for both Base density A and B values.
B Fallback feature is not optional with Base Density measurements. By default, a ‘Set’ fallback value of 0 is
copied to the prime data in the event of a fallback situation. See also “Prime re-selection procedure”.
C Selects the logic table for the prime base density (channel) selection. (See “Re-selection Procedure” below)
D When Modbus is selected, the ‘intelligent’ transmitter monitor (ITM) feature can be set-up to supply the Base
density B measurement. For all details of the ITM feature, refer to Chapter 7, Addendum E.
When PTZ 1 is selected, Base density B is calculated using the PTZ1 method. (See page 11.73 for details).
When PTZ 2 is selected, Base density B is calculated using the PTZ2 method. (See page 11.75 for details).
When Analog Input is selected, Base density B is supplied by a HART transmitter or by an analogue
transmitter. You must also select a HART Input or Analogue Input, whichever is appropriate. See also Note E.
E Ensure that the basic configuration of the Analogue/HART Input has been completed.
Page 11.70 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

BASE DENSITY
Prime Base Density Re-Selection Procedure
In the event of a base density input channel (e.g. Base Density ‘A’) failing or returning to a live state, the 795X will
perform a re-selection procedure for obtaining a live Prime Base Density value. This procedure involves evaluating
a user-selected logic decision table to determine where to get the prime value.
x The logic table below is shown in full for the “Automatic A” configuration option, where Base Density ‘A’ is preferred)
Base Base A#B (Comp) Base Base Prime Base

Density ‘A’ Density ‘B’ out of limit Density ‘A’ Density ‘B’ Density
out of limit out of limit input failed input failed Selected
YES YES YES - - FB Key:
- YES YES - - A A = Base Density ‘A’,
YES - YES - - B
- - YES - - B B = Base Density ‘B’,
YES YES - - A FB = Fallback
- YES - - A
YES - - - B
- - - - A Notes:
YES YES YES YES - FB 1. The “Automatic B”
- YES YES YES - FB configuration option uses
YES - YES YES - B the same logic table
- - YES YES - B except Base Density ‘B’
YES YES - YES - B
is the preferred channel.
- YES - YES - FB
YES - - YES - B This preference reverses
- - - YES - B the A and B selection in
YES YES YES - YES FB the last column of this
- YES YES - YES A table.
YES - YES - YES FB
- - YES - YES A
YES YES - - YES FB 2. “Out of limit” columns
- YES - - YES A 1 and 2 are concerned
YES - - - YES FB with the HI or LO alarm
- - - - YES A limits.
YES YES YES YES YES FB
YES - YES YES YES FB 3. “Input failed” columns
- - YES YES YES FB are concerned with ‘Live’
YES YES - YES YES FB inputs.
- YES - YES YES FB
YES - - YES YES FB
- - - YES YES FB
x The logic table below is shown in full for the “Base Density A” option, where Base Density ‘B’ is not involved.
Base Density ‘A’ Base Density ‘A’ Prime Base

out of limit input failed Density Selected
- - A
- YES FB
YES - A
YES YES FB
Key: A = Base Density ‘A’, FB = Fallback
x The logic table below is shown in full for the “Base Density B” option, where Base Density ‘A’ is not involved.
Base Density ‘B’ Base Density ‘B’ Prime Base

out of limit input failed Density Selected
- - B
- YES FB
YES - B
YES YES FB
Key: B = Base Density ‘B’, FB = Fallback
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.71

BASE DENSITY
Base Density Equation List:
Equation DE#6: Base Density (from PTZ1)
§ Pb · § U * Z * t ·
Using: Ub = ¨¨ ¸*¨
¸ ¸
© Z0 * t b ¹ © P ¹
Where: Ub = Base Density……………..…..………….………………..… {Parameter: “Base Density B value”}

Z0 = Base compressibility……………………………………….. {Parameter: “Base Density Zbase”}
tb = Temperature at base conditions (in Kelvin)……………… {Parameter: “Base temp value”}
Pb = Pressure at base conditions……………….………………. {Parameter: “Base pressure value”}
P = Meter pressure………………………..…………………….. {Parameter: “Meter pressure”}
t = Meter temperature (in Kelvin)…………….……………….. {Parameter: “Meter temperature”}
U = Line density at base conditions………………….………… {Parameter: “Prime density value”}
Z = Line compressibility………….……………………………… {Parameter: “Base density ZMeter”}
Equation DE#7: Base Density (from PTZ2)
Mb * Pb
Using: Ub =
R
Z0 * tb *
100
Where: Ub = Base Density……………..…..……………….…..………… {Parameter: “Line Density B value”}

Mb = Molecular weight of measured gas……….…………....… {Parameter: “Base mass of gas”}
Z0 = Base compressibility……………………………………….. {Parameter: “Base Density Zbase”}
tb = Temperature at base conditions (in Kelvin)……………… {Parameter: “Base temp value”}
Pb = Pressure at base conditions…………….…………………. {Parameter: “Base pressure value”}
R = Universal gas constant………………….……………..…… {Parameter: “Gas const R J/mol.K”}
Page 11.72 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

BASE DENSITY B FROM PTZ1/COMPRESSIBILITY

x Base Density ‘B’ from PTZ1
This method allows Base Density ‘B’ to be derived from a prime Base Density input. Corrections are applied for
the pressure, temperature and line compressibility (factor ‘Z’) of the measured gas.
t b Pb 1 2 The following compressibility sources for PTZ1 are supported:

3 4 5 x S-GERG 1988
t
x AGA-NX19 (Standard or surface fit)
P M 6
Cv/m Compressibility x AGA-NX19Mod
CO2 Calculation Z0 x AGA-NX19Mod3h
(S-GERG)
N2 x AGA-8
Z
SG x Linear Interpolation
1 9 What to do
tb P b
10 11 1. Configure a compressibility source. (Configuration may
t have already been done for Line Density)
'Z' Factor M 6
P 2. Configure Base Density ‘B’ to use PTZ2 method.
Cv/m* Calculation
(NX19, Z0
CO2 tb Pb
NX19mod, 1
N2 NX19mod3h*) Z Z
SG OR 7 U Base Density B
Source Gas Base
t Calculation 43 Density 'B'
Selection
OR 8 P (PTZ1)
Gas Composition Z0
(Normalised)
14 to 35
M 38 6 Gas Composition (Normalised)
'Z' Factor
t
Calculation Z0 36 % Methane % Neo-Octane
P (AGA8)
Z 37 % Nitrogen % Neo-nonane
12 13 % Carbon Dioxide % Neo-Decane
t b Pb 1 % Ethane % Hydrogen Sulphide
% Propane % Water
tb P b % Neo-Butane % Helium
1
% Iso-Butane % Oxygen
t
'Z' Factor Z0 % Neo-Pentane % Carbon Monoxide
P Calculation
(Linear) Z % Iso-Pentane % Hydrogen
UB
% Neo-Hexane % C6+
39 40 41 42

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Compressibility”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Base density”>/<”Base density B”>, (3) <”Temperature”>
(4) <”Pressure”>, (5) <”Base density / SG”>, (6) <“Configure”>/<“Energy”> & (7) <”Health check”>/<”Normalise gas data”>

t Meter temperature * cÖf P.11.57 5 SGERG ref conditions
tB Base temp value Mb, 6 Base mass of gas * cÖf C
P Meter pressure * cÖf P.11.59 Z0, 7 Base density Zbase * cÖf
PB Base pressure value Z, 8 Base density ZMeter * cÖf
SG SG prime value * cÖf P.11.77 9 Mass of air
Cv/m Energy value * cÖf P.11.80 10 Tor temp offset B
1 Base PTZ 1 calc sel 11 AGA-NX19 method A
2 H2 cÖf D 12 AGA8 Z uncertainty cÖf
3 SGERG selector 13 AGA8 compositn range
4 SGERG report errors 14 Norm Methane E
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.73

Base Density B from PTZ1/Compressibility

15 Norm Ethane cÖf E 30 Norm Oxygen cÖf E
16 Norm Propane cÖf E 31 Norm CO cÖf E
17 Norm n-Butane cÖf E 32 Norm Hydrogen cÖf E
18 Norm i-Butane cÖf E 33 Norm Argon cÖf E
19 Norm n-Pentane cÖf E N2, 34 Norm Nitrogen cÖf E, F
20 Norm i-Pentane cÖf E CO2, 35 Norm CO2 cÖf E, F
21 Norm n-Hexane cÖf E 36 AGA8 Z base value * cÖf
22 Norm n-Heptane cÖf E 37 AGA8 Z value * cÖf
23 Norm n-Octane cÖf E 38 AGA8 M value * cÖf
24 Norm n-Nonane cÖf E 39 Linear Z K10 cÖf
25 Norm n-Decane cÖf E 40 Linear Z K11 cÖf
26 Norm C6+ cÖf E 41 Linear Z K12 cÖf
27 Norm H2S cÖf E 42 Linear Z K13 cÖf
28 Norm Water cÖf E 43 Base density B value * cÖf
29 Norm Helium cÖf E U Prime density value * cÖf
Notes:
B This parameter (menu data) is applicable to the AGA-NX19mod3h calculation only.
Page 11.74 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)


Measurement:
x Base density B (for streams/runs 1 and 2) – from PTZ2
This method is similar to PTZ1 except Base Density B is derived from the molecular weight of the gas.
Corrections are applied for pressure, temperature and base compressibility (factor ‘Z’) of the measured gas.
The following compressibility sources for PTZ2 are supported:

x S-GERG 1988
tb Pb 1 2
x AGA-NX19 (Standard or surface fit)
3 4 5
t
x AGA-NX19Mod
P Mb x AGA-NX19Mod3h
Cv/m Compressibility x AGA-8
CO2 Calculation Z 8
(S-GERG) What to do
N2
Z0
SG 1. Configure a compressibility source.
(Configuration may have already been done for Line Density)
tb Pb 1 9 2. Configure Base Density ‘B’ to use PTZ2 method.
10 11
t tb Pb
'Z' Factor Mb
P
Calculation 1 39
Cv/m* Z 8
(NX19, 6 Base Density
CO2 Source Mb Gas Base
NX19mod, B Calculation 40
N2 NX19mod3h*) Selection Density 'B'
Z0 7 Zb (PTZ2)
SG
Gas Composition
(Normalised) Gas Composition (Normalised)
14 to 35 % Methane % Neo-Octane
Mb 38
% Nitrogen % Neo-nonane
'Z' Factor % Carbon Dioxide % Neo-Decane
t
Calculation Z 37 8
P (AGA8) % Ethane % Hydrogen Sulphide
Z0 36 % Propane % Water
12 13 % Neo-Butane % Helium
tb Pb 1 % Iso-Butane % Oxygen
% Neo-Pentane % Carbon Monoxide
% Iso-Pentane % Hydrogen
% Neo-Hexane % C6+

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Compressibility”>, (2) <“Configure”>/<“Base density”>/<”Base density B”>, (3) <”Temperature”>
(4) <”Pressure”>, (5) <”Base density / SG”>, (6) <“Configure”>/<“Energy”> & (7) <”Health check”>/<”Normalise gas data”>

t Meter temperature * cÖf P.11.57 9 Mass of air
tB Base temp value 10 Tor temp offset B
P Meter pressure* cÖf P.11.59 11 AGA-NX19 method A
PB Base pressure value 12 AGA8 Z uncertainty cÖf
SG SG prime value * cÖf P.11.77 13 AGA8 compositn range
Cv/m Energy value * cÖf P.11.80 14 Norm Methane cÖf E
1 Base PTZ2 calc sel 15 Norm Ethane cÖf E
2 H2 cÖf D 16 Norm Propane cÖf E
3 SGERG selector 17 Norm n-Butane cÖf E
4 SGERG report errors 18 Norm i-Butane cÖf E
5 SGERG ref conditions 19 Norm n-Pentane cÖf E
Mb, 6 Base Meter mass of gas * cÖf C 20 Norm i-Pentane cÖf E
Z0, 7 Base density Zbase * cÖf 21 Norm n-Hexane cÖf E
Z, 8 Base density ZMeter * cÖf 22 Norm n-Heptane cÖf E
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.75


23 Norm n-Octane cÖf E 32 Norm Hydrogen cÖf E
24 Norm n-Nonane cÖf E 33 Norm Argon cÖf E
25 Norm n-Decane cÖf E N2, 34 Norm Nitrogen cÖf E, F
26 Norm C6+ cÖf E CO2, 35 Norm CO2 cÖf E, F
27 Norm H2S cÖf E 36 AGA8 Z base value * cÖf
28 Norm Water cÖf E 37 AGA8 Z value * cÖf
29 Norm Helium cÖf E 38 AGA8 M value * cÖf
30 Norm Oxygen cÖf E 39 Gas const R J/mol.K
31 Norm CO cÖf E 40 Base density B value * cÖf
Notes:
B This parameter (menu data) is applicable to the AGA-NX19mod3h calculation only.
Page 11.76 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Measurements and Features:
x Specific Gravity A (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from Specific gravity transducers (1 - 4).
x Specific Gravity B (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from Prime base density, scaled mA Input or Chromatograph (Modbus).
x Prime Specific Gravity (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from Specific gravity A, Specific gravity B or Fallback facility.
K0 K2
1
3 4 5
Time Period Input 1
Time PS) S.G. A
SGA
Time Period Input 2
Period 2 Calculation 6
Time Period Input 3 Selection (Transducer)
Time Period Input 4
8 12 15 16 17 18
A#B 14
S.G. B Prime Limits & PRIME
UB 7 Calculation S.G. Fallback 22 SPECIFIC
(Base Density) Selection Check GRAVITY
21
19 20
10 11
9 S.G. B
mA Inputs S.G. B Method
Source Selection
Calculation 13
HART Inputs Selection
(mA Scaling)
SGB
S.G. B from Chromatograph (Modbus) Index for use with

xx
list of parameters

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Transducer details”>, (2) <”Health check”>/<”Time period inputs”>,
(3) <”Configure”>/<”Specific gravity”>, (4) <”Configure”>/<”Transmitter detail”>/<”Specific gravity B”> and
(5) <”Base density / SG”>
Index Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Menu Data Notes?
1 SG A Timeperiod Src SG B Timeperiod Src SG C Timeperiod Src SG D Timeperiod Src A
2 Time Period Input 1 Time Period Input 2 Time Period Input 3 Time Period Input 4 B, C, D
3 SG 1 glitch limit SG 2 glitch limit SG 3 glitch limit SG 4 glitch limit B, C
4 SG 1 K0 SG 2 K0 SG 3 K0 SG 4 K0
5 SG 1 K2 SG 2 K2 SG 3 K2 SG 4 K2
Index Menu Data Notes? Index Menu Data Notes?
6 SG 1 value * cÖf SG A 15 Prime SG sel cÖf G
7 Prime base density * cÖf P.11.70 16 SG HI limit cÖf H
8 Base density of air 17 SG LO limit cÖf H
9 SG 2 analog source cÖf F 18 SG step limit cÖf H
10 SG 100% cÖf 19 Prime SG FB type
11 SG 0% cÖf 20 Prime SG FB value cÖf
12 SG B calc select cÖf E 21 SG selected cÖf
13 SG 2 value * cÖf SG B 22 SG prime value * cÖf
14 SG comparison limit cÖf A#B
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.77

SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Notes:
A Select a transducer by nominating the time period input 3 being used by that transducer. [Menu (1)]
This flexibility extends to, and directly affects, the use of time period inputs by gas density transducers. See
table below for suggested allocations of transducers and time period inputs.
Time Period Input SG A (Stream/run 1 to 4)

Connection Suggestions TPIN1 TPIN2 TPIN3 TPIN4
1=DT 9 8 8 8
1=DT 2=DT 9 9 8 8
1=DT 2=DT 3=DT 9 9 9 8
1=DT 2=DT 3=DT 4=DT 9 9 9 9
1=SG 8 8 8 8
1=SG 2=SG 8 8 8 8
1=SG 2=SG 3=SG 8 8 8 8
1=SG 2=SG 3=SG 4=SG 8 8 8 8
1=DT 2=SG 9 8 8 8
1=DT 2=SG 3=SG 9 8 8 8
1=DT 2=SG 3=SG 4=SG 9 8 8 8
1=DT 2=DT 3=SG 9 9 8 8
1=DT 2=DT 3=SG 4=SG 9 9 8 8
Key:
N
=DT Connect density transducer ‘n’ to Time Period Input ‘n’.
n=SG Connect SG transducer ‘n’ to Time Period Input ‘n’.
TPIN Time Period Input.
9 Time period input is used.
8 Time period input is not used.
B Limit is applied to raw periodic time values from the selected transducer. [Menu (1)]
C A frequency measurement ‘glitch’ is an anomalous reading that is unusually different to previous readings.
Anomalous readings can be filtered out by the 795X before use in calculations. A user-defined tolerance for a
frequency change is used to distinguish between good and anomalous readings. A frequency change that is
above the tolerance limit means that the frequency is anomalous. Following an anomalous reading, there must
be three consecutive “good” readings within the tolerance limit before the frequency is acceptable. An alarm is
raised whenever there are five consecutive anomalous readings; it can be cleared at any time.
D Time Period Input 3 is associated with the Density Input 3 rear panel connections. Likewise, Time Period Input 4
corresponds to the Density Input 4 rear panel connection. (See Chapter 2 for Density Input connections.)
E When Base Density is selected, Specific gravity B is calculated from Prime base density.
When Analogue Input is selected, Specific gravity B is supplied by a HART transmitter or by an analogue
transmitter. You must also select a HART Input or Analogue Input, whichever is appropriate. See also Note F.
When Chormat is selected, Specific gravity B is supplied by a Chromatograph. Refer to Chapter 7 for
information on the 795x support for Chromatographs.
The Transducer option applies to 795x software version 1510 only.
F Ensure that the basic configuration of the Analogue/HART Input has been completed.
G Optional feature. Limits are for the prime selected value.

H Use this to select a logic table for the Prime specific gravity selection. (See “Re-selection Procedure” below).
3
Time Period Inputs (or Periodic Time Inputs) are referred to as “Density inputs” in rear panel pin designations.
Page 11.78 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Prime SG Re-Selection Procedure
In the event of a SG input channel (e.g. SG ‘A’) failing or returning to a live state, the 7955 will perform a re-selection
procedure for obtaining a live Prime SG value. This procedure involves evaluating a user-selected logic decision
table to determine where now to get the prime value.
x The logic table below is shown in full for the “Automatic A” configuration option, where SG ‘A’ is preferred.
SG ‘A’ SG ‘B’ A#B (Comp) SG ‘A’ input SG ‘B’ input Prime SG Key:
out of limit out of limit out of limit failed failed Selected
A = SG ‘A’,
YES YES YES - - FB
B = SG ‘B’,
- YES YES - - A
YES - YES - - B FB = Fallback
- - YES - - B
YES YES - - A Notes:
- YES - - A
1. The “Automatic B”
YES - - - B
configuration option
- - - - A
uses the same logic
YES YES YES YES - FB table except SG ‘B’ is
- YES YES YES - FB the preferred stream.
YES - YES YES - B
- - YES YES - B This preference
YES YES - YES - B reverses the A and B
- YES - YES - FB
selection in the last
column of this table.
YES - - YES - B
- - - YES - B
YES YES YES - YES FB 2. “Out of limit”
- YES YES - YES A columns 1 and 2 are
YES - YES - YES FB concerned with the HI
- - YES - YES A or LO alarm limits.
YES YES - - YES FB
- YES - - YES A
3. “Input failed”
YES - - - YES FB
columns are
- - - - YES A
concerned with ‘Live’
YES YES YES YES YES FB inputs.
YES - YES YES YES FB
- - YES YES YES FB
- YES - YES YES FB
YES - - YES YES FB
- - - YES YES FB
x The logic table below is shown in full for the “SG A” configuration option, where SG ‘B’ is not involved
SG ‘A’ SG ‘A’ input Prime SG
Out of limit failed Selected
- - A
- YES FB
YES - A
YES YES FB
Key: A = SG ‘A’, FB = Fallback
x The logic table below is shown in full for the “SG B” configuration option, where SG ‘A’ is not involved
SG ‘B’ SG ‘B’ input Prime SG
Out of limit failed Selected
- - B
- YES FB
YES - B
YES YES FB
Key: B = SG ‘B’, FB = Fallback
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.79

ENERGY
Measurements: (Note: Turn to page 11.82 for the Equation List)
x Energy Value (Streams/runs 1 - 4) – from ISO 6976 (1995), AGA5 (1981), scaled mA Input or a Chromatograph.
x Energy flow rate (Streams/runs 1 - 4)
Gas Composition
Index for use with (Normalised)
XX list of associated data
1 To 24
30 Relative Density
Energy Value
35 36 37 38
34 Calculation 31 Wobbe
CO2 Value Fallback (ISO 6976)
mA
mA Inputs Calculation & Limits
Selection 33 25 26 27
(Scaling) Check Key:
28 29 66 Cv = Calorific value in Volume units
39 40 OR 41
Cv/m = Calorific value either in Volume or Mass units
CO2
CO2 direct from
Chromatograph
Energy Value
44 45 46 47 SG 32 Calculation
43 61
N2 Value Fallback (AGA 5) QBV 56
Cv/m Energy
mA
mA Inputs Calculation & Limits Value 63
Selection Cv Energy
(Scaling) Check Method Energy
N2 62 Flow Rate 65
Direct from 51 Cv
Selection Rate
48 49 OR 50 64 Calculation
Chromatograph
Qm
N2 direct from 42
Chromatograph 53 54 55 56 57 Cv/m
52
Energy Value Fallback
Source
mA Inputs Calculation & Limits 60
Selection
(Scaling) Check
58 59

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Energy”>, (2) <”Configure”>/<”Transmitter detail”>, (3) <“Energy”>, (4) <”Temperature”>,
(5) <”Configure”>/<”Line Density”>, (6) <”Base density / SG”> and (7) <”Health check”>/<”Normalise gas data”>
1 Norm Methane E 23 Norm n-Undecane E
2 Norm Ethane E 24 Norm n-Dodecane E
3 Norm Propane E 25 Absolute zero Menu(4)
4 Norm n-Butane E 26 Combustion temp G
5 Norm I-Butane E 27 Base temp value H
6 Norm n-Pentane E 28 Gas const R J/mol.K Menu(5)
7 Norm I-Pentane E 29 Mass of air D
8 Norm n-Hexane E 30 Relative Dens value * cÖf
9 Norm n-Heptane E 31 Wobbe index cÖf
10 Norm n-Octane E 32 SG prime value * cÖf P.11.77
11 Norm n-Nonane E 33 CO2 live input src A
12 Norm n-Decane E 34 Live CO2 input chl
13 Norm C6+ E 35 Live CO2 @ 100%
14 Norm H2S E 36 Live CO2 @ 0%
15 Norm water E 37 Live CO2 HI limit B
16 Norm Helium E 38 Live CO2 LO limit B
17 Norm Oxygen E 39 Live CO2 FB type
18 Norm CO E 40 Live CO2 FB value
19 Norm Hydrogen E 41 Live CO2 value * Menu(2)
20 Norm Argon E 42 N2 live input source A
21 Norm Nitrogen E 43 Live N2 input chl
22 Norm CO2 E 44 Live N2 @ 100%
Abbreviations: “norm” = normalised. “HI” = High, “LO” = Low, “temp” = temperature, “Dens” = Density, “src” = source
Page 11.80 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

ENERGY
45 Live N2 @ 0% 56 Live energy HI limit B
46 Live N2 HI limit B 57 Live energy LO limit B
47 Live N2 LO limit B 58 Live energy FB type
48 Live N2 FB type 59 Live energy FB value
49 Live N2 FB value 60 Live energy value * Menu(2)
50 Live N2 value * Menu(2) 61 Energy calc selector cÖf I
51 Chromat energy * C 62 Energy value * cÖf
52 Live energy input A 63 Base volume rate * cÖf F
53 Live energy 100% 64 Mass rate * cÖf F
54 Live energy 0% 65 Energy rate * cÖf
55 Energy type selector 66 ISO6976 CV type J
Abbreviations used: “chl” = channel, “calc” = calculation, “SG” = Specific Gravity, “Dens” = Density, “src” = source
“const” = constant, “FB” = Fallback, “HI” = High, “LO” = Low
A Ensure that the basic configuration of the Analogue/HART Input has been completed.
B Optional feature. Keep both high and low limits ‘Set’ to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
C Ensure that the menu data is ‘Live’ and a value is being received from a Chromatograph.
Refer to Chromatograph support reference pages in Chapter 7 for further configuration information.
(MENU: <”Health Check”>/<”Normalise gas data”>/<”Live inputs”>)
D This parameter is applicable to the “ISO 6967 MJ/m3” and the “ISO 6967 MJ/kg” calculation methods.
F Refer to the “Flow Metering” reference pages for information on this flow rate.
G The combustion reference condition for Table 3 of ISO 6976:1995:E. It can be ‘Set’ to 0qC, 15qC, 20qC or
25qC. When ‘Set’ to other temperatures, an alarm is raised and the ISO 5967 (MJ/m3) calculation uses 15qC
H The base temperature reference condition for Table 2 of ISO 6976:1995:E. It can be ‘Set’ to 0qC, 15qC or
20qC. When ‘Set’ to other temperatures, an alarm is raised and the ISO 5967 (MJ/m3) calculation uses 15qC
I See Table 1 for guidance on the various calculations available.
J Choose if the Superior or Inferior calorific value is output by the ISO 6976 calculation.
Table 1: Energy (Cv/m) Calculation Options
Multiple-choice List Energy Calculation

Calculation Outputs
Option * (Method/Standard)
“ISO 6976 MJ/M3” ISO 6976:1995(E) T1-3,L.1 Real Calorific value (in MJ/m3), Relative Density, Wobbe Index
“ISO 6976 MJ/kg” ISO 6976:1995(E) T1-3,L.1 Real Calorific value (in MJ/kg), Relative Density, Wobbe Index
“AGA 5” AGA 5:1981 Real Calorific value (in MJ/kg – converted from dekatherms/lb)
“Chromat energy” (Onboard Chromatograph) Real Calorific value (in MJ/m3)
“Live calorific value” (mA Input Scaling) Real Calorific value – selectable units of MJ/m3 or MJ/kg
* Abbreviation: “val” = value
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.81

ENERGY
Energy Equation List:
Equation EN#1: Calorific value (AGA 5)
Using: Cm = 0.02035
0.001970 MX
SG
Where: Cm = Calorific value in mass units……………………………….. {Parameter: <”Energy Value”>}

SG = Specific gravity………………………………………………. {Parameter: <”SG prime value”>}
And: MX = MC * 0.000329 MN * 0.000217
Where: MC = Percentage of CO2 in measured gas composition……… {Parameter: <”Live CO2 value”>}
MN = Percentage of Nitrogen in measured gas composition…. {Parameter: <”Live N2 value”>}
Equation EN#2: Calorific value (ISO 6976)

Note: Refer to the ISO 6976 report (1995 edition) for detailed information.
HVIdeal
Using: Hreal = Cv……………………………………..……….. {Parameter: <”Energy value”>}
Z mix
j n
Where: HVIdeal ¦X
j 0
j * H j = Ideal volumetric calorific value (Cv)
Xj = Percentage of constituent ‘j’ in the gas composition

Hj = The ideal calorific value of constituent ‘j’ in the gas composition
2
§j n ·
And: Zmix
¨
= 1 ¨
¨j
¦ ¸
¸
2
X j * b j ¸ 0.005 * 2 XH XH
© 1 ¹
Where: bj = Gas constituent (excluding Helium and Carbon Dioxide)
XH = The mole fraction of hydrogen
Z = Line compressibility factor
Equation EN#3: Relative density value (ISO 6976 method)
Using: RDreal =
RDIdeal * Z Air
Z mix
Where: RDreal = Relative density of gas composition……………….…. {Parameter: <“Relative Dens value”>}
ZAir = Compression factor of air
ZMix = See Equation EN#2
j n
¦X *M
j 0
j j
And: RDreal =
M Air
Where: Xj = Percentage of constituent ‘j’ in the gas composition

Mj = Molar mass of constituent ‘j’ in the gas composition
MAir = Molar mass of air……………………………………….. {Parameter: “Mass of air”}
Page 11.82 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

ENERGY
(Energy Equation List Continued…)
Equation EN#4a: Energy Flow Rate from Calorific value (mass units)
Using: QE = QE * Cm
Where: QE = Energy flow rate……………………………………… {Parameter: <”Energy rate”>}

Qm = Mass flow rate………………..……………………… {Parameter: <”Mass rate”>}
Cm = Calorific Value (in mass units)……………………… {Parameter: <”Energy value”>}
Equation EN#4b: Energy Flow Rate from Calorific value (volume units)
Using: QE = QBV * Cm
Where: QE = Energy flow rate……………………………………. {Parameter: <”Energy rate”>}

QBV = Base volume flow rate………….……..…………… {Parameter: <”Base volume rate”>}
Cm = Calorific Value (in mass units)….………………… {Parameter: <”Energy value”>}
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.83

ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
Feature:
x Live analogue outputs supported by 7955:
mA output channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 8)
What to do:
Use this reference page to find out how to configure each analogue output channel that is to transmit values to
external devices once every machine cycle.
After configuring the necessary parameter for a channel and for the parameter, check that a satisfactory live reading
is displayed by the corresponding “Analog out value” parameter.
By default, no parameters are pre-allocated to analogue outputs.

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Analog outputs”> and (2) <“Health check”>/<”Analog outputs”>
Analogue Channel Analogue Channel
(and signal types) Menu Data (as displayed) (and signal types) Menu Data (as displayed)
mA output 1 value * mA output 5 value *

mA output 1 source mA output 5 source
Analogue Output 1 mA 1 value @ 100% Analogue Output 5 mA 5 value @ 100%
(mA only) mA 1 value @ 0% (mA only) mA 5 value @ 0%
mA output 1 type mA output 5 type
mA output 1 filter mA output 5 filter
mA out 1 user source mA out 5 user source
mA out 3 type mA output 7 type
Note:
A The <“mA out user source”> parameter is for selecting a parameter that is not readily available with the normal
‘source’ parameter. It is necessary to select the “USER” option for <”mA output source”> and then program
“mA out user source” with the unique identification number of the parameter.
Page 11.84 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Feature:
x Digital outputs supported by the 7955:
Status output channels 1 to 25
What To Do:
This reference page will assist when configuring basic data (see list below) for all the Status Output channels that
are being used. Later tasks will expect this data to be already configured.
By default, the first 3 Status Outputs are reserved for the ALO - Alarm Logger Output - feature, as described in
Chapter 8. The rest of the status outputs are available for use as listed in Chapter 3.
In the <“Health Check”> menu, there are 2 Status Output

sub-menus. Each contains a parameter with a series of a
digits on display line 2. Each digit indicates the present Status Outputs
state of an individual output. XXX0010000100000 b
This Status Output 11
c is presently active
Look for menus <”Status out 1-16”> and (positive logic)
<“Status out 17-25”> (See graphic, right) d

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Status outputs”> and (2) <“Health check”>/<“Status outputs”>
Status O/P Menu Data Status O/P Menu Data Status O/P Menu Data
Channel (as displayed) Channel (as displayed) Channel (as displayed)
1 Status out 1 logic 11 Status out 11 logic 21 Status out 21 logic
6 Status out 6 logic 16 Status out 16 logic
Note:
A Status Outputs 1 to 3 are reserved for use by the Alarm Logger Output feature. This is the reason why there is
a permanent “XXX” seen in the first three digits of the parameter <“Status out 1-16”>.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.85

PULSE OUTPUTS
Features:
x Live pulse outputs supported by 7955:
Pulse output channels 1 to 5
What To Do:
Use this page to configure basic information for the pulse output channels. A channel can be set-up to transmit each
increment to a normal mode total as a pulse train, suitable for an external counter.
Each output pulse has a significance that equates to a certain mass or volume in the units of measurement already
selected for the associated flow rate. As an example, consider a flow total increasing at a steady rate of one gallon
every second and significance that is programmed with a value of six, representing six gallons. This would typically
result in a single pulse being transmitted every 6 seconds, depending on the actual machine cycle time (see note B).
Pulse duration (on-time) can be programmed to be any value from 50milliseconds. There is no upper limit. Each
pulse output has a parameter <Pulse output n duration> to edit the pulse duration.
By default, totals are not pre-allocated to pulse outputs. Pulse outputs are also not pre-allocated to a stream/run.

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Totalisers”>/<”Pulse outputs”> and (2) <“Configure”>/<“Totalisers”>/<”Clear pulse outputs”>
Menu Data / Parameter List:

Pulse Output Channel Menu Data Pulse Output Channel Menu Data
Pulse Output 1 Pulse o/p 1 source Pulse Output 4 Pulse o/p 4 source
Pulse o/p 1 signif Pulse o/p 4 signif
Pulse o/p 1 stream Pulse o/p 4 stream
Pulse Output 2 Pulse o/p 2 source Pulse Output 5 Pulse o/p 5 source
Pulse o/p 2 signif Pulse o/p 5 signif
Pulse o/p 2 stream Pulse o/p 5 stream
Pulse Output 3 Pulse o/p 3 source
Pulse o/p 3 signif
Pulse o/p 3 stream
Notes:
A If the pulse frequency exceeds 10Hz (10 complete pulses per second), a ‘reservoir’ is used to keep a count of
the excess. Always SET a large enough pulse significance to avoid this occurring; if there is an excess,
increase the significance value and wait for things to calm down again. Alternatively, all reservoirs can be
cleared immediately by selecting the “Clear” command through the <“Clear pulse outputs”> parameter.
B Pulses are transmitted at evenly calculated intervals within the ‘window’ of a machine cycle. As the actual
machine cycle time always varies, the calculated interval between pulses will vary even when the value from
the Pulse Output Source (e.g. a flow rate) has not changed.
0.525s 0.6s
1.05 Seconds 1.2 Seconds

(Actual Cycle Time) (Actual Cycle Time)
Example of pulse output distribution (for two machine cycles)
C The ‘Pulse Output Stream’ parameter is for further identifying a total after making a selection for the source.
x “Station” option: Station total
x “Stream 1” option: Stream/run 1 total
Page 11.86 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

SPECIAL EQUATIONS
Feature:
x Special Equation Type One
The following equation is available to streams/runs 1 - 4:
§ a * b X * c ) ·
R A B¨ ¸

¨d* e Y * f ¸
© ¹
Where: A, B = Constants
a-f = Pointers
X, Y = Constants
R = Result

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Custom application”>

Term Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Term Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
R Special equation 1 * cÖf N/A General constant 1 cÖf C
A Special eqn1 const A cÖf N/A General constant 2 cÖf C
B Special eqn1 const B cÖf N/A General constant 3 cÖf C
X Special eqn1 const X cÖf N/A General constant 4 cÖf C
Y Special eqn1 const Y cÖf
a Special eqn 1 ptr a cÖf B
b Special eqn 1 ptr b cÖf B
c Special eqn 1 ptr c cÖf B
d Special eqn 1 ptr d cÖf B
e Special eqn 1 ptr e cÖd B
f Special eqn 1 ptr f cÖf B
N/A Special eqn 1 text cÖf A
Notes:
A A facility is provided whereby a text title can be edited to identify the calculation. Changing the default text will
alter the on-screen description of the result menu data.
B Edit the value with the identification number of the menu data (parameter) to be used for this term.
Identification numbers can be seen on-screen by locating the data in the menu system and then pressing the
‘a’-key. Re-press the ‘a’-key to remove the number from the display. With this type of menu data, the word
“off” is seen when not in use.
C There is a collection of unused data locations within the custom equation menu. These are provided for
defining constants that could be identified as equation terms ‘a’, ‘b’, etc.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.87

SPECIAL EQUATIONS
Feature:
x Special Equation Type Two
The following equation is available to streams/runs 1 - 4:
eA B * t C * t
2
R
Where: R = Result
A, B, C = Constants
t = Pointer

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Custom application”>

Term Menu Data (as displayed) Notes? Term Menu Data (as displayed) Notes?
R Special equation 2 * cÖf N/A General constant 1 cÖf C
A Special equ2 const A cÖf N/A General constant 2 cÖf C
B Special equ2 const B cÖf N/A General constant 3 cÖf C
C Special equ2 const C cÖf N/A General constant 4 cÖf C
t Special eqn 2 ptr t cÖf B
N/A Special equation text cÖf A
Notes:
A A facility is provided whereby a text title can be edited to identify the calculation. Changing the default text will
alter the on-screen description of the ‘result’ menu data.
B Edit the value with the identification number of the menu data (parameter) to be used for this term.
Identification numbers can be seen on-screen by locating the data in the menu system and then pressing the
‘a’-key. Re-press the ‘a’-key to remove the number from the display. With this type of menu data, the word
“off” is seen when not in use.
C There is a collection of un-used data locations within the custom equation menu. These are provided for
defining constants that could be identified as equation terms ‘a’, ‘b’, etc.
Page 11.88 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

PASSWORDS AND SECURITY
The following pages explain how the 7955 can set-up to restrict access to facilities.
Securable and non-secure modes

The 7955 can work in either a non-secure or securable mode. In the non-secure mode, anyone can have access
to any of the facilities. In securable mode, access to facilities can be protected by passwords.
Changing security mode:

In the 7955 instruments, you can change the security mode by using the key switch on the front of the instrument.
The instruments are normally securable but, when you insert the key and turn it clockwise, this changes the mode to
non-secure. You can only withdraw the key in the vertical (securable) position.
1. Security Level LED 2. Security lock
The security lock on the 7955 instrument
Passwords and Security Levels

A password system restricts access to its facilities to those people with certain levels of authority. There are four
levels of security:
x Calibration (also referred to as the “Programmer” security level)

x Engineer
x Operator
x World (anyone other than those listed above).
The table below lists what facilities each of these groups can access.
Access levels, and what they can have access to
Facilities available Calibration Engineer Operator World

Programmable All data or functions
parameters except YES YES which don’t affect NO
security codes results of calculations
Security codes YES NO NO NO
Programming facilities YES YES NO NO
Calibration facilities YES NO NO NO
How the security LED RED flashing RED ORANGE GREEN

appears
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.89

PASSWORDS AND SECURITY
Setting or changing a password (security code)

x Firstly, use the <“Enter Password”> parameter screen (selected from the Main Menu) for entering the
password to change to the “Calibration” (Programmer) security level.
x Press the Main Menu key and then navigate to this menu:
<“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Security”>/<“User interface”>
From this menu, select the password (Programmer, Engineer, Operator or World) you want to set or change,
then type in a password of up to 20 characters. If there is an existing password you can clear it first by
pressing the CLR key.
You can, if you wish, have the same password for more than one level. This gives you access to the facilities
of all the levels covered by that password.
x Use the <“Enter Password”> parameter screen for entering a password to change security level.
Keyboard Security Fallback (Optional)

The present security level for information access through the keyboard can be automatically changed to the “World”
level after a user-defined period of time has elapsed without use of the keyboard. Use of the keyboard during the
period causes the timing to be re-set. Security level changes can still be made at any time in the normal way (as
explained earlier) but will re-set the timing.
By default, this security feature is not active. To activate, the length of time for the period must be ‘set’ to a value
more than zero. Passwords to change security level are as already defined.
x Configuration task: Enable keyboard security fallback

Follow these instructions:-
1. Select this menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Security”>/<“User interface”>
2. Locate the “Security timeout” parameter screen and then ‘set’ a value for the time-out. It is not advisable
to set a time less than 15 seconds.
(End of configuration task)
To de-activate this feature, ‘set’ the value of the <“Security timeout”> to zero.
Communications Security Fallback (Optional)

Information access through the communication ports can be disabled after a period of time has elapsed without any
data traffic. Data traffic during the period causes the timer to be re-set.
By default, this feature is not active. To activate it, the length of time must be set to a value more than zero.
x Configuration task: Enable communications security fallback

1. Change security level to “Calibration” (i.e. flashing red security LED)
2. Select menu: <“Configure”>/<“Other parameters”>/<“Security”>/<“Communications”>
3. Locate the “Security timeout” parameter and then ‘set’ a value for the time-out.
4. (Optional) Locate the “Comms password” parameters and set a new password. A new “Communications”
password should be also set rather than keep the default one.
To de-activate this feature, set the value of the “Security timeout” location to zero.
To re-enable information access through the communication ports after a time-out, the “Communications”
password needs to be entered in (or written to) the “Enter comms password” parameter.
Page 11.90 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

MULTI-PAGE MULTI-VIEW
What is Multi-View?
Multi-View (often referred to as the “User Display”) is a single-key activated display that you can define to show
whatever information you want. It consists of one or more pages with the four lines on each page comprising of
either or both of:
x Text (such as the name of a parameter), at the left of the line.

x A value for a parameter, at the right of the line.
You can change the configuration of a Multi-View display whenever you wish. An example of a typical multi-view
display is shown below.
How to get into Multi-view

To see the first Multi-view display page, press the MULTI-VIEW key (i.e. the TOP blank key). A multi-view display
page looks like the example below.
Text width setting – a movable

boundary between text and value
Text (e.g. parameter names) Value of parameter
A typical Multiview display
Use the DOWN-ARROW key to page down through other multi-view displays. The message “Invalid MultiView
Page” appears to indicate that no further pages are defined. Use the UP-ARROW to reverse through the display
pages.
Configuring Multi-view
Follow this procedure for configuring Multi-view:
Step 1: Decide what text you want to display

You almost certainly want each line of the Multi-view display to show the name (possibly in an
abbreviated form) of a parameter whose value you want to display. Bear in mind that:
x Text cannot exceed 11 characters.
x The display leaves a space between the text and value.
x The value is displayed as a number without any units. You may wish to include the units as
part of the text.
Step 2: Find the location IDs of the parameters

1. In the menu system, find the parameter you want.
2. Press the ‘a’-key to display the identification number.
3. Note down that number.
4. Repeat this for the other parameters.
7955 1540 (CH11/CB) Page 11.91

MULTI-PAGE MULTI-VIEW
Step 3: Open the Multi-view configuration menu

Look for the Multi-view configuration data within the following menu: <“Configure”>/<“Multi-view”>
Step 4: Entering the text and location ID for each line

1. Select whichever page (1 - 5) you want to configure.
2. Select whichever line (1 - 4) you want to configure.
3. Enter the text you require.
4. Enter the parameter identification number you require.
Note that after the identification number is entered, the display changes to show the name of the
parameter.
Step 5: Set the text width

The text width is the number of characters you want the text to occupy. If you want to set the text
width:
1. Go to the Text width menu.

2. Edit the value
Page 11.92 7955 1540 (CH11/CB)

Solartron Mobrey Limited 795x Flow Computer Software Version 1540 Issue 5.40 (or higher)
11A Wet Gas Orifice Metering Support
11A.1 INTRODUCING WET GAS SUPPORT

Wet gas metering is a commonly used term in the industry for the metering of multi-phase flow where a
large proportion of the total volume of flow is gas, mixed with small amounts of liquid - typically
oil/condensate or water.
With the development of many new gas condensate fields around the world, wet gas metering is a fast
moving field with intense interest throughout the oil and gas industry.
There is software support for:

x 2-phase, in which the wet gas comprises water and oil/condensate
x 3-phase, in which the wet gas comprises methanol, water and condensate
11A.2 SUMMARY OF MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE

The gas mass flow rate is calculated by using a mass flow equation as stated in the ISO 5167-1:(1998)
Standard, which assumes dry gas conditions.
The indicated gas (mass) flow rate is then corrected to yield the true gas mass flow rate. There is a
choice of corrective calculations: Murdock, Chisholm or De Leeuw. Once the true gas mass flow rate
has been obtained, the liquid mass flow rate is calculated from the gas mass fraction (GMF) and the
true gas mass flow rate.
11A.3 WHAT TO DO
1 Review the equations as listed in Section 11a.4……..….…….. See Page 11a.2
2 Review and establish I/O connections as in Section 11a.5…… See Page 11a.10
3 Follow instructions as listed in Secion 11a.6……….…..………. See Page 11a.11
BA, Sept. 2002 11A.1

Wet Gas Metering Support 795x Series Flow Computer
11A.4 THE EQUATIONS

This section shows the associated equations. Terms are annotated with software parameters that are
to be found within the menu system of the flow computer.
Equation 11.1: Indicated Mass Flow Rate (Gas)

The indicated gas (mass) flow rate is calculated for the venturi DP device using ISO5167-1(1998)
Standard calculations.
Cg S 2
Using: Qgi = H* d' 2 * GP * U g
1 E 4 4
Where: Qgi = Indicated gas mass flow rate (in kg/s)…….....……{Menu Data: <”Ind gas mass rate”>}
GP = SET/LIVE Differential pressure (in Pascals)…..….{Menu Data: <”Diff pressure value”>}
Cg = Coefficient of discharge for gas (no units)....……..{Menu Data: <”Orif discharge ceoff”>}
d’ = Throat diameter (in metres) – corrected…….…….{Equation 11.6}
3
Ug = Density of measured gas (in kg/m )……....……… {Menu Data: <”Prime density value“>}
S = 3.141592654..................................……......…...... {Actual constant used}
E = Beta ratio (no units)..………………..……………... {See Equation 11.3}
H = Expansibility factor (no units)..……………………..{See Equation 11.5}
Equation 11.2: Velocity of approach
1
Using E =
1 E4
Where E = Velocity of approach (no units)……….….……….. {Menu Data: <”Vel of approach”>}

E = Beta ratio (no units)…………….……….………….. {See Equation 11.3}
Equation 11.3: Beta ratio

d'
Using: E =
D'
Where: E = Beta ratio (no units)……………..…….……………… {Menu Data: <”Mass rate Beta”>}
d' = Throat diameter (in metres) – corrected…..……….. {See Equation 11.6}
D’ = Pipe diameter (in metres) – corrected……………… {See Equation 11.7}
Equation 11.4: Reynolds Number
§ 4 * Q gi ·
Using: Red = ¨ ¸ * 3600
¨ S * P * D' ¸
© ¹
Where: Red = Reynolds number (no units)..…...………....……… {Menu Data: <”Reynolds number”>}
Qgi = Indicated gas mass flow rate (kg/hour).………….. {See Equation 11.1}
P = Dynamic viscosity (in Pascal seconds)………...… {Menu Data: <”Dynamic visc”>}
D’ = Pipe diameter (in metres) – corrected….………… {See Equation 11.7}
S = 3.141592654....................................…..…..…...... {Actual constant used}
11A.2 BA, Sept. 2002

795x Series Flow Computer Wet Gas Metering Support
Equation 11.5: Expansibility factor (gas)

1
ª§ 2 · § · § K H 1 ·º 2
«¨ kH ¸ ¨ ¸ ¨ KH ¸»
K * PR 1 E4 1 PR
Using: H = «¨¨ H ¸*¨
¸ ¨
¸*¨ ¸»
« KH 1 2 ¸ ¨ 1 PR ¸»
«¨¨ ¸¸ ¨
1 E 4
* PR KH ¸ ¨ ¸»
¬© ¹ © ¹ © ¹¼
Where: H = Expansibility factor (no units)...…..…….................{Menu Data: <”Orif expandability”>}

E = Beta ratio (no units).....................………............... {See Equation 11.3}
KH = Isentropic exponent / Specific heat (no units)........{Menu Data: <“Isentropic”>}
GZ
And: PR = Pressure ratio = ........…………………….......... {Menu Data: <”Pressure ratio”>}
GP
If using “ISO5167” option:
§
1 DE ¸ 2 ·
GZ = ¨ * GP
¨ 1 DE ¸
2
© ¹
Where: GP = Measure venturi DP (in bar)…………………….…. {Menu Data: <”Diff pressure value”>}
D = Cg * E
Cg = Coefficient of discharge for gas (no units)....……..{Menu Data: <”Orif discharge ceoff”>}
E = Velocity of approach (no units)……….….……….. {See Equation 11.2}
E = Beta ratio (no units)…..................…………........... {See Equation 11.3}
If using “A.beta^2+B.Beta+C” options:
GZ = (A.E2 + B.E + C).GP………………………….……… {Menu Data: <”Pressure loss”>}
Where: GP = Measure venturi DP (in bar)……………….…. {Menu Data: <”Diff pressure value”>}
A = User supplied constant ‘A’ (no units)………….…. {Menu Data: <”Press loss const A”>} *
B = User supplied constant ‘B’ (no units)………….…. {Menu Data: <”Press loss const B”>} *
C = User supplied constant ‘C’ (no units)………….…. {Menu Data: <”Press loss const C”>} *
E = Beta ratio (no units)…..................…………........... {See Equation 11.3}
* Parameters are located under <”Configure”>/<”flowmeter details”>/<”Orifice”>
Equation 11.6: Correction for area expansion of the Throat diameter
Using: d’ >
= d * 1 t t c * E o * 10 6 @
Where: d’ = Throat diameter (in metres) – corrected….…........{Menu Data: <”Corr orifice diam”>}
d = Throat diameter at calibration temperature……….{Menu Data: <”Orifice diameter”>}
t = SET/LIVE Operating temperature (in qC)…...........{Menu Data: <“Meter temperature”>}
tC = Calibration temperature (in qC).….….....................{Menu Data: <“Orifice cal temp”>}
E0 = Expansion coefficient (in PPM/qC)….................... {Menu Data: <“Orif exp coeff”>}
Equation 11.7: Correction for area expansion of the pipe diameter
Using: >
D’ = D * 1 t t c * EP * 10 6 @
Where: D’ = Pipe diameter – corrected for expansion….…......... {Menu Data: <”Corr pipe diameter”>}
D = Pipe diameter at calibration temperature…….…..... {Menu Data: <”Pipe diameter”>}
t = LIVE/SET Operating temperature (in qC)...……....... {Menu Data: <“Meter temperature”>}
BA, Sept. 2002 11A.3

tC = Calibration temperature (in qC).…..….......……........ {Menu Data: <“Orifice cal temp“>}

EP = Pipe expansion coefficient (in PPM/qC)..…….......... {Menu Data: <“Pipe exp coeff”>}
Equation 11.1Equation 11.5Equation 11.11

Equation 11.9: Corrected Mass Flow Rate (Gas)
The flow rate, Qgi, is in error due to the presence of liquid and is corrected to give the true gas rate, Qg,
using a correction factor, WGC.
Q gi
Using: Qg =
WGC x
Where: Qg = Corrected gas mass flow rate (in kg/s)…….………..{Menu Data: <”Mass rate”>}
Qgi = Indicated gas mass flow rate (in kg/s) …..…..………{See Equation 11.1}
WGC x is the correction factor generated by a selectable algorithm: Murdock, Chisholm or De Leeuw.
Common to these algorithms is the Lockhart-Martinelli parameter X.
DPl Qg Ug Frl § 1 x ·§¨ C g ·¸ U g

Using: X= = * = = ¨ ¸ H
DPg Ql Ul Frg © x ¹¨© Cl ¸¹ Ul
§ 1 x ·§¨ C g ·¸ U g
X = ¨ ¸ H
© x ¹¨© Cl ¸¹ Ul
Where: X = Lockhart-Martinelli parameter (no units)…….…..…..{Menu Data: <”LockhartMartinelli X”>} *

Qg = Corrected gas mass flow rate (in kg/s)…….………..{Menu Data: <”Mass rate”>}
Q l = liquid mass flow rate (in kg/s)…….….…………..….. {See Equation 11.10}
Ug = SET/LIVE Gas density measurement (kg/m3)…..… {Menu Data: <”Prime density value“>}
U l = SET/LIVE Liquid density measurement (kg/m3).….. {See Equation 11.11}
x = Gas mass fraction (GMF)………….………………….{See Equation 11.12}
C l = Liquid discharge coefficient (no units) ..……..…….. {Menu Data: <”Liq discharge coeff”>} *
Cg = Gas discharge coefficient (no units) ..…..………….. {Menu Data: <”Orif discharge coeff”>} *
H = Lockhart-Martinelli expansibility factor (no units)…. {Menu Data: <”LockhartMartinelli e”>} *
* Parameters are under: <”Health check”>/<”Flowmeter details”>/<”Orifice details”>/<”Wet gas”> and
<”Configure”>/<”Flowmeter details”>/<”Orifice”>/<”Wet gas”>
U sg Ug
And: Frg =
gD Ul U g
Usl Ul
Frl =
gD Ul U g
Where: Frg = Froude number (gas)…………………………………..{Menu data: <”Froude number (gas)”>} *

Frl = Froude number (liquid)……………………….………..{Not in the menu system}
Usg = Superficial velocity (gas)…..…………….…..………..{Menu data: <”Gas velocity (m/s)”>} *
Usl = Superficial velocity (liquid)…………………..………..{Not in the menu system}
* Parameters are under: <”Health check”>/<”Flowmeter details”>/<”Orifice details”>/<”Wet gas”>
11A.4 BA, Sept. 2002

Murdock Correction Factor

This is given by,
1 x Cg Ug
WGCx = 1 c M H
x Cl Ul
In terms of Lockhart-Martinelli parameter X,
WGCx = 1 c MX
Where:
WGCx = Wet gas correction factor (no units).…………………{Menu Data: <”Wet gas corr factor”>} *
M = Primary ‘Murdock’ coefficient (no units)……………. {Menu Data: <”Murdock coeff M”>} *
c = Secondary ‘Murdock’ coefficient (no units).…………{Menu Data: <”Murdock coeff c”>} *
X = Lockhart-Martinelli parameter (no units)…….…….…{Menu Data: <”LockhartMartinelli X”>} *
The coefficients M and c must be programmed (SET).
Chisholm Correction Factor

In terms of the Lockhart-Martinelli parameter X,
WGCx = 1 CX X 2
Where:
X = Lockhart-Martinelli parameter X (no units)……….…{Menu Data: <”LockhartMartinelli X”>} *
0.25 0.25
§ Ug · §U ·
And: C = ¨¨ ¸
¸ ¨ l ¸
¨ Ug ¸
© Ul ¹ © ¹
Where:
C = Chisholm factor C (no units).…………………………{Menu Data: <”Chisholm factor C”>} *
Ug = Gas density (in kg/m3)…..………………………….… {Menu Data: <”Prime density value”>}
Ul = Liquid density (mixture) (in kg/m3)……….…………..{See Equation 11.11}
* Parameter is under: <”Health check”>/<”Flowmeter details”>/<”Orifice details”>/<”Wet gas”>
When Chisholm is used, it is common practice to programme (SET) both the expansibility factor and
the ratio of discharge coefficients to unity. The ratio of discharge coefficients can be set to 1 by
programming the same value for the liquid and discharge coefficients.
H = Lockhart-Martinelli expansibility factor (no units)...{Menu Data: <”LockhartMartinelli e”>} *
Cl = Liquid discharge coefficient (no units) ..……...….. {Menu Data: <”Liq discharge coeff”>} *
Cg = Gas discharge coefficient (no units) ..…..……….. {Menu Data: <”Orif discharge coeff”>} *
* Parameters are under: <”Configure”>/<”Flowmeter details”>/<”Orifice”>/<”Wet gas”>
BA, Sept. 2002 11A.5

De Leeuw Correction Factor

In terms of the Lockhart-Martinelli parameter X,
~
WGCx = 1 CX X2
Where:
X = Lockhart-Martinelli parameter X (no units)……….…{Menu Data: <”LockhartMartinelli X”>} *
n n
§ Ug · § ·
And:
~
C = ¨¨ ¸ ¨ Ul ¸
¸ ¨ Ug ¸
© Ul ¹ © ¹
Where:
~
C = De Leeuw factor C (no units).…………………..…… {Menu Data: <”DeLeeuw factor C”>} *
Ug = Gas density…….……………………………………… {Menu Data: <”Prime density value”>}
U l = Liquid density (total liquid) (in kg/m3)……………….. {See Equation 11.11}
* Parameter is under: <”Health check”>/<”Flowmeter details”>/<”Orifice details”>/<”Wet gas”>
The n coefficient is a function of the gas Froude number,

n = 0.41 for Frg d 1.5
n = 0.606 * (1 – e-0.746Frg) for Frg > 1.5
Note that the term n is a function of the Froude number, which, in turn, is a function of the superficial gas
velocity (see earlier). The means that the flow computer calculates n iteratively until convergence occurs.
As with Chisholm, it is common practice to programme (SET) both the expansibility factor and the
ratio of discharge coefficients to unity. The ratio of discharge coefficients can be set to 1 by
programming the same value for the liquid and discharge coefficients.
H = Lockhart-Martinelli expansibility factor (no units)...{Menu Data: <”LockhartMartinelli e”>} *
Cl = Liquid discharge coefficient (no units) ..……...….. {Menu Data: <”Liq discharge coeff”>} *
Cg = Gas discharge coefficient (no units) ..…..……….. {Menu Data: <”Orif discharge coeff”>} *
* Parameters are under: <”Configure”>/<”Flowmeter details”>/<”Orifice”>/<”Wet gas”>
11A.6 BA, Sept. 2002

Equation 11.10: Liquid Mass Flow Rate
Q g 1 x
Using: Ql =
x
Ql = liquid mass flow rate (in kg/s)…….….……………..{Menu Data: <”Liquid mass rate“>}
Qg = Corrected gas mass flow rate (in kg/s)…….….…..{See Equation 11.9}
x = Gas mass fraction (GMF)…………..……………… {See Equation 11.12}
Equation 11.11: Liquid density

The “2-phase” method uses:
§ WC · § WC ·
Using: Ul =¨ * U w ¸ ¨1 ¸ * U oc
© 100 ¹ © 100 ¹
Where: Ul = Liquid density (in kg/m3)………………………..….. {Menu Data: <”Liquid density”>}

WC = SET/LIVE Water cut (%)……………………...…….{Menu Data: <”Water cut”>}
UW = Water density (in kg/m3)……………………….……{Menu Data: <”Water density”>}
UOC = Oil/condensate density (in kg/m3)..……………….. {Menu Data: <”Oil/condensate dens“>}
Note:
The liquid component may take the form of an oil/condensate or water or a combination of both. The
liquid density reflects this with a choice of input for the Water Cut (%) – it can be a SET (fixed) value or
obtained LIVE from a nominated analogue input channel. The Water Cut is the fraction of water in the
liquid phase. Oil/condensate density and water density must be SET (fixed) values.
This “3-phase” method uses,
<l
U l =
<c <w <m

Uc Uw Um
Where: Ul = Liquid density of mixture (in kg/m3)…..…..………..{Menu Data: <”Liquid density”>}
<l = Total liquid to gas mass ratio (no units)………….. {Menu Data: <”Liquid : gas ratio”>} *
<c = Condensate to gas mass ratio (no units)…..…….. {Menu Data: <”Condensate ratio”>}
< w = Water to gas mass ratio (no units)…………….….. {Menu Data: <”Water ratio”>}
< m = Methanol to gas mass ratio (no units)……….…….{Menu Data: <”Methanol ratio”>}
Uw = Density of water (in kg/m3)……………………..….. {See Equation 11.14}
Um = Density of methanol (in kg/m3)……………………..{See Equation 11.15}
Uc = Density of condensate (in kg/m3)….………….….. {See Equation 11.16}
* Parameter is under: <”Health check”>/<”Wet gas data”>
Equation 11.12: Gas mass fraction (GMF)

If using the “2-phase” method, the GMF is a user-supplied value that must be programmed (SET) into
the flow computer (Menu Data: <”Gas mass fraction”>).
If using the “3-phase” method, the GMF is given by:

1
x =
1 <l
x = Gas mass fraction (GMF)………….………………. {Menu Data: <”Gas mass fraction”>}
< l = Total liquid to gas mass ratio (no units)………….. {Menu Data: <”Liquid : gas ratio”>} *
* Parameter is under: <”Health check”>/<”Wet gas data”>
BA, Sept. 2002 11A.7

Equation 11.13: Component mass fractions

The compnent mass fractions are given by,
<c
]c = ………………………………………………. {Menu Data: <”Condensate mass frac”>}
1 <l
<w
]w = ……………………………………………….. {Menu Data: <”Water mass frac”>}
1 <l
<m
]m = ………………………………………………. {Menu Data: <”Methanol mass frac”>}
1 <l
Equation 11.14: Water density

This is given by,
Uw = D.t2 + E.t + F
Where: Uw = Water density (in kg/m3)…………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”Water density”>} *

D = user supplied constant ‘D’………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const D”>} *
E = user supplied constant ‘E’………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const E”>} *
F = user supplied constant ‘F’………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const F”>} *
t = Upstream temperature (in qC)……………….……. {Menu Data: <”Meter temperature”>}
* Parameters are located under the menu: <”Configure”>/<”Wet gas data”>/<”Water/Conds/Meth”>
Similarly, the density of water as base conditions is given by,
Ustdw = D.tbase2 + E.tbase + F
Where: Ustdw = Water density at 15qC (in kg/m3)……….…..…….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens at 15”>}
D = user supplied constant ‘D’………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const D”>}
E = user supplied constant ‘E’………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const E”>}
F = user supplied constant ‘F’………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”Water dens const F”>}
tbase = 15.0 (qC)……………………………………….……. {Actual constant used}
Equation 11.15: Methanol density

This is given by,
Um = G.t2 + H.t + J
Where: Um = Methanol density (in kg/m3)……………………….. {Menu Data: <”Methanol dens value”>} *
G = user supplied constant ‘G’………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”Methanol dens cnst G”>} *
H = user supplied constant ‘H’………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”Methanol dens cnst H”>} *
J = user supplied constant ‘J’………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”Methanol dens cnst J”>} *
t = Operating temperature (in qC)……………….……. {Menu Data: <”Meter temperature”>}
11A.8 BA, Sept. 2002

Similarly, the density of Methanol as base conditions is given by,
Ustdm = G.tbase2 + H.tbase + J
Where: Ustdm = Methanol density at 15qC (in kg/m3)……..……….. {Menu Data: <”Methanol dens @ 15”>}
G = user supplied constant ‘G’………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”Methanol dens const G”>}
H = user supplied constant ‘H’………………..……….. {Menu Data: <” Methanol dens const H”>}
J = user supplied constant ‘J’………………..……….. {Menu Data: <” Methanol dens const
tbase = 15.0 (qC)……………………………………….……. {Actual constant used}
Equation 11.16: Condensate density

The calculation of the condensate density involves multiplying the user-supplied density (at standard
conditions) by a volume correction factor (VCF).
Uc = (Ustdc * VCF)
Where: Uc = Condensate density (in kg/m3)……………………..{Menu Data: <”Oil/condensate dens”>}

Ustdc = Condensate density at 15qC (in kg/m3)……….….. {Menu Data: <”Conds dens @ 15”>} *
VCF = CTL * CPL
* This is a user-supplied value that must be programmed (SET) into the flow computer.
The volume correction factor (VCF) is given by multiplying two correction factors together, one for the effect
of pressure (CPL) and one for the effect of temperature (CTL).
The correction factor CTL is given by the API 2540 equation,
CTL = exp(-D15(t – tbase)(1.0+0.8D15(t – tbase)))………..…{Menu Data: <”Condensate dens Ctl”>}
K0 K1
D15 = K 2 …………………………………. {Menu Data: <”Condens alpha15”>}
U 2stdc U stdc
Where: K0 = user supplied constant K0………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”API user K0”>} *
K1 = user supplied constant K1………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”API user K1”>} *
K2 = user supplied constant K2………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”API user K2”>} *
* This is a user-supplied value that must be programmed (SET) into the flow computer. Parameters
are located under the menu: <”Configure”>/<”Wet gas data”>/<”Water/Conds/Meth”>
The correction factor CPL is given by,

1
CPL = …………………..………………….. {Menu Data: <”Condensate dens Cpl”>}
1 FC (P Pe )
Where: P = Operating pressure………………………..……….. {Menu Data: <”Meter pressure”>}

Pe = Condensate equilibrium vapour pressure.……….. {Menu Data: <”Condens EquilibPress”>} *
§ 870960 4209.t ·¸
And: FC = 10 9 exp¨ 1.6208 0.00021592 .t
¨ U 2
U 2stdc ¸¹
© stdc
Where: t = Operating temperature (in qC)……………….……. {Menu Data: <”Meter temperature”>}

* This is a user-supplied value that must be programmed (SET) into the flow computer.
BA, Sept. 2002 11A.9

11A.5 INPUT AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
11a.5.1 Analogue Inputs (on Flow Computer)

What to do:
Sensor and analyser connections must be wired to analogue input terminals on the Flow Computer, as
guided in Chapter 2 of the main operating manual.
You then need to configure the software parameters of an analogue input to get LIVE values, as
guided in Chapter 11 of the main operating manual. Ensure there are LIVE values being displayed by
the <analog input value> menu pages. Further configuration work is in Section 11a.6.
Meter-run/Stream/Channel One
Suggested
LIVE Input Input Type Comment
Connection
Operating Temperature Analogue Input 1 0/4-20mA or PRT x Term t of equations in Section 11a.4
Upstream Pressure Analogue Input 3 0/4-20mA x Venturi – Term P in Equation 11.5
Differential Pressure Analogue Input 5 0/4-20mA x Venturi DP ‘pay’ cell *
Water Cut (%) Analogue Input 7 0/4-20mA x Term WC of Equation 11.11
* pay-and-check procedure applied when Flow Computer is configured for stacked DP cells
Meter-run/Stream/Channel Two
Suggested
LIVE Input Input Type Comment
Connection
Operating Temperature Analogue Input 2 0/4-20mA or PRT x Term t of equations in Section 11a.4
Upstream Pressure Analogue Input 4 0/4-20mA x Venturi – Term P in Equation 11.5
Differential Pressure Analogue Input 6 0/4-20mA x Venturi DP ‘pay’ cell *
Water Cut (%) Analogue Input 8 0/4-20mA x Term WC of Equation 11.11
* pay-and-check procedure applied when Flow Computer is configured for stacked DP cells
11a.5.2 Analogue Outputs (on Flow Computer)

Flow rates are available in terms of gross volume rates at metering conditions. You may assign these
outputs to analogue output channels.
Analogue output wiring requirements on the 795x series Flow Computer are as guided in Chapter 2 of
the main operating manual.
Meter-run/Stream/Channel One
Suggested
LIVE Output Output Type
Connection
Indicated gas mass rate Analogue Output 1 4-20mA
Liquid mass rate Analogue Output 2 4-20mA
Liquid volume rate Analogue Output 3 4-20mA
Gas mass fraction Analogue Output 4 4-20mA
Meter-run/Stream/Channel Two
Suggested
LIVE Output Output Type
Connection
Indicated gas mass rate Analogue Output 5 4-20mA
Liquid mass rate Analogue Output 6 4-20mA
Liquid volume rate Analogue Output 7 4-20mA
Gas mass fraction Analogue Output 8 4-20mA
11A.10 BA, Sept. 2002

11A.6 CONFIGURING STEP-BY-STEP

1. Get yourself ready
(1a) You will need to be familiar with the front panel keys and navigating around the menu system
If you are unsure, refer to Chapters 5 and 6 of any 795x Series Operating Manual
(1b) Ensure you have a list of the fixed data. It is also a good idea to have an at-a-glance
summary of the connections including data, e.g. maximum measurement, for each sensor
(1c) You will need the Flow Computer security key and/or the Engineer security level password
2. Prepare the Flow Computer

(2a) Complete input and output connections as guided in Section 11a.5
(2b) Adjust the display contrast to suit your environment (Optional)
(2c) Adjust display formats to suit your requirements (Optional)
(2d) Check on the idle time and increase the target cycle time if necessary (Optional)
3. Check LIVE analogue inputs

Use the Health Check (menu) feature to monitor SET/LIVE analogue input values. If you do not
have a summary of the inputs, it will be a case of trying all the menu pages.
4. Clear the Historical Alarm Log

If alarms re-appear in the Historical Alarm Log, deal with these before proceeding to Step 5.
When you do proceed to Step 5, ignore new alarms until Step 8.
5. Configure the Flow Computer (from the front panel)

Note: Instructions here assume that one metering-run (stream) is being configured fully before
proceeding with the next one. Repeat entire STEP 5 for further metering-runs (streams).
(5a) Select Orifice metering
x Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Flowmeter details”>/<”Flowmeter select”>
x Locate this software parameter: <”Select flow meter”>
x Check on-screen that the correct stream/channel is selected. (If not, use the grey
selection key)
x Ensure the multiple-choice option of <”Select flow meter”> is edited to show “Orifice”
(5b) Configure meter temperature and meter pressure (software parameters) to get LIVE values
x Please use the temperature and pressure pages of Chapter 11 in the operating manual.
There is a quick-find index in the early part of Chapter 11.
Note:
x Meter temperature is referred to as “operating temperature” in this supplement. Also,
see term t of equations in Section 11a.4
x Meter pressure is referred to as “venturi upstream pressure” in this supplement. Also,
see input connections on page 11a.10 and term P of equations in Section 11a.4
(5c) Configure differential pressure (software parameters) to get a LIVE value

x Please use the Orifice Flow Metering (ISO 5167-1) pages of Chapter 11 in the main
operating manual. There is a quick-find index in the early part of Chapter 11.
x Menu: <”Configure”>/<”Flowmeter details”>/<”Orifice”>/<”Diff pressure”>
(5d) Configure gas density measurements

Gas density Ug can be calculated by the PTZ method or it can be a programmed (SET) value.
PTZ calculation method
x Please refer to the density pages of Chapter 11 in the main operating manual.
SET value method

x Navigate to this routine operation menu: <”Line density”>/<”Prime line density”>
x Check on-screen that the correct metering-run (stream) is selected. Use the METERING-
RUN/STREAM SELECT key to change.
x Edit the value line to SET a value.
BA, Sept. 2002 11A.11

(5e) Configure orifice system parameters

x Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Flowmeter details”>/<”Orifice”>
x Locate and edit the software parameters as guided in Table 11a.6.1
x Health-check the interim results as listed in bottom half of Table 11a.6.1:. You may need to refer
to the equations in Section 11a.4 – see page 11a.2.
(5f) Configure venturi parameter

x Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Flowmeter details”>/<”Orifice”>/<”Venturi orifice”>
x Locate and edit the software parameter in Table 11a.6.2.
(4g) Configure wet gas parameters

x Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Flowmeter details”>/<”Orifice”>/<”Wet gas”>
x Locate and edit the software parameters in Table 11a.6.3.
x Health-check the interim results as listed in bottom half of Table 11a.6.3. You may need to
refer to the equations in Section 11a.4 – see page 11a.2.
(5g) Configure liquid density measurements

x Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”>/<”Wet gas data”>
x If using “2-phase” option, locate and edit the software parameters as guided in Table 11a.6.4.
x If using “2-phase” option, health-check the interim results as listed in bottom half of Table 11a.6.4.
You may need to refer to the equations in Section 11a.4 – see page 11a.2.
x If using “3-phase” option, locate and edit the software parameters as guided in Table 11a.6.5.
x If using “3-phase” option, health-check the interim results as listed in bottom half of Table 11a.6.5.
You may need to refer to the equations in Section 11a.4 – see page 11a.2.
6. Check LIVE calculation values (from the front panel)
(6a) Stream Flow rates

x Navigate to this routine operation menu: <”Flow rates”>/<”Stream rates”>/<”Wet gas rates”>
x Edit all the software parameters to be “LIVE”
x Navigate to this routine operation menu: <”Flow rates”>/ <”Stream rates”>/<”Strm mass rate”>
x Edit the software parameter to be “LIVE”
(6b) Station Flow rates

x Navigate to this routine operation menu: <”Flow rates”>/<”Station rates”>/<”Wet gas rates”>
x Edit all the software parameters to be “LIVE”
x Navigate to this routine operation menu: <”Flow rates”>/ <”Station rates”>/<”Stn mass rate”>
x Edit the software parameter to be “LIVE”
(6c) Stream Flow totals

x Navigate to this menu: <”Flow totals”>/<”Stream totals”>/<”forward totals”>/<”Wet gas totals”>
x Check the totals are incrementing as expected
(6d) Station Flow totals

x Navigate to this menu: <”Flow totals”>/<”Station totals”>/<”forward totals”>/<”Wet gas totals”>
x Check the totals are incrementing as expected
7. Check LIVE analogue outputs

Use the Health Check (menu) feature to monitor SET/LIVE scaled analogue output values
If you do not have a summary of the output connections, it is a case of trying all the menu pages.
8. Clear the Historical Alarm Log

Clear the Historical Alarm Log and then trouble-shoot any alarms that cannot be cleared.
11A.12 BA, Sept. 2002

Table 11a.6.1: Software Parameters of Orifice System
Parameter
Purpose Default setting Comments and Instructions
(as seen) *
Orifice type Orifice Type Selection (List) “Plate” x Select “Venturi” from list
Pipe diameter Term D in Equation 11.7 0.000 (m) x SET value from your information
Orifice diameter Term d in Equation 11.6 0.000 (m) x SET value from your information
Dynamic visc Term P in Equation 11.4 0.000 (cP) x SET value as on calibration report **
Isentropic *** Term KH in Equation 11.5 0.000 x SET value from your information
Pipe expans coeff Term EP in Equation 11.7 0.000 (PPM/Deg.C) x SET value from your information
Orif expans coeff Term EO in Equation 11.6 0.000 (PPM/Deg.C) x SET value from your information
Orif mass flow calc Mass flow calculation select “ISO5167” (1991) x Select “ISO5167:Am1 (1998)”
Orifice cal temp Calibration temperature 20.000 (Deg.C) x SET value from your information
LockhartMartinelli e Term H in Equation 11.5 0.000 x Make this “Live”
Press loss const A Pressure loss constant A 0.000 x SET value from your information
Press loss const B Pressure loss constant B 0.000 x SET value from your information
Press loss const C Pressure loss constant C 0.000 x SET value from your information
Press loss calc sel Calculation selection ISO5167 x Select “A.beta^2+B.beta+C” from list
Interim Results To View/Check: Menu: <”Health Check”>/<”Flowmeter details”>/<”Orifice details”>
Mass rate Beta Term E in Equation 11.3 0.000 x No status to change. Read-only value
Vel of approach Term E in Equation 11.2 0.000 x Change status to “LIVE”
Reynolds number Term Red in Equation 11.4 1000000.000 x No status to change. Read-only value
Corr orifice diameter Term d’ in Equation 11.6 0.000 (metres) x No status to change. Read-only value
Corr pipe diameter Term D’ in Equation 11.7 0.000 (metres) x No status to change. Read-only value
Pressure loss Term GZin Equation 11.5 0.000 (mbar) x No status to change. Read-only value
Pressure ratio Term PR in Equation 11.5 1.000 x No status to change. Read-only value
* Abbreviations used: “visc” = viscosity, “expans” = expansibility, “coeff” = coefficient, “cal” = calibration,
“temp” = temperature, “const” = constant, “calc” = calculation, “sel” = select, “Vel” = velocity, “Corr” = corrected
** Calibration report is optional and you may therefore need to find this value from other documentation
*** Isentropic exponent also known as “specific heat”
Note: Always check on-screen that the correct stream/channel is selected. (If not, use the grey selection key)
Table 11a.6.2: Venturi Software Parameters
Parameter
(as seen) *
Venturi type Venturi type selection “Rough cast” x Select from multiple-choice list
Table 11a.6.3: Wet Gas Software Parameters
Parameter
(as seen) *
Discharge coeff src Linearise or fixed value “ISO5167” x Keep “ISO 5167” (for fixed value option)
Orif discharge coeff Term Cg of Equation 11.1 0.000 x LIVE (if from curve) or SET (fixed value)
Liq discharge coeff Term Cl of Equation 11.9 0.000 x SET value from your information
Gas mass fraction Term x of Equation 11.12 100 (%) x Make this LIVE if using “3-phase” option
BA, Sept. 2002 11A.13

Murdock coeff M Term M of Equation 11.9 ** 1.260 x SET value from your information **
Murdock coeff c Term c of Equation 11.9 ** 0.000 x SET value from your information **
Mrate corr calc sel Select correction algorithm Murdock x Murdock, Chisholm or De Leeuw
Interim Results To View/Check: Menu: <”Health Check”>/<”Orifice details”>/<”Wet gas data”>
Wet gas corr factor Term WCGx in Equation 11.9 0.000 x Check calculated value is as expected
LockhartMartinelli X Term X in Equation 11.9 0.000 x Check calculated value is as expected
Chisholm factor C Term C in Equation 11.9 0.000 x Check calculated value is as expected
~
DeLeeuw factor C Term C in Equation 11.9 0.000 x Check calculated value is as expected
Froude number (gas) Term Frg in Equation 11.9 0.000 x Check calculated value is as expected
* Abbreviations used: “src” = source, “coeff” = coefficient, “Orif” = Orifice, “Liq” = Liquid
** Applicable unless using Chisholm or De Leeuw correction algorithm
Table 11a.6.4: Software Parameters of liquid density measurements (2-phase only)
Parameter
(as seen) *
Liquid Density Selection Software Parameter: Menu <”Configure”><”Wet gas data”>
Liquid dens calc sel Select liquid density calc. 3-phase x Select “Water cut” (i.e. 2-phase)
Water Cut Software Parameters: Menu <”Configure”><”Transmitter detail”>/<”Water cut”>
Water cut input chl AIN/HART channel selection “None” x Select channel from multiple-choice list
Water cut 0% Minimum measurement 0.0 (%) x SET maximum and minimum water cut
Water cut 100% Maximum measurement 0.0 (%) values. Optional unless using analyser
Water cut high lmt High limit alarm threshold 0.0 (%) x Optional feature. Limit checking is
Water cut low limit Low limit alarm threshold 0.0 (%) switched off when both are SET to 0.0
Water cut step lmt Step limit alarm threshold 0.0 (%) x Optional feature. 0.0 = No check
Water cut FB type WC fallback configuration “None” x “Last Good Value” or “Fallback Value”
Water cut FB value WC value for fallback 0.0 (%) x SET a value if fallback-to-value required
Liquid Density Software Parameters: Menu: <”Line density/<”Wet gas”>
3 3
Water density UW in Equation 11.11 0.000 (kg/m ) x SET to 1000 kg/m
3
Oil/condensate dens UOC in Equation 11.11 0.000 (kg/m ) x SET value from your information
3
Liquid density Ul in Equation 11.11 0.000 (kg/m ) x SET to value (if fixed) or make LIVE
* Abbreviations used: “chl” = channel, “lmt” = limit, “FB” = fallback, “dens” = density
Table 11a.6.5: Software Parameters of liquid density measurements (3-phase only)
Parameter
(as seen) *
Liquid dens calc sel Select liquid density calc. 3-phase x Select either “2-phase” or “3-phase”
Water ratio Term < w in Equation 11.11 0.000 x SET value from your information
Condensate ratio Term < C in Equation 11.11 0.000 x SET value from your information
Methanol ratio Term < m in Equation 11.11 0.000 x SET value from your information
Water dens const D Term ‘D’ in Equation 11.14 0.000 x SET value from your information
Water dens const E Term ‘E’ in Equation 11.14 0.000 x SET value from your information
Water dens const F Term ‘F’ in Equation 11.14 0.000 x SET value from your information
3
Water density Term Uw in Equation 11.14 0.000 (kg/m ) x Check calculated value is as expected
11A.14 BA, Sept. 2002

3
Condensate dens @ 15 Term Ustdc in Equation 11.16 1.000 (kg/m ) x SET value from your information
API user K0 Term K0 in Equation 11.16 0.000 x SET value from your information
Condens EquilibPress Term Pe in Equation 11.16 1.01325 (bar abs) x SET value from your information
Methanol dens cnst G Term ‘G’ in Equation 11.15 0.000 x SET value from your information
Methanol dens cnst H Term ‘H’ in Equation 11.15 0.000 x SET value from your information
Methanol dens cnst J Term ‘J’ in Equation 11.15 0.000 x SET value from your information
3
Methanol density Term Um in Equation 11.15 0.000 (kg/m ) x Check calculated value is as expected
3
Liquid density Term U l in Equation 11.11 0.000 (kg/m ) x Check calculated value is as expected
Interim Results To View/Check: Menu: <”Health Check”>/<”Wet gas data”>
Liquid : gas ratio Term < l in Equation 11.11 0.000 x Check calculated value is as expected
Water mass frac Term < w in Equation 11.11 0.000 x Check calculated value is as expected
Condensate mass frac Term < c in Equation 11.11 0.000 x Check calculated value is as expected
Methanol mass frac Term < m in Equation 11.11 0.000 x Check calculated value is as expected
BA, Sept. 2002 11A.15

11A.16 BA, Sept. 2002

Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12. Routine operation (Data maps)

12.1 Viewing the data
The tables on the following pages show that part of the menu structure which you use to carry out routine
tasks such as checking results or changing units of measurement.
7955 1540 (Ch12/AB) Page 12.1

12.1.1 Flow rates and Flow totals

Menu structure for routine work: Part 1 of 2
Main Menu Level #2 Level #3 Level #4
Flow rates → Stream rates → Strm corr vol rate → Corrected vol rate
Strm mass rate → Mass rate
Strm base vol rate → Base volume rate
Strm energy rate → Energy rate
Strm ind vol rate → Indicated vol rate
Conversion factor → Conversion factor
Corrected factor → Correction factor
Wet gas rates → Ind gas mass rate →
Liquid mass rate →
Liquid bvol rate →
Water/Cond/Meth/HC →
Station rates → Stn corr vol rate → Station cor vol rate
Stn mass rate → Station mass rate
Stn base vol rate → Station BaseVol rate
Stn energy rate → Station energy rate
Stn ind vol rate → Station Ind vol rate
Sub stn 1 rates → Stn1 corr vol rate → SubStn1 corr vol rate
Stn1 mass rate → SubStn1 mass rate
Stn1 base vol rate → SubStn1 BaseVol rate
Stn1 energy rate → SubStn1 energy rate
Stn1 ind vol rate → SubStn1 ind vol rate
Sub stn 2 rates → Stn2 corr vol rate → SubStn2 corr vol rate
Stn2 mass rate → SubStn2 mass rate
Stn2 base vol rate → SubStn2 BaseVol rate
Stn2 energy rate → SubStn2 energy rate
Stn2 ind vol rate → SubStn2 ind vol rate
Flow totals → Stream totals → Forward totals → Corr vol total →
Mass total →
Base vol total →
Energy total →
Ind vol total →
Wet gas totals →
Page 12.2 7955 1540 (Ch12/AB)


Flow totals → Stream totals → USonic rev totals → Rev corr vol total →
Rev mass total →
Rev base vol total →
Rev energy total →
Rev ind vol total →
USonic net totals → Net corr vol total →
Net mass total →
Net base vol total →
Net energy total →
Net ind vol total →
Tariff totals → Band A total →
Band B total →
Band C total →
Band D total →
Alarm total → Alarm total
Meter err total → Main meter err total
Station totals → Forward totals → Corr vol total →
Mass total →
Base vol total →
Energy total →
Ind vol total →
Wet gas totals →
USonic rev totals → Rev corr vol total →
Rev mass total →
Net mass total →
Alarm total → Station alarm total
Meter err total → Station MeterErr tot
Sub stn1 totals → Forward totals → Corr vol total →
Mass total →
Base vol total →
Energy total →
Ind vol total →
Wet gas totals →
Rev mass total →
Net mass total →
7955 1540 (Ch12/AB) Page 12.3


Alarm total → SubStn1 alarm total
Meter err total → SubStn1 MetterErr total
Sub stn2 totals → Forward totals → Corr vol total →
Mass total →
Base vol total →
Energy total →
Ind vol total →
Wet gas totals →
Rev mass total →
Net mass total →
Alarm total → SubStn2 alarm total
Meter err total → SubStn2 MetterErr total
Page 12.4 7955 1540 (Ch12/AB)

12.1.2 Line density, base density and specific gravity

Menu structure for routine work:
Line density → Prime meter density → Prime density value
Line den average → Prime den FWA value
Selected density → Meter dens selected
Line density A → Meter dens A value
Line density B → Meter dens B value
Dens % comparison → Mtr dens comp value
Dens1 txdr reading → Meter dens 1 sensor
Dens2 txdr reading → Meter dens 2 sensor
Dens3 txdr reading → Line density3 sensor
Dens4 txdr reading → Line density4 sensor
Density limits → High limit → Meter density HI lmt
Low limit → Meter density LO lmt
Value comp limit → Meter dens cmp lmt
Percent comp limit → Mtr dens % cmp lmt
Line Z → Meter density ZMeter
Base Z → Meter density ZBase
Molecular mass → Meter mass of gas
Wet gas → Liquid density → Liquid density
Water density → Water density
Oil/condensate den → Condensate density →
Ctl →
Cpl →
Alpha15 →
Compressibility F →
Base density / SG→ Prime base density → Prime base density
Base den average → Prime den FWA value
Prime SG → SG prime value
Selected Base dens → Base dens selected
Selected SG → SG selected
Base density A → Base density A value
Base density B → Base density B value
Dens % comparison → Base dens comp value
SG A → SG 1 value
SG B → SG 2 value
SG % comparison → SG comparison value
Limits → Base dens limits → High limit →
Low limit →
Value comp limit →
Percent comp limit →
SG limits → High limit →
Low limit →
Value comp limit →
Percent comp limit →
Base dens of air → Base density of Air
Relative density → Relative dens value
Rel den average → Rel den FWA value
Base Z → Base density ZBase
Line Z → Base density ZMeter
Molecular mass → Base mass of gas
7955 1540 (Ch12/AB) Page 12.5


Wet gas → Liquid dens @15C → Liquid density @ 15C
Water dens @15C → Water dens @ 15
Methanol dens @15C → Methanol dens @ 15
Conds dens @15C → Condensate dens @ 15
Page 12.6 7955 1540 (Ch12/AB)

12.1.3 Temperature, Pressure and Energy

Temperature → Line temperature → Meter temperature
Line temp average → Line temp FWA value
Density 1 temp → Density1 temperature
Dens1 temp average → Dens1 temp FWA value
Base temperature → Base temp value
Absolute zero → Absolute zero
Combustion temp → Combustion temp
Limits → Line temperature → High limit →
Low limit →
Step limit →
Density 1 temp → High limit →
Low limit →
Step limit →
Low limit →
Step limit →
Low limit →
Step limit →
Low limit →
Step limit →
Sensor readings → Line temp reading → Meter temp at sensor
Dens1 temp reading → Dens temp1 value
Pressure → Line pressure → Meter pressure
Line press average → Line press FWA value
Atmos pressure → Atmospheric pressure
Base pressure → Base pressure value
Limits → Line pressure → High limit →
Low limit →
Step limit →
Atmos pressure → High limit →
Low limit →
Step limit →
Diff press hi lmt → Diff press HO limit
Energy → Energy value → Energy Value
Wobbe index → Wobbe index
7955 1540 (Ch12/AB) Page 12.7

12.1.4 Smaller Topics

Main Menu Level #1 Level #2
Custom application → Special eq.1 value → Special equation 1
Special eq.2 value → Special equation 2
Password → Enter password
Time → Time and date → Time and date
Set cycle time → Target cycle time
Actual cycle time → Actual cycle time
System idle time → Idle cycle time
Software version → Software version
Page 12.8 7955 1540 (Ch12/AB)

12.2 Checking the performance of the 795X

If you want to check that the external connections are working properly, the Health Check facility can help
you. It shows, for each external connection:
• the name of the input or output

• the value of the data
• the units for the data
• whether the data is live or set
If the data is live but the value appears to be unusually high or low, this may be because the external
connection is not working properly.
7955 1540 (Ch12/AB) Page 12.9

12.2.1 Health Check

Health check → Flowmeter inputs → Turbine → Turbine freq. →
Turbine Pulses →
Turbine Errors →
Turb indic. Vol K →
Turbine error dev. →
Orifice → DP Value →
Selected DP cell →
Cell 1 →
Cell 2 →
Cell 3 →
Cell 4 →
Cell 5 →
Ultrasonic → Ultrasonic freq. →
Ultrasonic pulses →
Ultrasonic errors →
U/S indic vol K →
U/S error dev →
Linear → Linear value →
Linear error dev →
Time period inputs → Time Period I/P 1 → Time period input 1
Time Period I/P 2 → Time period input 2
Analog inputs → Analog input 1 → Analog in 1 value
Analog input 2 → Analog in 2 value
: : : → : : : :
Analog input 16 → Analog in 16 value
Status inputs → Status in 1-16 → Status inputs
Status in 17-26 → Status inputs 2
Analog outputs → Analog output 1 → Analog out 1 value
Analog output 2 → Analog out 2 value
: : : → : : : :
Analog output 8 → Analog out 8 value
Status outputs → Status out 1-16 → Status out 1-16
Status out 17-25 → Status out 17-25
Status outputs → Status outputs
User alarms → Alarm state:ABIJXY
Normalise gas data → Methane → Norm Methane
Ethane → Norm Ethane
:
Argon → Norm Argon
Live inputs → Carbon dioxide →
Nitrogen →
Cv/m →
Chromat Cv →
Continued on next page …
Page 12.10 7955 1540 (Ch12/AB)

Health Check menu structure for routine work: Part 2 of 2

Health check → Flowmeter details → Orifice details → Beta →
Orif dischar coeff →
Orif expand factor →
Vel of approach →
Reynolds number →
Corr pipe diameter →
Corr orif diameter →
Press loss value →
Mass rate K factor →
Pressure ratio →
Wet gas →
Ultrasonic details → Direction →
Meter factor calc →
Line water content →
Water corr factor →
Totals → Standard → Stream increments →
Station increments →
Sub stn 1 incs →
Sub stn 2 incs →
Meter err inc →
Maintenance → Totals →
Increments →
Tariff → Tariff increments →
Tariff band →
Chromat → Chromat A → Chromat A status →
Chromat A Enable →
Chromat A poll cnt →
Chromat B → Chromat B status →
Chromat B Enable →
Chromat B poll cnt →
Chromat C → Chromat C status →
Chromat C Enable →
Chromat C poll cnt →
Chromat C → Chromat D status →
Chromat D Enable →
Chromat D poll cnt →
HART inputs → HART board status → HART software ver →
HART num of links →
HART status →
HART 1 value → HART input 1 value
: : : : : : :
Wet gas data → Liquid mass ratio → Liquid : gas ratio
Water mass frac → Water mass frac
Conds mass frac → Condensate mass frac
Meth’l mass frac → Meth’l mass frac
7955 1540 (Ch12/AB) Page 12.11

12.3 Printed reports

This section explains how the 795X can print a variety of reports about the state of the system.
12.3.1 Types of report

There are many types of report:
Report name
Content of report
(as displayed)
Current report This shows settings and values of up to 20 data locations that have been set-up in a user-
defined list. (Refer to Chapter 9 for a guide to this report).
Alarm report Current contents of the Historical Alarm Log.
Event report Current contents of the Historical Event Log.
Alarm log The “Alarm” trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving).
Manual log The “Manual” trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving).
Daily log The “Daily” trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving).
Interval log The “Interval” trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving).
Reports can be enhanced to include more information. Refer to Chapter 9 for a guide on available
enhancements.
12.3.2 Printing a report

Reports have to be printed out individually. Each print request involves selecting a report name
(description) from a fixed list of all reports. The contents of that report is then transmitted through all serial
communications ports that have been set-up for printing.
The “World” security level prevents everyone from requesting a report to be printed. All other levels can
be used to request any of the reports that are listed above. To find out about how to change security
level, refer to the “Security” section in Chapter 11.
How to print a report using the front panel keyboard

1. Ensure that at least one serial communications port is configured for printing and the port is suitably
connected to either an ASCII printer or a PC running a terminal emulation program.
Note: Configuration of the printer and/or PC is outside the scope of this Operating Manual.
3. Select the menu: <“Print report”>
4. Change the option (value) to one of the report descriptions in the fixed list.
5. Watch the output on appear either on the Printer or PC.
How to print a report by other methods

Method #1: MODBUS
A ‘remote’ instrument can manipulate data locations in the 795X through a MODBUS network link to a
serial communications port.

connected to either an ASCII printer or a PC (running some kind of terminal emulation program).
Note: Set-up of the Printer and/or PC is outside the scope of this Operating Manual.
2. Transmit a MODBUS write command to the 795X.

The command should result in changing the present value of the “Print Report” location to a value from
the following table:
Page 12.12 7955 1540 (Ch12/AB)

Value Report Selected

0 “None”
1 “Current report”
2 “Alarm report”
3 “Event report”
4 “Alarm log”
5 “Manual log”
6 “Daily log”
7 “Interval log”
3. Watch the output on either the printer or a PC.
Chapter 7 features worked examples of supported MODBUS commands that can be

very easily adapted for this purpose.
It will be necessary to know the location number of “Print Report” for part of the
command sequence. This can be done by pressing the PRINT MENU key, searching
the menu structure and then, once found, pressing the ‘a’-key.
How to print a report by other methods

Method #2: Status Input (Direct)
A Status Input (#4 by default) can be used by an external system to request a print-out of the “Current”
report.

connected to either an ASCII printer or a PC (running some kind of terminal emulation program).
Note: Set-up of the Printer and/or PC is outside the scope of this Operating Manual.
2. Ensure that the Status Input is suitably wired to the system that will activate it.
It is possible to modify some attributes of a Status Input:

(a) Logic sense: Choose between “Positive Logic” (default) or “Negative Logic”
(b) Mode: Choose between “Non latched” (default) or “Latched”
See menu: <“Configure”>/<“Status Inputs”> or equivalent for the software release.
3. Test by activating the Status Input.
It is possible to allocate this remote print function to another Status Input but care is needed to avoid
clashes with Prover Inputs (Chapter 16) and the input allocated to “Maintenance mode”.
Either way, the same instructions will still apply. See menu: <“Configure”>/<IO physical alloc”>
7955 1540 (Ch12/AB) Page 12.13

12.4 Giving your 795X a tag number

If you have more than one 795X you may want to give each instrument a tag number so that, in printed
reports for example, you know which one the report refers to.
To allocate an identifier:
1. Select the Tag number option on the Main Menu.
2. Press the b-key. The cursor shifts to the left of the screen.
3. Key in the identifier you want. This over-types any existing identifier.
4. Press the b-key again. The new details shift back to the right of the display.
12.5 Giving a tag number to a stream

You may want to give a tag to each stream a tag number so that, in printed reports for example, you know
which one the report refers to.
To allocate an identifier:
1. Select the Stream tag number option on the Main Menu.
2. Use the STREAM/METER-RUN SELECT key to select the stream.
3. Press the b-key. The cursor shifts to the left of the screen.
4. Key in the identifier you want. This over-types any existing identifier.
5. Press the b-key again. The new details shift back to the right of the display.
Page 12.14 7955 1540 (Ch12/AB)

Chapter 13 Routine maintenance and fault-finding
13. Routine maintenance and fault finding
13.1 Cleaning the instrument

You can use a cloth or sponge and water clean the outside of the instrument. Do not use caustic
cleaning agents or abrasive materials.
13.2 Fault finding

Although the instrument is designed to be extremely reliable it is possible that faults may arise at
some time or another. The fault-finding charts show the most likely faults and explain how to
trace their causes and put them right. If you cannot cure a fault yourself, contact your supplier or
the manufacturers for help.
NOTE: This chapter does not deal with faults caused by incorrect configuration of
the instrument. If you want to find out more about configuration, refer to
Chapters 10 and 11.
Using the Health Check

The 795x Health Check facility provides a method of displaying a variety of measurement
parameters, including time period inputs, analogue inputs and status inputs and outputs. This can
be used as a diagnostic aid if the system seems to be faulty.
795x Op Man / BC Page 13.1

PROBLEM:
A reading from
a transmitter is
not displayed
Has it Is the
NO Check the field wiring transmitter’s NO Wire the transmitter
ever been
against the wiring field wiring up according to the
displayed
schedule correct wiring schedule
?
?
YES YES
Replace the field

The field wiring
wiring to the
is faulty
transmitter
Is the
transmitter NO 795x’s Connector/
receiving power Power Supply Board Change the
from the is probably faulty Connector Board
795x
?
YES
Is the
transmitter NO The transmitter or Refer to the
sending current its configuration transmitter’s manual
to the 795x is probably faulty for more information.
?
YES
Is
the 795x NO Correct the
configured configuration
correctly
?
YES
The 795x’s input Replace the 795x’s
circuit is probably Connector/Power
faulty Supply Board
Fault-finding chart 1: No reading from a transmitter
Page 13.2 795x Op Man / BC

Take great care during this procedure because the

power supply must be ON when you carry it out.
PROBLEM:
The display is blank
Is the
power to NO
the 795x Turn the power ON
ON
?
YES
Has
Is the
the fuse YES NO
795x’s supply Adjust the voltage so
in the 795x
voltage within that it is within spec
blown
spec
?
?
NO YES Replace the fuse by

one of the correct
rating
Is the
security LED NO 795x’s Connector/ Replace the 795x’s
on the 795x Power Supply Board Connector/Power
lit is probably faulty Supply Board
?
YES
The 795x’s Display
Replace the 795x’s
Module is probably
Display Module
faulty
Fault-finding chart 2: The display is blank
795x Op Man / BC Page 13.3

Page 13.4 795x Op Man / BC

Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14. Removal and replacement of parts
14.1 Front Panel Assembly
Front Panel
Assembly
Switch panel Display Display Processor

and bezel cable Board
PL1 PL2
Display fixing screws Bezel fixing Case

and washers (4 off) screws (4 off)
Removing the Front Panel Assembly
1. Undo and remove the four screws which secure the Bezel to the case. Withdraw the Front
Panel Assembly to the limits of the connecting wiring then lay it on top of the case.
2. Partially withdraw the Processor Board then disconnect the two connectors from the
Processor Board. The Front Panel Assembly is now free.
3. Replace all items by reversing this procedure. Take great care to ensure that the cables are
not pinched on re-assembly.
14.2 Display
1. Remove the Front Panel Assembly as explained in Section 14.1.
2. Undo and remove the four screws and washers which attach the display to the Front Panel
Assembly.
3. If required, unplug the ribbon cable from the display.
4. Replace all items by reversing this procedure.
7955 Op Man / AB Page 14.1

14.3 Switch Panel
Switch Switch Panel Display

Panel fixing nuts and and cable
washers (4 off)
Key Switch Spring Display fixing screws

switch cable Bezel clip and washers (4 off)
Removing the Switch Panel Assembly
1. Remove the Front Panel Assembly as explained in Section 14.1
2. Undo the four screws and washers which attach the display to the bezel. Remove the
display.
3. Un-solder the flexi-cable from the key switch. Remove the spring clip from the switch then
withdraw the switch from the case.
4. Undo and remove the four nuts and washers which attach the Switch Panel to the bezel. Lift
the Switch Panel away.
5. Replace all items by reversing this procedure.
Page 14.2 7955 Op Man / AB

14.4 Processor Board
Switch panel Display Mother

cable cable Board
PL1 PL2
Switch Panel Processor Power Supply

and Bezel Board Board
Removing the Processor Board and Power Supply Board

2. Pull the Processor Board forwards so that it disengages from the connector at the back of the
case. Withdraw the board from the case.
14.5 Power supply board

2. Pull the Power Supply Board forwards so that it disengages from the connector at the back of
the case. Withdraw the board from the case.
14.6 Connector Board

1. Remove the Rear Panel Assembly as described in Section 14.9.
2. Remove the Mother Board as explained in Section 14.10.
3. Unscrew the threaded hexagonal spacers on top of the Connector Board, then lift the
Connector Board off the studs.

14.7 Fuse
2. Slide the Power Supply Board out of the case.
3. Referring to the diagram, find the fuse and gently prise it out of the fuse holder.
4. Press the replacement fuse into the fuse holder. Make sure that the fuse is of the correct
type and rating as specified in Chapter 14.
5. Replace all items in the reverse order of removal. Take great care to ensure that the cables
are not pinched on re-assembly.
Top of
instrument
case
Power
Socket Rear Supply Mother
Fuse SK1 Panel Board Board
Where to find the fuse on the Power Supply Board

14.8 Back-up battery

Instructions:-
1. Ensure that the unit is disconnected from all power supplies.
2. Ensure that a new battery and a thin edged, non-conductive implement are within easy
reach.
3. Remove the Front Panel Assembly from the unit as explained in Section 14.1.
4. Remove the Processor Board from the unit as explained in Section 14.4.
5. Referring to the diagram below, use the non-conductive implement to gently lever the
battery upwards from near the rear of the clip. As soon as the battery lifts up a small amount,
gently ease the battery in a horizontal direction away from the holder and the clip. Keep the
battery in contact with the clip.
DO NOT LIFT UP THE CLIP MORE THAN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY.
6. Keep the battery in contact with the clip until you are prepared to insert the new one.
When the clip looses contact with the battery, there is a maximum of 10 seconds before all
configuration and database information is lost.
7. Once prepared, remove existing battery and then slide the new one under the clip and into the
holder - observing the polarity symbols. Complete this action within 10 seconds.
8. Re-assemble the 7955 instrument
Part of Battery
Processor
Board
Clip/
contact
Battery
holder
Where to find the back-up battery on the Processor Board

14.9 Rear Panel Assembly

It is strongly recommended that in order to ensure continued compliance to EMC
directives, you do not attempt to remove the rear panel assembly, but return the
instrument to your nearest Solartron Service Centre.
The instructions given below should only be carried out if it is absolutely necessary.
Processor
Board
Rear Panel
Assembly
fixing screws
(4 off)
Power Supply Mother

Board Board
Removing the Rear Panel Assembly
2. Pull the Processor Board forwards so that it disengages from the connector at the back of the
case. Withdraw the board from the case.
3. Pull the Power Supply Board forwards so that it disengages from the connector at the back of
the case. Withdraw the board from the case.
4. Remove the four screws which secure the Rear Panel Assembly into the case.
5. Withdraw the Rear Panel Assembly from the case, taking care not to bend the metal spring
clips on the top and bottom of the Connector Board.
not pinched on re-assembly, and ensure that the metal clips are not bent or damaged.

14.10 Mother Board

It is strongly recommended that in order to ensure continued compliance to EMC
directives, you do not attempt to remove the rear panel assembly, but return the
instrument to your nearest Solartron Service Centre.
1. Remove the Rear Panel Assembly as described in Section 14.9.
2. Referring to the diagram, undo and remove the six screws and washers which fix the Mother
board to the rest of the Rear Panel Assembly.
3. Using a straight pull, carefully lift the Mother Board clear of its four connections to the
connector board. The Mother Board is now free.
not pinched on re-assembly, and ensure that the metal clips are not bent or damaged.
COMPLETE ASSEMBLY DISMANTLED ASSEMBLY
Screws and Threaded Plain Rear

washers spacers spacers panel
Mother Connector Rear Earth stud

Board Board Panel and fixings
Removal of the Mother Board and Connector Board

14.11 Guide to fitting the Ethernet board

(Warning! You must take precautions to prevent a static charge from damaging PCBs. An earth wrist-strap is ideal)
1. Ensure jumpers on the Ethernet board are configured correctly. Use Table 14.11.1 to verify this. (Figure
14.11.2 shows where to find these jumpers)
2. Remove the front panel assembly, as guided in Section 14.1 of Chapter 14
3. Remove the processor board, as guided in Section 14.2 of Chapter 14
4. Locate connectors PL12, PL13 and PL14 on the processor board. They are used for attaching the Ethernet
board to the processor board. Remove any bridges you may see covering pins of PL12 – PL14. (Figure
14.11.4 indicates where to find the connectors).
5. If vibration is significant where the 7955 instrument is to be sited, you should plug in a plastic post, similar to
Figure 14.11.1, into a hole on the processor board. The location of the hole is indicated in Figure 14.11.4
The plastic post is supplied with the Ethernet board. Fitting it is optional but will prevent the Ethernet board
from shaking loose when the 7955 instrument is sited in an area with vibrations.
6. When ready, bring the Ethernet board to just above the processor board
7. Align the connector blocks underneath the Ethernet board with PL12, PL13 and PL14 on the processor board.
(Figure 14.11.3 shows the connector blocks). If using the plastic post (from step 5), it should now be naturally
aligned with the hole on the Ethernet Board. (The hole is shown in Figure 14.11.2)
8. Check visually for a good alignment and then apply a gentle pressure from above, but only over the
connection points
9. Once the Ethernet board begins to engage onto the processor board, re-check the alignment at all the
connecting points. If okay, apply further pressure until it is fully engaged. Otherwise, disengage carefully and
return to step 6. If the plastic post (from step 5) has engaged, you may need to simultaneously squeeze the
anchored tip and lift board up to disengage.
10. Re-insert the processor board

11. Re-attach the front panel
12. Power-up the 7955 instrument when it is fully re-assembled
13. Once the power-cycle is complete, you need to check that the Ethernet board is functioning. To do this,
navigate to the <Health Check>/<”Enet card status”> menu and then review settings for the MAC address and
Software version. The card is incorrectly installed if you see “Not available”.
Table 14.11.1: Jumper Configuration for Ethernet Board
JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP8 JP9 JP10 JP11
2-3
Made Open Open Made Open Made Open Open Open Open
Made
Note: “Made” – Bridge covers pins 1 and 2 unless specified otherwise, “Open” – No bridge covers the pins
Figure 14.11.1: Optional Plastic Post

Figure 14.11.2: Ethernet Board 79550509 (Top View)
Note: The PL5 and JP8-11 connectors on the top surface are for factory testing
Figure 14.11.3: Ethernet Board 79550509 (Bottom View)
Figure 14.11.4: Area of PL12, PL13 and PL14 on Processor Board


Chapter 15 Assembly drawing and parts list
15. Assembly drawing and parts list
15.1 What the drawing and parts list tell you

The drawing and parts list show those parts of the 7955 which you can obtain as spares. To
identify an item:
1. Find the item on the appropriate assembly drawing

2. Note the Item Number by the side of it.
3. look up the Item Number on the parts list. The parts list tells you:
• the Part Number for the item
• a description of the item
• the quantity of the item that appears on the drawing.
15.2 How to obtain spare parts

You can obtain spare parts from the supplier from whom you bought the instrument or from the
manufacturers (Solartron). In either case, you must state on your order:
• your name, address and telephone or fax number

• a description of the parts you want
• the part numbers of the items you are ordering
• the quantity of each item.
7955 Op. Man./AA Page 15.1

Diagram for identifying and ordering spares
Page 15.2 7955 Op. Man./AA

Item no. Part number Description Quantity
1 79553700 Instrument case 1
2 79513703 Bezel 1
3 79511206 Display assembly 1
4 79550503 Motherboard assembly 1
5 79550504 Connector board assembly (D-type connectors) 1
6 79553701 Rear panel (D-type connectors) 1
7 79513705 Switch panel (with cable) 1
8 376100160 Keyswitch and retainer 1
9 79550502 Processor board 1
10 79510501 Power supply board 1
11 411129010 M3 crinkle washer 14
12 79513710 15-way cable 1
13 410031010 M3 hexagonal full nut 4
14 400001930 M4 thumb nut 1
15 410031020 M4 hexagonal full nut 1
16 411029020 M4 plain washer 2
17 412011420 Nylon spacer: 3.5mm ID x 8mm long 6
18 415370070 Hexagonal spacer: M3 x 13mm long 6
19 406803060 M3 x 6mm pan-head screw 10
20 411129020 M4 crinkle washer 2
21 406902460 M3 x 8mm pan-head screw 8
22 360106230 2A glass 1
23 800400380 Lithium battery CR2330 1
7955 Op. Man./AA Page 15.3

Page 15.4 7955 Op. Man./AA

Chapter 16 HART, SMART and the 7955
16. HART, SMART and the 7955

This Chapter is a comprehensive guide for understanding how the 7955 can be set-up for digital
†
communications with “SMART” type field transmitters.
Important Notice
This Chapter is only relevant to 7955’s with the “HART” add-on board
installed. Contact Solartron for up-to-date details of 7955 upgrade options.
16.2 Introduction to SMART and HART with the 7955

‡
A special add-on board is required to be installed inside the 7955 before this facility is enabled.
This board provides all the necessary hardware and firmware support for the 7955 to
communicate as a Current Input Device (Primary Master) on two separate networks (two-wire
4-20mA loops) of “SMART” field transmitters (Slaves).
Warning!! Each network loop must have no more than five “SMART” field transmitters
connected at any one time. Exceeding this number will damage add-on
boards.
The following “safe area only” diagram shows all the HART network loops with the maximum
number of “SMART” field transmitters connected to each loop. In practice, far fewer transmitters
are used.
Take note of the warnings - above and below. Section 16.3 has details of external wiring
involving the 7955.
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
a
HART Channel 1 HART 1 Value HART Channel 3
0.125 b
HART Channel 2 Live c HART Channel 4

d
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
Warning!! Connecting up “SMART” transducers has to be done with great care. Powering-up
more than one point-to-point configured transmitter on a HART network loop can
produce an electrical current (20mA per transmitter) that can damage the 7955.
†
A “SMART” transmitter is said to be intelligent because it contains a micro-processor that provides extra functionality. This may
take various forms, such as on-board calculations, handling multiple sensors, combining types of measurement. measurement
integrity indicators, and so on. “SMART” is also used for the ability to re-use existing field wiring.
‡
Solartron part number is 79557
7955 Op Man/AA
Page 16.1
§ **
The communications standard for each network loop is the HART Protocol . A full technical
discussion of this standard is outside the scope of this operating manual. There is a detailed
discussion of the HART protocol in the Rosemount booklet entitled “HART Field
Communications Protocol - A Technical Description”. However, particularly important aspects
involving the 7955 are covered in later section as they are needed.
Application Software is able to request data from dynamic variables that are kept and maintained
by a “SMART” transmitter. These dynamic variables can be thought of as being very much like
7955 type data locations. Four dynamic variables per “SMART” field transmitter can be
requested. A total of sixteen dynamic variables can be input to the 7955. Configuration details
concentrate on setting up the 7955 to obtain up to eight (the maximum) measurement values.
HART HART
7955 HART Inputs Transmitter Transmitter
HART 1 Variables Variables
Primary Primary
HART 2
Secondary Secondary
HART 3 Third Third
HART 4 Fourth Fourth
HART 5 Address = 1 Address = 9

HART 6
HART 7
HART network loop 1
HART 8
HART 9
HART network loop 2
HART 10
HART 11
HART HART
HART 12 Transmitter Transmitter
HART 13 Variables Variables
Primary Primary
HART 14 Secondary Secondary
HART 15 Third Third
Fourth Fourth
HART 16
Address = 1 Address = 8
Example of 2 HART Network Loops
§
This is an acronym for “Highway Addressable Remote Transducer”. HART is a registered trademark of the HART
Communication foundation.
**
Implementation conforms to revision 5.5 of the HART protocol specification.

16.3 Connecting the 7955 to a HART network loop

This section covers installation issues for analogue input wiring involving the 7955.
16.3.1 7955 Electrical connections and impedance requirements

HART connections use analogue inputs 13, 14, 15 and 16 for HART network loops 1, 2, 3 and 4
respectively. The HART add-on board provides the hardware support for these inputs to become
“SMART” analogue inputs.
7955
24V d.c. (Isolated supply)

+
"SMART"
Field
Transmitter Analogue input Signal +
-
Active
impedance
Note: 100 Ohms

To ensure reliable
operation, it is good
practice to ground Analogue input Signal -
the 0V d.c. isolated
supply at one point. 0V d.c. (Isolated supply)
“SMART” Analogue input on the

HART add-on board (Internally powered)
Every analogue input on the 795x utilises a internal 100Ω current sense resistor. The circuitry for
the “SMART” analogue inputs (on the HART add-on board) use a 100Ω current sense resistor in
series with an active impedance. The total impedance is then sufficient for reliable operations at
HART signal frequencies, while minimising the d.c. voltage drop across the 795x terminals. This
allows a sufficient voltage at the field transmitter even when powered through I.S. Barriers (or
Isolators).
Parameter notes:
1. At d.c., the voltage drop at the maximum current of 22mA is 3.4V
2. Minimum impedance in the HART extended frequency band (500 -10khz) is 330Ω
3. Maximum impedance in the HART extended frequency band (500 -10khz) is 480Ω
HART network loop 1 (Analogue input 13):

D-Type D-Type Pin
Pin function
Pin no. Designation
+24V d.c. (isolated supply) SK3/34 +24V Analogue
Analogue input signal + SK3/40 Analog i/p 13 +
Analogue input signal - SK3/39 Analog i/p 13 -
0V d.c. (isolated supply) SK3/18 0V Analogue
7955 Op Man/AA
Page 16.3

D-type D-type Pin
Pin function
Pin no. Designation
Analogue input signal + SK3/6 Analog. i/p 14 +
Analogue input signal - SK3/22 Analog. i/p 14 -

D-type D-type Pin
Pin function
Pin no. Designation

D-type D-type Pin
Pin function
Pin no. Designation
16.3.2 Frequency-shift keying

The HART protocol uses the American “Bell 202” standard frequency-shift keying (F.S.K.)
method to mask a digital signal on to analogue wiring.
Important Notice
The “HART” add-on board provides 4 HART channels that utilise existing
Analogue Inputs (13, 14, 15 and 16). This allows SMART and Non-SMART
instruments to use an analogue input at the same time. However, the F.S.K.
signal produces random errors on the analogue signal which affect the normal
accuracy (See Appendix ‘C’).
Solartron strongly recommend that analogue inputs, being used for HART loop
inputs, should only be used for HART communications.

16.3.3 Cable choice and the 65μs rule

There is a standard “65μs” rule that determines the maximum length of cable that can be used for
reliable operation of the HART network loop .
Step 1: Add up all the resistance in the network loop.

• 7955 current sense resistance is equivalent to 350Ω with the HART add-on board.
• I.S. Barrier or Isolator
• Cable
Step 2: Find out the total cable capacitance
Step 3: Multiply the total resistance * total cable capacitance.
The resulting value must be less than 65μs.
Solartron can provide multi-pair cable that has a maximum capacitance of 115 pF/m. The
following table shows the recommended maximum cable lengths for typical HART network loops
with this cable.
No. of Loop Max. Cable

slaves resistance length
1 No Barrier 1171m
1 150Ω 884m
1 300Ω 713m
2 No Barrier 1136m
2 150Ω 846m
2 300Ω 673m
3 No Barrier 1101m
3 150Ω 807m
3 300Ω 633m
4 No Barrier 1067m
4 150Ω 769m
4 300Ω 593m
5 No Barrier 1032m
5 150Ω 730m
5 300Ω 553m
Table notes:
1. Cable length calculations take into account the 350Ω resistance from a 7955 with the
HART Board.
2. It is assumed that a 150Ω I.S. Barrier has a maximum end to end resistance of 185 Ω
3. It is assumed that a 300Ω I.S. Barrier has a maximum end to end resistance of 340 Ω
A discussion of cable choices can be found in the Rosemount booklet entitled “HART Field
Communications Protocol - A Technical Description”.
Important Notice:
Field transmitters in hazardous areas
Always follow wiring instructions provided by manufacturers of the field transmitters.
7955 Op Man/AA
Page 16.5
16.4 Configuring the 7955 to use a HART network loop

Two methods are provided for configuring with the key-pad (on the front panel). Do not use the
second method unless you are experienced with configuration using the menus.
16.4.1 Configuring by using the software wizard (Recommended)

This sub-section covers step-by-step instructions for using a software wizard to configure a 7955
that has the following set-up:
Example 1
A HART network loop with one “SMART” static pressure field transmitter is attached to analogue
input 15. The objectives of this example are:
• to set a multi-drop address
• to get static pressure from the fourth dynamic variable (on the transmitter) into the first
HART data location dedicated to holding input values
• to allocate the first HART data location to the Line pressure calculation
Follow these instructions:-

1. Press the MENU key so that page 1 of the main menu appears.
Go to the wizard
selection menu 2. Use the DOWN-ARROW key until the “Configure” main menu
option is displayed.
3. Press the blue key that is alongside the “Configure” option
4. Press the ‘a’ key twice.
5. Press the ‘b’ key and then use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll
Select the Hart inputs
through a list of wizards.
wizard
6. Press the ‘b’ key when “Hart inputs” appears on the display.
Select HART Input 1 7. Press the ‘d’ key to answer “yes” to the prompt.
8. “HART 1 PhyLinkNo” is set to “HART link 1” by default. This
Choose the HART
example involves HART network loop 1 (i.e. HART link 1) so
network loop
there is no need to change the setting.
However, If anything other than “HART link 1” is shown:
• Press the ‘b’ key and then use the DOWN-ARROW key
to scroll through the options.
• Press the ‘b’ key when “HART link 1” is displayed.
9. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step.
10. Press the ‘b’ key
Choose the address of
the “Field transmitter” 11. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until
“HART address 5” is shown.
12. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection
Choose the fourth 14. Press the ‘b’ key
dynamic variable 15. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until
“Fourth variable” is shown.

Choose the type of 18. Press the ‘b’ key

dynamic variable 19. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options
until “Static press (G)” is shown.
Select the averaging 22. Press the ENTER key to keep the existing setting and continue
mode to the next step.
Put the field transmitter 23. Press the ‘b’ key
on-line 24. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until
“On line” is shown.
Monitor the response 27. Watch the response message. It should cycle from “None”
from issuing the on- to “Configured” in less than a minute.
line/off-line command Note: The response “SMART error” may appear if there is
there is a problem with the HART network loop.
Change status to get 29. Press the ‘d’ key
live values from the 30. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options
field transmitter until “Live” is shown.
31. Press the ‘b’ key to confirm this selection. Live static
pressure values (gauge units) should now be displayed.
Skip remaining 33. Press the ‘c’ key to answer “no” to the prompt.
questions 34. Repeat step 3 until the “Hart inputs” wizard is completed.
Allocate the HART data 35. Use the “Pressure” wizard to make data location HART
input location‘ value 5 the source for the Line pressure calculation.
Note: During the “Pressure” wizard, “Line press source”
should be set to “HART input 5”
(End of Example)
To view results after exiting the wizard, look in the menu :<“Health check”>/<“Inputs”>
7955 Op Man/AA
Page 16.7
16.5 Post configuration - viewing HART data

This sub-section provides a complete check-list of all the data locations associated with checking
information returning from HART network loops.
Task 1: Checking the results

Step 1: Select this menu : <“Health check”>/<“Inputs”>
Step 2: Look at data shown in this check-list
Data name
(as displayed) Instructions and Comments
HART input 1 value

HART input 2 value
HART input 3 value Values from sixteen dynamic variables
HART input : value
HART input 16 value
HART software ver • HART board firmware identification.
HART no. of phy links • This shows the number of HART network loops.
Default setting is “None”
HART status • This shows a digit for each of the sixteen HART data
location inputs:
Digit = ‘0’ - Input is not configured (not in use)
Digit = ‘1’ - Input is configured (in use)
Digit = ‘2’ - Input configuration failed due to an error
• Note: Default state is 0000000000000000
16.6 SMART units of measurement

Support is provided for a sub-set of the SMART units of measurement
Temperature Density Pressure Mass rate

1. Deg.C. 1. g/cc 1. In WG 1. g/sec
3
2. Deg.F 2. g/m 2. mm WG 2. g/Min
3. Kelvin 3. lb/gallon (UK) 3. Bar 3. h/Hour
3
4. lb/ft 4. mBar 4. Kg/sec
5. Kg/litre 5. Pa 5. Kg/Min
6. g/litre 6. MPa 6. Kg/day
3
7. lb/in 7. In HG 7. Tonnes/Min
8. Tonnes/Hour
9. Tonnes/Day
10. Lb/sec
11. Lb/Hour
12. Lb/Day
Note: Data values received in un-supported measurement units are displayed without units of
measurement - line 3 of the display is blank. However, calculations that use this data
always assume the default units of measurement. For temperature data, this would be
“Deg.C”. Refer to Chapter 9 for a full list of supported units of measurement.

17. BATCHING (TRANSACTIONS)
This chapter explores the 795x support for Standard Batch Operations.
17.1 Standard Batch Operations

Batch operations comprise transactions and recording of product transfers and conditions over a defined
period. The records kept are the current transaction in progress and the previous (last) completed
transaction. Additionally, the transaction can be archived. Both the current and previous records may be
printed out on-demand or printed automatically on transaction completion. The archived transaction
maybe viewed or printed later when required.
These records are called ‘Batch Transaction Records’ but may sometimes be referred to as ‘Quantity
Transaction Records’ (QTR) and typically contain totals, start/stop time/date and conditions, together with
weighted averages.
17.1.1 Batch Operation Types

The Flow Computer offers 3 types of batch operation:
(1) Daily
This type of batch commences at a programmed (SET) hour, which is the contract hour. The
duration is 24 hours at all times, unless the calendar clock is adjusted. Batches are back-to-back and
therefore have to be halted on-demand by a menu-based command selection.
(2) Timed
This type of batch commences when a programmed (SET) date and time matches that of the Flow
Computer calendar clock. Time is the primary parameter for completing a batch. The duration of a
batch is a fixed, user-programmed period. Batches are always back-to-back and have to be halted on-
demand by a menu-based command selection or by pressing the BOTTOM-BLANK (application
specific) front panel key.
(3) Manual Trigger

This type of batch is started by selecting a menu-based command. User- intervention is the primary
parameter for completing a batch. The duration of a batch is therefore entirely dependent on when the
“Halt” command is selected. Batches are not back-to-back unless “Run” and “Halt” commands are
issued in quick succession.
Alternatively, the BOTTOM-BLANK (application specific) front panel key can start / stop a batch.
17.1.2 Batch Operation Parameter Reference

This section is a reference for all the parameters associated with batch transaction operations.
Index for use with Points To Observe

1 2 3 8 xx
list of parameters
1. Only one type of batch operation
Timed Batch
Set-up
can operate at any one time. A
Current Batch
(Menu) batch type is exclusively selected
9 To 19
at that moment of being enabling
4 5 8 Copy over at by a menu-based command e.g.
20a To 83a end of batch
Manual Batch
Batch “Run”. This action also halts an
or Transaction
Set-up 20b To 101b Batch Archive existing batch transaction.
Recording
2. There are menu system areas for

6 7 8 Previous Batch
(Menu) viewing the records of the
Daily Batch Flow Rates previous and current batch
Set-up and Totals
transactions. (Menu: <“Batching”>)
3. The transaction record of a

Figure 17.1: Batch Operation Parameters completed batch is automatically
archived. (See “Archiving” section
in Chapter 9).
7955 1540 (Ch17/AA) 17.1

Chapter 17 Batch Operations
Menu Data List (1 of 2): * shows data that can be “Live” or “Set”
1 Timed Batch start 12 Prime base density * cÖf G
2 Timed batch interval 13 SG prime value * cÖf G
3 Timed batch control B, D 14 Energy value * cÖf G
4 Manual batch enable B, D 15 Meter density ZLine * cÖf G
5 Man Stn batch enable B, D 16 Meter density ZBase * cÖf G
6 Daily contract hour 17 Diff pressure value * cÖf G
7 Daily batch enable B, D 18 Meter factor * cÖf G
8 Batch auto print E 19 Meter K factor * cÖf G
9 Meter temperature * cÖf G - Flow status cÖf (A)
10 Meter pressure * cÖf G - Operating mode cÖf A
11 Prime density value * cÖf G
cÖf = Multi-stream/run data type (See Chapter 11 for explanation)

(1) <“Configure”>/<“Batching”> and (2) <“Batching”>
CURRENT BATCH TRANSACTION RECORD PREVIOUS BATCH TRANSACTION RECORD
20a Batch number cÖf F 20b Batch number cÖf (= 20a)
21a Batch status cÖf 21b Batch status cÖf (= 21a)
22a Batch start time cÖf C: 7 22b Batch start time cÖf (= 22a)
23a Batch start temp cÖf C: 2 23b Batch start temp cÖf (= 23a)
24a Batch start press cÖf C: 3 24b Batch start press cÖf (= 24a)
25a Batch start density cÖf C: 8 25b Batch start density cÖf (= 25a)
26a Start vol total cÖf C: 1 26b Start vol total cÖf (= 26a)
27a Start mass total cÖf C: 1 27b Start mass total cÖf (= 27a)
28a Start bvol total cÖf C: 1 28b Start bvol total cÖf (= 28a)
29a Start energy total cÖf C: 1 29b Start energy total cÖf (= 29a)
30a Start ivol total cÖf C: 1 30b Start ivol total cÖf (= 30a)
31a Start rev vol total cÖf C: 1 31b Start rev vol total cÖf (= 31a)
32a Start rev mass total cÖf C: 1 32b Start rev mass total cÖf (= 32a)
33a Start rev bvol total cÖf C: 1 33b Start rev bvol total cÖf (= 33a)
34a Start rev energy tot cÖf C: 1 34b Start rev engy total cÖf (= 34a)
35a Start rev ivol total cÖf C: 1 35b Start rev ivol total cÖf (= 35a)
36a Start net vol total cÖf C: 1 36b Start net vol total cÖf (= 36a)
37a Start net mass total cÖf C: 1 37b Start net mass total cÖf (= 37a)
38a Start net bvol total cÖf C: 1 38b Start net bvol total cÖf (= 38a)
39a Start net energy tot cÖf C: 1 39b Start net engy total cÖf (= 39a)
40a Start net ivol total cÖf C: 1 40b Start net ivol total cÖf (= 40a)
41a Batch ivol total ** cÖf C: 1 41b Batch ivol total ** cÖf (= 41a)
42a Batch vol total ** cÖf C: 1 42b Batch vol total ** cÖf (= 42a)
43a Batch bvol total ** cÖf C: 1 43b Batch bvol total ** cÖf (= 43a)
44a Batch energy total ** cÖf C: 1 44b Batch energy total ** cÖf (= 44a)
45a Batch rev vol total cÖf C: 1 45b Batch rev vol total cÖf (= 45a)
46a Batch rev mass total ** cÖf C: 1 46b Batch rev mass total ** cÖf (= 46a)
47a Batch rev bvol total ** cÖf C: 1 47b Batch rev bvol total ** cÖf (= 47a)
48a Batch rev energy tot ** cÖf C: 1 48b Batch rev energy tot ** cÖf (= 48a)
49a Batch rev ivol total ** cÖf C: 1 49b Batch rev ivol total ** cÖf (= 49a)
50a Batch net vol total ** cÖf C: 1 50b Batch net vol total ** cÖf (= 50a)
51a Batch net mass total ** cÖf C: 1 51b Batch net mass total ** cÖf (= 51a)
52a Batch net bvol total ** cÖf C: 1 52b Batch net bvol total ** cÖf (= 52a)
53a Batch net energy tot ** cÖf C: 1 53b Batch net energy tot ** cÖf (= 53a)
54a Batch net ivol total ** cÖf C: 1 54b Batch net ivol total ** cÖf (= 54a)
17.2 7955 1540 (Ch17/AA)

55a Batch alarm total cÖf C: 1 55b Batch alarm total cÖf (= 55a)
56a Stn batch vol total C: 1 56b Stn batch vol total (= 56a)
57a Stn batch mass total C: 1 57b Stn batch mass total (= 57a)
58a Stn batch bvol total C: 1 58b Stn batch bvol total (= 58a)
59a Stn batch energy tot C: 1 59b Stn batch energy tot (= 59a)
60a Stn batch ivol total C: 1 60b Stn batch ivol total (= 60a)
61a Stn bch rev vol tot C: 1 61b Stn bch rev vol tot (= 61a)
62a Stn bch rev mass tot C: 1 62b Stn bch rev mass tot (= 62a)
63a Stn bch rev bvol tot C: 1 63b Stn bch rev bvol tot (= 63a)
64a Stn bch rev engy tot C: 1 64b Stn bch rev engy tot (= 64a)
65a Stn bch rev ivol tot C: 1 65b Stn bch rev ivol tot (= 65a)
66a Stn bch net vol tot C: 1 66b Stn bch net vol tot (= 66a)
67a Stn bch net mass tot C: 1 67b Stn bch net mass tot (= 67a)
68a Stn bch net bvol tot C: 1 68b Stn bch net bvol tot (= 68a)
69a Stn bch net engy tot C: 1 69b Stn bch net engy tot (= 69a)
70a Stn bch net ivol tot C: 1 70b Stn bch net ivol tot (= 70a)
71a Stn batch alarm tot C: 1 71b Stn batch alarm tot (= 71a)
72a Batch av temp ** cÖf C: 2 72b Batch av temp cÖf (= 72a)
73a Batch av den temp ** cÖf C: 4 73b Batch av den temp cÖf (= 73a)
74a Batch av press ** cÖf C: 3 74b Batch av press cÖf (= 74a)
75a Batch av meter dens ** cÖf C: 8 75b Batch av meter dens cÖf (= 75a)
76a Batch av base dens ** cÖf C: 9 76b Batch av base dens cÖf (= 76a)
77a Batch av SG ** cÖf C: 5 77b Batch av SG cÖf (= 77a)
78a Batch av energy ** cÖf C: 6 78b Batch av energy cÖf (= 78a)
79a Batch av DP ** cÖf C:11 79b Batch av DP cÖf (= 79a)
80a Batch av Z ** cÖf C:10 80b Batch av Z cÖf (= 80a)
81a Batch av base Z ** cÖf C:10 81b Batch av base Z cÖf (= 81a)
82a Batch av MF ** cÖf C:12 82b Batch av MF cÖf (= 82a)
83a Batch av K factor ** cÖf C:12 83b Batch av K factor cÖf (= 83a)
84b Batch end date/time cÖf C: 7
85b Batch end meter temp cÖf C: 2
86b Batch end meter pres cÖf C: 3
87b Batch end meter dens cÖf C: 8
88b End vol total cÖf C: 1
89b End mass total cÖf C: 1
90b End bvol total cÖf C: 1
91b End energy total cÖf C: 1
92b End ivol total cÖf C: 1
93b End rev vol total cÖf C: 1
94b End rev mass total cÖf C: 1
95b End rev bvol total cÖf C: 1
96b End rev energy tot cÖf C: 1
97b End rev ivol total cÖf C: 1
98b End net vol total cÖf C: 1
99b End net mass total cÖf C: 1
100b End net bvol total cÖf C: 1
101b End net energy tot cÖf C: 1
102b End net ivol total cÖf C: 1
** Continuously updated during batch. cÖf = Multi-stream/run data type (See Chapter 11 for explanation)
Abbreviations used:
“temp” = temperature, “pres” or “press” = pressure”, “ivol” = indicated volume, “bvol” = base volume, “av” = average,
“Stn” = station, “Bch” = batch, “den” or “dens” = density, “DP” = differential pressure, “rev” = reverse, “tot” = total and
“MF” = meter factor.
7955 1540 (Ch17/AA) 17.3

Notes:
A Batch transactions require the 795x Flow Computer to be operating in “Normal” mode. This parameter can
be found in the ‘i’-key menu, along with the flow status parameter. The operating mode can only be
changed when flow status shows “stopped”. For further details, see “Totals” sections of Chapter 11.
B Activating another batch type will immediately terminate all existing batch activities.
C:<n> Use Table 17.1 to help identify the initial data source for batch transaction record parameters
Table 17.1: Batch Transaction Record – Parameter Source Reference
Ref. No. Source Category

1 Normal mode total
2 Line temperature
3 Line pressure
4 Density temperature
5 Specific gravity
6 Energy
7 795x Calendar Clock
8 Prime density
9 Base density
10 Compressibility / Density
11 Orifice Flow Metering
12 Turbine/Ultrasonic Flow Metering
D Terminating a running batch will leave both current and previous batch records with identical values until a
new batch is started.
E Enables or prevents an automatic printout of the batch report immediately on completion of a batch. A serial
communication port will need to be configured for a connection to an ASCII compatible device e.g. printer.
F This parameter cannot be reset to zero on-demand but will rollover to zero after exceeding 4.95 billion.
G For configuration details, refer to Chapter 11 of this operating manual.
17.4 7955 1540 (Ch17/AA)

17.1.3 Guided Example 1: Manual Trigger Type Batch

This example demonstrates how a manually triggered type is configured, commenced by a menu-based
command selection and completed on-demand by another menu-based command selection. Adapt the
example to be applicable to your installation.
What to do:
Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list and Menu Data / Parameter list
for this example.
Overview:
Figure 17.2 gives a graphical overview for the example. It shows single-shot batches, each varying in
duration and, consequently, varying the quantity delivered. These batches are unaffected by the flow
conditions, which are reasonably stable in this case. The Flow Computer does not control product flow.
A station mode batch transaction uses both streams/runs 1 and 2 for a single batch. Station totals in the
current record are updated during each cycle. Individual stream/run totals are not updated.
(Opening/Closing totals are unaffected by the mode).
The single stream/run mode involves an individual stream/run being used for an individual batch,
allowing up to two batches to be recorded at the same time. Individual stream/run totals in the current
batch record are updated once every cycle. Station totals are not updated. (Opening/Closing totals are
unaffected)
Tracked Product Flow

Flow
(m3/hour)
"Complete"
"In progress" "In progress" "Complete"
Time
B1 B2
(Tank A) (Tank B)
"Run" "Halt" "Run" "Halt"
(Enable & Trigger)
Figure 17.2: Manual Triggered Batch Type
Operation Events (Figure 17.2):

01. Flow increases (independently of Flow Computer).
02. Operator selects the “Run” command when flow is adequate. Batch B1 starts immediately, with the batch
status changing to “In progress”.
03. Batch B1 continues and product flow remains stable until ‘Tank A’ approaches full capacity.
04. Flow rate decreases independently of Flow Computer.
05. Batch B1 completes when the operator selects the “Halt” command. The batch status then changes from
“In progress” to “Complete”.
06. Batch B2 does not start yet. There is a wait until ‘Tank B’ is ready.
07. Flow rate increases independently of Flow Computer.
08. Operator uses the “Run” command when flow rate is adequate. Batch B2 starts immediately, with the
batch status changing to “In progress”.
09. Batch B2 continues and product flow remains stable until ‘Tank B’ approaches full capacity.
10. Flow decreases (independently of Flow Computer).
11. Batch B2 completes when the operator selects the “Halt” command.
7955 1540 (Ch17/AA) 17.5

Menu Data / Parameter List: (The associated menus are listed on page 18.2.)
Menu Data (as displayed) Value/Option Comment
• Use command for enabling and triggering the
Manual batch enable * “Run”
non-station batch (i.e. stream/run 1, 2, 3 or 4).
• Use command for enabling and triggering a
Man Stn batch enable * “Run”
station batch (i.e. streams/runs 1-4 summation).
Batch status ** (See “Operation Events”) • Useful for monitoring the batch operation.
* “Halt” is the command for completing a batch and deselecting the batch type.
** Viewed from within the current batch transaction record.
17.6 7955 1540 (Ch17/AA)

17.1.4 Guided Example 2: Timed Batches (Station mode only)

This example demonstrates how the timed batch type is configured, commenced at a programmed date
and time, and halted on-demand. Adapt the example to be applicable to your installation.
What to do:
Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list for this example.
Overview:
Timed batches operate in station mode only, whereby both streams/runs 1 and 2 are used for a single
batch. During a batch, the Station totals in the current batch record are updated once every machine
cycle. The individual stream/run totals in the current record are not updated.
Figure 17.3 gives a graphical overview for the example. It shows a series of back-to-back batches; each
is programmed to last 300 seconds. The first batch commences - triggers - when the 795x calendar clock
matches a programmed (SET) date and time, “12-10-2003 08:00:00”. Timed batch operations are
unaffected by flow conditions, which are reasonably stable in this example. Batch Bn is interrupted 200
seconds after starting, following the selection of a “halt” command.
Flow
(m3/hour)
"In progress"
"Complete"
Time
B1 B2 B3 Bn
(300s) (300s) (300s) (n-1)*300s (200s)
12-10-2003 12-10-2003 "Halt"
07:51:00 08:00:00
"Run" (Trigger)
(Enabled)
Figure 17.3: Timed Batches

01. Configure associated parameters in the order as listed in the table below.
02. Wait for the 795x calendar clock to match the trigger date and time.
03. Trigger occurs on 12 October 2003 at 8 o’clock in the morning. Batch B1 starts immediately.
04. Batch B1 completes after 300 seconds and batch B2 starts immediately.
05. Batch B2 completes after a further 300 seconds and batch B3 starts immediately.
06. Batch B3 completes after a further 300 seconds.
07. Batches continue…
08. Later, batch Bn starts.
09. After 200 seconds, the “halt” command is selected. The batch, Bn, ends immediately and parameter
<Batch status”> shows “Complete”.
10. To resume this timed batch operation, edit a new date and time, adjust the duration if necessary and
then re-select the “Run” command.
7955 1540 (Ch17/AA) 17.7

Menu Data Value/Option Comment
Timed batch interval 300.0 (s) • 300 seconds per station batch.
Timed batch control “Run” • Command for enabling the timed batch type.
Timed batch start * 12-10-2003 08:00:00 • Trigger for 1st batch is 12th October 2003 at 8am.
Batch status ** In Progress Ù Compete • Useful for monitoring the general batch operation
st
* “00-00-0000 00:00:00” = Start 1 batch immediately after editing duration, then selecting “Run” command.
** Viewed from within the current batch transaction record (menu: <Batching>/<”Current batch”>)
Configuration Option:
The date element of <”Batch start time“> is optional. It can be “00-00-00” if commencing with the first batch on the
present day. The time element must always be specified since “00:00:00” is treated by the 795x as midnight.
17.8 7955 1540 (Ch17/AA)

17.1.5 Guided Example 3: Daily Batch (Station mode only)

This example demonstrates how the daily batch operates.
What to do:
Read the Overview and then browse through the Operation Events list and Menu Data / Parameter list
for this example.
Overview:
Daily batches operate in station mode only, whereby both streams/runs 1 and 2 are used for a single
batch. During a batch, the Station totals in the current batch record are updated once every machine
cycle. The individual stream/run totals in the current record are not updated.
Figure 17.4 gives a graphical overview of this example. It shows two back-to-back batches, each batch
lasting 24 hours. The first 24-hour batch B1 commences - triggers - when the “Run” command is selected.
The batch operation is unaffected by the flow conditions, which are reasonably stable in this case. Batch
B1 ends automatically after 24 hours has elapsed. The second batch B2 then commences automatically.
Batch B2 ends automatically after 24 hours has elapsed. This time, a “Halt” command is selected and this
prevents more batches.
Flow
(m3/hour)
"In progress"
"Complete"
Time
B1 B2
13-10-2003 (24 hours)
(24 hours) 08:00:00
"Run" "Halt"
12-10-2003 14-10-2003
08:00:00 08:00:00
Figure 17.4: Daily Batch

01. Flow is controlled independently of Flow Computer.
02. Operator uses the “Run” command when flow rate is adequate. Batch B1 starts immediately, with the
batch status changing to “In progress”
03. Batch B1 continues and product flow remains stable until 24 hours have elapsed.
04. Batch B2 commences immediately without any operator intervention.
05. Batch B2 completes after 24 hours have elapsed.
06. Operator selects the “Halt” command at the same time that the batch completes.
07. The batch status then changes from “In progress” to “Complete”.
Menu Data
Value/Option Comment
(as displayed)
Daily contract hour “0800” • Select “0800” as contract hour.
Control “Run” • Command for starting the 24-hour batches.
Control “Halt” • Command for stopping the 24-hour batches
7955 1540 (Ch17/AA) 17.9

17.1.6 Printing Batch Reports

Batch reports can output by using one of several methods:
1. Method: On-demand
This feature requires no configuration apart from setting up an RS232C port, as guided in Chapter 7.
To activate, press the PRINT-MENU key and then select the “Print report” menu option. Now choose
a report by selecting from the multiple-choice options. Table 17.2 shows the relevant options for the
batch reports. The report format can be seen on pages 18.11 onwards.
Table 17.2: Descriptors for Printed Batch Reports

Option
Purpose of option
(as displayed)
“Print batch report” • Printout the “Current” batch (transaction) record in a report format.
“Print prev batch” • Printout the “Previous” batch (transaction) record in a report format.
2. Method: Automatic Printed Report

The Flow Computer can be configured to automatically printout a report on completion of a batch
transaction.
Activation instructions:
1. Navigate to this menu: <”Configure”><”Batching”>/<”Automatic print”>
2. Select the “On” option
All methods require a RS232C communications port to be set-up for connection to a printer or other
ASCII compatible output device. Printed reports are transmitted in an ASCII format through the port
configured exclusively for this type of connection.
When a batch report is first printed, it is stamped with “ORIGINAL”. All subsequent printouts of the same
report will be stamped with “DUPLICATE”. However, the “current” batch report is stamped with
“DUPLICATE” only if the report values have not changed.
17.10 7955 1540 (Ch17/AA)

Figure 17.5: Orifice System "Current Batch" Printed Report
BATCH TRANSACTION RECORD

========================
Operators signature: .............

Report printing time: XX/XX/XXXX XX:XX:XX
Tag number
Batch number X
Batch status XXXXXXXXXXXX
Batch base temp X.XXX Deg.C

Batch base pressure X.XXX bar abs
Batch combust temp X.XXX Deg.C
Batch start time XX/XX/XXXX XX:XX:XX

Batch end time XX/XX/XXXX XX:XX:XX
Meter Run Data

--------------
1 2 3 4
---------------------------------------------------
Batch start temp X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX Deg.C
Batch end meter temp X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX Deg.C
Batch start press X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX bar abs
Batch end meter pres X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX bar abs
Batch start density X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg/m3
Batch end meter dens X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg/m3
Cumulative Totals
-----------------
Start vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
End mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Start bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
End energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch Totals
------------
Batch vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Batch bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch alarm total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Station Batch Totals

--------------------
Stn batch vol total X.XXX m3
Stn batch mass total X.XXX kg
Stn batch bvol total X.XXX m3
Stn batch energy tot X.XXX MJ
Weighted Averages
-----------------
Batch av temp X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX Deg.C
Batch av den temp X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX Deg.C
Batch av press X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX bar abs
Batch av meter dens X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg/m3
Batch av base dens X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg/m3
Batch av SG X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av energy X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch av Z X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av base Z X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Alarm Counts
------------
Alarms during batch X X X X
If alarm count is not zero refer to alarm history log to obtain alarm details.
Alarm count is valid only if alarm history log is not full.
7955 1540 (Ch17/AA) 17.11

Figure 17.6: Turbine System "Current Batch" Printed Report

========================

Tag number
Batch number X
Batch status XXXXXXXXXXX


Meter Run Data

--------------
1 2 3 4
--------------------------------------------------
Cumulative Totals
-----------------
Start ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch Totals
------------
Batch ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch turbine errors X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX

--------------------
Stn batch ivol total X.XXX m3
Weighted Averages
-----------------
Batch av MF X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av K factor X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX pulse/m3
Alarm Counts
------------
17.12 7955 1540 (Ch17/AA)

Figure 17.7: Ultrasonic System "Current Batch" Printed Report

========================

Tag number
Batch number X
Batch status XXXXXXXXXXX


Meter Run Data

--------------
1 2 3 4
---------------------------------------------------
Cumulative Totals
-----------------
Start rev ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3

End rev ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start rev vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End rev vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start rev mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
End rev mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Start rev bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End rev bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start rev energy tot X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
End rev energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Start net ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3

End net ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start net vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End net vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start net mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
End net mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Start net bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
End net bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Start net energy tot X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
End net energy total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch Totals
------------
Batch rev ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3

Batch rev vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch rev mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Batch rev bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch rev energy tot X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
Batch net ivol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3

Batch net vol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch net mass total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX kg
Batch net bvol total X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX m3
Batch net energy tot X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX MJ
7955 1540 (Ch17/AA) 17.13



--------------------
Stn bch rev ivol tot X.XXX m3

Stn bch rev vol tot X.XXX m3
Stn bch rev mass tot X.XXX kg
Stn bch rev bvol tot X.XXX m3
Stn bch rev engy tot X.XXX MJ
Stn bch net ivol tot X.XXX m3

Stn bch net vol tot X.XXX m3
Stn bch net mass tot X.XXX kg
Stn bch net bvol tot X.XXX m3
Stn bch net engy tot X.XXX MJ
Weighted Averages
-----------------
Alarm Counts
------------
17.14 7955 1540 (Ch17/AA)

Figure 17.8: Linear Flow System "Current Batch" Printed Report

========================

Tag number
Batch number X
Batch status XXXXXXXXXX


Meter Run Data

--------------
1 2
------------------------
Cumulative Totals
-----------------
Batch Totals
------------

--------------------
Weighted Averages
-----------------
Batch av MF X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
Batch av K factor X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX X.XXX
pulse/m3
Alarm Counts
------------
7955 1540 (Ch17/AA) 17.15

17.16 7955 1540 (Ch17/AA)

Appendix A Glossary
Appendix A Glossary
A
ADC See Analogue to digital converter
Address A number which uniquely identifies a location.
Alarm An indicator which shows when a failure has occurred. Alarms are
classified as System, Input or Limit.
API American Petroleum Institute
Analogue input An input where information is received in analogue form.
Analogue output An output from which information is transmitted in analogue form.
Analogue to digital converter A circuit that converts analogue voltages or currents into digital (usually
binary) numbers which can then be processed by computers. The
digital signal gives the amplitude of the analogue signal at a particular
instant. See also Digital to analogue converter.
AUI Short for Attachment Unit Interface, the portion of the

Ethernet.htmlEthernet standard that specifies how a cable is to be
connected to a transceiver that plugs into a 15-pin socket
B
5 2
Bar A unit of pressure. 1 bar = 10 Nm .
Base condition Base or Standard Conditions give the volume which would have been
transferred if the temperature were at a pre-defined figure. The actual
values for base temperature and pressure vary from country to country.
Base density Density of a fluid measured under base conditions.
Big-endian Given a multi-byte number representation, the most significant byte has
the lowest address. For example, a big-endian computer represents 1
as “00 01” in the case of double-byte representation. See also “Little-
endian” glossary entry.
British Thermal Unit The energy required to raise the temperature of one pound of water
through one degree Fahrenheit.
BTU See British Thermal Unit.
795x (APPX-A/AE) Page A.1

Appendix A Glossary
C
Calibrate To assess the performance of an item of equipment against that of
another one whose accuracy is known.
Calibration certificate Each transducer is calibrated before it leaves the factory. The details
(together with the transducer’s serial number) are recorded on a
Calibration Certificate.
Calibration constant Among the information given on the calibration certificate are some
constants (unique to that transducer) which compare the transducer’s
actual performance against a standard. The signal converter must
know these constants before it can calculate accurate results.
The constants are designated: K0, K1, K2, and so on.
Calorific value The energy content of a substance (usually a gas).
Chassis earth In a large installation where the chassis and instrumentation are
earthed separately, this is the “dirty” earth to which instrument chassis
are connected.
Checksum In data transmission, a checksum is a number which is added to a

string of data and whose value is related to that data. It is used to
check that the data has been transmitted accurately.
Connector The part of a cable that plugs into a port or interface to connect one
device to another. Most connectors are either male (containing one or
more exposed pins) or female (containing holes in which the male
connector can be inserted).
Configuration 1. The setting up of an instrument (by entering data, setting fallback

values, setting alarms, and so on) so that it works according to your
requirements.
2. The method by which transducers and other inputs and outputs are
physically connected to the 7950 Signal Converter
Conventional pipe prover This has a volume between detectors that permits a minimum
accumulation of 10,000 direct (unaltered) pulses from the meter under
test.
Covimat A rotational viscometer produced by Solartron.
Crystal factor A multiplying factor which accounts for the difference between the
actual frequency of a particular crystal and its theoretical frequency.
CV See Calorific value
Page A.2 795x (APPX-A/AE)

Appendix A Glossary
D
DAC See Digital to analogue converter
Damping Suppressing the oscillations in a vibrating body or medium.
Degree API Used in the petroleum industry to describe the density of petroleum
products. A degree API is given by:
o
141.5/(SG at 60 F) - 131.5
Values lie within the range -1 to +101, the larger the number the lighter
the oil.
Degree Baume A unit on an arbitrary scale which can be converted into actual SG
values. Used when describing the sugar content of aqueous solutions.
Degree Brix A unit on an arbitrary scale which can be converted into actual SG
values. Used when describing the sugar content of aqueous solutions.
Density The measured density of the fluid in a pipeline.
Differential pressure The difference in pressure at two points in a pipeline.
Digital to analogue converter A circuit that converts digital signals into analogue equivalents. See
also Analogue to digital converter.
Download To send data or programs to another (usually subsidiary) instrument.

(Opposite of Upload).
DP See Differential pressure
E
EMC Electro-Mechanical Compatibility
Endian The ordering of bytes in a multi-byte number. See also “Big-endian”

and “Little-endian” entries.
Event A change in the system operation. Events may be caused by the user
(such as setting a parameter or changing the security) or by alarms (if,
for example, a fallback is invoked when the system fails).
External connection A generic term which covers: inputs, outputs, power supplies and serial
communications; in short, anything connected to the 7950.
F
Fallback mode A description of the system when it is using a Fallback value.
Fallback value A value used as a temporary substitute for a parameter when a live
input which is used to calculate the parameter fails.

Appendix A Glossary
Flow computer An instrument which monitors flow rates and densities of gases and
liquids. It does this by communicating with transmitters such as
pressure, temperature, level, flow, density and analytical instruments.
These measurements are then corrected for temperature, pressure and
velocity of sound.
FS Full scale.
Full composition The composition of a gas used in calculating energy and

compressibility.
H
Hazardous area An area where there is a risk of fire or explosion.
Health check a check that all inputs and devices connected to the 795x are operating
normally.
Hg The chemical symbol for the element Mercury.
Historical log A log of every alarm received by the 795x.
Hub A common connection point for devices in a network. Hubs are

commonly used to connect segments of a LAN. A hub contains multiple
ports. When a packet arrives at one port, it is copied to the other ports
so that all segments of the LAN can see all packets.
A passive hub serves simply as a conduit for the data, enabling it to go

from one device (or segment) to another. So-called intelligent hubs
include additional features that enables an administrator to monitor the
traffic passing through the hub and to configure each port in the hub.
Intelligent hubs are also called manageable hubs.
I
Instrumentation earth In a large installation where the instrumentation and chassis are
earthed separately, this is the “clean” earth to which the instrumentation
is connected.
Interrogate To ask another part of a system to supply information.
J
J See Joule.
2
Joule The unit of work. 1J = 1N/m .
Jumper A metal bridge that closes an electrical circuit. Typically, a jumper

consists of a plastic plug that fits over a pair of protruding pins. Jumpers
are sometimes used to configure add-on (option) boards. By placing a
jumper plug over a different set of pins, you can change a board's
parameters.

Appendix A Glossary
K
K-factor The K-factor relates the output from a flow meter to a specific set of
units. For volume output meters such as turbines, it is often quoted as
pulses per meter cubed.
Kinematic viscosity The ratio of the dynamic viscosity of a fluid to its density.
L
LED See Light-emitting diode.
Light-emitting diode A diode which light up when current flows through it. LED’s are usually
used as indicator lights on instruments.
Limit Limits are upper and lower values between which a measured
parameter is expected to be. If the parameter is outside these limits, it
can trigger an alarm if you have set the system to do so.
Little-endian Given a multi-byte number representation, the least significant byte has
the lowest address. For example, a little-endian computer represents 1
as “01 00” in the case of double-byte representation. See also the “Big-
endian” glossary entry. Intel powered machines are little-endian.
Live A value is live if it can be altered automatically as a result of some

internal calculation or transducer input. (See also: Set.)
Location An area of computer memory where data is stored. Information can be

written to it from the keyboard, a remote computer, or automatically by
the sensors.
Location ID A number which uniquely identifies a location.
M
Mass flow rate The rate at which a given mass of fluid flows through a transducer.
MAU Short for Media Access Unit, an Ethernet transceiver
MODBUS/TCP MODBUS/TCP is a variant of the MODBUS family of simple, vendor-

neutral communication protocols intended for supervision and control of
automation equipment. Specifically, it covers the use of MODBUS
messaging in an ‘Intranet’ or ‘Internet’ environment using the TCP/IP
protocols. The most common use of the protocols at this time are for
Ethernet attachment of PLC’s, I/O modules, and ‘gateways’ to other
simple field buses or I/O networks.
Mode The operational state of the instrument.
Monitor To keep a constant check on the status of a system or process.

Appendix A Glossary
12
Multiples of numbers T tera 10 G giga 109
M mega 106 k kilo 103
m milli 10-3 P micro 10-6
Multiview A user-defined display which can show up to four lines of information of

your choice. Typically, each line comprises text (such as a parameter
name) and a value for the parameter.
P
Pa See Pascal.
2
Pascal The unit of force. 1 Pa = 1N/m
Percent mass The percentage that the mass of a substance has compared to the total
mass for a mixture of substances of which it is a part.
Periodic time The duration of one cycle of a wave-form, equal to the inverse of the
frequency.
Platinum resistance thermometer A highly-accurate thermometer, based around a coil of very pure
platinum wire, which is extremely stable over time. It can be used
instead of an analogue input to the signal converter or flow computer.
POST See Power-on self test.
Power-on self test A standard routine which an item of equipment goes through when it is
powered up to make sure that it is operating correctly. The progress of
the test is usually shown on the instrument display.
Protect ground Another name for Chassis earth.
PRT See Platinum resistance thermometer.
Pressure The measured pressure of the fluid in the pipeline.
Primary variable A variable (such as time or distance) which is directly measured.
psi Pounds per square inch. Imperial units of pressure.
Pulse output An output of single pulses, sent to equipment such as pulse summators
or electro-mechanical totalizers.
PV See Primary variable

Appendix A Glossary
R
Radio frequency interference Interference from sources which transmit at radio frequencies; that is,
frequencies in the range of about 100kHz to about 300GHz.
Reynolds number vl Uvl

A dimensionless constant given by Re
Q P
Where: v = fluid viscosity
L = length
Q = kinematic viscosity
U = density
RFI See Radio frequency interference
RS-232 An international standard for serial data transmission. It specifies

voltage levels, timing and control.
S
Saybolt viscosity A viscosity measured using methods developed by the Saybolt
company. It is obtained by timing how long the fluid takes to flow out of
a cup through a hole of known size. The viscosity is expressed in units
of time.
Security code A code or password which a user must key in before being allowed
access to all or part of a system.
Sensor Another name for a transducer.
Set A value is SET if it is keyed in by the user and does not change unless
the user changes it. (See also: Live.)
Set-up routine A procedure for setting up or configuring a system.
SG See Specific gravity
Signal converter A device which converts one signal into another. Its main use is in
quality measurement systems such as brewing where the output is
used by a control or monitoring system.
Specific gravity The mass per unit volume of a fluid.
Standard condition See Base condition
Status The condition of part of a system; for example, whether it is on, off, and
so on.
Status display A display which summarises the contents of the Historical log and gives
an indication of the current status of the system.

Appendix A Glossary
T
TCP/IP Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, the
suite of communications protocols used to connect hosts on the
Internet. TCP/IP uses several protocols, the two main ones being TCP
and IP. TCP/IP is built into the UNIX operating system and is used by
the Internet, making it the de facto standard for transmitting data over
networks. Even network operating systems that have their own
protocols, such as Netware, also support TCP/IP.
Temperature The measured temperature of the fluid in the pipeline.
Temperature correction Solartron transducers are designed to work at 20°C. A correction must
be applied when working at other temperatures.
Text descriptor Text which you can enter into the signal converter. Typically, this is a
parameter name when you configure Multiview.
Therm Unit of heat. 1 therm is the heat required to raise 1000 pounds of water
through 100°F.
Transducer A device which converts a physical quantity (such as temperature or

pressure) to a voltage or some other electrical quantity that can be
measured and analysed.
U
Upload To receive data or programs from another instrument. (Opposite of
Download).
V
Viscosity In a liquid, the resistance to that force which tends to make the liquid
flow.
Volume flow rate The rate at which a given volume of fluid flows through the system.
VOS Velocity of Sound

Appendix A Glossary
W
Wizard One of the “standard” configurations whch you can select instead of
configuring the 795x from scratch. You can edit the resulting
configuration to meet your requirements.
Wobbe index A measure of the amount of heat released by a gas burner of constant
orifice. It indicates the quality of the gas and is given by the expression
1

VU 2
Where:
V = the gross calorific value in BTU per cubic foot at STP
U = specific gravity.

Appendix A Glossary

Wiring schedule
Sheet of
795x Op Man / AC
External connections Barrier 795x
Instrument Wiring Signal Comments
colour
Connector Connector
Name Type & pin no. Pin Pin & pin no.
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule
Page B.1
Page B.2 795x Op Man / AC

Wiring schedule
Sheet of
795x Op Man / AC
External connections Barrier 795x
Instrument Wiring Signal Comments
colour
Connector Connector
Name Type & pin no. Pin Pin & pin no.
Page B.3
Page B.4 795x Op Man / AC

Appendix C Technical data for the 7955

C.1 What this Appendix contains
• List of different types of connections you can make to 7955
• Technical Specification
• Connection diagrams and tables
• Earthing arrangements
C.2 External connections

You can make the following types of external connections to the 7955:
• INPUTS Analogue Inputs from devices which monitor continuously

changing parameters and transmit analogue
signals. These include:
• PRTs (PT100)
• temperature transducers (0/4-20mA)
• pressure transducers (0/4-20mA)
• differential pressure transducers (0/4-20mA)
• viscosity transducers (E.g. Solartron Covimat
(0/4-20mA)
• calorimeters (0/4-20mA).
Pulse Inputs from devices which transmit information as

pulses. For example, a turbine (or positive
displacement) flowmeter.
Time period Inputs from devices where the frequency of the

transmitted signal is related to the parameter
being measured. These include:
• density transducers (Solartron 7835 or 7826)

• base density transducers
• viscosity transducers (Solartron 7827).
Status One of two levels, to show the state of some part

of the system, such as whether a valve is open or
closed.
7955 Op Man/AA Page C.1

• OUTPUTS Analogue Outputs from the signal converter to those devices

(such as chart recorders) which require analogue
outputs (0/4-20mA).
Pulse For equipment such as pulse summators or

electro-mechanical totalizers (open collector).
Status Outputs to equipment whose status is to be

changed as, for example, an output which opens
or closes a valve (open drain).
• Serial and For receiving and sending information to other

Ethernet Network devices linked to 7955. These include:
Communications
• Printers
• Host computers
• Master or slave 795x’s, Chromatographs, etc.
• Power supplies Inputs d.c. only
Outputs d.c. only. These provide power within the 7955

and to some other external devices such as
transducers.
Isolation The isolation between the enclosure and all DC

notes power inputs, signal inputs and signal outputs is:
50VDC continuously OR
125VDC for less than 15 seconds.
Consequently, isolation between any two signal

lines and any DC power line is:
100VDC continuously OR
250VDC for less than 15 seconds.
Page C.2 7955 Op. Man/AA

C.3 Maximum number of external connections

The table below lists the maximum number of external connections which you can make to a
single 7955.
Type of connection Maximum number
Standard Additional Additional Additional with Additional

with option with option option board with option
board 79556 board 79557 79558 board 79559
Inputs
Analogue 16 0 0 0 0
HART 0 0 4 0 0
Pulse 5 0 0 0 0
Time period 4 0 0 0 0
Status 24 0 0 2 2
Outputs
Analogue 4 4 0 0 0
Pulse 5 0 0 0 0
Status 25 0 0 0 0
Serial Comms. ports
RS232 1 0 0 0 0
RS232/485 2 0 0 2 2
Ethernet ports 0 0 0 0 1

C.4 Specification
General
Environmental Operating temperature 0 to +50 deg. C
Storage temperature -20 to +70 deg. C
Relative humidity Up to 90% non-condensing
Bump BS 2011 test Eb
Vibration Instrument subjected to resonance
frequencies ranging from 10Hz to 200Hz at
1g over a 10 hour period.
EMC Emissions EN 50081-2: 1993

(Industrial environment)
Immunity EN 50082-2: 1995
(Industrial environment)
Safety BS EN 61010-1 (1993)
Enclosure IP50 from the front panel,

only when mounted.
Dimensions Height 101mm

Width 197mm
Depth 355mm
Weight 3.5kg
External connections Type D-type rear panel. 3x25-way D-type for all
connections except communications and
power. Separate 9-way D-type connectors
for communications. 4-way Klippon
connector for power.
Options None

Inputs
o o
Analogue 4-20mA input accuracy without ±0.008% of full scale at 25 C ± 0.001%/ C
HART active
o o
4-20mA inputs (13, 14, 15 & 16) ±0.1% of full scale at 25 C ± 0.001%/ C
accuracy with HART active
4-20mA input resolution Better than 4 parts per million
o o o
PT100 accuracy (-50 to +200 C) ±0.05ºC ±0.01 C/ C
PT100 resolution Better than 0.02ºC
PT100 energisation <1mA average
(Meets BS1904 & IEC751, <1mW in the PT100)
Long term drift <20ppm per 1000 hours for first 1000 hours,
subsequently far less
Quantity 16 off :
First four are selectable as PT100, 0-20mA or 4-
20mA.
Remainder are selectable as 0-20mA or 4-20mA.
Scan time 60ms per channel
Options None
Pulse Frequency range DC to 4kHz; minimum pulse width 125μs

Input trigger level 0.5V (1.2V p-p)
Quantity 5 off single or dual-pulse turbine
Options None
Time period Range 100μs to 5000μs

Accuracy ±30nS
Resolution 2ns at 1kHz for 1-second sample
Input trigger level 0.5V (1.2V p-p)
Quantity 4 off
Options None
Status Type Polled

Trigger voltage 5V to 24V opto-isolated
Poll period Maximum 250ms
Quantity 24 off
Options When fitted with option board 79558:
• additional 2 off inputs
When fitted with option board 79559:
• additional 2 off inputs

Outputs
o
Analogue Base board device accuracy (12- ±0.075% of full scale (24mA) +/- 0.00075%/ C
bit)
Base board device resolution 1 part in 3500
Long term drift <20ppm per 1000 hours for first 1000 hours,
subsequently far less
Quantity 4 off
Update time 0.1s minimum, software dependent
Options Option board 79556 for an extra 4 channels
Special Notices 1. The maximum load impedance that the
analogue outputs can drive is 1K Ohms. This
must include any barrier impedance and the
load itself.
2. Analogue outputs are “Active Loops”.
(Active loops are powered by the device
providing the current output. “Passive loops”
are powered externally, usually by the device
receiving the current)
Pulse Output type Open-collector Darlington drivers

Maximum current 200mA per output at 24V with maximum 50%
duty
Maximum frequency 10Hz
Quantity 5 off
Options None
Status Type Output 1 uses a relay (24V DC/30V AC @

250mA maximum),
Others use open drain (100mA each at 24V)
Update rate Software controlled
Quantity 25 off
Options None
Prover Type Fleeting contact ball detectors (opto-isolated)

interface
Minimum pulse width for 10mS
detection
Quantity 2 off (can also be used as extra status inputs)
Options None

Communications
Serial communications Port 1 Physical layer RS232 full duplex
Max. baud rate 19K2
Handshake XON/XOFF
Port 2 Physical layer RS232 full duplex or RS485 half duplex
Max. baud rate 19K2
Handshake XON/XOFF and/or RTS/CTS
Port 3 Physical layer RS232 full duplex or RS485 half duplex
Max. baud rate 19K2
Handshake XON/XOFF and/or RTS/CTS
additional 2 off RS323/RS485 channels
When fitted with option board 79559:
• additional 2 off RS323/RS485 channels
• 1 off Ethernet link (15-way MAU socket)
SMART transmitter Number of loops None on standard unit

communications
4 loops of Rosemount HART using
analogue inputs 13, 14, 15 and 16
Hardware facilities
Keyboard interface Number of keys 30
Key scan time 2ms
Debounce 14ms
Options None
Display Number of lines 4

Characters per line 20
Backlight LED, continuously powered
Contrast software selectable, temperature
compensated
Options None
Real-time clock Accuracy Better than 1 second per day

Power Replaceable Lithium button cell
Options None

Battery monitor Type ADC, indicates battery condition

Options None
Alarm annunciation Quantity 3 (one each for Input, System or Limit

alarms)
Type Red LED
Operation Flash indicates new alarm condition. Steady
indicates accepted alarm.
Options None
Security Mechanisms 1. Switch located on front panel

2. Software code
Indicator Bi-colour LED on the front panel:
1. RED: Not secured
2. GREEN: Secured
3. ORANGE: Part-secured
Options None
Memory Program storage 3 Mbyte FLASH, field programmable

Data storage 768k Bytes of battery-backed. Battery life is
typically 2 years if instrument is un-powered
or 5 years if powered.
64k Bytes of non-volatile store for calibration

data
Options None
Co-processor
Type 80-bit floating point maths co-processor
Options None
Power Supplies
Input 21V-30V dc. 35W maximum. 2A worst-case
start-up current
Output General instrumentation 1 x 24V nominal at 800mA

energisation
Turbine energisation Switchable voltages of 8V or 16V, current
limited to 120mA
DAC energisation Isolated 25V output at 200mA
Options None

C.5 Connections
1 Status o/p 12 Status i/p 1 Alarm common Ethernet 0V Comm 5 rx/tx + Ground
2 Status o/p 13 Status i/p 2 Alarm NC Ethernet cd + Comm 5 rx Comm 1 tx Ground
3 Status o/p 14 Status i/p 27 Alarm NO Ethernet tx + Comm 5 rts Comm 1 rx Supply -
4 Status o/p 15 Status i/p 28 Turbine power + Ethernet 0V Comm 4 rx/tx + Supply +
5 Status o/p com Status i/p 3 Analog i/p 15+ Ethernet rx + Comm 4 rx Comm 0V
6 Pulse o/p com Status i/p 4 Analog. i/p 14 + Ethernet 0V Comm 4 rts
8 Turbine Sig. 9 + Status i/p 6 Analog i/p 11 + Ethernet 0V Comm 3 rx/tx +
9 Turbine Sig. 9 - Status i/p 7 Analog. i/p 9 + Ethernet cd - Comm 3 rx
10 Turbine Sig. 2 + Status i/p 8 Analog. i/p 8 + Ethernet tx - Comm 3 rts
11 Turbine Sig. 2 - Status i/p 9 Analog. i/p 6 + Ethernet 0V Comm 2 rx/tx +
12 Turbine Sig. 5 + Status o/p 2 Analog. i/p 5 + Ethernet rx - Comm 2 rx
13 Turbine Sig. 5 - Status o/p 3 PRT 4 power + + 12V Comm 2 rts
14 Turbine Sig. 8 - Status o/p com PRT 3 signal + Ethernet 0V Comm 5 rx/tx -
33 Density Sig. 4 + Analog. o/p 5 PRT 1 Signal -
36 Status o/p 23 Status i/p 20 +24V Den./Ana./Turb
48 Density Sig. 2 + Analog. o/p 6 PRT 2 Power -
49 Density Sig. 2 - Analog. o/p 7 PRT 1 Power +

C.6 Earthing
In addition to earthing the chassis, (described in Chapter 4), you may have to make extra earth
connections in some cases, depending on the installation requirements.
The types of connection can be split into three groups, each of which has different earthing requirements.
The groups are:
Serial communications ports

Group 1 (non-isolated power supply):
Ethernet port
Pulse outputs
Status outputs
Group 2 (isolated power supply): Status inputs
Analogue outputs
Group 3 (isolated power supply): Analogue inputs

Frequency inputs
The diagram on the next page shows you how to earth the external connections.

Protect Ground
Pin 50
SK1
Group 1
(SK1, SK2/14, SK4, SK5 Pin 1 Pulse Output Common
and SK6) Status Output Common
Chassis and Protect Ground
instrumentation are Status Input Common (Opto-isolated)
Pin 50
earthed together unless
you cut Link 1
SK2
Pin 1 Analogue o/p Common
Status Output Common

Protect Ground
Group 2 Pin 50
(SK2/34, SK2/35 )
No earthing is SK3
required for Status
Inputs
Pin 1 0V Turbine/Density/Analogue Inputs
Internal
0V Density Inputs
Isolated
0V Analogue Inputs Supply
0V Ethernet
Protect Ground
Pin 15
Group 3 SK4
(SK3) Pin 1 0V Ethernet
Protect Ground
Connect external
earths as Pin 25
required. SK5
Pin 1
Protect Ground 0V Serial Port
Pin 9
SK6
0V Serial Port
Pin 1
Link
Chassis
Earth
Earth PL1
stud
E E 0v +25V
DC Power
Earthing arrangements for the 7955 (D-type connectors)

Earthing requirements for group 1 connections only
In general, the earthing arrangements are different for large and small installations. (A small
installation may possibly consist of just one instrument.)
• If the 7955 is part of a large installation with separate earths for chassis
and instrumentation:
In this case you may (depending on the overall system requirements)

earth the 7955 chassis and instrumentation separately by cutting the
link on the connector board.
• If the 7955 is on its own or in a small installation with one common earth
for chassis and instrumentation:
In this case you must leave the link intact so that the chassis and
instrumentation are earthed to the same point.
Top of
instrument
case
Socket Rear Processor Mother

Link SK1 Panel Board Board
Where to find the link on the connector board

The status inputs do not have to be earthed because the circuitry contains only opto-electrical
components. However, they can be externally earthed if an installation requires it.
These depend on what sort of installation you have and the environment in which it operates.
You therefore have to decide what earthing arrangements you need. It is likely that this group
has to be earthed at a zener barrier earth. For further information, refer to the documentation for
the external devices which are connected to the installation.


Appendix D Units and conversion factors

The figures in the following table are taken from BS 350: Part 1: March 1974.
Parameter Imperial units Metric equivalent
Length 1 inch 25.4 mm

1 foot 0.3048 m
Mass 1 lb 0.45359237 kg
1 ton 1016.05 kg
3 3
Density 1 lb/ft 16.0185 kg/m
3
1 lb/gal 99.7763 kg/m
3
1 lb/US gal 119.826 kg/m
2
Pressure 1 lb/in 68.9476 mbar
1 atm 1.013250 bar
1 MPa 10 bar
-5
1 N/m 10 bar
o -3
1 mm Hg (0 ) 1.33322 x 10 bar
o -3
1 in Hg (0 ) 33.8639 x 10 bar
3 3
Volume or capacity 1 in 16.8371 cm
3 3
1 ft 0.0283168 m
3
1 gal 4.54609 dm
3
1 US gal 3.78541 dm
3
1 US barrel 0.158987 m
3 3
Volume flow 1 ft /min 40.776 m /day
3
1 gal/min 6.5463 m /day
Mass flow 1 lb/hr 10.886 kg/day
1 ton/hr 1016.05 kg/hr
Energy 1 BTU 1.05506 kJ
1 kWh 3.6 MJ
1 therm 105.506 MJ
o o
Temperature F (1.8 x C) + 32
Viscosity (dynamic) 1P 0.1 Pa s
2
1 lbf/(ft s) or 1 pdl s/ft 1.48816 Pa s
1 slug/(ft s) or 1 lbf 47.8803 Pa s
2
s/ft
2
Viscosity (kinematic) 1 St 1 cm /s
2 2
1 ft /s 9.29030 dm /s
795x Op Man / AC Page D.1

Page D.2 795x Op Man / AC

Appendix E Data tables

E.1 The tables
Note: The equations used to derive these tables are given in Section E.2.
Density/temperature relationship of crude oil

3
Temp.(°C) Density (kg/m )
60 738.91 765.06 791.94 817.15 843.11 869.01 894.86 920.87 946.46

55 742.96 768.98 794.93 820.83 846.68 872.48 898.24 923.95 949.63
50 747.00 772.89 798.72 824.51 850.25 875.94 901.80 927.23 952.82
45 751.03 776.79 802.50 828.17 853.81 879.40 904.96 930.50 956.00
40 755.05 780.68 806.27 831.83 857.36 882.85 908.32 933.76 959.18
35 759.06 784.57 810.04 835.48 860.90 886.30 911.67 937.02 962.36
30 763.06 788.44 813.79 839.12 864.44 889.73 915.01 940.28 965.53
25 767.05 792.30 817.54 842.76 867.97 893.16 918.35 943.52 968.89
20 771.03 796.18 821.27 846.38 871.49 896.59 921.68 946.77 971.85
15.556 774.56 799.57 824.59 849.60 874.61 899.62 924.63 949.64 974.65
15 775.00 800.00 825.00 850.00 875.00 900.00 925.00 950.00 975.00
10 778.95 803.83 828.72 853.61 878.50 903.41 928.32 953.23 978.15
5 782.90 807.65 832.42 857.20 882.00 906.81 931.62 958.45 981.29
0 786.83 811.46 836.12 860.79 885.49 910.21 934.92 959.66 984.42
Density/temperature relationship of refined products

3
Temp.(°C) Density (kg/m )
60 605.51 657.32 708.88 766.17 817.90 868.47 918.99 969.45 1019.87

55 610.59 662.12 713.50 769.97 821.49 872.00 922.46 972.87 1023.24
50 615.51 666.91 718.11 773.75 825.08 875.53 925.92 976.28 1026.60
45 620.49 671.68 722.71 777.53 828.67 879.04 929.38 979.69 1029.96
40 625.45 676.44 727.29 781.30 832.24 882.56 932.84 983.09 1033.32
35 630.40 681.18 731.86 785.86 835.81 886.06 938.28 986.48 1038.67
30 635.33 685.92 736.42 788.81 839.37 889.56 939.72 989.87 1040.01
25 640.24 690.63 740.96 792.55 842.92 893.04 943.16 993.26 1043.35
20 645.13 695.32 745.49 796.28 846.46 896.53 846.58 996.63 1046.68
15.556 649.46 699.48 749.50 799.59 849.61 899.61 949.62 999.63 1049.63
15 650.00 700.00 750.00 800.00 850.00 900.00 950.00 1000.00 1050.00
10 654.85 704.66 754.50 803.71 853.53 903.47 953.41 1003.36 1053.32
5 659.67 709.30 758.97 807.41 857.04 906.92 956.81 1006.72 1056.63
0 664.47 713.92 763.44 811.10 860.55 910.37 960.20 1010.07 1059.93
The two tables above are derived from equations in the Revised Petroleum Measurement Tables (IP 200,
ASTM D1250, API 2540 and ISO R91 Addendum 1).
795x Op Man / AC Page E.1

Platinum resistance law (To DIN 43 760)
°C Ohms °C Ohms °C Ohms °C Ohms °C Ohms
-220 10.41 -120 52.04 -20 92.13 80 130.89 180 168.47

-210 14.36 -110 56.13 -10 96.07 90 134.70 190 172.16
-200 18.53 -100 60.20 0 100.00 100 138.50 200 175.8
-190 22.78 -90 64.25 10 103.90 110 142.28 220 183.17
-180 27.05 -80 68.28 20 107.79 120 146.06 240 190.46
-170 31.28 -70 72.29 30 111.67 130 149.82 260 197.70
-160 35.48 -60 76.28 40 115.54 140 153.57 280 204.88
-150 39.65 -50 80.25 50 119.40 150 157.32
-140 43.80 -40 84.71 60 123.24 160 161.05
-130 47.93 -30 88.17 70 127.07 170 164.76
3
Density of ambient air (in kg/m ) at a relative humidity of 50%
Air
Air Temperature (°C)
Pressure
(mb) 6 10 14 18 22 26 30
900 1.122 1.105 1.089 1.073 1.057 1.041 1.025
930 1.159 1.142 1.125 1.109 1.092 1.076 1.060
960 1.197 1.179 1.162 1.145 1.128 1.111 1.094
990 1.234 1.216 1.198 1.180 1.163 1.146 1.129
1020 1.271 1.253 1.234 1.216 1.199 1.181 1.163
3
Density of pure water (in kg/m to ITS - 90 Temperature Scale)
Temp
°C 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
0 999.840 999.940 999.972 999.940 999.848 999.699 999.497 999.244 998.943 998.595
20 998.203 997.769 997.295 996.782 996.231 995.645 995.024 994.369 993.681 992.962
40 992.212 991.432 990.623 989.786 988.922 988.030 987.113 986.169 985.201 984.208
60 983.191 982.150 981.086 980.000 978.890 977.759 976.607 975.432 974.237 973.021
80 971.785 970.528 969.252 967.955 966.640 965.305 963.950 962.577 961.185 959.774
100 958.345
Page E.2 795x Op Man / AC

Velocity of Sound in Liquids

The values for a selection of fluids are given below. You can obtain further details from reference books
such as Tables of Physical and Chemical Constants and some Mathematical Functions by G W C Kaye
and T H Laby.
Liquid Temperature Velocity of Sound Rate of Change

( δc / δt ms K
-1 -1 -
(t °C) ( c ) ms )
Acetic acid 20 1173 ----

Acetone 20 1190 -4.5
Amyl acetate 29 1173 ----
Aniline 20 1656 -4.0
Benzine 20 1320 -5.0
Blood (horse) 37 1571 ----
Butyl acetate 30 1172 -3.2
Carbon disulphide 25 1142 ----
Carbon tetrachloride 20 940 -3.0
Chlorine 20 850 -3.8
Chlorobenzene 20 1290 -4.3
Chloroform 20 990 -3.3
Ethanol amide 25 1724 -3.4
Ethyl acetate 30 1133 -3.9
Ethyl alcohol 20 1162 -3.6
Formic acid 20 1360 -3.5
Heptane 20 1160 -4.5
n-Hexane 30 1060 ----
Kerosene 25 1315 -3.6
Menthol 50 1271 ----
Methyl acetate 30 1131 -3.7
Methyl alcohol 20 1121 -3.5
Methylene Chloride 25 1070 ----
Nitrogen -189 745 -10.6
Nonane 20 1248 ----
Oil (castor) 19 1500 -4.1
Oil (olive) 22 1440 -2.8
Octane 20 1197 ----
Oxygen -186 950 -6.9
n-Pentane 20 1044 -4.2

n-Propyl acetate 26 1182 ----

Toluene 20 1044 -4.2
Turpentine 25 1225 ----
Water (distilled) 10 1447.2 ----
20 1482.3 ----
30 1509.1 ----
50 1542.5 ----
Water (sea) -4 1430.2 ----
00 1449.5 ----
05 1471.1 ----
15 1507.1 ----
25 1534.7 ----
o-Xylene 22 1352 ----

E.2. Equations used to derive data tables
Density/temperature relationship
The density/temperature relationship is:
ρ t = ρ 15 exp[−α 15 Δ t (1 + 0.8α 15 Δ t )]
ρt
3
where: = density at line temperature t°C (kg/m )
ρ 15
3
= density at base temperature 15°C (kg/m )
Δt = t°C -15°C (i.e. t - base temperature)
α 15 = tangent thermal expansion coefficient per °C at base

temperature 15°C
Tangent thermal expansion coefficient

The tangent thermal expansion coefficient differs for each of the major groups of hydrocarbons. It
is obtained from the equation:
K 0 + K1 ρ 15
α 15 =
ρ 152
where K 0 and K1 are API factors which are obtained from the table:
Product Density K0 K1
Range
3
(kg/m )
Crude Oil 771 - 981 613.97226 0.00000

Gasolines 654 - 779 346.42278 0.43884
Kerosines 779 - 839 594.54180 0.00000
Fuel Oils 839 - 1075 186.96960 0.48618
Product compressibility
The definition of compressibility used to develop the table in Section 1 of the IP Petroleum
measurement Manual is the isothermal secant compressibility, defined by the equation:
1 ⎡ ∂V1 − ∂V2 ⎤
β=− ⎢ ⎥
V0 ⎣ P1 − P2 ⎦ T

where β = isothermal secant compressibility at
V0 = volume of liquid at atmospheric pressure
∂V1 = change in volume from V0 to V1

∂V2 = change in volume from V0 to V2
V1 & V2 = volumes at pressures P1 and P2 , respectively
P1 & P2 = gauge pressure readings (Bar)
For practical purposes, when the liquid volume changes from V0 to V1 as the gauge pressure
changes from zero (atmospheric) to P1 , the above equation is simplified to:
1 ⎡ ∂V1 ⎤
β=− ⎢ ⎥
V0 ⎣ P1 ⎦ T
ISO Document TC 28/SC3/N248, (Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International

Use) gives the following equations relating β to the compressibility data:
log e C = 1.38315 + 0.00343804T − 3.02909 log e ρ − 0.0161654T log e ρ
and
β = C × 10 6 × bar −1
where: T = oil temperature in °C

r = oil density in kg/litre at 15°C
The new equation (from the API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter
11.2.1M) gives (after converting to units of kg/m and bar):
⎛ 0.87096 ×10 6 4 .2092 × t ×103 ⎞

⎜ −1.62080 + 0.00021592 × t + + ⎟
⎝ ρ 215 ρ 215 ⎠
−4
β = 10 e bar −1
where: T = temperature in °C
3
r15 = density (in kg/m ) at 15°C and at atmospheric pressure
3 3
This equation is valid for the density range of 638 kg/m to 1074 kg/m . For a density range of
3 3
350 kg/m to 637 kg/m refer to Chapter 11.2.2M in the API Manual.

Velocity of sound in liquids

The velocity of sound in dilational waves in unbound fluids is given by:
1
c = (β a ρ )
−
2
where: c = velocity of sound
βa = adiabatic compressibility
ρ = density


Appendix F Calculations and theory
F.1 The VOS effect on density measurements
This sub-section shows how the 795x software (version 1510) works out the velocity of sound
factors that are used for correcting line density.
Two methods are provided:-
1. Pressure method
This method is preferred and is for applications where live pressure measurement is
available to the 795x.
2. Specific gravity method

This is also known as the “User Gas Equation Method”. It is for applications where pressure
measurement is not available. Inputs of Specific Gravity and Temperature are required.
The 795x uses the same basic correction equation for both methods:
Equation F.1#1: Density with the correction for the effect of V.O.S.
⎛ 2⎞
⎜ ⎛ K ⎞ ⎟
⎜ 1 + ⎜⎝ τ ⎟
* Cc ⎠ ⎟
Using: ρ = ρ1 * ⎜ ⎟
⎜ ⎛ ⎞
2⎟
⎜ 1+ ⎜ K
⎟ ⎟
⎜ ⎜τ * C g ⎟⎠ ⎟⎠
⎝ ⎝
Where: ρ = True line density (V.O.S. corrected)………… {Menu Data: “Line density A”}
ρ 1 = Line density (uncorrected or temperature corrected)
C c = V.O.S. of calibration gas (m/s) {See equation F.1#2}
C g = V.O.S. of measured gas (m/s)

{See either equation F.1#3a (pressure method) or F.13#b (SG method)}
4
4
4
τ = Periodic time of density transducer output signal (in μs)
795x Op Man / AA Page F.1

Also for both methods, the velocity of sound of the calibration gas is calculated by the 795x
using the following equation:
Equation F.1#2: V.O.S. of the calibration gas
Using: ( )
C C = K A + (K B * ρ 1 ) + K C * ρ 12 + K D * ρ 13
Where: C C = V.O.S. of the calibration gas (in m/s)
ρ1 = line density (un-corrected or temperature corrected)
And: K A , K B , K C and K D are coefficients from the appropriate ‘K’ column of

table F.1#1 (below).
795x automatically selects the appropriate value for each ‘K’ coefficient by using this table.
Calibration Density
KA KB KC KD
Gas range
3 -0.530984 0.595473 -0.314834
Nitrogen 0-100 Kg/m 349.007
E-01 E-02 E-04
3 -0.044632 0.297076 -0.418178
Nitrogen 0-400 Kg/m 348.994
E-02 E-05
3 -0.579479 0.623017
Methane 0-250 Kg/m 442.987 0.0
E-02
3 0.913056 0.155044 -0.2564
Argon 0-400 Kg/m 318.079
E-01 E-03 E-06
Table F.1#1
Notes:
• The density range of the transducer is selected when configuring line density.
• There is no support for other calibration gases.
• Temperature is assumed to be 20 °C.
Equation F.1#3a: V.O.S. of the measured gas (pure or composition) for pressure method
γ 0 * P * 10 5
Using: CG = + K 5 * ρ 12 + K 6 * ρ 13
ρ1
Where: C G = V.O.S. of the measured gas (in m/s)
ρ 1 = Line density (uncorrected or temperature corrected)
P = Line pressure (in barA)

And: K 5 , K 5 and γ 0 are constants that must be ‘Set’ into the 795x.
For a pure gas, values can be taken from the appropriate columns of table F.1#2
(on page F.3).
For gas compositions these (pure gas) constants should be modified in proportion
to the volumetric fraction (percentage) of each gas component.
Page F.2 795x Op Man / AA

Coefficients to enter Coefficients to enter

Molecular Approx.
Gases Gamma (for density less than (for density greater
Weight VOS1
or equal to 100 Kg/m3) than 100 Kg/m3)
γ0 K5 K6 K5 K6 m/s
Air 28.96469
Argon 39.9480 1.677 7.21 * 10-3 -54.7 * 10-6 1.46*10-6 -3*10-6 323.0
Carbon Monoxide 28.01055 1.395 6.14*10-3 -31.0*10-6 - - 347.4
Carbon dioxide 44.00995 1.290 -2.05*10-3 18.7*10-6 -0.38*10-3 2.22*10-6 264.2
Ethane 30.07012 1.194 -42.66*10-3 830*10-6 -0.66*10-3 8.95*10-6 323.0
Ethylene 28.054 1.243 -4.78*10-3 52.9*10-6 5.49*10-3 6.50*10-6 320.0
Helium 4.00260 1.664 77.3*10-3 -782.4*10-6 - - 1006.0
Heptane 100.20557 1.054 0 0 0 0 155.0
Hexane 86.17848 1.063 0 0 0 0 170.0
Hydrogen 2.01594 1.407 0 0 0 0 1297.7
Hydrogen sulphide 34.07994 1.320 0 0 0 0 305.0
Methane 16.04303 1.307 4.75*10-3 0.824*10-6 4.75*10-3 0.824*10-6 442.0
Nitrogen 28.01340 1.400 5.25*10-3 -28.6*10-6 2.66*10-3 -4.49*10-6 349.0
Octane 114.23266 1.048 0 0 0 0 144.0
Oxygen 31.9988 1.397 2.50*10-3 -11.08*10-6 - - 329.0
Propane 44.09721 1.132 -109*10-3 4055*10-6 5.88*10-3 -6.16*10-6 250.0
Propylene 42.081 1.154 -200*10-3 8410*10-6 - - 256.0
ISO-Butane 58.12430 1.097 -2042*10-3 0.4685 10.67*10-3 -13.7*10-6 214.0
Neo-Butane 58.12430 1.095 -2042*10-3 0.4685 10.67*10-3 -13.7*10-6 211.0
ISO-Pentane 72.15139 1.077 0 0 0 0 188.0
Neo-Pentane 72.15139 1.076 0 0 0 0 187.0
Table F.1#2: Gas data and 795x coefficients for Cg (VOS calculation)
Notes: Gas Density range

3
Carbon Monoxide 0-100 Kg/m
3
Carbon dioxide 0-200 Kg/m
3
Helium 0-75 Kg/m
3
Oxygen 0-100 Kg/m
3
Propylene 0-20 Kg/m
3 3
Ethylene 0-350 Kg/m i.e. where density could exceed 200 Kg/m use
K5 = -0.66 * 10-3 and K6 = 6.50 * 10-6
1
at Normal conditions.
795x Op Man / AA Page F.3

Equation F.1#3b: V.O.S. of the measured gas (pure of composition) for S.G. method
K C G1
Using: CG = *
τ ⎛ K ⎞
(1 − C G1) + ⎜ τ * C ⎟
⎝ C ⎠
Where: CG = V.O.S. of the measured gas (in m/s)

CC = V.O.S. of the calibration gas (in m/s) {See equation F.1#2}
τ = Periodic time of density transducer output signal (in μs)
4
4
4
⎡⎛ ⎛ ⎡ SG ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎞⎟ ⎤
K3 ⎞ SG
And: C G1 = ⎢⎜ 1 + ⎟ * ⎜⎢ ⎥ −⎢ ⎥ ⎟⎥
⎢⎝ ρ +K4⎠ ⎜ ⎣ λ 0 * 293 ⎦
⎝ ⎣ λ 0 * (273 + t ) ⎦ g ⎠ ⎥⎦
⎣ c
Where: t = Calibration temperature

SG = Specific gravity
[]c = For calibration gas
[]g = For measured gas
γ0 = Low pressure ratio of specific heats (or ‘Gamma’). (See notes below).
And: K 3 and K 4 are constants that must be ‘Set’ into the 795x. (See notes below).
Notes:
• K3 and K4 are normally taken from the calibration certificate that was issued with the gas
density transducer. Alternatively, the following table has typical values that can be used.
Gas Composition Density K3 K4

3
Nitrogen-Methane 10 to 60 kg/m 830.222 59.006
Nitrogen-Methane 60 to 200 kg/m3 1389.4 205.455
Argon-Methane 60 to 200 kg/m3 2186.01 310.079
• ‘Ideal’ values for Specific Gravity can be taken from table F.1#2 (on page F.3). In
practice, the live Specific Gravity measurements may be more appropriate.
• For a measured pure gas, a value for γ 0 can be taken from table F.1#2 (on page F.3).
• For a measured composition of gas, a value for γ 0 can be taken from table F.1#2 (on
page F.3) but needs to modified in proportion to the volumetric fraction (percentage) of
each gas component.
Page F.4 795x Op Man / AA

Appendix G Certificate of conformity
795x (APPX-G/AD) Page G.1

Page G.2 795x (APPX-G/AD)

795x (APPX-G/AD) Page G.3

Page G.4 795x (APPX-G/AD)

Operating Manual
HB551540
7955 Flow Computer February 2005
Mobrey Measurement Mobrey Inc

158 Edinburgh Avenue, 19408 Park Row, Suite 320,

Slough, Berks, UK, SL1 4UE Houston, TX 77084 USA

T +44 (0) 1753 756600 T +281 398 7890
F +44 (0) 1753 823589 F +281 398 7891
mobrey.sales@EmersonProcess.com mobrey.sales@EmersonProcess.com
www.mobrey.com www.mobrey.com
Mobrey SA-NV Belgium tel: 02/465 3879

Mobrey Ltd China tel: 021 6232 7972
Mobrey GmbH Deutschland tel: 0211/99 808-0
Mobrey SA France tel: 01 30 17 40 80
Mobrey sp z o o Polska tel: 022 871 7865
Mobrey AB Sverige tel: 08-725 01 00
© 2005, Mobrey. The right is reserved to amend details given in this publication without notice.

Flow Computer Mobrey 7955 Gas Quad 1540

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Flow Computer Mobrey 7955 Gas Quad 1540

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Operating Manual

Quad-Stream/Run Gas Applications (1540)

While carrying out this procedure you must

Electricity is dangerous and can kill.

x All power leads are un-powered.

1. About this manual 1.1

1.1 What this manual tells you 1.1

2. Getting started 2.1

2.1 What this Chapter tells you 2.1

2.4 7955 Output Connections 2.24

2.5 Other 7955 Connections 2.28

2.7 If you need help ... 2.33

3. About the 7955 3.1

3.1 Background 3.1

3.3 Communications 3.5

4. Installing the system 4.1

4.1 What this Chapter tells you 4.1

5. The keyboard, display and indicators 5.1

5.1 What this chapter tells you 5.1

6. The menu system 6.1

6.1 What this Chapter tells you 6.1

7. Serial Port Communications and Networking 7.1

7.1 What this chapter tells you 7.1

7.3 MODBUS from the 7955 view-point 7.4

7.4 Connecting to a 7955 Serial Port (RS-232 and RS-485) 7.6

7.5 Connecting to Ethernet 7.10

7.7 After Connecting up to the 7955 Ethernet Port … 7.13

7.9 Historical Alarm logger access over a MODBUS network 7.25

7.10 Historical Event logger access over a MODBUS network 7.32

7.11 Archive access over a MODBUS network 7.38

7A. Peer-To-Peer Communications 7a.1

8. Alarms and Events 8.1

8.1. Alarms 8.1

8.2. Events 8.13

8.3. Enhanced Auditing 8.17

9. Additional facilities 9.1

9.1 Feature: Archiving 9.1

9.3 Selecting units and data formats 9.20

10. Configuring using Wizards 10.1

10.1 Introduction to Wizards 10.1

11. Configuring without Wizards 11.1

11.1 What does this Chapter tell me? 11.1

11.4 Reference page conventions 11.6

12. Routine operation (data map) 12.1

12.1 Viewing the data 12.1

12.2 Checking the performance of the 795X 12.9

13. Routine maintenance and fault-finding 13.1

13.1 Cleaning the instrument 13.1

14. Removal and replacement of parts 14.1

14.1 Front panel assembly 14.1

16. HART, SMART and the 7955 16.1

16.1 What this Chapter tells you 16.1

17. BATCHING (TRANSACTIONS) 17.1

17.1 Standard batch operations 17.1

Appendix C Technical data for the 7955 C.1

Appendix D Units and conversion factors D.1

Appendix F Calculations F.1

If you want to... Read....

• Find out what's in this manual Contents pages

• Get started quickly Chapter 2

• Get an overview of the instrument Chapter 3 and Appendix C

• Understand how the menu system works Chapter 6

• Make connections to the instrument Chapters 2, 4, 7 and Appendix C

• Install the instrument and set it up Chapters 2, 4, 10 and 11